ι '
'
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
1 Ν ST RU CT I 0 Ν
ΜΑΝ UAL
Te k tro n ix, Inc . 0 070-1089-00
Ρ . Ο . Box 500
0
B eaverto n , Oregon 97005
Se r ial
"
Num ber
Phone : 644-0161
"
Cables : Te k tronix 171
.WARRANTYΑΙΙ Tektronix J nstru me nts are : warranted against .
d efective materials and workmanship for one yea r.
respect, Any ' . q uestions w ith to the - warranty, m entione d abo ve, shou ld- p e 'taken up with yo u r Tektronix Field' Engineer or re presentative. All requests for repairq and. replacement parts should be directed to the Tektronix Fie l d Office or rep resentativ e in Your area_ This procedure will assu re you' the fastest possible 'service. Please include the i nstrument Type (πr Pa rt Numbery and Serial or Model Number with all requests for p arts or Se r vice : Specifications and price c h ange privileges reserved . Copyright © 1971 by Te ktronix, Inc., B eaverton, Oregon . P rinted in the U nite d States of America. All ri ghts reserved . Contents of this publication may not be r eprod uced i n any form witho ut permission of th e copyrig ht owner.
U.S.A. :and foreign Tekt ronix prod ucts covere d y U .S . and fo reign patents, and/or p atents p ending .
ι 1
TA BLE OF CO N T EN TS S E CTIO N 1
453Α/R453A SPE CI FICATIO NS
Page
Introd uction
1-1
Table 1-1 E lectrical
1-1
SECTIO N 2
1-1 V ertical Deflection System 2-17 Triggeri ng (Α and Β Sweep)
1-3
H orizontal Deflection System 1-4 2-18 Calibrator 1-6 2-19 Ζ Axis Input 1-7 Outpu t Signals
1-7
Display
1-8
Power Supply
1-8
Table 1-2 E nvironmental Characteristics
1-9
Table 1-3 Physical
1-9
Standar d Accessories
1-10
2-23
OPERATI NG I NST RU CTIO NS (cont) I nput Co u pling
2-17
Deflection F actor
D ual-Trace Operatio n Channel 1 Outp ut an d Cascaded Operation
Algebraic Addition Trigger Source
2-19
Trigger Co up li ng
2-20
Trigger Slope
2-21
Trigger
2-21
Level
H igh-F requency Stability
Α Swee p Triggered Α Swee p Mode
L ight
H orizontal Sweep Rate Swee p Magnificatio n
M ixed and Delaye d Sweep Χ-Υ Operation
SECTIO N 2 OPERATI NG I NST RU CTIO NS 2-27 2_1
Ge neral
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
Α an d Β Gate
Intensity Modulatio n Calibrator
2_7 2_1
Ge n eral
Operating Temperat ure
2-2
Pea k to Pea k Voltage
Co ntrols an d Connectors
F irst-Time Operation Test Set-up Ch art
2-3 2-7 2-11
Vertical Chann el Selectio n 2-15 Vertical Gai n A dju stme nt 2-15 Step Atte nu ator Balance Signal Co n nections
L oadi ng E ffect of
the
Type 453Α/R453A
Coaxial Ca ble Considerations
2-16
M easureme nts-AC
M easurements-DC
Measureme nts Time-D u ration Measureme nts Comparison
U sing Delayed Sweep J itter Measurements
Pulse
2-23 2-24 2-27 2-27 2-27
2-28 2-29 2-30 2-31 2-32 2-32 2-33 2-34
2-37
Delayed Trigger Generator
2-38
Trigger Generator
2-39
N ormal
Mu lti-Trace Ph ase Difference
2-16
H ig h Resol ution Phase Measurements
Ground Consideratio ns 2-17 2-42
2-21
I nstantaneous V oltage
2-16
2-16
2-21
2-20
General Operating Information Determining F requency Si mp lified O p erati ng I nformation 2-11 R isetime Measureme nts I ntensity Control 2-14 Time-Differe nce Measurements Astigmatism Adju stme nt 2-14 Delayed Sweep Time Measurements Graticule 2-14 2-35 Delaye d Sweep Magnification Trace Alignment Adju stment 2-15 Displayed Comp lex Sig nals L ig ht F ilter 2_15 2-36 Beam F inder 2-15
2-21
App lications
F ront Cover Operating V oltage
Operating Positio n 2-2 Rackmoun ti ng 2-2
2-17
Measureme nts
Χ- Υ Ph ase M easureme nts
Co mmo n-Mode Rejection
2-39 2-40 2-40
ι ι
CO NT EN TS (co n t) S E CTIO N 3
S E CTIO N 5
CI R C U IT D E SC R I PTIO N
Intro du ction Te k tro n ix Fiel d Service U si n g T h is Proce du re Test Eq u ipmen t Re qu ire d Prelimi n ary Control Settings
I n trod u ction 3-1 3-1 Block Diag ra m Circ u it O p eration 3-3 5-1 C h a nn el 1 Vertical P reamp 3-4 3-6 C h an n el 2 Vertical P ream p Vertical Switc h ing 3-7 3-9 Vertical O u tp ut Am p lifier 5-4
Prelimi n ary Proce du re for Performance Ch eck
Part I[-Adjustment Intro d u ction Ind ex to P art II-Adjustment Ad justme n t
I S E CTIO N 4 M AI N T EN A N C E 4-1 I n trod u ctio n 4-1 Cover R emoval Preventive M aintenance 4-1 General 6-3 Cleaning 4-1 Lu brication 4-2 Visual Ins pection 4-2 Tra nsistor C h ec k s 4-2 S E CTIO N 7 R ecali bration 4-2
4-7 4-7 4-7 4-10 4-13 4-13
5-26 5-26
P reliminary P roced u re for
S E CTIO N 6
Corrective M ai nte n a nce Gen eral O btai n ing R eplacement Parts Sol d ering Tec h ni q u es Com p o n e nt R ep lacement Recalibratio n After R epair I nstr um ent R epack agi n g
5-3
Intro d u ctio n Ind ex to Part Ι - P erforma n ce C h ec k
C R T Circ u it 3-27 Low-Voltage P ower S u p p ly 3-28 3-31 Voltage Distrib u tio n Calibrator 3-31
4-2 4-2 4-4 4-4
5-1 5-1 5-1
P art 1- Pe r forma n ce C h ec k
3-10 Trigger Prea mp 5-4 Α Trigger Generator 3-12 3-16 Α Swee p Generato r 5-5 Β Trigge r Ge n erator 3-19 Β Sweep Generator 3-21 Horizo n tal Am plifier 3-23 3-2 ς 2 Axis Amplifier
Tro u bles hooting Introduction Tro u blesh ooti n g Ai d s Troub lesh ooting Equ i p ment Trou b les h ooting Tec hn iq u es
CA L I BR ATIO N
'
5-26
RAC KM O UNTI N G ntrodu ction I nstr u me nt Di mensio ns R ac k Di m ension s Sli d e-O ut Track s M o u nti ng P roce d u re Alter n ative Rear M ou nti ng Met hods R emovi n g or I n stalling t h e I nstr umen t Sli d e-O u t Trac k Lubrication
6-1 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-3
ELE CT R ICA L PA R TS L IST A bbreviatio n s a n d Sy m bols Parts Ord eri ng I n for m atio n I ndex of Electrical Parts L ist Electrical Parts L ist
S E CTIO N 8
DIAG R A M S A N D CI R C U IT ILLUSTRATIONS
B OA R D
Sym b ols a nd R eference Desig n ators Voltage a n d Wavefor m Test Con d itio n s Diagrams Circ u it Board Ill u strations
8-1 8-2
ι
ι ι
ι
ι ι ι
ι ι ι
ι ι ι
ι
ι ι ι
ι
453Α/ R 453A
CO N T EN TS (co n t) S E CTIO N 9
ME C H A N ICA L PA R TS L IST Mec h a n ical Parts L ist I n formation
Index of Mec h anical Parts L ist an d Ill u stratio n s Mec h a n ical Parts List
C H A N G E INF O RM ATIO N Abbreviations a n d symbols u sed in t h is man u al are base d on or ta ken d irectly from IEEE Sta nd ar d 260 "Stan d ar d Sym b ols for Un its", MIL-STD-12B a n d ot h er stan dar d s of th e electronics i ndu stry . C h ange i n for mation , if any, is located at th e rear of th is man ual .
F ig . 1-1 . Top ; t h e 453 Α Oscillosco p e . B ottom ; t h e R453A Oscillosco p e .
453Α/ R453A
453Α/ R 453A
S E CTIO N l
453AIR4S3A SPECIFICATION Change information, if any, affecting this section will be found at the rear of this manual. Intro d uct i o n T h e Te k tronix 453 Α Oscillosco p e is α transistorized p ortable oscillosco pe d esigned to o perate in α wi d e range of environmental con d itions . T h e lig h t weig h t of t h e 453 Α allows it to be easily trans p orte d , w h ile p rovid ing t h e performance necessary for accurate h igh -fre q uency measu re ments . T h e d u al-c h annel DC-to-60 MH z vertical system provides cali b rate d d eflection factors from 5 millivolts to 10 volts/ d ivision . C h annels 1 and 2 can be cascad e d using an
external cable to provide α one millivolt minimum deflection factor ( b oth V O LTS/DI V switc h es set to 5 m V ) . T h e trigger circuits p rovi d e stable triggering over t h e full range of vertical fre q uency res p onse . Se parate trigger controls are provi d ed to select t h e desired triggeri ng for t h e Α an d Β sweeps . One of t h ree sweep modes can be selecte d for t h e Α swee p ; automatic, normal, or si n gle swee p . T h e h orizo n tal swee p p rovides α maximum swee p rate of 0 .1 microseco n d/division (10 na n oseconds/ d ivisio n usi n g 10 Χ magnifier) along wit h α d elaye d sweep feat u re for accurate relative-time measurements . Accurate Χ - Υ measurements can be mad e wit h C h annel 2 p rovi d ing t h e vertical deflection, an d C h annel 1 provi d ing t h e h orizo n tal d eflection ( ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h set to C H 1 O R Χ -Y, H O R IZ DIS PL AY
switc h set to Χ -Y) . T h e regulate d DC p ower su pp lies maintain constant out p ut over α wi d e variation of line voltages an d fre q uencies . Total p ower consum p tion of t h e instrument is ap p roximately 90 watts .
Informatio n give n i n t h is instruction manual ap p lies to the R453A also unless ot h erwise noted . T he R453A is electrically identical to t h e 453Α , but is mec h anically ada p ted for mounting in α stan d ar d 19-inc h rac k . Rac k Mounting i n structions an d α d imensional d rawing for t h e R453A are p rovid ed in Section 6 of t h is man u al .
T h is instrument will meet t h e electrical c h aracteristics liste d in Table 1-1 following com p lete calibration as given in Section 5 . T h e p erformance c h ec k p roce d ure i n Section 5 p rovides α convenient met h o d of c h eck ing instrument performa n ce wit h out ma k i ng inter n al c h ec k s or ad j ustments . T he following electrical c h aracteristics apply over α calibration interval of 1000 h o u rs an d an am b ient temperature range of 0 ° C to +50 ° C, exce pt as ot herwise in d icated . Warm u p time for given accuracy is 20 minutes .
TA BLE 1-1 ELE CT R ICA L
C h aracteristic
Performance Req uirement
Su p plemental Information
VER TICA L D EFLE CTIO N SYST EM Deflection F actor 5 millivolts/ d ivision to 10 volts/ d iviSte sion in 11 cali b rate d step s for eac h c h annel . L ess t h an one millivolt/ d ivision w h en C h annel 1 an d 2 are cascad e d . Deflection Accuracy
Varia b le Deflection F actor
Wit h in 3% of in d icate d d eflection . Casca d ed deflectio n factor u ncalib rated .
Ι Continuo u sly varia b le settings b rate d .
Selected by V O L TS/DI V switc h . p s in 1-2-5 se qu ence .
Wit h GAI N correctly a d j uste d at 20 m V an d VA R V O L TS/DI V control set to cali b rated .
b etwee n cali- Ι E xten d s maximum d eflection factor to at least 25 volts/d ivision .
Specification-453Α/ R 453A TA BLE 1-1 (cont)
C h a racteristic
Performance Requirement
B a ndwid t h at -3 dB p oints (wit h or without Ρ 6061 P robe)
Driven
20 mV to 10 VOLTS/DIV
DC to at least 60 megahertz
10 mV/DIV
DC to at least 50 megahertz
5 mV/DIV
DC to at least 40 megahertz
Channels 1 an d 2 casca d ed
DC to at least 25 megahertz
from
VOLTS/DIV p osition .
AC L ow-Freq uency Response (lower -3 d B point)
25-o h m
control
set
V AR calibrated
source .
to
In p ut Cou p ling switch set to AC .
Without probe
1 .6 h ertz factors .
at all
d eflection
With Ρ 6061 P robe
0 .16 h ertz or less at all factors .
d eflection
In p ut
Su pp lemental Information
or
less
RC Characteristics
Resistance
One megohm
Ca p acitance
A pp roximately 20 p icofara d s
M aximum
Safe
In p ut Voltage
±2%
600 volts DC + p eak AC (one kilohertz or less) .
In p ut Cou p ling M od es
AC or DC .
Vertical Dis p lay M o d es
Channel 1 only . Channel 2 only . Dual-trace, alternate between channels . Dual-trace, cho pp e d b etween channels. A dd e d algebraically .
Cho pp e d Re p etition Rate
A pp roximately 500 kilohertz .
Am p lifier Crosstalk
100 :1 or greater, DC to 20 megahertz .
Common M o d e Rejection Ratio (all deflection factors)
At least 20 :1 DC to one kilohertz for signals less than eight times the VOLTS/DIV switch setting .
Polarity Inversion
Dis p layed signal from Channel 2 can be inverted .
Signal Delay L ine
Permits viewing of lead ing e d ge of triggering signal (internal triggering only) .
Selected b y In p ut Coupling switch .
Specification-453Α/ R 453A TA BLE 1-1 (cont)
C h aracteristic
Performance R eq uirement TR IGG ER I N G (Α
AN D
SWEEP)
Β
Internal from d isp layed c h annel from C h annel 1 only .
Sou rce
Sup p lemental Information
or
Selecte d b y SO UR C E switc h .
Internal from AC p ower source .
E xternal .
E xternal d ivi d e by 10 . Co u p ling
AC
Selecte d by CO UPL I N G switc h .
AC low-frequency rej ect
AC h ig h -fre q u ency re j ect DC
Swee p ca n be triggered from p ositivegoing or negative-going portion of trigger signal .
P olarity
Internal
Selected
by S L O PE
switc h
Trigger Sensitivity
AC
0 .3 d ivision of d eflection, minimum, 30 h ertz to 10 mega h ertz ; increasing to 1 .5 d ivision at 60 mega h ertz .
LF REJ
0 .3 d ivision of d eflection, minim u m, 30 kilo h ertz to 10 mega h ertz ; increasing to 1 .5 division at 60 megah ertz .
H F REJ
0 .3 d ivision of d eflection, minimum, 30 h ertz to 50 kilo h ertz .
DC
0 .3 d ivision of d eflection, minimum, DC to 10 mega h ertz ; increasing to 1 .5 d ivision at 60 mega h ertz .
E xternal Trigger Sensitivity AC
50 millivolts, minimum, 30 h ertz to 10 10 mega h ertz ; increasing to 200 millivolts at 60 mega h ertz .
LF
REJ
50 millivolts, minimum, 30 kiloh ertz to 10 mega h ertz ; increasing to 200 millivolts at 60 mega h ertz .
HF
REJ
50 millivolts, minimum, 30 hertz to 50 kilo h ertz .
DC
50 millivolts, minimum, DC to 10 mega h ertz ; increasing to 200 millivolts at 60 mega h ertz .
SO UR C E switc h set to EXT . Triggering signal re qu irements increase d times for ΕΧΤ - 10 p osition .
S p ecification-453Α/ R 453A TA BLE 1-1 (cont)
C h aracteristic
P erformance R e q uirement
Su pp lemental Information
Auto Triggering ( Α swee p only)
Sta b le d isp lay presente d wit h signal am p lit u d es given un d er Internal an d E xternal Trigger Sensitivity above 20 h ertz . Presents α free-r u nning swee p for lower freq uencies or in absen ce of trigger signal .
Single Swee p ( Α Swee p only)
Α Swee p Generator p ro d u ces only one swee p wh en triggere d . Fu rth er swee ps are loc k ed out until RE S E T bu tton is p resse d . Trigger sensitivity same as give n for internal an d external sensitivity .
Display
J itter
One nanosecon d or less at 10 nanosecond s/d iv ision swee p rate ( M AG switc h set to Χ 10) .
E xtern al Trigger In p ut R C C h aracteristics
One mego h m paralleled by 20 p icofara d s (a pproximate) .
LEVEL co ntrol range ΕΧΤ
At least + an d - 2 volts .
ΕΧΤ = 10
At least + an d - 20 volts .
Maximum safe
in pu t voltage
600 volts DC + p ea k AC (one k ilo h ertz or less)
H O R IZO N TA L D EFLE CTIO N
SYST EM
Α an d Β Sweep Ge n erator Swee p R ates Α sweep ( d elaying swee p )
0 .1 microsecond /d ivision to 5 secon d s/ d ivision in 24 calibrated ste p s.
Ι Selecte d b y Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . Ste p s in 1-2-5 sequ ence .
Β swee p ( d elayed swee p ) 0 .1 microsecond /d ivision to 0 .5 secste an d /d ivision in 21 cali b rate d ps
Ι Selecte d by Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch . Ste p s in 1-2-5 seq uence .
Swee p Acc u racy
Performance R equi r emen t 0° C to +40 ° C
Ι
-15 0 C to +55 ° C
M agnifie d
Ι
W it h in 6%
Ι
M agnifie d
I
5 s/DI V to 0 .1 s/DI V
With i n 3%
Ι
W it h in 4°/ο
1 W it h in 5°/ο
50 ms/DI V to 0 .1 μ s/DI V
W ith in 3%
Ι
W ith in 4%
1 W it h in 4%
W it h in 5%
With in 5°/ο
Ι
W ith in 5°/ο
Ι W it h in 5%
W it h in 10%
Swee p L inearity Over any two d ivision portion wit h in cente r eig h t d ivisions (all sweep rates)
U nmag n ified
I
U nmagnified
Over center eigh t d ivisions
Ο
Specificatio n -453Α/ R 453A TA BLE 1-1 (cont)
P erformance
C h aracteristic
Varia b le Swee p R ate
Α Swee p
R equirement
Contin u ously varia b le b rated swee p rates .
Length
between cali-
Varia b le from fo u r d ivisions or less to 10 d ivisions or greater .
Mixed
I
Su pp lemental Information
E xtend s maxim u m Α sweep rate to at least 12 .5 secon d s/ d ivision an d Β sweep ~ rate to at least 1 .25 seconds/d ivision . Ι Measured at 1 ms/ DI V .
an d Delayed Swee p
M ixed Sweep Acc u racy
W ith in 2°/ο ± meas u red Α swee p error E xcl ud e first 0 .5 d ivisio n of d is p layed wh e n viewing t h e Α portion only . Β sweep an d 0 .2 d ivision or 0.1 mic r op ortion acc u racy is same as state d second, wh ich ever is greater, after tra n u nd er Swee p Accuracy . isition from Α to Β swee p . Cali b rated Delay R ange
Delay Acc u racy Over Center E ig h t Divisions
Continuous from microsecon d s .
50 secon d s to 0 .2
0 ° C to +40 ° C
Ι -15 0 C to +55 ° C
5sto0 .1 s/DI V
W it h in 1 .5% of inW it h in 3 .5% of ind icated d elay Ι d icate d d elay
50 ms to 1 μ s/DI V
W it h in 1 .5%ο of ind icated d elay
Incremental Mu lti p lier Delay Time
L inearity
J itter
W it h in 0 .2%
Selected by DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I E R ( d ial an d Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h .
W it h in 2°/ο of ind icated d elay Ι W it h in 0.3%
L ess
t h an 1 part in 20,000 of th e maxim u m availa b le d elay time (10 times Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h setting) .
E xternal H orizontal
Am plifier
millivolts/division
to
In pu t to C H 1 or Χ connector Deflection F actor
5
Accuracy
Χ B an d widt h at Up per -3
Point
10
d ivisio n in 11 cali b rated ste p s . 0 ° C to +40 ° C
dB
volts/
-15 ° C to +55 ° C
Wit h in 5°/ο of in- W ithin 8°/ο of ind icate d d eflection d icate d deflection
ΙΙΝΤ T R IG switc h set to C H 1 O R Χ -Y . Ste p s in 1-2-5 sequ ence .
E xternal uste d
D
h orizontal at 20 m V .
gain
correctly
F ive mega h ertz or greater
Inp u t R C C h aracteristics R esistance
1 mego h m ±2°/ο
Ca p acitance
App roximately 20 p icofara d s
Ph ase d ifference between Χ an d Υ am p lifiers
3 ° or less at 50 k ilo h ertz
ad-
S pecification-453 Α/ R 453A TA BLE 1-1 (cont)
P erformance R e q u irement
C haracteristic
Su pp lemental Information
In p u t to ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ I NPU T Connector Deflection F actor
Β SO UR C E switc h in ΕΧΤ ; 270 millivolts/ d ivision ±15% . ΕΧΤ -
Β SO UR C E switch in 2 .7 volts/d ivision ±20% .
Χ Ban d wi d th at Upp er -3 d B p oint
10;
F ive mega h ertz or greater
One mego h m parallele d by 20 p icofara d s (a p p roximate)
In p ut RC C h aracteristics
Phase d ifference between Χ an d Υ am p lifiers
3 ° or less at 50 kilo h ertz
600 volts DC + p ea k AC (one kilo h ertz or less) .
Maxim u m Safe In p u t Voltage
CA L I BR ATO R Waves h a p e
S q u are wave
P olarity
P ositive going .
Baseline at zero volts .
O u t p u t Voltage
0 .1 volt or 1 volt, p ea k to p ea k
Selecte d by CA L I BR ATO R switc h .
O u t p u t C u rrent
F ive milliam p eres t h ro u g h PR O BE L OO P on si d e p anel
Re p etition
Rate
Acc u racy
Ι One kilo h ertz . 0°C to
Voltage
+40°C
-150C to +55 °C
±1 .5%
±1%
C u rrent Re p etition
Rate
Risetime
Ou t pu t Resistance
±0 .5%
Ι
±1°/α
One microsecon d or less A pproximately position
200
A pp roximately position
20
o h ms o h ms
in in
1
V
0 .1
V
S p ecification-453 Α / R 453A TA BLE 1-1 (cont) C h aracteristic
P erformance Re q uirem e nt
Su pp lemental Information
Ζ AXIS I NPU T Sensitivity
Five volt p ea k -to-p ea k signal p ro d uces noticeable mod ulation at normal intensity .
Polarity of O p eration
Positive-going in p u t signal d ecreases trace intensity ; negative-going in p u t signal increases trace intensity .
U sable F re q uency
DC to 50 mega h ertz or greater .
Range
A pp roximately 47 kilo h ms
I n p ut Resistance at DC In p ut Co u p ling
DC cou p led
M aximum Inp u t Voltage
200 volts DC + p ea k AC
O U T PU T SIG N A L S Α an d Β Gate Wavesh a p e
Rectangular pulse
Am p lit u d e
Ap p roximately
Polarity
Positive-going
Duration
Same d uration as resp ective swee p .
12 volts pea k
O u t p u t Resistance
Baseline at a b out -0.7 volt
A pp roximately 1 .5 kilo h ms .
Vertical Signal Out (C H 1 only) O u t p u t V oltage
25 millivolts or greater, for eac h d iviInto one megoh m loa d . ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h sio n of C R T d isp lay . I set to N O RM .
Ban d width
DC to 25 mega hertz or greater w h en cascade d wit h C h annel 2, or into 50o h m load .
Ou t pu t cou p ling
DC cou p led
Out p u t resistance
A pp roximately 50 o h ms .
S p ecification-453Α / R 453A TA BLE 1-1 (cont)
Performance R equ irement
C haracteristic
Supp leme ntal Informatio n
DIS PL AY Graticule Ty p e Area
Internal
E ig h t divisions vertical by 10 divisions h orizo n tal . E ac h d ivision eq uals 0 .8 centimeter .
Ill u mination Ph osph or
B eam
F in d er
V aria b le e d ge ligh ti ng . Ρ 31 sta nd ar d . s p ecial ord er .
Oth ers available on
L imits d isplay w h en p ressed .
wit h in gratic u le area
P OWER SUPPL Y
L i ne Voltage
115 volts n ominal or 230 volts nominal . I
V oltage R anges (AC, RM S) 115-volts nomi n al
90 to 110 volts
N ominal
line voltage an d voltage range selected b y L i n e V oltage Selector . Given voltages apply wh en line voltage co n tains 2°/ο or less h armonic d istortion .
104 to 126 volts 112 to 136 volts 230-volts nominal
180 to 220 volts 208 to 252 volts 224 to 272 volts
L ine F re q u ency
48 to 62 h ertz
M axim u m P ower Consum p tion
92 watts, one am pere at 60 h ertz, 115volt line
Specification-453 Α/ R 453A TA BLE 1-2 ENV I R O NMEN TA L C H A R ACT ER ISTICS C h aracteristic
given limits from 150 k ilo h ertz to 1000 megah ertz (mesh filter installe d ) .
P erformance
I NO ΤΕ
This instrument will meet the electrical characteristics given in Table 1-1 over the following environmental limits. Complete details on environmental test procedures, including failure criteria, etc ., can be obtained from Tektronix, Inc . Contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative . Tem p erature Op erating Storage Altitud e O p erating
Storage
H umi d ity
O p erating and storage
Vibration
O p erating a nd non-operating
S h oc k O p erating an d non-operating
Con du cte d in terference
Tr ansportation
15,000 feet maximum . M aximum o p erati n g tem peratu re d ecreases b y 1 ° C p er 1000 feet increase i n am p litu d e a b ove 5000 feet . Teste d to 50,000 feet
PH YSICA L
C h aracteristic
Interference (EMI) as tested in Μ Ι L- Ι6181D (wh e n equ ippe d with M OD 163D only) Interfere n ce ra d iate d from th e i n strument un d er test wit h i n t h e
Information
Cooling
Safe o p erating tem p eratu re maintaine d b y forced-air cooling . A u tomatic resetting t h ermal c u to u t p rotects instrument from overh eating .
F i n ish
Ano d ize d aluminum p anel an d c h assis . Blue vi n yl-coate d ca b inet .
cycles (120 h o u rs) to 95% relative h umidity reference d to MILE-16400F .
Two sh oc k s at 30 g, one-h alf sine, 11 millisecon d d u ration each d irection along eac h ma j or axis . G u illoti n e-ty p e s h ock s . Total of 12 s h oc k s .
M eets N ational Safe Transit ty p e of test w h en pac k age d as sh ippe d from
TA BLE 1-3
F ive
15 min u tes along eac h of th e th ree maj or axes at α total displacement of 0 .025-i nc h pea k to p ea k (4 g at 55 Hz) wit h freq uency varie d from 10-55-10 Hz in one-min u te cycles . H ol d at 55 H z for t h ree minutes on eac h axis .
Interference cond ucted out of t h e instr u ment u n d er test t h roug h t h e p ower cord wit h in t h e given limits from 150 kilo h ertz to 25 megah ertz .
Tek tronix, Inc .
-15 0 C to +55 0 C -55 0 C to +75 ° C
E lectro-magnetic
Ra d iated i n terfere n ce
Performa n ce
C h aracteristic
Overall Dime n sions, 453Α (meas u re d at maxim u m p oints)
H eig h t
7 .2 inc h es (18 .3 centimeters)
Wi d th
12 .6 inc h es (32 .0 ce n timeters)
Le n gt h
20 .7 i n ch es (52 .6 centimeters) including front cover ; 22 .4 i n ch es (56 .9 centimeters) with h an d le p ositioned for carrying .
Overall Dimensions, R453A (measu re d at maximum p oints)
H eigh t
7 .0 inch es (17 .8 centimeters)
Wi d th
19 inc h es (48 .3 centimeters)
L ength
17 .4 inc h es (44 .2 centimeters) b eh in d front panel ; 19 .2 inc h es (48 .8 ce n timeters) overall .
S p ecif ication-453Α/R453A Characteristic
Information
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
N et Weight 453 Α (inclu d es front cover without accessories)
A p proximately kilograms) .
R453A (without accessories)
A pp roximately 33 .5 poun d s (15 .2 kilograms) .
30
p ounds (13 .6
Stan d ard accessories su p plie d with the 453 Α an d R453A are listed in th e M echanical P arts
L ist
illustrations . F or
optional accessories available for u se with this instrument, see the current Tektronix, Inc . catalog .
453 Α /R453A
O PERATI N G I N ST RU CTIO N S Change information, if any, affecting this section will be found at the rear of this manual.
ι
ι
t
ι
ι
ι
General To effectively u se the 453 Α , t he o p eration an d ca p abilities of the instrument must be k nown . This section d escribes the o p eration of the front-, si d e-, an d rear- p anel controls and connectors, gives first time an d general o p erating information, and lists some basic a pp lications for this instrument .
F ront
Co v er
The front cover furnishe d with the 453 Α p rovi d es α d ust-tight seal around t he front p anel . U se the cover to p rotect the front p anel when stori ng or transp orting the instrument . The cover also p rovi d es storage s p ace for p robes an d other accessories (see F ig . 2-1) . O perating
Voltage CAUTION
This instrument is designed for operation from α power source with its neutral at or near earth (ground) potential with α separate safety-earth conductor. It is not intended fo r operation from two phases of α multi-phase system, or across the legs of α single-phase, three-wire system.
T he 453 Α can be o p erate d from either α 115-volt or α 230-volt nominal line-voltage source . The L ine V oltage Selector assembly on the rear p anel converts the instrument from one o p erating range to the other . In ad d ition, this assembly changes the p rimary connections of the p ower transformer to allow selection of one of three regulating ranges . The assembly also inclu d es the two line fuses . When the instrument is converted from 115-volt to 230-volt nominal o p eration, or vice versa, the assembly connects or d isconnects one of the fuses to p rovi d e the correct p rotection for the instrument . U se the following p roce d ure to convert this instrument between no minal line voltages or regulating ranges . 1 . Disconnect the instrument from the p ower source . 2 . L oosen the two ca p tive screws which hol d the cover onto the voltage selector assembly ; then pull to remove the cover .
ι
F ig . 2-1 . Accessory storage provi d e d in front cover .
3 . To co n vert from 115-volts nominal to 230-volts nominal line voltage, pull out the V oltage Selector switch bar (see F ig . 2-2) ; turn it aroun d 180 ° and p lug it back into the remaining h oles . Change the line-cor d power p lug to match t he p ower-source rece p tacle or use α 115- to 230-volt ada p ter . NO ΤΕ Color-coding of the cord conductors is as follows (in accordance with National Electrical Code) :
L ine Neutral Safety earth (ground)
B lack
White Green
4 . To change regulating ranges, pull out the Range Selector switch bar (see F ig . 2-2) ; sli d e it to the d esired p osition and p lug it back in . Select α range which is centered about the average line voltage to which t he instrument is to be connecte d (see Table 2-1) .
Op erating Instructions-453Α / R 453A connect t h is instr u ment to α two-wire AC p ower system, be sure to connect th e groun d lead of t h e a d a p ter to earth (ground) . F ailure to com p lete t h e ground system may allow th e c h assis of th is instrument to be elevate d above groun d p otential an d p ose α s h oc k h azar d .
T h e feet on t h e rear p anel p rovid e α convenient cord wra p to store t h e p ower cor d w h en not in use .
O p erating Tem p erature
F ig . 2-2 . L ine Voltage Selector assembly on th e rear panel (s h own wit h cover remove d ) . TA BLE 2-1 Regulating Ranges
R egu lating Range Range Selector Switc h Position
LO
(switc h bar in left h oles) Μ (switc h bar in mi dd le h oles) ΗΙ (switc h b ar in righ t h oles)
115- V olts N ominal
230- V olts N ominal
90 to 110 volts 180 to 220 volts 104 to 126 volts 208 to 252 volts 112 to 136 volts 224 to 272 volts
5 . Re-install th e cover an d tig h ten t h e two ca p tive screws . 6 . Before ap p lying p ower to th e instrument, c h ec k t h at t h e in d icating tabs on th e switc h bars are p rotru d ing t h rough th e correct h oles for t h e d esired nominal line voltage an d regu lating range .
This instrument may be damaged if operated with the Voltage Selector assembly set to incorrect positions for the line voltage applied,
L ine
T h e 453 Α is coole d by air d rawn in at t h e rear an d blown out th roug h h oles in t h e to p an d bottom covers . A d e q u ate clearance on th e to p , b ottom, an d rear m u st be p rovi d ed to allow h eat to be d issipated away from t h e instru ment . T h e clearance p rovi d e d b y t h e feet at t h e bottom an d rear sh ould b e maintaine d . If p ossible, allow about one inc h of clearance on t h e top . Do not b loc k or restrict t h e air flow from t h e air-esca p e h oles in t h e cabinet. Α t h ermal cutout in t h is instrument provi d es t h ermal protection and d isconnects t h e p ower to t h e instrument if th e internal tem p erature exceed s α safe o p erating level . P ower is automatically restored w h en t h e tem perature returns to α safe level . Operation of th e instrument for exten d e d p erio d s wit h out t h e covers may cause it to overh eat an d th e t h ermal cutout to o p en . T h e air filter s h oul d be clea n e d occasionally to allow t h e maximum amount of cooling air to enter th e instrument . Cleaning instructions are given in Section 4 .
Th e 453 Α can be o p erated w here th e ambient air tem p eratu re is between -15 ° C an d +55 ° C . Derate t h e maxim u m o p erating tem p erature 1'C for each add itional 1000 feet of altitu d e above 5000 feet . T h is instrument can be store d in am b ient tem peratu res between -55 ° C an d +75 ° C . After storage at tem p erat u res beyond t h e o p erating limits, allow t h e c h assis tem p erature to come wit h in t h e o p erating limits before p ower is a pp lied .
Op erating Posit i on The h an d le of t h e 453Α can be p ositione d for carrying or as α tilt-stand for t h e instr u ment . To p osition th e h an d le, p ress in at both p ivot p oints (see rig . 2-3) and turn th e h andle to th e d esired p osition . Several positions are p rovi d ed for convenient carrying or viewing . T h e instrument may also be set on t h e rear- p anel feet for o p eration or storage .
R ac k mounting Th e 453 Α is d esigned to be used with α th ree-wire - AC p ower system . If α t h ree- to two-wire ada p ter is use d to 2-2
Co mp lete i n formation for mounting t h e R453A in α cabinet rack is given in Section 6 of t h is manual .
ι
,
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
ι ι
Op erating Instructions-453 Α/ R 453A
POSITIO N Controls vertical of t h e
(AC GN D DC)
ι
of trace.
Screwdriver GAI N adj ustment to set gain
In p ut Cou p ling
ι
p osition
V ertical P ream p .
Selects signal
System .
m eth od to
of co up ling
V ertical
in p ut
Deflection
AC : DC com p onent of in pu t signal is bloc k ed . (-3 dB
L ow
point)
fre q uency limit
is abou t 1 .6
h ertz .
GN D :
In p ut circ u it is grounded ( d oes not gro u nd a pp lied signal) .
both sid es ! π ; Lio n h αηλ 1e .
DC : All com ponents of t h e in pu t signal are p asse d to t h e V ertical Deflection System .
Screw ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ BA L d river a dju stment to balance Vertical Deflection System in t h e 5, Fig . 2-3 . Ha nd le positioned to provi de α stan d for t h e i nstr u me n t . 10, an d 20 m V p ositions of t h e VO LTS/DI V switc h . In CO N T R O L S A N D CO NNECTO R S
C H 1 O R Χ an d CH 2 O R Υ
General
pu t connector for vertical signal .
Selects MOD E vertical mod e of o p eration . Α brief d escri p tion of th e function or o p eration of t h e front-, si d e-, and rear-p anel controls an d connectors follows C H 1 : T h e C h annel 1 signal is d is(see F ig . 2-4) . M ore d etailed information is given in th is p layed . section un d er General O p erating Information . C H 2 : T h e C h annel 2 signal is d isp laye d .
Dis p lay I N T EN SITY
Controls b rig h tness of d isp lay .
P rovi d es
a dj ustment
define d d is p lay . SCA LE
I
LLUM
BEAM F I N D ER
Vertical
ι
(bot h
for
α
well-
Controls gratic u le illumination . Com p resses d is p lay wit h in gratic u le area in d e pendent of dis p lay p osition or a pp lie d signals .
c h annels
A L T : Dual trace d is p lay of signal on b ot h c h annels . Disp lay switc h ed between c h annels at end of eac h swee p . C H O P : D u al trace d is p lay of signal on bot h ch annels . Dis p lay switc h ed between c h annels at α rep etition rate of about 500 kilo h ertz .
exce p t as noted )
ADD : C h annel 1 an d 2 signals are V O L TS/DI V Selects vertical d eflection factor algebraically add e d a nd th e algebraic (V A R contr ol m u st be in calibrate d sum is disp laye d on th e p osition for in d icate d d eflection C RT . factor) . ΙΝΤ Τ R Ι G Selects source of internal trigger sigVA R P rovi d es contin u o u sly variable d eηαΙ from vertical system . Also reflection factor between t h e calilects so u rce of Χ signal for Χ - Υ brated settings of t h e V O LTS/DI V mode o p eration . switc h . N O RM : Swee p circuits triggered UN CA L L ig h t ind icates th at t h e VA R confrom d is p laye d ch annel(s) . C h antrol in not in th e calibrated nel 1 signal available at C H 1 p osition . O U T connector . 2-3
O perating
Instructions-453 Α/R453A
Β Triggering and
E xternal Horizontal
C RT
Channel l
Α. F ront
Β. Sid e panel
Α Triggeri ng
C hannel 2
panel
C. Rear panel
F ig . 2-4 . F ront-, si d e-, a nd rear-panel co ntrols an d connectors .
2-4
O p erating Instructions-453 Α/ R 453A th e signal connected to t h e CH 1 gere d only from signal app lie d to O R Χ connector (see ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h ) . th e C h annel 1 in p u t connector . No signal availa b le at C H 1 O U T UPL I N G Determines meth od of cou p ling CO connector . C H 1 lig h ts, located trigger besi d e Α an d Β SO UR C E signal to trigger circ u it . switc h es indicate w h en th e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h is in th e C H 1 O R AC : Re jects DC and attenuates sigΧ - Υ p osition . F or Χ - Υ mo d e nals below about 30 h ertz . Aco p eration, C h annel 1 signal is cepts signals between about 30 connected to t h e H orizontal h ertz and 60 mega h ertz, Am p lifier . LF REJ : Re j ects DC an d attenuates signals below about 30 kilo h ertz . Inverts t h e C h annel 2 signal w h en INVERT (C H 2 Acce p ts signals between about only) p ulled out. 30 kilo h ertz an d 60 mega h ertz . CH 1 O R Χ- Y : Swee p circuits trig-
Groun d (not labeled )
Α an d Β Triggering (bot h ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T
HF
Bin d ing post to esta b lis h common groun d b etween t h e 453A and any associate d e q ui p ment .
DC : Acce p ts all trigger signals from DC to 60 mega h ertz or greater .
w h ere a pp licable)
'In p ut connector for external trigger signal . Connector for Β Triggering also serves as external h orizontal in p ut for th e Χ signal wh en H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h is in Χ -Υ p osition an d Β SO UR C E switc h is in ΕΧΤ position .
REJ : Acce pts signals between about 30 h ertz an d 50 kilo h ertz ; rej ects DC and attenuates signals outside t h e above range .
S L O PE
Selects p ortion of trigger w h ic h starts t h e swee p . +:
Swee p can be triggered from p ositive-going portion of trigger signal .
- : Swee p can b e triggere d from negative-going portion of trigger signal .
Selects so u rce of trigger signal . SO UR C E
Ι NT : Internal trigger signal obtained from Vertical Deflection LEVEL Selects am p litu d e point System . Wh en C H 1 lig h t is on, signal at w h ic h swee p is trigger signal is obtained only from th e C h annel 1 in pu t signal ; Decreases HF STA B d is p lay j itter w h en th e lig h t is off, th e trigger (A Triggering only) fre q u ency signals . H as signal is o b tained from th e d iseffect at low swee p rates . p layed c h annel(s) . Source of internal trigger signal is selected b y th e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h . Α an d Β Swee p
L I NE :
Trigger signal obtaine d from α sam p le of t h e line voltage a pp lied to t h is instr u ment .
ΕΧΤ : Trigger signal o btained from an external signal a pp lied to th e ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T connector . ΕΧΤ - 10 : Atten u ates external trigger signal a pp roximately 10 times .
CH 1
L ig h t
ind icates th at t h e internal trigger signal is obtai n e d only from
signal
on trigger triggered . for high negligi b le
DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER
P rovi d es varia b le swee p d elay be-
Α S WEEP T R IG'D
L ig h t indicates th at Α swee p is trig gered and will p ro d uce α sta b le display wit h correct I N T EN SITY an d POSITIO N control settings .
UN CA L Α O R Β
L ig h t in d icates th at eith er th e Α VA R or Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V V A R IA BLE control is not in th e calibrate d p osition .
tween 0 .20 and 10 .20 times t h e de lay time in d icated b y t h e Α TIME/ DI V switc h .
2-5
Operating Instructions-453 Α/ R453A Α A ND Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V AN D D EL AY TIME
Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch (clear plastic flange) selects the swee p rate of the Α swee p circ uit for Α sweep only operation an d selects the b asic d elay time (to b e mu ltiplie d b y DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial setting) for mixe d or d elayed swee p o p eration . Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V E(D selects L AY E D SWEEP) switch sweep rate of the Β swee p circ u it for mixed or d elayed swee p o peration only . V ariable controls must b e in calibrated p ositions for calibrated sweep rates. Α VAR
Β SWEEP M OD E
Provi des continuo usly variable Α swee p rate between calibrated settings of the Α ΤΙΜΕ /DIV switch. Α swee p rate is cali brated when control is set fully cloc kwise to calibrated position . Selects Β swee p o peration mo de. TR IGG ER ABLE A FTER D EL AY TIME : Β sweep circu it will not produce α swee p until α trigger pulse is received following the d elay time selected by the D EL AY TIME (A TIME/DIV) switch and the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial.
d etermined by the setting of the
'
M IX ED : Both time b ases are oper-
'
D EL AY TIME (Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V ) switch an d t he DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial . Swee p mo d e determined by Β SWEEP MOD E switc h. ating. The sweep rate of the first p art of th e sweep is d etermined by the Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch ; the last part is d etermined b y the Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch . The amount of d isplay allocated to each time base is determined by th e setting of the DELAY-TIME MULTIPL I ER dial .
'
Χ -Y : H orizontal d eflection p rovi ded by an external signal .
M AG
Increases swee p rate to ten times setting of Α or Β ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch by horizontally expand ing the cen ter d ivision of the d isplay. L ig h t in d icates wh en magnifier is on,
Α S WEEP MOD E
Determin es the operating mo de for Α swee p .
A UTO T R IG : Sweep initiate d by the app lied trigger signal at point selected b y the Α LEVEL conΒ STA RTS A FT ER D EL AY TIME : trol when th e trigger signal re petition rate is above about 20 Β swee p circ uit ru ns imme dih ertz an d within the frequ ency ately following delay time selecrange selected b y the Α CO UPted by th e D EL AY TIME switch L I N G switch. Triggered swee p an d DELAY-TIME MULTIPL I ER d ial. can be obtained only over the am plitude range of the app lied signal . Wh en th e Α LEVEL εοηH O R IZ DISPL AY Selects h orizontal mode of operatrol is outsid e th e am plitu d e tion . range, the trigger re petition rate is below the lower freq u ency Α: H orizontal d eflection p rovi d ed b y Α swee p. Β swee p inoperalimit (or above u pp er limit for tive . HF REJ), or th e trigger signal is inadequate, the swee p free runs Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β : Swee p rate at the sweep rate selected by the determined by Α ΤΙΜΕ /DIV Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch to p roduce switch. An intensified portion α brig ht reference trace. app ears on the d isp lay d uring the Β sweep time . This p osition N O RM T R IG : Swee p initiate d by provides α c hec k of th e d uration the applie d trigger signal at point selecte an d position of the d elayed d by Α LEVEL control swee p ( Β ) with respect to the deover the frequency range selecte laying swee p (Α) . d b y the Α CO UPL I NG switch. Triggere d swee p can be obtained Β (D EL AY E D SWEEP) : Swee p rate only over the am plitude range of d etermined by Β ΤΙΜΕ /DIV th e ap plied trigger signal . Wh en , switch after the d elay time the Α LEVEL control is outside
'
'
O perating Instructions-453 Α/R453A to obtain α well- d efined d isp lay. Does not require re-adj ustment in
the am p litu d e range, the trigger re p etition rate is outsi d e the freq uency range selecte d b y the Α
CO UPL I N G switch , or the trig-
ger signal is ina d e q uate, t h ere is no trace .
normal u se .
Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V VA R IA BLE
P rovi d es contin u o u sly varia b le Β swee p rate between calibrate d set-
tings of Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch . Β swee p rate is calibrated w h en conSI N G LE S WEEP : After α swee p is trol is set f u lly cloc k wise to CA L . displayed, furth er swee p s cannot be p resente d u ntil t h e RE S E T Current PR O BE L OO P loop p rovi d ing five-milliambu tton is p ressed . Dis p lay is triggered as for N O RM o p eration p ere squ are-wave current from calibrator circuit . using t h e Α Triggering controls . Output Α GAT E connector p rovi d ing α recRE Wh S ET en t h e RE S E T button is p resse d tangular pulse coincident wit h Α (SI N G LE S WEEP mo d e), α single swee p . d is p lay will b e p resented (with correct triggering) w h en t h e next trigΒ GAT E Ou tp ut connector p roviding α recger p u lse is received . RE S E T lig h t tangular p ulse coincident wit h Β (insi d e RE S E T b u tton) remains on sweep . until α trigger is received and th e swee p is com p leted . RE S E T bu tton must b e p ressed b efore anot h er CH 1 OU T Outp u t connector p rovi d ing α swee p can be p resente d . sam p le of t h e signal a pp lie d to t h e Α S WEEP LEN GT H
C H 1 O R Χ connector w h en t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h is in th e N O RM p osition .
Ad ju sts length of Α swee p . In t h e FULL p osition (cloc k wise d etent),
t h e swee p is at least 10 divisions Switc CA L I BR ATO R h selects o u t p ut voltage of long . As th e control is rotated Cali b rator . 1-volt or 0 .1-volt s q uare co u ntercloc k wise, th e length of Α wave available . sweep is red u ce d until it is less t h an four d ivisions long ju st b efore t h e Screw T R AC E R OTATIO N d river ad ju stment to align d etent in t h e f u lly-co u ntercloc k trace with h orizontal graticule lines . wise p osition is reac h ed . In t h e Β EN DS Α p osition (co un tercloc k wise d etent), t h e Α swee p is reset at R ear Panel t h e en d of t h e Β swee p to p rovide Ζ AXIS I NPU T In p u t con n ector for intensity mo d t h e fastest p ossible sweep re p etition u latio n of t h e C R T d isp lay . rate for d elayed sweep disp lays . Controls P OSITIO N trace.
h orizontal
p osition
of
F I NE
P rovi d es more p recise h orizontal p osition a d ju stment.
1 kH z
Cali b rator ou t p ut connector .
PO WER ON
L
Screw d river a d ju stment u se d in conju nction with th e F OC U S control
Switch ing assem b ly to select th e nominal o p erating voltage an d th e line voltage range . T h e assembly also inclu d es t h e line fuses .
Range Selector : Selects line voltage ra nge (low, me d ium, h ig h ) . FIRST-TIME O PER ATIO N
p ower to t h e
Side Panel
Selector
Voltage Selector : Selects nominal operating voltage range (115 V or 230 V) .
ig h t : In d icates th at P O WER switc h is on and t h e instrument is co n necte d to α line voltage sou rce .
Switc h : Controls instrument.
ASTIG
L ine Voltage
General T h e following step s will d emonstrate th e u se of th e controls an d connectors of th e 453Α . It is recommen d ed t h at t h is p roced ure b e followed com p letely for familiarization wit h th is instr u ment . 2-7
O perating Instructions-453 Α/ R453A Dis p lay
Setu p Information
4 . Ad vance t h e I N T EN SITY control u ntil th e trace is at th e d esire d viewing level (near mi d range) .
1 . Set th e controls as follows: Dis p lay Controls
INTENSITY F OC U S SCA LE ILLUM
Countercloc kwise
Mi d range
Countercloc kwise
V ertical Controls ( both channels if app licable) mV 20 V O LTS/DI V Calibrate d VAR M id range POSITIO N DC In put Co upling CH 1 M OD E N O RM ΙΝΤ TR IG Pus hed in I NVER T Triggering Controls (bot h Α an d Β if app licable) LEVEL SLO PE CO UPL I N G SOU RCE
Cloc kwise (+) + AC ΙΝΤ
Swee p Controls DELAY-TIME 0.20 MULTI PL I ER Α an d Β ΤΙΜΕ /DIV .5 ms Cali brated Α VAR Β STA RTS AFTER Β SWEEP MOD E DEL AY TIME H OR IZ DISPL AY Α , O FF M AG M idrange P OSITIO N FULL Α S WEEP LENGT H A U TO TR IG Α S WEEP MOD E P OWER O FF Side P anel Controls L CA Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V VA R IA BLE CA L I BR ATOR .1 V 2 . Connect the 453Α to α p ower voltage and frequency re quirements t h e available line voltage is outside V oltage Selector assembly (on rear Voltage in th is section .
source th at meets th e of the instrument. If the limits of the L ine panel), see Op erating
3. Set the POWER switch to ON . Allow about five minutes warmup so th e instrument reac hes α normal o perating temperature before p roceed ing. 2- 8
kH z CA L connector to t h e C H BN C cable .
5. Connect the 1
connector wit h α
1 OR Χ
6. Turn the Α LEVEL control toward 0 u ntil th e d is play becomes stable . N ote that the Α SWEEP T R IG'D light is on wh en the d is play is stable .
ι ι ι ι
7 . Adj ust the F OC US control for α s h ar p, well-defined d is p lay over the entire trace length. (If focuse d d isp lay cannot b e obtained, see Astigmatism Ad j ustment in th is section .) 8. Disconnect the in put signal and move the trace with the Channel 1 POSITIO N control so it coinci des with one of the h orizontal graticule lines. If the trace is not p arallel with t he gratic ule line, see Trace Alignment Adjustment in th is section. 9. Rotate the SCA LE I LLUM control th rough out its range an d notice that the gratic ule lines are ill uminated as the control is turned cloc kwise (most obvious with mes h or tinted filter installe d) . Set control so graticule lines are illu minated as d esired .
'
V ertical
10 . Change th e CH 1 V OLTS/DI V switch from 20 m V to 5 m V . If the vertical position of the trace sh ifts, see Step Attenuator Balance in th is section. 11 . Set the CH 1 V OLTS/DI V switch to 20 mV an d set the Ch annel 1 In put Cou pling switch to AC . Connect the 1 kH z CA L connector to both the CH 1 O R Χ an d C H 2 O R Υ connectors with two BN C cables an d α BN C Τ connector. NOTE If the BN C cables and BN C Τ connecto r are not available, ma ke the following changes in the procedure. Place the BN C jack post (supplied accessory) on the 1 kHz CA L connecto r and connect the two 10Χ probes (supplied accessories) to the CH 1 and CH 2 connectors. Connect the probe tips to the BNC jac k post. Set the CA L IBRATOR switch (on side-panel) to 1 V. 12 . Turn the Channel 1 POSITIO N control to center the play. d is T he d is play is α squ are wave, five d ivisions in am p li-
, '
'
O p erating Instructions-453 Α / R 453A t u de
wit h ab out five cycles d is p laye d on th e screen . If t h e d isp lay is not five divisions in am p litude, see Vertical Gain A dj ustment in t h is section .
22 . Set th e M OD E switc h to ADD . T h e d is p lay sh o u l d be four d ivisions in am p lit ud e . N ote th at eith er P OSITIO N control moves t h e dis p lay .
13 . Set t h e C h annel 1 In p ut Cou p ling switc h to G N D an d position t h e trace to th e center h orizontal line wit h h e C h annel 1 POSITIO N control . Th is p rovi d es α gro u n d reference at t h e center horizontal line .
23 . Pull t h e I NVER T switc h . The d is p lay is α straig h t line in d icating th at t h e algebraic su m of th e two sig n als is zero (if th e C h annel 1 an d 2 gain is correct) .
t
14 . Set t h e C h annel 1 In p ut Co u p ling switc h to DC . N ote t h at t h e baseline of t h e waveform remains at t h e center h orizontal line (gro u nd reference) . 15 . Set t h e C h annel 1 In pu t Co up ling switc h to AC . waveform is centere d a b o u t th e center h ori zontal line (groun d reference) .
N ote t h at th e
16 . T u rn t h e C h annel 1 VA R control t h rou g h o u t its range . N ote t h at th e UN CA L lig h t comes on w h en t h e VA R control is move d from t h e cali b rate d position (f u lly cloc k wise) . T h e d eflection s h o u l d b e re d uce d to a b o u t two d ivisions. Return t h e VA R control to t h e cali b rate d p osition . 17 . Set t h e M OD E switc h to C H 2 . 18 . T u rn t h e C h annel 2 P OSITIO N control to center t h e dis p lay . T h e d isp lay will b e similar to th e p revious d is p lay for C h annel 1 . C h ec k C h annel 2 ste p attenuator balance an d gain as d escribed in ste p s 10 t h roug h 12 . T h e C h annel 2 In p ut Cou p ling switc h an d VA R control o p erate as d escribed in ste p s 13 th ro u g h 16 . 19 . Set both V O L TS/DI V switc h es to 50 m V. 20 . Set th e M OD E switc h to A L T and p osition t h e C h annel 1 waveform to t h e to p of th e graticule area and th e C h annel 2 waveform to t h e b ottom of th e graticule area . Turn th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch h rough out its range . N ote th at th e d is p lay alternates b etween c h annels at all sweep rates .
t
21 . Set th e M OD E switc h to C H O P an d t h e Α TIME/ DI V switc h to 10 μ s . N ote t h e switc h ing between c h annels as s h own b y t h e segmented trace . Set t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h t o C H 1 O R Χ -Y ; t h e trace s h o u l d app ear more soli d , since it is no longer triggered on th e between-c h annel switc h ing transients . T u rn t h e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h t h ro u g h out its range . Α du al-trace d isp lay is p resente d at all sweep rates, b ut unli k e A L T, b ot h c h annels are dis p layed on eac h trace on α time-sh aring basis . Retu rn t h e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to .5 ms .
24 . Set eit h er VO L TS/DI V switc h to 20 m V . T h e s qu are-wave d is p lay indicates th at t h e algebraic sum of t h e two signals is no longer zero . Return t h e M OD E switc h to C H 1 and b oth V O L TS/ ΠΙ V switc h es to .2 (if using 10 Χ p robes, set both V O L TS/DI V switc h es to 20 m V) . P us h in t h e I NVER T switc h . Triggering 25 . Set th e CA L I BR ATO R switc h to 1 V . Rotate th e Α LEVEL control th ro u gh o u t its range . T h e d isp lay free runs at th e extremes of rotation . N ote th at t h e Α S WEEP T R IG'D lig h t is on only w h en th e d is p lay is triggere d . 26 . Set t h e Α SWEEP M OD E switc h to N O RM T R IG . Again rotate th e Α LEVEL control t h roug h ou t its range . Α d isp lay is p resente d only w h en correctly triggered . T he Α S WEEP T R IG'D lig h t o p erates as in A U TO T R IG . Retu rn th e Α SWEEP M OD E switch to A U TO T R IG an d set th e Α LEVEL control for α sta b le disp lay . 27 . Set t h e Α S LO PE switch to - . T h e trace starts on th e negative p art of th e sq uare wave . Return t h e switch to + ; t h e trace starts with th e p ositive p art of th e s qu are wave. 28 . Set t h e Α CO UPL I N G switc h to DC . Turn t h e C h an nel 1 P OSITIO N control u ntil th e d is p lay becomes u nsta b le (only part of s q uare wave visible) . Ret u rn th e Α COUPLING switc h to AC ; t h e d is p lay is again stable . Since c h anging trace p osition ch anges DC level, th is sh ows h ow DC level c h anges affect DC trigger cou p ling . Return th e d isp lay to th e center of th e screen . 29 . Set th e M OD E switc h to C H 2 ; t h e d is p lay s h ou l d b e stable . Remove t h e signal connecte d to C h annel 1 ; th e display free runs . Set t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h to N O RM ; t h e disp lay is again stable . N ote th at t h e C H 1 lig h ts in Α an d Β Triggering go out w h en t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h is c h anged to N O RM . 30. Set t h e Α SO UR C E switc h to L I NE . Connect α 10 Χ p ro b e (supp lied accessory) to th e C H 2 O R Υ connector . Connect t h e p ro b e ti p to α line-voltage so u rce and set th e C H 2 VO L TS/DI V switc h for α dis p lay abou t four d ivisions in am p litu de . If necessary, ad ju st t h e Α LEVEL control for 2- 9
Ope r ating Instructions-453Α / R 453A α stable d is p lay of t h e sine-wave . N otice t h at th e d is p lay starts on th e correct slop e . Disconnect t h e p ro be . 31 .w Connect t h e Cali b rator signal to b ot h th e C H 2 O R Υ an d Α ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T connectors. Set t h e Α SO UR C E switc h to EXT . O p eratio n of th e LEVEL, S L O PE, an d CO UPL I N G controls for external triggering are th e same as d escri b ed in ste p s 25 t h ro u g h 28 . 32 . Set t h e Α SO UR C E switc h to ΕΧΤ - 10 . O peration is th e same as for EXT . N ote th at th e Α LEVEL control h as less range in t h is position, in d icating trigger signal atten u atio n . Return th e Α SO UR C E switc h to INT . 33 . O p eration of th e Β Triggering controls is similar to Α Triggering .
N ormal
and
M agnified Swee p
34 . Set t h e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to 5 ms a nd th e M AG switc h to Χ 10 . Th e d isp lay s h oul d b e similar to th at o b tained with th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h set to .5 ms an d th e MAG switc h to O FF . 35 . Turn th e h orizontal POSITIO N control t h roug h out its range ; it s h o u l d b e possible to p osition t h e d isp lay across th e com p lete graticule area . Now turn th e F I NE control . T h e d isplay moves α smaller amount and allows more p recise p ositioning . Ret u rn th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to .5 ms, th e M AG switc h to O FF a n d ret u rn th e start of th e trace to th e left graticule line . 36 . T u rn t h e Α V A R control th rough out its range . Β lig h t comes on w h en t h e Α VA R control is moved from t h e cali b rate d p osition (fu lly cloc k wise) . T h e swee p rate is slower by about 2 .5 times i n th e fully countercloc k wise position as in d icate d by more cycles d is p laye d on t h e C R T . Retu rn th e Α V A R control to th e cali brated p osition .
N otice th at th e UN CA L Α O R
intensified p ortion a pp ears to j um p between p ositive slo p es of th e d is p lay . Set th e Β S L O PE switch to - ; t h e i n tensified p ortion b egins on th e negative slo p e . Rotate t h e Β LEVEL control ; t h e intensifie d p ortion of th e d is p lay disa pp ears h en t h e Β LEVEL control is out of t h e triggerable range . Return th e Β LEVEL control to 0 . 39 . Set th e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Β (D ELAY E D S WEEP) . Rotate th e D ELAY-TI ME MUL TI PL I ER d ial th rough out its range ; a b out one- h alf cycle of th e waveform sh ou l d be d is p laye d on t h e screen (lea d ing e d ge visi b le only at h ig h I N T EN SITY control setti n g) . T h e d isp lay remains sta b le on t h e screen, ind icating th at t h e Β swee p is triggere d . 40 . Set th e Β SWEEP M OD E switch to Β STA R TS A F T ER D EL AY TIME . Rotate t h e DELAY-TIME MULTIPL I ER d ial th roug h out its range ; t h e d is p lay moves continuou sly across th e screen as th e co n t r ol is rotated . 41 . Rotate th e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial f u lly countercloc k wise a nd set th e H O R IZ DIS PLAY switch to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β . Rotate t h e Α SWEEP LEN GT H εοη trol countercloc k wise ; the length of th e d is p lay d ecreases . Set t h e control to t h e Β EN DS Α p osition ; now t h e d is p lay end s after th e intensified p ortion . Rotate th e D EL AYTIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial an d n ote t h at th e swee p length increases as th e d isp lay moves across th e screen . Retu rn t h e Α S WEEP LEN GT H control to FULL . 42 . T u rn t h e Β VA R IA BLE control (on si d e p anel) th rough out its range . N otice t h at t h e UN CA L Α O R Β ligh t comes on w h en t h e Β V A R IA BLE control is moved from t h e CA L p osition (fu lly cloc k wise) . T h e Β sweep rate (intensified portion) is slower by a bout 2 .5 times in t h e fully countercloc k wise p osition, as in d icated by α longer intensified zone . Return t h e Β V A R IA BLE control to CA L .
43 . Set th e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to M IX E D an d th e D EL AY-TI ME MULTI PL I ER to 5 .00 . N otice th at t h e first h alf of th e sweep is at t h e swee p rate of t h e Α time b ase (5 ms/DI V ), an d th e last h alf is at t h e swee p rate of t h e Β time base (0 .5 ms/DI V) . Rotate th e DELAY-TIME MULTIDelaye d Swee p PLI ER dial t h roug h o u t its range an d notice th at th e d isp lay 37 . Pull t h e D EL AY E D SWEEP k nob out an d tu rn it to switc h es between time bases at t h e p oi n t in d icated by t h e 50 μ s (D EL AY TIME remai n s at .5 ms) . Set th e H O R IZ DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial . Retu rn t h e H O R IZ DISDISPLAY PL AY switch to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β . An intensifie d switc h to Α . portion, about one division in le n gth , sh oul d be s h own at th e start of th e trace . Rotate th e DELAY-TIME MULTIPL I ER d ial th ro u gh out its range ; th e intensified portion Single Swee p sh ou ld move along th e d isp lay . 44 . Set th e Α SWEEP M OD E switc h to SI N G LE SWEEP . Remove th e Cali b rator signal from th e C H 2 O R Υ connec tor . P ress t h e RE S E T bu tton ; th e RE S E T ligh t s h oul d come 38 . Set t h e Β S WEEP M OD E switch to T R IGG ER A BLE . Again rotate t h e DELAY-TIME on an d remain on . Again apply th e signal to t h e C H 2 O R Υ A F T ER D ELAY TIME connector ; α si n gle trace sh o u l d b e p resente d and t h e MULTI PL I ER d ial t h roug h out its range and note t h at t h e
2- 1 0
Operating I n structions-453A/ R453A RESET light sh oul d 9ο out. Return the Α SWEEP M OD E switch to AUTO T R IG .
can be demonstrate d . R emove the grou nd stra p between the Ζ AXIS I NPUT b in d ing posts . Co nnect the external signal to b ot h the C H 2 OR Υ connector and t he Ζ AXIS I NPUT b ind i ng posts . Set the Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch to disE xternal Horizontal play abou t five cycles of the waveform . T he positive pea ks 45 . Connect the Cali brator signal to b oth the CH 2 OR of the waveform shoul d be blan k ed and the negative pea ks Υ and ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ I NPU T connectors . Set the Β intensifie d , in d icating intensity mo d ulation . Re p lace the SO UR Cgro E switch to ΕΧΤ , Β CO UPL ING switch to DC, an d un d stra p . the H OR IZ DISPL AY switch to Χ-Y . Increase the INTENSITY control setting until the d is play is visi ble (two d ots d is p layed diagonally) . The d is play should be five d ivisions 53 . T h is completes the basic operating p rocedu re for vertically an d a bout 3.7 divisions h orizontally . Set the Β the 453Α . Instrume nt o p eratio ns n ot ex plai ned here, or SO UR CE switch to ΕΧΤ 10 . The d isp lay shoul d b e reo p erations wh ic h need furt her explanation are discussed duced 10un times horizontally . Th e d is p lay can be p ositio ned d er General O p erating Information . h orizontally with the horizontal P OSITIO N or F I NE control, an d vertically with the Channel 2 P OSITIO N control. 46 . Co n nect the Calibrator signal to b oth the C H 1 O R Χ and C H 2 OR Υ connectors . Set the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch to CH 1 OR Χ-Υ and the Β SO UR CE switch to INT . 47 . The dis p lay shoul d be five d ivisions vertically and h orizontally . T he d is p lay can b e positioned horizontally with the Channel 1 P OSITIO N control an d vertically with the Channel 2 P OSITIO N control.
48 . Change the CH 1 V OL TS/DI V switch to .5 . The dis p lay is re d uced to two d ivisions h orizontally . Now set the CH 2 VO LTS/DI V switch to .5 . The d isp lay is red uced to two divisions vertically .
Beam F in d er
49 . Set the CH 1 an d C H 2 V O L TS/DI V switches to 10 mV. The dis p lay is not visi ble since it exceed s th e scan area of the C RT. 50 . P ress the BEAM F I NDER switch. N ote that th e d isρΙαγ is returne d to the graticule area . Wh ile holding t h e BEAM F I N D ER switch dep resse d , increase the vertical an d h orizontal deflection factors until the dis p lay is re d uced to about two d ivisions vertically an d h orizontally . Ad ju st the Ch annel 1 an d 2 P OSITIO N controls to center the dis p lay about the center lines of the graticule. R elease the BEAM F I N D ER and note th at the d is p lay remains within the viewing area . Disconnect the app lie d signal . 51 . R e d uce the I NTEN SITY control setting to normal, Β SO UR CE switch to ΙΝΤ, an d set th e H O R IZ DISPLAY switch to Α. Ζ-Axis In p ut 52 . If an external signal is available (five volts pea k to
p ea k minimum) t h e function of the Ζ AXIS I NPUT circu it
T EST S ET- UP C HA RT
F ig . 2-5 shows the front, si de, and rear panels of the 453Α. Th is chart can be re p ro d uced an d used as α test-setu p record for sp ecial measurements, a pp lications or p roced ures, or it may be u sed as α training ai d for familiarization with th is instrument. G ENER A L O PERATI N G I NF ORM ATIO N Sim p lifie d O p erating Instructions General. The following information is p rovi d e d to ai d in quickly obtaining th e correct setting for the 453Α to pre sent α d isplay . The operator shoul d b e familiar with the com p lete function an d operation of the instrument as d escribed in this section before using th is proce d u re .
N ormal Sweep Display (Y -Τ Disp lay) 1 . Set th e INT EN SITY control fu lly co untercloc kwise . 2 . Set the Input Co u p ling switch to AC, VA R VO LTS/ DI V control to calibrated, and vertical M OD E switch to CH 1 (use A LT or CHOP for dual-trace disp lay) . 3. Set the Α S WEEP MOD E, Α S L OPE, Α CO UPLI N G, and Α SO UR C E switches to their up positio n s. 4 . Set the Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch to 1 ms/DIV, Α V A R ΤΙΜΕ /DI V control to cali brated , an d H O R IZ DISPL AY switch to Α. 5. Set the POWER switc h to ON . Allow several minutes warm u p . 6. Connect the sign al to the CH 1 O R Χ connector. 2- 1 1
Operating Instructions-453 Α/ R453A 453Α
T E ST SET-UP C HART Β
DELAY TIME MULTIPLIER 1-10
LEVEL
TRIGGERING
Ι οΕισ,ΥΕ D SWEEP) COUPLING SOURCE
SLOPE +
'_~
Ι AC
η
/Ο
ιΝΤ
CΗ 1
ΕΜ TRIG
LF REJ
LINE
INPUT
ΗΕ REJ Εν Ο TRIG Ρ
Ε %Τ XT Η 10
OC Α AND Β ΤΙΜΕ /DIV
υ rv εη8ι ρ U OR CAL
AND DELAY
θ SWEEP MODE ROGISERABLE STARTS AFTER DΕΙΑ-4:~ AF R οΕΙΑν TIME ΤΕTIME
TIME
10 20/
20
50Ι
Ι
S .2 \
Ι
HOR12 DISPLAY Α ΙΝΤΕΝ DURING G Θ Γ 13 οευΥεο ( 5ωεΕR Α , ,
,~
50
\
5
~~
(
/2
4 DIV
AC
SERIAL
CH STEP
GND
DC
NORM ΙΝΤ TRIG
1
(((Πlll=ό`Ε
_ CH 1 .- GN 2
Urvcαι 5 Βω βΎ RΕου CED
10 ALT CHOP
AC
ADD
GND CH
DC
Γ
2 STEP ALT Ν
TEKTRONIX . ΙΝ C
on
Α
SWEEP AUTOM ODE
Π
Θ ENDS Α ~~~ FULL
TRIG NORM TRIG SINGLE SWEEP
Θ RE
Α TRIGGERING
.4L EVEL Β LEVEL /
Ο
SLOPE \
+
+
COUPLING
SOURCE
AC
ΙΝΤ
REJ
LINE
CH 1 ΕΜ TRIG INPUT
ET
Ο
L
ΒΕΑνΕ R ΤυΝ. OREGON, υ τΑ
Α.
Β . Side
Ο ED 5 ΙΤΙΟΝ
INVERT PULL REDUCED
F ro n t p a n el
pa nel
?
0 j
F ig . 2-5.
2- 1 2
ΟΝ
Ο Ο ΟΜ υτε® α r ρισD DURING AND SOURCE
POSITION
UNCAL
P OWER
Ι 70 1 S
C . R ear panel
O perating Instructions-453A/ R 453A 7 . A dvance t h e I N T EN SITY control until α d is p lay is visi b le (if d is p lay is not visible wit h th e I N T EN SITY control at mi d range, press th e BEAM F I N D ER switc h and ad j ust t h e V O L TS/DI V switc h until th e d isp lay is redu ced in size vertically ; t h en center t h e com p ressed d isp lay with th e vertical an d h orizontal POSITIO N controls ; release th e BEAMS F I N D ER) . Set th e F OC U S control for α well- d efined d isp lay . 8 . Set t h e VO L TS/DI V switc h an d vertical POSITIO N control for α dis p lay w h ic h remains with in t h e graticule area vertically .
5 . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Β (D EL AY E D SWEEP) . Delaye d swee p rate is sh own b y t h e d ot on t h e D EL AY E D S WEEP ( Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V ) k no b . 6 . F or α d elayed sweep d is p lay with less j itter, set th e Β WEEP M OD E switc h to T R IGG ER A BLE A F T ER DEL AY TIME, all Β Triggering switc h es up, an d ad ju st t h e Β LEVEL control for α sta b le d is p lay .
M ixe d
Sweep Display (Y-Τ Dis p lay)
1 . F ollow ste p s 1 - 10 for 9 . Set t h e Α LEVEL control for α sta b le d isp lay . 10 . Set th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h and h orizontal POSITION control for α d is p lay w h ic h remains with in t h e gratic u le area h orizontally .
M agnifie d Sweep
Dis p lay (Y-Τ Dis p lay)
1 . F ollow steps 1 - 10 for N ormal Swee p Disp lay . 2 . A dj ust th e h orizontal P OSITIO N control to move th e area to be magnified with in t h e center d ivision of th e C R T . If necessary, c h ange th e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch setting so th e com p lete area to b e magnifie d is with in t h e center division . 3 . Set t h e M AG switc h to Χ 10 and a dj ust t h e h orizontal control for precise p ositioning of th e magnified display .
F I NE
Delaye d Sweep Dis p lay (Y -Τ Display) 1 . F ollow ste p s 1 - 10 for N ormal Swee p Dis p lay . 2 . Set t h e Β S WEEP M OD E switc h to Β STA R TS A F T ER D EL AY TIME, H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β , an d th e Α S WEEP LEN GT H control to
N ormal
Sweep Dis p lay .
2 . Set th e Β SWEEP M OD E switc h to Β STA R TS A F T ER D ELAY TIME, H O R IZ DIS PLAY switc h to M IX E D, an d Α S WEEP LEN GT H to FULL . 3 . Pull o u t th e D EL AY E D S WEEP ( Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V ) switc h an d turn cloc k wise to obtain th e amount of magnification d esired . 4 . A dj ust t h e DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial to vary t h e amount of d elay time b efore th e start of t h e magnifie d p ortion of th e d isp lay . 5 . F or mixed sweep d isp lay with less j itter, set th e Β SWEEP M OD E switc h to T R IGG ER A BLE A F T ER D ELAY TIME, all Β Triggering switc h es up, and adj ust t h e Β LEVEL control for α stable d isp lay .
Χ - Υ Dis p lay 1 . Set t h e I N T EN SITY control fully co u ntercloc k wise . 2 . Set b oth In p ut Cou p ling switc h es to AC and V A R VO L TS/DI V controls to cali b rated .
3 . Set t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h to C H 1 O R Χ -Y, H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Χ -Y, Β SO UR C E switc h to ΙΝΤ , th e Vertical M OD E switc h to C H 2, and th e Β CO UPL I N G h to DC . Center t h e h orizontal P OSITIO N control . switc 3 . Pull out t h e D EL AY E D S WEEP ( Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V ) switc h
FULL .
an d turn cloc kwise so t h e intensifie d zone on t h e d is p lay is th e d esired lengt h (inte n sified zone will be d is p layed in d elayed form) . If an intensifie d zone is not visible, c h ange th e I N T EN SITY control setting .
4 . Set th e P O WER switc h to ON . Allow several minutes warmu p .
4 . Adj ust th e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER dial to p osition t h e intensifie d zone to th e p ortion of th e d isp lay to b e d elayed .
5 . Connect th e Χ ( h orizontal) signal to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector an d th e Υ (vertical) signal to t h e C H 2 O R Υ connector .
2- 1 3
Operating Instructions-453Α /R453A 6 . A d vance the INTENSITY control until α d isp lay is visible (if no d is p lay is visible, p ress the BEAM F INDER switch an d ad just the CH 1 and C H 2 V OLTS/DIV switches until the d is p lay is re d uced in size b oth vertically an d h orizontally ; then center the com p resse d d isp lay with t he CH 1 and C H 2 P OSITION controls ; release the BEAM F INDER) . Set the F OCUS control for α well- d efined d isp lay .
2 . Set the TI ΜΕ /DIV switch to .2 ms . 3 . With t he F OCUS control an d ASTIG adjustment set to midrange, a d just the INTENSITY control so the rising p ortion of the d isp lay can be seen .
4 . Set the ASTIG a d justment so the h orizontal and verti7 . cal Set the CH 1 an d CH 2 V OLTS/DIV switches an d p ortions of the d is p lay are equally focuse d , but not POSITION controls for α d is p lay which remains within the necessarily well focuse d . graticule area (leave the h orizontal POSITION control set to midrange) . CH 1 controls affect h orizontal deflection 5 . Set the F OCUS control so the vertical p ortion of the an d C H 2 controls affect vertical d eflection . trace is as thin as possible . Intensity Control
6 . Repeat ste p s 4 an d 5 for b est overall focus . M ake final The setting of the INTENSITY control may affect the check at normal intensity . correct focus of the d isp lay . Slight re-adjustment of the F OCUS control may be necessary when the intensity level is changed . To p rotect the CRT p hosphor, d o not turn the Graticule I NTENSITY control h igher than necessary to p rovi d e α The graticule of the 453 Α is internally marked on the satisfactory disp lay . The light filters red uce the observed face p late of the CRT to p rovid e accurate, no-parallax light out p ut from the CRT . When u sing these filters, avoid measurements . The graticule is marked with eight vertical advancing the INTENSITY control to α setting that may and 10 h orizontal d ivisions . E ach d ivision is 0 .8 centimeter b urn the p hos p hor . When the h ighest intensity d isp lay is square . In addition, each major d ivision is d ivi d ed into five d esired , remove the filters an d use only the clear face p late minor d ivisions at the center vertical an d h orizontal lines. pprotector . Ap parent trace intensity can also b e im p roved in The vertical gain an d h orizontal timing are calibrate d to the s uch cases by red ucing the ambient light or u sing α viewing graticule so accurate measurements can be ma d e from the h ood . Also, be careful that the INTENSITY control is not lines can b e varied C w itT TRmi . The ϊΙΙυ Ε L Lοη of the set too h igh when changing the ΤΙΜΕ /DIV switch from α L E Ι UM control .. with SCA fast to α slow swee p rate, or when changing to the external h orizontal mo d e of o p eration . Astigmatism A djustment If α well- d efine d d isp lay cannot be obtained with the F OCUS control, a d just the ASTIG adjustment (si d e p anel) as follows .
NO ΤΕ To check for proper setting of the ASTIG adjustment, slowly turn the FOCUS control through the optimum setting. If the ASTIG adjustment is correctly set, the vertical and horizontal portions of the display will come into sharpest focus at the same position of the FOCUS control . This setting of the ASTIG adjustment should be correct for any display. However, it may be necessary to reset the FOCUS control slightly when the INTENSITY control is changed. 1 . Connect α 1 V Calibrator signal to either channel and set the V OLTS/DIV switch of that channel to p resent α two- d ivision d isp lay . Set the M ODE switch to d is p lay the channel selecte d . 2- 1 4
F ig . 2-6 shows the graticule of the 453Α an d d efines the various measurement lines . The terminology d efined here
First division vertical line
Center vertical line
N inth division vertical line
Center horizontal line
Fig . 2-6 . Definition of measurement lines on 453A graticule .
ι I
ι
ι ι ι ι
ι
O p erating Instructions-453Α/ R 453A will b e used in all discussions involving gratic u le measurements .
filter or clear face p late p rotector . It can be ordered b y Te k tronix P art No . 378-0573-00 .
Trace Align ment A dj ustment
Α filter or t h e facep late p rotector s h o u l d be use d at all times to p rotect th e C R T face p late from scratc h es . T h e face p late p rotector and t h e tinted filter mount in th e same h ol d er . To remove t h e lig h t filter or face p late p rotector from th e h ol d er, p ress it out to th e rear . T h ey can be rep lace d by sna pp ing t h em bac k into t h e h ol d er .
If α free-running trace is not p arallel to th e h orizontal graticule lines, set th e T R AC E R OTATIO N ad j ustment as follows . Position t h e trace to th e center h orizontal line . A dj ust t h e T R AC E R OTATIO N adj ustment (side p anel) so t h e trace is p arallel wit h th e h orizontal graticule lines .
L ig h t F ilter T h e tinte d filter p rovi d e d wit h t h e 453 Α minimizes lig h t reflections from th e face of t h e C R T to im p rove contrast w h en viewing t h e d is p lay un d er h igh ambient lig h t conditions . Α clear p lastic facep late p rotector is also p rovi d e d wit h th is instrument for use w h en neit h er t h e mesh nor th e tinted filter is u sed . T h e clea r face p late p rotector p rovi d es t h e best d isp lay for waveform ph otogra ph s . It is also p refera b le for viewing h ig h writing rate d is p lays . To remove t h e filter from th e C R T, p ress d own at t h e b ottom of th e frame an d pull th e to p of t h e filter away from t h e C R T face p late (see F ig . 2-7) . An o p tional mes h filter is available for use wit h th e 453 Α (stan d ard wit h M OD 163D) . T h is filter p rovi d es s h ielding against rad iated EMI (electro-magnetic interference) from th e face of t h e C R T . It also serves as α lig h t filter to ma k e th e trace more visi b le u n d er h ig h ambient lig h t con d itions . T h e mes h filter fits in p lace of t h e tinte d
ι ι ι
T h e BEAM F I N D ER p rovi d es α means of locating α display w h ic h over-scans t h e viewing area eith er vertically or h orizontally . Wh en t h e BEAM F I N D ER switc h is p ressed , t h e d is p lay is com p resse d with in t h e graticule area . To locate an d re- p osition an over-scanned d is p lay, use t h e following p roced ure : 1 . P ress t h e BEAM F I N D ER switc h . 2 . Wh ile t h e BEAM F I N D ER switc h is h el d d e p resse d , increase t h e vertical an d h orizontal d eflection factors until th e vertical d eflection is reduced to a b out two d ivisions and th e h orizontal d eflection is re du ce d to a bout four divisions (t h e h orizontal d eflection need s to be re d uced only w h en in th e Χ - Υ mod e of o p eration) . 3 . A dj ust t h e vertical and h orizontal P OSITIO N controls to center th e disp lay about th e vertical an d h orizontal center lines . 4 . Release th e BEAM F I N D ER switc h ; th e d is p lay s h oul d remain with in th e viewing area .
Vertical
C h annel Selection
E ith er of th e in p ut c h annels can be use d for single-trace d isp lays . Apply t h e signal to th e desired in p ut connector and set t h e M OD E switc h to disp lay t h e c h annel u sed . However, since C H 1 triggering is p rovi d ed only in C h annel 1 and t h e invert featu re only in C h annel 2, t h e correct ch annel must b e selected to ta k e a d vantage of th ese features . F or dual-trace d is p lays, connect th e signals to b oth in pu t connectors an d set t h e MODE switch to one of t h e d ualtrace p ositions .
ι
ι ι
Vertical
F ig . 2-7 . Removing t h e filter or faceplate protector .
ι
Beam F in d er
Gain A dj ustment
To ch eck t h e gain of eith er ch annel, set th e V O L TS/D I V switc h to 20 m V . Set t h e CA L I BR ATO R switc h to .1 V an d connect th e 1 kH z CA L connector to th e in pu t of th e c h annel use d . T h e vertical d eflection s h o u l d be exactly five d ivisio n s . If not, a dj ust t h e front- p anel GAI N ad ju stment for exactly five d ivisions of d eflection . 2- 1 5
Op erating Instructions-453Α/R 453A NOTE if the gain of the two channels must be closely match ed (such as for ADD mode operation), th e adjustment procedure given in th e Calibration section sh ould be used.
The best measurement accuracy when using probes is provided if the GAI N a dj ustment is ma de with the p robes installed (set the CA L I BR ATO R switch to 1 V) . Th is compensates for any inaccu racies of the pro bes . Also, to p rovi de the most accurate measurements, cali brate the vertical gain of the 453Α at th e temperature at whic h the measurement is to be made.
ad apters an d t he bayonet-ground ti p provi de the b est frequency response . R emem ber that α ground stra p only α few inch es in length can p roduce several p ercent of ringing when operating at the h igher frequ ency limit of this system . See yo u r Te ktronix, Inc. catalog for characteristics and com patibility of p robes for use with t his system . In h ig h -fre q uency app lications requiring maximum overall bandwi dth, use coaxial cables terminated at both en ds in their characteristic im pedance . See the d iscussion on coaxial cables in th is section for more information .
H igh-level, low-frequency signals can be connected d irectly to the 453Α i nput connectors with s h ort unshielded leads. Th is cou pling method works best for signals b elow about one kilohertz an d deflectio n factors above one Ste p Attenuator B alance vvolt/division . Wh en this method is u se d, establis h α To chec k the step attenuator balance of either channel, common ground between the 453Α an d the equi pment set t h e In put Coupli ng switch to G N D an d set the Α un der test . Attempt to p osition the leads away from any SWEEP MOD E switch to AUTO T R IG to p rovi d e α freesource of interference to avoid errors in the d is p lay . If running trace . Ch ange the V O LTS/DIV switch from 20 m V interference is excessive with uns hielded leads, use α coaxial to 5 mV . If t h e trace moves vertically, adjust th e frontcable or α p ro be. panel ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ BA L ad ju stment as follows ( αΙΙοω at least 10 minutes warmup before performing th is a d ju stment) . L oa ding E ffect of the 453Α 1 . W ith the Input Cou pling switch set to GND an d the VO LTS/DI V switch set to 20 mV, move the trace to the center h orizontal line of the graticule with t he vertical POSITIO N control .
As nearly as p ossible, simu late actual op erating cond itions in th e equi pment under test . Otherwise, th e equ i p-
ment under test may not produce α normal signal . The p robes mentioned previously offer the least circuit load ing. See the probe instruction man ual for load ing characteristics of in dividual probes .
2. Set the V O L TS/DI V switch to 5 m V an d ad just th e ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ B AL ad justment to return th e trace to the center h orizontal line .
Wh en the signal is coup led d irectly to the in put of the 453Α , the in put im pedance is about one mego hm p arallele d by abou t 20 p icofarads. Wh en th e signal is cou pled to the in put th roug h α coaxial cable, the effective in put ca paci tance d epen ds upon the ty pe an d length of cable u sed . See 3. Rec hec k step attenu ator b alance an d re peat adju stthe following d iscussion for information on obtaining maximent u ntil no trace shift occurs as t h e V O LTS/DI V switch mum frequ ency response with coaxial cables . is changed from 20 mV to 5 mV. Signal Connections
Coaxial Cable Considerations
In general, probes offer the most convenient means of Th e signal cables used to connect the signal to the 453Α connecti ng α signal to the in put of the 453Α . Te ktronix input connectors h ave α large effect on the accuracy of α displayed hig h-fre qu ency waveform . To maintain the hig h10Χ p ro bes are also shielded to p revent picku p of electrostatic interference freq . Α 10 Χ attenuator p ro be offers α h ig h uency characteristics of the app lied signal, h igh-quality in put im pedance and allows the circ uit under test to perlow-loss coaxial cable sh ould be used. The ca ble sh ould b e form very close to normal operating cond itions . H owever, α terminated at t he 453 Α in put connector in its c h aracteristic 10Χ probe also attenuates th e in put signal 10 times. Te kim ped ance . If it is necessary to use cables with differing tronix F ield E ffect Transistor pro be systems are available characteristic im p edances, u se su itable im pedance-match ing whic h of fer the same h ig h-inpu t im pedance as the 10Χ d evices to p rovide the correct transition, with minimu m p robes. H owever, they are p articularly u seful since they loss, from one im pedance to th e other . provi de wi de- band operation while p resenting low attenuation an d low in put ca pacitance . To obtain maximum b an dwi d th when using p robes, observe the grounding consid erT h e ch aracteristic im pedance, velocity of p ropagation, ations given in the p ro be man u al . T he p ro be-to-connector and n ature of signal losses in α coaxial ca ble are d etermined 2- 1 6
'
,
'
O perating Instructions-453 Α/ R453A
by the ph ysical an d electrical characteristics of the ca b le . L osses caused b y energy d issi pation in the d ielectric are
nector is internally disconnected, bu t not groun d ed, an d the in pu t circuit is hel d at grou nd potential .
Groun d Consi d erations
The G N D position can also be u se d to pre-c h arge th e cou p ling ca p acitor to the average voltage level of the sig nal a pp lie d to th e in p ut connector. This allows measurement of only the AC com p onent of signals h aving both AC an d DC com p onents. The pre-c hargi ng networ k incorporate d in this unit allows the in put-cou p ling ca p acitor to charge to the DC so urce voltage level when the I n p ut Cou p ling switch is set to G N D . The proce d ure for using this feature is as follows :
pro p ortional to th e signal freq uency . Therefore, m uch of the h ig h-fre q uency information in α fast-rise pu lse can b e lost in only α few feet of intercon necting cable if it is not the correct ty p e. To be su re of the h igh -fre q uency res p onse of th e system when using ca bles longer th an about five feet, observe the transient res p onse of the 453Α an d t he interconnecting cable with α fast-rise pu lse generator (generator risetime less than 0.5 nanosecon d s) .
R eliable signal measureme nts cannot be mad e unless both th e oscillosco pe an d th e unit un d er test are connected together by α common reference (groun d ) lea d in a dd ition to th e signal lead or p robe . Although th e three-wire AC power cord p rovi d es α common connection when used with eq ui p ment with similar power cord s, th e groun d loop p rod uced may ma ke accurate measurements im p ossi ble . The groun d stra ps su pp lied with th e probes p rovi d e an a d eq uate grou nd . The sh ield of α coaxial ca ble provi d es α common groun d wh en connecte d between two coaxial connectors (or with suitable a d a p ters to p rovi d e α common ground ) . Wh en using unsh iel d e d signal leads, α common ground lea d s houl d be connecte d from the 453Α ch assis to the chassis of the equipment un d er test .
In p ut Cou p ling Th e C h annel 1 and 2 In p ut Cou p ling switches allow α ch oice of in p ut co u p ling meth ods. The ty p e of d isp lay d esired an d th e a pp lied signal will d etermine th e cou p ling to use. Th e DC Co u pli ng p osition can be u sed for most a pp lications. This p ositio n allows meas urement of th e DC comp onent of α signal . It must also b e used to d is p lay signals below abou t 16 hertz as they will be attenuate d in the AC position .
1 . B efore connecting the signal containing α DC com p onent to the 453Α in put connector, set the I n put Co u p ling switch to GN D . Then connect the signal to the input connector .
2. Wait about one secon d for the co u p ling ca p acitor to charge . 3. Set the In put Co up ling switch to AC . The trace (display) sh oul d remain on the screen so the AC com p onent of the signal can be measu red in the normal manner . Deflection
F actor
Th e amount of vertical d eflection p rod uced by α signal is d etermine d by the signal am p litude, the attenuation factor of th e p robe (if use d ), the setting of the V O LTS/DIV switch, and the setting of the V AR VO LTS/DI V control . The cali brate d d eflection factors ind icate d by the V O LTS/ DI V switches apply only when th e V A R control is set to the cali brated p osition (fully counterclockwise) .
The V A R VO LTS/DIV control p rovides variable (uncalibrated) vertical d eflection between the calibrated settings of the V O LTS/DIV switch . The V AR control extends the maximum vertical d eflection factor of the 453Α to at least 25 volts/d ivision (10 volts p osition) .
In t he AC Cou p ling p osition, th e DC com ponent of th e signal is bloc k e d by α cap acitor in th e in p ut circ uit . Th e low-freq uency response in the AC p osition is about 1 .6 h ertz (-3 dB point) . Therefore, some low-frequency attenuation can b e ex p ected near th is freq uency limit. Attenuation in th e form of waveform tilt will also a ppear in square waves wh ich h ave low-frequency com p onents . The AC coupling position p rovi d es the best d is p lay of signals with α DC com p onent wh ich is much larger than the AC com p onent,
Alternate M o d e. The AL T p osition of the vertical M OD E switch p rod uces α d isplay wh ic h alternates between Channel 1 an d 2 with each swee p of the C RT . Although th e ALT mod e can be used at all swee p rates, the CH O P mode p rovi d es α more satisfactory dis p lay at swee p rates below about 50 microsecon ds/d ivisio n. At these slower swee p rates, alternate mode switc h ing becomes visually p erce p ti ble .
The GN D position provid es α grou n d reference at the in p ut of th e 453Α wit h out t h e nee d to externally groun d t he in put connectors. The signal a pp lied to the in p ut con-
P roper internal triggering in the A LT mod e can be ob tained in either the N O RM or CH 1 O R Χ-Υ p ositions of the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch . Wh en in the N O RM p osition, th e
Dual-Trace Operation
2- 1 7
Op erating Instructions-453Α/R453A sweep is triggere d from the signal on each ch annel . Th is p rovi d es α stab le d isp lay of two u nrelated signals, but does not in d icate th e time relationsh ip between the signals. In the CH 1 O R Χ-Υ position, the two signals are d is played showing true time relationsh ip . If the signals are not time related, th e Channel 2 waveform will be u nstable in the CH 1 O R Χ-Υ p osition . Cho p ped Mode. The CHOP position of the M OD E switch p roduces α d isp lay whic h is electronically switched betwee n c han nels. In general, the CHO P mod e provi d es the best d isplay at swee p rates lower th an about 50 microsecon d s/ d ivision, or whenever d ual-trace, single-s hot phenomena are to b e d is p layed . At faster sweep rates the chopped switching becomes app arent and may interfere with t he d is p lay .
P roper internal triggering for the CH OP mode is provided with the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch set to CH 1 O R Χ-Y . If the N ORM p osition is u se d, the swee p circu its are triggered from th e b etween-c hannel switch ing signal an d b ot h waveforms will be un stable . E xternal triggering provid es the same result as CH 1 OR Χ-Υ triggering . Two signals wh ich are time-relate d can b e d isplayed i n the chopp ed mod e showing true time relationshi p . If the
signals are not time-relate d , the Channel 2 dis p lay will a pp ear unstable . Two single-s hot, transient, or ran d om signals whic h occu r within the time interval d etermi ned by t h e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch (10 times sweep rate) can be com pare d using the CHOP mode. To correctly trigger th e swee p for maximum resolution, the Ch annel 1 signal must p rece d e the Channel 2 signal . Since the sig nals show true time relationsh i p , time- d iffere nce measurements can b e ma d e.
Channel 1 Outp ut an d Casca d e d O peration If α lower deflection factor than provi ded
by the
V O LTS/DIV switches is desire d , C hannel 1 ca n be use d as α wi d e- band pream p lifier for C hannel 2 . Apply t he input
signal to th e C H 1 OR Χ connector. Connect α 50-o hm BN C cable (18-inc h cable for maximum cascaded freq uency response) b etween t he C H 1 O UT (si d e panel) an d t he CH 2 OR Υ connectors . Set t he M OD E switch to CH 2 and the ΙΝΤ T RIG switc h to N O RM . W it h both V OLTS/DIV switch es set to 5 mV , the d eflection factor will b e less th an one millivolt/d ivision . To p rovi d e calibrated one millivolt/ d ivision deflection factor, connect the .1-volt Cali brator signal to the CH 1 O R Χ connector . Set th e CH 1 V O LTS/DIV switch to .1 and the CH 2 VO LTS/DIV switch to 5 mV . Adju st th e Channel 2 V AR V OLTS/DIV control to p roduce α d isp lay exactly five d ivisions in amplitu d e. The cascaded d eflection factor is d etermine d by d ivid ing the CH 1 V O LTS/DI V switch 2- 1 8
setting by 5 (C H 2 V O LTS/DIV switch and V A R control remain as set above) . F or example, with t he CH 1 V OLTS/ DI V switch set to 5 mV, the calibrated deflection factor will be 1 mill ivolt/d ivision; CH 1 V O LTS/DI V switch set to 10 mV, 2 millivolts/ d ivision, etc. The following o p erating consi d erations an d basic applications may suggest other u ses for th is feature. 1 . If AC cou p li ng is d esired , set the Channel 1 In p ut Cou p ling switch to AC an d leave the Ch annel 2 In p ut Co upling switch set to DC . Wh en bot h In p ut Cou p ling switches are set to DC, DC signal cou p ling is provi d ed . 2. K ee p both vertical P OSITIO N controls set near mi drange. If th e inpu t signal h as α DC level whic h necessitates one of the P OSITIO N co n trols b eing turned away from mi d range, correct operation can b e obtaine d b y keeping the Channel 1 POSITIO N control near mi d range and using the Chan nel 2 P OSITIO N control to position the trace near the d esired location . Then, use the Channel 1 POSITIO N control for exact p ositio ning. This metho d will keep both Inp ut P ream ps o p erating in their linear range.
ι
3 . Th e ou tp ut voltage at the CH 1 OUT connector is at least 25 millivolts/d ivision of CRT d isplay in all CH 1 V OLTS/DI V switch p ositions . 4. The M OD E switch an d C hannel 1 V A R VO LTS/DI V control h ave no effect on the signal availa ble at the CH 1 OUT connector.
5. The Ch annel 1 In put Pream p can be used as an im p e d ance matc h ing stage with or without voltage gain . The in pu t resistance is one mego hm and the outpu t resistance is about 50 ohms .
6. The dynamic range of the Channel 1 In p ut Pream p is e q ual to about 20 times the CH 1 V O LTS/DI V setting . T he CH 1 O UT signal is nominally at 0 volt DC for α 0 volt DC in put level (C hannel 1 POSITIO N con trol centered) . The Channel 1 POSITIO N control can be used to center the outp ut signal with in the d ynamic range of the am plifier . 7 . If d ual-trace o p eration is used , the signal a p plied to the Channel 1 in p ut connector is d is played wh en Chan nel 1 is tu rned on . Wh en Ch annel 2 is turned on, the am p lified signal is d isp laye d . Thus, Channel 1 trace can b e u sed to monitor the in p ut signal wh ile the am p lified signal is d isp layed by Channel 2.
ι ι
ι
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι I
Op erating Instructions-453Α/R453A 8. In special a pp lications wh ere the flat frequ ency response of the 453Α is not d esire d , α filter inserted between the CH 1 OUT and CH 2 OR Υ connector allows the oscillosco p e to essentially ta ke on the frequ ency res p onse of the filter . Com b ine d with metho d 7, th e in put can be mon itored by Ch annel 1 and th e filtered signal d isp layed by Channel 2. 9. By using Channel 1 as α 5Χ low-level voltage p ream p lifier (5 mV position), the Channel 1 signal availa ble at the C H 1 OUT connector can be use d for any a pp lication where α low-impedance p ream p lified signal is need ed . R emember th at if α 50-o hm load im pe d ance is use d , the signal am p litude will be about one- half. Algebraic Add i tion General. The ADD p osition of the M OD E switch can be use d to d is p lay th e sum or difference of two signals, for common-mo d e rejection to remove an un d esired signal, or for DC offset (app lying α DC voltage to one channel to offset the DC component of α signal on the oth er channel) .
3. U se vertical POSITIO N control settings wh ic h most n early p osition the signal of each c hannel to mid-screen when viewed in either the C H 1 or CH 2 p ositions of the M OD E switch. Th is insures th e greatest d ynamic range for
ADD mode o peration .
I
4 . F or similar resp onse from each chann el, set b oth n p ut Coupli ng switch es to th e same position.
Trigger Source INT . F or most app lications, the sweep can b e triggered internally . In the ΙΝΤ p osition of the Triggeri ng SO UR C E switch , the trigger signal is obtained from the V ertical Deflection System . The ΙΝΤ T R IG switch p rovi d es furth er selection of th e internal trigger signal ; obtained from the Chan nel 1 signal in the CH 1 O R Χ-Υ position, or from the d isp layed signal when in the N ORM positio n. F or si ngletrace d is plays of either channel, the N ORM p osition provi d es the most convenient operation. H owever, for d ualtrace d isplays sp ecial co nsi d erations must b e ma de to p rovid e the correct disp lay . See Dual-Trace Operation in th is sectio n for d ual-trace triggering information .
Th e common-mode re jection ratio of the 453Α is greater than 20 :1 at one kilohertz (at all d eflection factors) for sigL INE . T he L I NE p osition of th e SO UR CE switch εοηηαΙ am plitu d es up to eight times the VO LTS/DI V switch nects α sam p le of the p ower-line frequency to the Trigger setting . H ig her re jection ratios can ty p ically be ac h ieved by Generator circ u it . L ine triggering is useful when the in p ut careful adjustment of th e gain of eith er channel wh ile signal is time-relate d to the line frequ ency . It is also useful observing the d isp laye d common-mo d e signal . for p rovi d ing α stable d is p lay of α li ne-freq uency com ponent in α com p lex waveform . Deflection F actor. T h e overall d eflection factor in the ADD p osition of the M ODE switch when both VO L TS/DIV switches are set to the same p osition is the same as the d eflection factor ind icated by either V OLTS/DI V switch . Th e am p litu d e of an a dd e d mode d isp lay can b e d etermined d irectly from the res ultant CR T d eflection multi p lie d by t he d eflection factor in d icated by either V O LTS/DI V switch. H owever, if the CH 1 and C H 2 V OL TS/DI V switches are set to different d eflection factors, resu ltant voltage is d ifficu lt to d etermine from the CRT d isp lay. In this case, th e voltage am p litu d e of th e resultant d isp lay can be d etermine d accurately only if the amplitu d e of the signal app lied to eith er channel is kn own.
Precautions . T h e following general preca utions shou ld be observe d when using the ADD mod e. 1 . Do not exceed the input voltage rati ng of the 453Α . 2. Do not apply signals that exceed an eq uivalent of about 20 times the V O LTS/DIV setting switc h . F or exam p le, with α V OLTS/DI V switch setting of .5, the voltage app lie d to that channel should not exceed about 10 volts. L arger voltages may distort the d isp lay.
EXT. An external signal connected to the ΕΧΤ TR IG I NPUT connector can be used to trigger the swee p in the ΕΧΤ position of th e Triggering SO UR CE switch . The external signal must be time-relate d to the d isplayed signal for α stable d is p lay. An external trigger signal can be used to p rovide α triggere d d isp lay when the internal signal is too low in am p litu d e for correct triggeri ng, or contains signal com p onents on wh ic h it is not d esired to trigger. It is also u seful when signal tracing in am p lifiers, p hase-sh ift n etwork s, wavesha p ing circuits, etc. The signal from α single point in the circuit un d er test can be connected to th e ΕΧΤ T RIG I NPU T co nnector thro ugh α signal p ro be or cable. Th e'swee p is th en triggere d b y the same signal at all times an d allows amplitu d e, time -relatio nship or waves ha pe changes of signals at vario us points in the circuit to be examined without resetting th e trigger controls . ΕΧΤ - 10 . Operation in t he ΕΧΤ - 10 positio n is the same as d escribed for ΕΧΤ except th at the external triggering signal is atte nu ated 10 times. Atte nuation of h ig ham p litude external triggeri ng signals is desirable to broa d en the range of the Triggering LEVEL control . When the CO UPL I N G switch is set to LF REJ, attenuation is abou t 20 :1 . 2- 1 9
ι
Op erating Instructions-453Α/R453A LF REJ. In the LF REJ position, DC is re jecte d an d signals below about 30 kilohertz are attenuated . Therefore, the swee p will be triggere d only by the higher-fre quency components of th e signal . T h is position is p articularly useful for provid ing stab le triggering if the trigger signal contains line-freq uency components. Also, in the A LT position of the M OD E switch , the LF REJ p osition provi des the best display at high swee p rates when com paring two unrelated signals (I NT T R IG switch set to N ORM) .
Trigger Coupling General. F our methods of coupling the trigger signal to the trigger circuits can b e selected with t he Triggering CO UPLING switches . E ac h p osition p ermits selection or rejection of the frequency com ponents of the trigger signal whic h can trigger the swee p. F ig . 2-8 graphically illustrates the band of frequ itch encies covered by each position of the CO UPL I NG sw . AC . The AC position bloc k s the DC component of the trigger signal . Signals with low-frequency components below about 30 hertz are attenuate d . In general, AC coupling can be used for most app lications. H owever, if the trigger signal contains unwanted components or if the swee p is to be triggere d at α low re petition rate or α DC level, one of the remaining CO UPL I NG switch positions will p rovi de α better disp lay .
HF REJ. Th e HF REJ p osition p asses all low-frequency signals between about 30 hertz an d 50 kiloh ertz . DC is re jected an d signals outside the given range are attenuated. Wh en triggering from complex waveforms, this position is useful for provid ing stable d is play of low-frequency com ponents. DC . DC cou pling can be used to provide stable triggering with low-frequency signals whic h woul d be attenuated in the AC p osition, or with low-repetition rate signals . It can also be used to trigger the swee p when the trigger signal reac hes α DC level selected by the setting of the LEVEL control. Wh en using internal triggering, the setting of the Channel 1 an d 2 POSITIO N controls affects the DC trigger level .
The triggering point in the AC p osition de pends on th e average voltage level of the trigger signal . If the trigger signals occur in α ran d om fash ion, the average voltage level will vary, causing the triggering p oint to vary also . This sh ift of the triggering p oint may b e enough so it is im possible to maintain α sta b le d is play . In such cases, use DC cou pling .
"
θ~έ~σφ
oil
φ
~`
:θ : ;σC
50 kH z
Fig. 2-8. Frequency range of each CO UPL ING switch position . 2- 20
r 'φ ~
:σσσιισ~
~ Γ
,
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
Operating Instructions-453 Α/R453A DC trigger coupling s h ould not be used in the A LT d ualtrace mode if the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch is set to N O RM . If used, t he swee p will trigger on the DC level of one trace an d th en eith er lock out completely or free run on the ot her trace. Correct DC triggering for this mod e can be obtained with the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch set to C H 1 O R Χ-Y . Trigger Slope The triggering S LOPE switch determines wh ether the trigger circuit responds on the p ositive-going or negativegoing p ortion of the trigger signal . Wh en the S LO PE switch is in the + (positive-going) p osition, the d isp lay starts with the p ositive-going p ortion of the waveform ; in t he (negative-going) positio n, the d is play starts with the negative-going p ortion of the waveform (see F ig . 2-9) . Wh en several cycles of α signal app ear i n th e d is p lay, the setting of the S L OPE switch is often unim portant . H owever, if only α certain p ortion of α cycle is to b e d isp laye d, correct setting of the S LOPE switch is im p ortant to p rovi d e α d isp lay whic h starts on the desired slope of the in put signal . Trigger
Level
The Triggering LEVEL co ntrol determines the voltage level on the trigger signal at w hic h t h e swee p is triggered. Wh en the LEVEL control is set in the + region, the trigger circuit responds at α more positive point on the trigger signal . Wh en the LEVEL control is set in the region, th e trigger circuit responds at α more negative point on the trigger signal . F ig . 2-9 illustrates th is effect with different settings of the S LOPE switch . To set the LEVEL control, first select the Triggering
M OD E, SO UR C E, CO UPL I N G, an d SLO PE . Then set th e
LEVEL control fully countercloc kwise and rotate itcloc kwise u ntil the d is play starts at the d esired point.
triggering . It is p articularly usef u l when setting up the trigger circuits when α trigger signal is availa ble without α trace dis p layed on the C RT and it also indicates that the Α sweep remains correctly triggered when operating in the Β (D E L AY E D SWEEP) mode. Α Swee p
M ode
AUTO TR IG . The AUTO T R IG p osition of the Α SWEEP MOD E switch provid es α stable d isplay when the Α LEVEL control is correctly set (see Trigger L evel in th is section) an d α trigger signal is available . The Α S WEEP T R IG'D ligh t in d icates when the Α Swee p Generator is triggere d . Wh en the trigger repetition rate is less than a bout 20 hertz, or in the absence of an adequate trigger signal, the Α Swee p Generator free runs to produce α reference trace. Wh en an adequate trigger signal is again app lied , the freerunning condition en ds and t he Α Swee p Generator is triggere d to p ro duce α stable display (wit h correct Α LEVEL control setting) .
N ORM T R IG . Operation i n the N O RM T R IG position wh en α trigger signal is app lied is the same as in the A UTO TR IG position . H owever, when α trigger signal is not present, the Α Swee p Generator remains off and t here is no d is play . The Α SWEEP T R IG'D light in d icates when the Α swee p is triggere d . The N O RM TR IG mode can b e used to d is play signals with repetition rates below about 20 h ertz . Th is mo de p rovi des an indication of an ad equate trigger signal as well as the correctness of trigger control settings, since th ere is no disp lay without proper triggering . Also, the Α SWEEP T R IG'D light is off wh en the Α swee p is not correctly triggered.
SI NG LE SWEEP . Wh en th e signal to be displayed is not re petitive or varies in amplitude, sh ape, or time, α conventional re petitive d is play may p rodu ce an unstable p resentaThe HF STAB control (Α only) is used to p rovide α tion . To avoi d th is, use the single-swee p feat ure of the sta ble d isplay of h igh-freq uency signals. If α stable d is play 453Α. T he SI N G LE SWEEP mode can also be used to cannot be obtained using the Α LEVEL control (trigger photograph α non-repetitive signal . signal must h ave adequate am plitude), adju st the HF STA B control for minimum h orizontal j itter in the display. This control has little effect with low-frequency signals. To use th e SI N G LE SWEEP mo de, first ma k e sure t h e trigger circuit will respond to th e even t to be d is played . Set the Α SWEEP M OD E switch to AU TO T R IG or N ORM Α Swee p Triggere d L ig h t T R IG an d o btain the best possi b le d is play in the normal The Α SWEEP T R IG'D light p rovides α convenient in diman ner (for random signals, set the trigger circuit to trigger cation of the cond ition of the Α Triggering circu it . If the Α on α signal wh ic h is app roximately the same am plitude and Triggering controls are correctly adj uste d with an adequate frequ ency as th e rand om signal) . Then, set the Α S WEEP trigger signal app lied, the light is on . H owever, if t h e Α M OD E switch to SI N G LE SWEEP an d press the RE S ET b utto n. When the RE SET bu tton is pushed, the next trigger LEVEL control is misa dju sted , the Α CO UPLI N G or Α p ulse initiates the sweep and α single trace will be p resented SO UR CE switches incorrectly set, or th e trigger signal too on the screen . After th is swee p is com plete, the Α Swee p low in am p litu de, th e Α SWEEP T R IG'D light will b e off. Generator is "loc ked o u t" until reset. Th e RE SET light T his feature can b e u sed as α general in dication of correct High-Frequency Stability
2- 21
Operating Instructions-453Α/R453A
SLOPE
W aveforms o b tai n e d wit h t he Triggeri ng LEVEL
0
"
S
"
co n trol set i n th e+ regio n .
N egative
LOPE
( - 1 Slo pe
+
_ Ι
SLOPE
Positive "1 + 1 Slope
Em M isom
LEVEL
ΜΕιιιιι Waveforms obtained with the Triggering LEVEL control set in the - region. ι
F ig .
2-9 .
E ffects
of Triggeri ng
ι
N egative
SLOPE
LEVEL
co n trol a nd
S L O PE
switc h .
ι
ι ι ι
ι
ι ι
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
O p erating Instructions-453Α / R 453A locate d insi d e t h e RE S E T button is on w h en th e Α Swee p Generator circuit h as been reset an d is rea d y to p ro d uce α swee p ; it goes out after t h e swee p is com p lete . To p re p are th e circuit for anoth er single-swee p d is p lay, p ress th e RES E T button again .
H orizontal
Swee p
First-division vertical line
N i n t h -division vertical li n e
R ate
T h e Α A N D Β TIME/DIV switc h es select cali b rated swee p rates for t h e Sweep Generators . T h e Α V A R an d Β VA R IA BLE controls p rovi d e continuo u sly varia b le sweep rates between t h e settings of t h e TIME/DIV switc h es . Wh enever th e UN CA L Α O R Β lig h t is on, th e swee p rate of eit h er Α or Β Swee p Generator, or bot h , is u ncali b rated . T h e lig h t is off w h en t h e Α V A R (front p anel) an d Β TIME/ DI V V A R IA BLE (si d e p anel) controls are bot h set to t h e cali b rate d p osition .
T h e swee p rate of th e Α Swee p Generator is brac k ete d by th e two b lac k lines on t h e clear p lastic flange of t h e TIME/DIV switch (see F ig . 2-10) . T h e swee p rate of t h e Β Swee p Generator is indicate d by th e dot on t h e D EL AY E D SWEEP k nob . Wh en th e d ot on th e outer kno b is set to t h e same p osition as t h e lines on th e inner k no b , th e two knobs loc k toget h er and th e swee p rate of bot h Swee p Generators is c h anged at th e same time . H owever, w h en t h e D ELAY E D SWEEP k nob is p ulled outward , th e clear p lastic flange is disengaged an d only th e Β Sweep Generator swee p rate is c h ange d . Th is allows c h anging th e delayed swee p rate wit h out c h anging th e d elay time d etermine d by t h e Α Swee p Generator .
Ti m e measu reme n t area
Fig . 2-11 . Area of graticule use d for acc u rate time measureme n ts . Wh en ma k ing time meas u rements from th e gratic u le, th e area between th e first-d ivision and nint h -d ivision vertical lines p rovi d es th e most linear time measure m ent (see F ig . 2-11) . T h erefore, th e first an d last d ivision of t h e d isp lay sh oul d not be u se d for ma k ing accurate time meas u rements . P osition th e start of t h e timing area to th e first-division vertical line an d set th e TIME/DIV switc h so t h e e nd of t h e timing area falls between t h e first- an d nint h -d ivision vertical lines . Swee p
M agnification
T h e swee p magnifier ex p an d s th e sweep 10 times . T h e center d ivision of t h e unmagnified d isp lay is t h e p ortion visi b le on t h e screen in magnified form (see F ig . 2-12) . Eq u ivalent length of th e magnified swee p is about 100 d ivisions ; any 10-d ivision p ortion may be viewed b y a d j usting th e h orizontal P OSITIO N control to bring th e desired p ortion onto th e viewing area . T h e F I NE p osition control is p articularly usef u l w h en t h e magnifier is on, as it p rovides p ositioning in small increments for more p recise control . To use t h e magnifie d swee p , first move th e p ortion of t h e d is p lay w h ic h is to be ex p and ed to th e center of t h e graticule . T h en set t h e M AG switc h to X10 . The FINE p osition control can b e a d j usted to p osition th e magnifie d d is p lay as desire d . Th e lig h t located below th e M AG switc h is on w h enever th e magnifier is on .
Fig . 2-1 ο . Α AND Β TIME/DIV switch .
Wh en t h e M AG switc h is set to Χ 10, th e swee p rate is d etermine d by d ivid ing t h e TIME/DIV switc h setting b y 10. F or exam p le, if t h e TIME/DIV switc h is set to .5 μ s, th e magnifie d sweep rate is 0 .05 microsecon d / d ivision . T h e magnifie d sweep rate must be used for all time measure2-23
Op erating Instru ctions-453Α/R453A
SEENEEMENE MENNEENNEE
r
-
M AG switch set ι
to Χ10 ~ L
[H Magnified waveform
"Γι ~ιΕ2CRΕ7 EMMMEENNNN FENNEEMENE MENEEMMEME
F ig . 2-12 . Operatio n of sweep magnifier.
ments when th e MAG switch is set to Χ10. T he magnifie d sweep rate is calibrated when the UN CA L Α O R Β light is off.
M ixed and Delaye d Swee p
The d elayed swee p ( Β swee p) is operable in the Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I NG Β, Β (D ELAY E D SWEEP), an d MIX E D positions DI of th e HO R IZ DISPL AY switch. The Α swee p rate along with t he DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial setting determines the time th at the Β sweep is delaye d . Sweep rate of the d elayed p ortion is determined by the Β TIME/ DI V (D ELAY E D S WEEP) switch setting. In the Α ΙΝΤΕΝ DUR I NG Β position, the d is play will appear similar to Fig. 2-13 Α. T he amount of delay time between th e start of Α swee p an d the intensified portion is d etermined by the setting of the Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch an d the D ELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial . For exam ple, th e d elay in d icated by th e D EL AY-TI ME MULTI PL I ER d ial setting shown in Fig. 2-14 is 3.55; th is 2- 24
F ig . 2-13 . ( Α ) Α ΙΝΤΕΝ DUR I NG Β display (Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V, .5 ms ; Β
ΤΙΜΕ /DI V, 50 μs), ( Β) Β (D EL AY ED SWEEP) display.
corres ponds to 3 .55 CRT d ivisions of Α swee p. This reading multiplied by the setting of the Α ΤΙΜΕ /DIV switch gives the cali brate d delay time b efore the start of the Β sweep (see Β Sweep Mo de whic h follows) . The intensified portion of th e d is play is p roduced b y the Β swee p. T he length of this portion is about 10 times the setting of the Β TIME/ V switch. Wh en the HO R IZ DIS PLAY switch is set to Β (D E
LAY E D SWEEP), only the intensified portion wh ic h was
shown in the A ΙΝΤΕΝ DUR I N G B position is disp layed οη the screen at the sweep rate indicate d by the Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch (see Fig. 2-13 Β) .
T he MIX ED position of the HO R IZ DIS PL AY switch provides α C RT display containing more than one time factor on the horizontal axis . The first part of the d isp lay is at the sweep rate set b y the Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch an d for t h e time d uration d etermined b y th e setting of the DEL AYTIME MULTI PL I ER d ial.T he latter part of th e display is at
ι
O p erating Instructions-453Α / R 453A 2-16 Β ) . T h e Β Triggering controls o p erate as d escribe d in t h is section .
ι ι ι ι ι
Delayed Swee p Operation . To o b tain α d elayed swee p d is p lay, use th e following p rocedure . 1 . Obtain α stable d is p lay wit h t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h set to Α . 2 . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switch to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D URING Β. 3 . Set t h e Β SWEEP M OD E switc h to t h e desired setting . If T R IGG ER A BLE A F T ER D EL AY TIME is selected, correct Β Triggering is also necessary . 4 . Set th e d elay time wit h t h e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h an d th e DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial . Fig . 2-14 . DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER dial . Read ing s h own : 3 .55 .
th e
sweep rate set by th e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . F ig . 2-15 ill u strates α ty p ical mixed swee p d is p lay . Β Swee p M o d e . T h e Β SWEEP M OD E switc h p rovi d es two mo d es of delaye d swee p o peration . F ig . 2-16 illustrates th e difference between t h ese two mod es . In th e Β STA R TS A F T ER D EL AY TIME p osition, t h e Β swee p is presente d immediately after t h e d elay time (see F ig . 2-16A) . The B sweep is triggere d at α selecte d point on Α swee p to p rovi d e th e d elay time ( Β swee p essentially free running) . Since t h e d elay time is th e same for eac h swee p , t h e d is p lay a ppears stable . In t h e T R IGG ER A BLE AF T ER D EL AY TIME p osition, t h e Β swee p o p erates only w h en it is triggered (by Trigger Circuits) after t h e selected delay time (see F ig .
ι ι ι ι ι
ι
Α Swee p ι FE- (Delay) -1 . ι ~k--(- Β Sweep Time Time ι ι
6 . If t h e T R IGG ER A BLE A F T ER D EL AY TIME p osition is u se d , ch ec k th e d isp lay for an intensified p ortion . Absence of t h e intensifie d zone indicates th at Β swee p is not correctly triggered . 7 . Set th e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Β (D ELAY E D SWEEP) . T h e intensifie d zone s h own in t h e Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β p osition is now d isp laye d at th e swee p rate selecte d by t h e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . Several exam p les using th e d elaye d sweep feature are given un d er Basic A pp lications in th is section .
Mixed Swee p Op eration . To obtain α mixed swee p display, use th e following p roce d ure : 1 . F ollow t h e p roced ure given a b ove for Delaye d Swee p Op eration . 2 . Set th e ΗΟΒΙΖ DIS PL AY switc h to M IX E D . T h e first p art of th e d is p lay is at t h e swee p rate set by t h e Α TIME/ DI V switc h . T h e last p art is at t h e sweep rate of t h e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . T h e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial d etermines t h e p oint th at t h e swee p rate c h anges from Α to Β.
F ig. 2-15 . Α typical mixed sweep dis p lay ( Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V set to 1 ms, Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V set to .1 ms, a n d t h e DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial set to 3 .55) .
ι
ι
5 . Pull th e D EL AY E D S WEEP ( Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V ) knob out an d set to th e d esire d swee p rate .
Α Swee p Lengt h . T h e Α SWEEP LEN GT H control is most usef u l w h en use d wit h d elayed swee p . As t h e control is rotated co u ntercloc k wise from th e FULL p osition, t h e lengt h of t h e Α swee p decreases (swee p rate remains constant) until it is about four d ivisions long in t h e co u nter2- 2 5
Operating Inst ru ctions-453Α / R453A
Ι
Α swee p time
1
Ι
~~ Delay Ι ι Time ~1 Α sweep ~~starts Β sweep ( V aria ble from 1 μs j i to 50 s b y Ι - Ε}- Β sweep time ~ Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V Ι Ι and :DELAY-TIME',, I MULTI PL I ER) 1 Α trigger pulse
Ι
Α sweep time Delay __*j Α swee p Ti m e ;Ε" -- ""arms" Β swee p
( Variable Ί 1 from 1 μs 1 to 50 s by Ι IA ΤΙΜΕ/DI V Ι Ι and Ι (D ELAY-ΤΙΜΕ ' MULTI PL I ER): Α trigger pulse
ε
ι
/
\
--
Β sweep waits for n ext trigger Β trigger pulse
0
'Ε 1 I -Εε- Β sweep time ' Ί Ι 1 1 Ι
Ι 1
Ι 1
Ι 1
1
1 1
/
Ι
\
/
Α swee
d isplay
\
I n tensified portio n of waveform
p
\\ \\
Μ"""ΕΜ""Ε" Ν"""ΜΕ/""Μ W"""ΜΕ"""Ε
ΜΕΝΕΜ """" Emmon s ΜΕΝΕΜ = . (Α) Β STA R TS A F T ER D EL AY TIME
'
~Ε 1
MMMMAIEEI Ί
A sweep I- display
I nten sified portio n of waveform
"Η ""ΕΜ"ΜΕ" "ΕΝΜΕΜ"Ε" Μ"""ΜΕΜ"ΜιΕ """"ΜΜ"""" """ΕΜ"""" """"ΝI ( Β ) T R IGG ER ABLE A F T ER D EL AY TIME
F ig . 2-16 . Com p a r iso n of delayed -sweep mo des . ( Α ) Β STA R TS A F T ER D EL AY TIME, ( Β ) T R IGG ER A BLE A F T ER D ELAY TIME . In eac h d is p lay th e Β swee p is d elayed α selected amo unt of time by th e Α sweep .
cloc k wise p osition (not in Β EN DS Α detent) . T h e Β EN DS Α position p rod uces α d is p lay w h ic h en d s imme d iately following Β swee p if th e Β swee p end s b efore t h e normal end of Α swee p . T h e Α S WEEP LEN GT H control is u se d to increase th e repetition rate of d elaye d swee p d is p lays . To u se t h e Α S WEEP LEN GT H control, set th e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β an d set t h e d elay
2-26
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
time an d d elayed swee p rate in th e normal manner . Tu rn th e Α SWEEP LEN GT H control co u ntercloc kwise u ntil t h e swee p en d s immed iately following t h e intensified por tion on th e dis p lay . Now set t h e H O R IZ DISPLAY switch to Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP) . T h is meth od p rovi d es t h e maximum repetitio n rate for α give n d elayed swee p d is p lay . In th e Β EN DS Α p osition, th e maxim u m d elaye d sweep re p etition rate is maintained au tomatically .
ι
Operating Instructions-453 Α/ R 453A
NO Τε
Intensity
M o d ulation
Intensity (Z-axis) mo d u lation can be used to relate α thir d item of electrical p h enomena to th e vertical (Y-axis) and th e h orizontal (X-axis) coord inates with o u t affecting the wavesh a p e of th e d isp laye d signal . T he Z-axis mod ulating signal a pp lie d to th e C R T circuit c h anges th e intensity of th e d is p layed waveform to p rovi d e th is ty p e of display . "Gray scale" intensity mo d u lation can be o btained b y applying signals w h ic h do not com p letely b lan k th e d is p lay . L arge am p litu d e signals of th e correct p olarity will comp letely blan k t h e d is p lay ; t h e s h ar p est d is p lay is p rovi d ed by signals with α fast rise an d fall . T h e voltage am p litu d e re qu ire d for visi b le trace mod ulation d e p en d s upon th e setΧ - Υ O p eration ting of t h e INTENSITY control . At normal intensity level, α five-volt p ea k -to- p ea k signal prod uces α visible c h ange in In some app lications, it is d esirable to d is p lay one signal brigh tness . Wh en th e Ζ AXIS I NPU T is not in u se, kee p th e versus anot h er (X-Y) rat h er t h an against time (internal d stra p in p lace to p revent c h a n ges in trace intensity groun swee p ) . T h e Χ - Υ p osition of th e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h d u e to extraneous noise . p rovi d es α means for a pp lying an external signal to t h e h orizontal am p lifier for th is ty p e of d is p lay .
Jitter can be introduced into the display and incorrect displays produced through the wrong usage of the Α SWEEP LENGTH control. When using this control, first obtain the best possible display in the FULL position. Then, set the control for the desired Α sweep length. If jitter is evident in the display, readjust the Triggering controls or change the Α SWEEP LENGTH control to α position that does not cause jitter.
Two modes of external h orizontal operation are p rovi d e d . Wh en th e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h is set to C H 1 O R Χ -Y, t h e Β SO UR C E switc h to ΙΝΤ , an d t h e Β CO UPL I N G switc h to DC, th e horizontal d eflection is p rovi d e d by α signal a p plied to th e C H 1 O R Χ connector . T h e C H 1 VO LTS/DI V switc h setting in d icates t h e calibrated h orizontal d eflection factor (C h annel 1 VA R control ino perative) . Center t h e horizontal P OSITIO N control an d use t h e C h annel 1 P OSITIO N control for h orizontal p ositioning .
In t h e ΕΧΤ an d ΕΧΤ _ 10 p ositions of t h e Β SO UR C E switc h , external h orizontal d eflection is provi d e d by α signal a p plie d to th e Β ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ I NPU T connector, T h e signal cou p ling provi d e d by t h e Β CO UPL I N G switc h can be use d to select or re j ect com p onents of t h e external h orizontal signal (all components of external h orizontal signal accepte d in DC p osition) . U sing t h is mode of o p eration, t h e h orizontal deflection factor is uncalibrate d . E xternal h orizontal d eflection factor is about 270 mill ivolts/clivision in t h e ΕΧΤ position of t h e Β SO UR C E switc h an d about 2 .7 volts/division in t h e ΕΧΤ : 10 position .
F or f u rt h er information on obtaining and inter p reting lissaj ous d is p lays, refer to t h e reference boo k s liste d un d er A pp lications . Α an d Β Gate
Time mar k ers a pp lied to th e Ζ AXIS I NPU T connector p rovi d e α d irect time reference on t h e dis p lay . With u ncalibrate d h orizontal sweep or external horizontal mod e o p eration, th e time markers provide α means of rea d ing time d irectly from t h e d is p lay . However, if t h e mark ers are not time-relate d to t h e d is p layed waveform, α single-swee p display s h ou l d be used (for internal swee p only) to p rovi d e α stable d is p lay .
Calibrator General . T h e one- k ilo h ertz square-wave Calibrator of t h e 453Α p rovi d es α convenient signal source for c h ec k ing basic vertical gain and swee p timing . H owever, to p rovide maximum measurement accuracy, th e ad j ustment p roce d ure given in t h e Calibration section of th is manual s h ould be use d . T h e Calibrator output signal is also very useful for a d j usting p robe com p ensation as d escribe d in t h e p ro b e instruction manual . In ad d ition, t h e Calibrator can be use d as α convenient signal source for a pp lication to external e q uipment .
Voltage . T h e Calibrator p rovi d es accurate p ea k -to- p ea k voltages of 0 .1 an d 1 volt into α h igh im pedance load . Voltage range is selected by t h e CA L I BR ATO R switc h on t h e si d e p anel . Outp u t resistance is a b out 200 oh ms in th e 1 V p osition and about 20 oh ms in t h e 0 .1 V p osition . Th e actual voltage across an external loa d resistor can be calculate d in t h e same manner as wit h any series
s q u are-wave
resistor com b ination (necessary only if t h e loa d resistance is less th an abo u t 50 kilo h ms) .
T h e Α an d Β GAT E outp ut connectors (on si d e p anel) p rovi d e α rectangular outp ut p u lse w h ic h is coinci d ent with Current. T h e cu rrent loop, locate d on t h e si d e panel, t h e sweep time of th e res p ective swee p generator . T h is recp rovi d es α five milliam p ere pea k -to- p ea k squ are-wave curtangular pu lse is a b ou t +12 volts in am p litu d e (into h igh rent w h ic h can be u se d to c h ec k an d calibrate cu rrentim p e d ance loa d s) wit h p u lse d uration th e same as t h e measuring p robe systems . T h is c u rrent signal is obtained by resp ective swee p . cli pp ing th e probe arou n d t h e current loop . C u rrent is con2-2 7
Operating Instructions-453 Α/ R 453A stant th rough th e loop in eit h er p osition of t h e CA L IBR ATO R switch . T h e arrow a bove th e PROBE L OO P in d icates conventional c u rrent flow ; i .e ., from + to - .
Rufus Ρ . Turner, " P ractical Oscilloscop e H an d boo k ", V ol u mes 1 an d 2, J o h n F. Ri der P ublis h er Inc ., N ew Yor k ,
F req uency . Th e Cali b rator circu it u ses fre qu ency-stable com p onents to maintain acc u rate fre qu ency an d constant d u ty cycle . T h us t h e Calibrator can be use d for c h ec k ing t h e b asic swee p timing of t h e h orizontal system .
Pea k -to- P ea k
Waves h a p e . T h e s q uare-wave o u t p u t signal of th e Calibrator can b e used as α reference waves h a p e w h en c h ec k i n g or a d ju sti n g th e com p ensation of p assive, h ig h -resistance p robes . Since t h e s q uare-wave o u tput from t h e Calibrator h as α flat to p , any d istortio n in t h e d is p layed waveform is d ue to th e p ro be com pensation .
1964 .
V oltage
To ma k e α p ea k -to- p ea k voltage meas u rement, use th e following proced ure : 1 . Connect th e signal to eit h er in p ut connector . 2 . Set t h e M OD E switc h to d isp lay th e c h a n nel use d . 3 . Set th e VO LTS/DI V switc h to d is p lay abo u t five d ivisions of th e waveform . 4 . Set th e In p ut Cou p ling switc h to AC .
NOTE
APPL ICATIO N S General T h e following information d escri b es th e p roced ures and tec h ni q ues for ma k ing meas u rements wit h α 453 Α Oscillosco p e . T h ese a p p lications are not descri b e d in d etail, since eac h a p p lication m u st be a d a p ted to t h e req uirements of th e in d ivi d ual measu rement . T h is instrument can also be used for many a pp lications wh ic h are not d escri b ed in th is manual . Contact yo u r local Te k tronix F iel d Office or rep resentative for assistance in ma k ing sp ecific meas u rements wit h t h is instrument . T he following boo k s d escribe oscillosco pe meas u rement tec h ni q ues w h ic h can b e a d a p te d for use wit h th is instr u ment .
Measurements-AC
For low-frequency signals below about 16 hertz, use the DC position .
5 . Set th e Α Triggering controls to o b tain α stable display . Set th e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to α p osition t h at d is p lays several cycles of t h e waveform . 6 . Turn th e vertical P OSITIO N control so th e lower p ortion of th e waveform coincid es wit h one of th e graticule lines below th e center h orizontal line, and t h e to p of t h e waveform is on t h e viewing area . M ove th e disp lay wit h t h e h orizontal P OSITIO N control so one of t h e u pp er p ea k s lies near t h e center vertical li n e (see Fig . 2-17) .
H arley Carter, "An Introd uction to t h e Cat h o d e Ray Oscillosco p e", Ph ili p s Tec h nical L i b rary, Cleaver- Hu me Press L t d ., L on d on, 1960 .
Positio n to ce nter vertical li n e
J . Czec h , "Oscilloscope M easuring Tec h ni qu e", Ph ili p s Tec h nical L ibrary, S p ringer-V erlag, N ew Yor k , 1965 . Robert G . M i dd leton, "Sco pe Waveform Analysis", H oward W . Sams & Co . Inc ., T h e Bobbs- M errill Com pany Inc ., In d iana p olis, 1963 . Ro bert G . M i dd leton an d L. Donal d P ayne, " U sing th e Oscillosco p e in In d u strial E lectronics', H oward W .Sams& Co . Inc ., T h e Bo b bs- M errill Com p any Inc ., Indiana p olis, 1961 .
Vertical deflection
J o h n F. Rider an d Seymour D . U slan, " E ncyclo p ed ia of Cat h o d e- R ay Oscillosco p es an d T h eir U ses", J o h n F . Ri d er P ublis h er Inc ., N ew Yor k , 1959 . J o h n F. Rider, "Obtai n ing and Inter p reting Test Scop e Traces", J o h n F . Ri d er Pub lish er Inc ., N ew Yor k , 1959 . 2- 2 8
Fig . 2-17 . Meas u ri n g pea k -to-pea k voltage of α waveform .
Op erating Instructio n s-453 Α / R 453A 7 . M easure th e d ivisions of vertical deflection from p ea k to p ea k . M a k e sure t h e VA R V O L TS/DI V control is in th e cali b rated p osition . ΝΟΤΕ Th is technique may also be used to ma k e measurements between two points on th e waveform rath er than peak to pea k. 8 . Mu lti p ly th e d istance meas u re d in ste p 7 by th e VO LTS/DI V switc h setting . Also inclu d e t h e attenuatio n factor of t h e p ro b e, if any .
E xam p le . Assu me α pea k -to- p ea k vertical deflection of 4 .6 d ivisions (see F ig . 2-17) using α 10 Χ atten u ator p ro be an d α V O LTS/DI V switc h setting of .5 .
U sing
th e formula :
vertical p robe VO LTS/DI V Volts Χ attenuation deflection Χ P ea k to P ea k setting factor (divisions) S ub stituting th e given values : Volts Pea k to P ea k = 4 .6 Χ 0.5 V Χ 10
NO ΤΕ To measure α voltage level with respect to a voltage rath er th an ground, ma k e th e following ch anges in step 6. Set th e Input Coupling switc h to DC and apply th e reference voltage to th e I NPU T connector. Then position th e trace to th e reference line . 7 . Set th e In p ut Co up ling switc h to DC . T h e groun d reference line can be c h ec ke d at any time by switch ing to th e G N D p ositio n (exce p t w h en using α DC reference voltage) . 8 . Set t h e Α Triggering controls to obtai n α stable display . Set t h e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to α setting t h at d is p lays several cycles of th e signal . 9 . M eas u re th e d istance in d ivisions between t h e reference line and t h e p oint on th e waveform at w h ic h th e DC level is to be measured . F or exam p le, in F ig . 2-18 t h e measurement is mad e between t h e reference line and p oint Α. 10 . E stablis h t h e p olarity of t h e signal . If th e waveform is above t h e reference line, th e voltage is p ositive ; below t h e line, negative (w h en t h e I NVER T switc h is p u s h e d in if u sing C h annel 2) .
T h e p ea k -to- p ea k voltage is 23 volts .
Instantaneous
Voltage M easurements-DC
11 . Mu lti p ly t h e distance measured in ste p 9 b y t h e VO L TS/DI V switc h setting . Inclu d e t h e attenuation factor of t h e p ro b e, if any .
To measu re t h e DC level at α given p oint on α waveform,
u se t h e following p roced u re :
1 . Connect th e signal to eit h er in p ut connector .
ENEEMSEEME
/""ΝΕWιΕRΕ"
2 . Set th e M OD E switc h to dis p lay t h e c h annel used . 3 . Set t h e VO L TS/DI V switc h to d isp lay about five d ivisions of t h e waveform . 4 . Set th e In p ut Co u pling switc h to G N D .
ιΜι ιΜι ιΕR πm !ΕΝΝΝΝ Vertical distance
NNENEENEWE
5 . Set t h e Α S WEEP M OD E switc h to A U TO T R IG . 6 . P osition th e trace to t h e b ottom line of t he gratic u le or oth er reference line . If th e voltage is negative wit h resp ect to gro u n d , p osition t h e trace to t h e to p line of t h e gratic u le . Do not move t h e vertical P OSITIO N control after th is reference line h as been establish ed .
R efere n ce line
Fig . 2-18 . M easu ri ng i n sta n ta n eo u s DC voltage wit h res pect to α reference . 2- 2 9
Op erating I n structions-453Α/ R 453A E xam p le . Assume th at th e vertical d istance measure d is 4 .6 d ivisions (see F ig . 2-18), t h e waveform is a b ove th e reference line, using α 10 Χ atte nu ator p ro be and α VO L TS/ DI V setting of 2 . U sing t h e form u la : Instanvertical VO L TS/ p ro be taneous = distance Χ p olarity Χ DI V Χ attenuation Voltage ( d ivisions) setting factor Su bstituting t h e given values : Instantaneous 4 .6X+1 Χ 2 V Χ 10 Voltage
Th e instantaneo u s voltage is +g2 volts .
Com p arison
M easurements
General . In some a pp lications it may be d esirable to esta b lis h ar b itrary u nits of measu re oth er th an t h ose in d icated by t h e V O LTS/DI V switc h or ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . T h is is p articularly u sef u l w h en com paring u n k nown signals to α reference am p litu d e or re p etition rate . One u se for th e com parison-measurement tec h ni q ue is to facilitate calibration of e q ui p ment (e .g ., on an assem b ly-line test) w h ere th e d esired am p lit u d e or re p etition rate d oes not p rod u ce an exact number of d ivisions of d eflection . T h e a d ju stment will b e easier an d more acc u rate if arbitrary units of measu re are establis h e d so t h at correct ad ju stme n t is in d icate d by an exact number of d ivisions of d eflection . Ar b itrary swee p rates ca n be useful for com p aring h armonic signals to α fun d amental freq uency, or for com p aring t h e re petition rate of th e in p u t an d o u tput pu lses in α digital cou nt- d own circuit . T h e following p roce d ure descri bes h ow to establis h arb itrary units of meas u re for com parison measu rements . Alth o u g h th e p roce d ure for establis h ing vertical an d h orizontal arbitrary u nits of measure is m u c h th e same, b oth p rocesses are d escri b ed in d etail .
V ertical Deflection F actor . To establis h an ar b itrary vertical d eflection factor based upon α s p ecific reference am p lit u d e, p roceed as follows : 1 . Connect t h e reference signal to t h e in p u t connector . Set t h e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to dis p lay several cycles of t h e signal .
2 . Set t h e V O L TS/DI V switc h an d t h e VA R V O L TS/ DI V control to p roduce α d is p lay an exact num b er of graticule d ivisions in am p lit u de . Do not c h ange t h e V A R V O L TS/DI V control after o b taining t h e d esired d eflection . T h is d isp lay can b e used as α reference for am p lit u d e comp arison measurements . 2- 3 0
3 . To establish an arb itrary vertical d eflection factor so th e am p litu d e of an u n k nown signal ca n be measu re d accurately at any setti n g of th e VO LTS/DI V switch , th e am p li tu d e of t h e reference signal m u st b e known . If it is not known, it can b e measu re d before th e V A R V O L TS/DI V control is set in ste p 2 . 4 . Divi d e t h e am p litu d e of t h e reference signal (volts) by t h e p ro d u ct of t h e vertical d eflection esta b lish ed in ste p 2 ( d ivisions) an d th e setting of t h e VO L TS/DI V switc h . T h is is th e vertical conversion factor .
Vertical Conversion = Factor
reference signal am p litu d e (volts) vertical VO L TS/D Ι V d eflection Χ switc h ( d ivisions) setting
5 . To meas u re th e am p lit u d e of an un k nown signal, d isconnect t h e reference signal an d connect th e un k nown signal to th e in p u t connector . Set th e VO L TS/DI V switc h to α setting th at provi d es s u fficient vertical d eflection to ma k e an acc u rate measurement . Do not read ju st th e VA R V O LTS/D 1 V control . 6 . M easure th e vertical d eflection in d ivisions an d calculate th e amplitu d e of th e u n k nown signal using the following formula . Signal = Am p litude
VO LTS/DI V vertical ve rtical s w itc h Χ conversion Χ d eflection setting
factor
(divisions)
E XA MPLE : Assu me α reference signal am p litu d e of 30 volts, α VO L TS/DI V switc h setting of 5 and t h e V A R V O L TS/DI V co n trol is adj usted to p rovi d e α vertical deflection of fo u r d ivisions .
S u bstituting t h ese values in t h e vertical conversion factor formula (step 4) : Vertical Conversion = 30 V = 1 .5 4Χ 5V F actor
Th en, wit h α VO L TS/DI V switc h setting of 10, t h e p ea k-top ea k am p lit u de of an un k nown signal wh ic h p rod u ces α vertical d eflection of five d ivisions can b e determined b y u sing t h e signal am p litu de formula (step 6) : Signal = 10 V Χ 1 .5 Χ 5 = 75 volts Amplit u d e
Op erating Instructions-453Α / R 453A Sweep Rates . To establis h an ar b itrary h orizontal swee p rate based upon α sp ecific reference fre q uency, procee d as follows : 1 . Connect t h e reference signal to th e in p ut connector . Set th e V O LTS/DI V switc h for fo u r or five d ivisions of vertical d eflection .
E XA MPLE : Assume α reference signal fre q uency of 455 h ertz (re p etition rate 2 .19 milliseconds), an d α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h setting of .2 ms, wit h th e Α V A R ΤΙΜΕ /DI V control adju sted to provi d e α h orizontal d eflection of eigh t d ivisions . S u bstituting th ese val u es in th e h orizontal conversion factor form u la (ste p 4) :
H orizontal 2 .19 ms Conversion .37 2 . Set t h e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h and t h e Α VA R ΤΙΜΕ /DI V = 0 .2 ms Χ 8 = 1 F actor co n trol so one cycle of t h e signal covers an exact num ber of h orizontal divisions . Do not c h ange t h e Α VA R ΤΙΜΕ /DI V control after obtaining th e d esire d d eflection . T h is d is p lay T h en, with α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch setting of 50 μ s, th e re p etican b e used as α reference for fre qu ency com p arison meastion rate of an u n k nown signal w h ic h com p letes one cycle u rements . in seven h orizontal d ivisions can b e d etermined by using t h e re p etition rate formula (ste p 6) :
3 . To establis h an ar b itrary swee p rate so th e rep etition rate of an un k nown signal can b e measu re d accu rately at any setting of th e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h , t h e re p etition rate of th e reference signal must b e known . If it is not known, it can b e meas u red before t h e Α V A R ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch is set i n ste p 2 . 4 . Divi d e t h e repetitio n rate of t h e refere n ce signal (secon d s) b y th e p ro du ct of th e h orizontal d eflection establish ed in ste p 2 ( d ivisions) and th e setting of t h e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch . T h is is th e h orizontal conversion factor . reference signal repetition rate (seconds) = Conversion horizontal ΤΙΜΕ /DI V F actor d eflection Χ switc h ( d ivisions) setting
H orizontal
Re petition = 50 μ s Χ 1 .37 Χ 7 = 480 μ s Rate T h is answer can b e converted to freq uency b y ta k ing t h e reci p rocal of t h e re p etitio n rate (see a pp lication on Determining F req u ency) .
Time-Duration
Measurements
To measu re time between two points on α waveform, u se th e following proced u re : 1 . Connect t h e sig n al to eit h er inp u t con n ector .
2 . Set t h e
M OD E
switch to dis p lay t h e c h annel use d .
5 . To measure th e re p etitio n rate of an un k nown signal, d isconnect t he reference signal a n d connect th e u n k nown signal to th e in p u t con n ector . Set t h e TI ΜΕ /DI V switc h to α setting th at p rovi d es s u fficient h orizontal d eflection to make an accurate measu rement . Do not rea d ju st t h e Α
3 . Set t h e VO L TS/DI V switc h to d is p lay a b out five d ivi sions of t h e waveform .
V A R ΤΙΜΕ /DI V control .
p lay .
6 . M eas u re th e h orizontal d eflection in d ivisions an d calc u late th e re petitio n rate of t h e un k nown signal u sing t h e following form u la :
5 . Set t h e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to t h e fastest swee p rate t h at d isp lays less th a n eig h t d ivisions between t h e time measu reme n t p oi n ts (see F ig . 2-19) . (See t h e topic e n title d Selecting Sweep Rate in t h is section concerning nonlinearity of first an d last divisions of d is p lay .)
Re p etition = Rate
ΤΙΜΕ /DI V h orizontal h orizontal s w itc h Χ conversion Χ deflection setting factor (divisions)
NOTE If the horizontal magnifier is used, be sure to use the magnified sweep rate in place of the Τ/ΜΕ/D/ V switch setting.
4 . Set th e Α Triggering controls to obtain α sta b le d is-
6 . Adj ust t h e vertical P OSITIO N control to move t h e p oints between w h ic h t h e time measurement is made to t h e center h orizontal line . 7 . Ad ju st t h e h orizontal P OSITIO N control to center th e dis p lay with in th e center eig h t d ivisions of th e gratic u le . 2- 3 1
Operati ng Instructions-453 Α/ R 453A p eriod ically-rec u rrent signal is t h e reci p rocal of t h e time d u ration ( p erio d ) of one cycle .
U se
t h e following p roce d ure :
1 . M easure th e time d uration of one cycle of t h e waveform as d escri b e d in th e p revio u s app lication .
2 . Ta k e th e reci p rocal of t h e time d uration to d etermine th e fre q uency .
E xam p le . T h e fre q uency of t h e signal s h own in F ig . 2-19 w h ic h h as α time d uration of 0 .5 millisecon d is : F re q uency = F ig . 2-19 . Meas u ri n g t h e ti m e du ration b etween p oints on α waveform .
8 . M easure t h e h orizontal d istance between t h e time measurement p oints. B e s u re t h e Α V A R control is set to th e cali b rated p osition . 9 . Mu lti p ly t h e distance meas u red in ste p 8 b y th e setting of th e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . If swee p magnification is u se d , d ivi d e t h is answer by 10 .
E xam p le . Assu me t h at th e h orizontal d istance between t h e time measurement p oints is five d ivisions (see F ig . 2-19) and t h e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch is set to .1 ms with th e magnifier off .
U sing
th e form u la :
h orizontal d istance Χ ΤΙΜΕ /DI V
setting Time Duration = (divisions) magnification
S ub stituting t h e given val u es : 0.1 ms Time Duration = 5 Χ 1
T h e time d uratio n is 0 .5 millisecon d . Determining
F re q uency
Th e time measurement tec h ni q ue can also b e u sed to meas u re t h e fre qu ency of α signal . T h e fre q uency of α 2- 3 2
1
time d uration
=
1
0 .5 ms
= 2 kH z
R isetime M easurements R isetime measurements em p loy basically th e same tec h ni q ues as time- d u ration measurements . T h e main d ifference is th e p oints b etween wh ic h t h e measurement is ma d e . T h e following p roced u re gives th e basic met h o d of measuring risetime between t h e 10% an d 90% p oints of t h e waveform . F alltime can be meas u re d in th e same manner on th e trailing e d ge of t h e waveform . 1 . Connect th e signal to eith er in p ut connector . 2 . Set t h e M OD E switc h to d is p lay th e c h annel u sed . 3 . Set t h e V O L TS/DI V switc h and V A R V O L TS/DI V control to p ro d u ce α d is p lay an exact n u m b er of d ivisions in am p litu d e . 4 . Center t h e d is p lay abo u t t h e center h orizontal line . 5 . Set th e Α Triggering controls to obtain α sta b le display . 6 . Set th e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to th e fastest swee p rate d is p lays less th an eigh t d ivisions b etween t h e 10% an d
th at
90% p oints on th e waveform .
7 . Determine t h e 10% an d 90% p oints on th e rising p ortion of t h e waveform . T h e fig u res given in Table 2-2 are for th e p oints 10% up from t h e start of t h e rising p ortion and 10% down from t h e to p of t h e rising p ortion (90% p oint) .
Op erating Instructions-453 Α / R 453A App lying t h e time d uration form u la to risetime :
TA BLE 2-2
Vertical dis p lay ( d ivisions) 4 5 6 7 8
10% an d 90% p oints 0 .4 0 .5 0 .6 0 .7 0 .8
and a nd and an d an d
3 .6 4 .5 5 .4 6 .3 7 .2
d ivisions d ivisio n s d ivisions d ivisions d ivisions
Divisions vertically between 10% & 90% points _3 .2 _4 .0 _4 .8 _5 .6 6 .4
h orizontal ΤΙΜΕ /DI V d ista n ce Χ
setting R isetime _ ( d ivisions) (Time Duration) magnification S u bstituting th e given values : Χ 1 μs R isetime -- 4 10 T h e risetime is 0 .4 microsecon d .
8 . A d j ust t h e h orizontal POSITIO N control to move t h e 10% p oint of t h e waveform to t h e first graticule line . F or exam p le, wit h α five- d ivision dis p lay as s h own in F ig . 2-20, t h e 10% point is 0 .5 d ivision up from t h e start of t h e rising p ortion . 9 . M eas u re t he h orizontal d istance between t h e 10% and 90% p oints . B e sure th e Α V A R control is set to th e calib rated p osition .
10. M ulti p ly th e d istance measure d in ste p 8 by t h e setting of t h e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch . If swee p magnification is used , d ivide th is answer by 10 .
E xam p le . Assume t h at t h e h orizontal d istance between t h e 10% an d 90% p oints is four d ivisions (see F ig . 2-20) and th e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch is set to 1 μ s with th e M AG switc h set to Χ 10 .
Time-Difference
Measurements
T h e calibrate d sweep rate an d d ual-trace feat u res of th e 453 Α allow measurement of time d ifference between two se p arate events . To measure time d ifference, use t h e following p roced u re . 1 . Set th e In p u t Co u p ling switc h es to t he d esired cou p ling p ositions . 2 . Set th e M OD E switc h to eit h er C H O P or A L T . In general, C H O P is more suitable for low-frequency signals an d th e A L T p osition is more s u ita ble for h ig h -fre q uency signals . M ore information on d etermining t h e mo d e is given u n d er Dual-Trace O p eration in th is section . 3 . Set t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h to C H 1 O R Χ -Y . 4 . Connect th e reference signal to th e C H 1 O R Χ connector an d th e com p arison signal to C H 2 O R Υ connector . T he reference signal sh ou l d p reced e th e com p arison signal in time . U se coaxial cables or p ro b es w h ic h h ave eq u al time delay to connect th e signals to t h e in p u t connectors .
1-1-1
5 . If t h e signals are of o p p osite p olarity, pull ou t t h e I NVER T switc h to invert t h e C h annel 2 d is p lay (signal may be of o pp osite p olarity due to 180 ° time d ifference ; if so ta k e into account in final calc u lation) .
6 . Set th e V O LTS/DI V switch es to p ro d uce fo u r or five-
d ivision d is p lays . Ι ι
H orizo n tal d istan ce
Fig . Ζ-20 . M easu ring risetime .
ι ι 1
7 . Set th e Α LEVEL control for α stable d is p lay .
Ι 8 . If p ossi b le, set th e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h for α swee p rate w h ic h s h ows th ree or more d ivisions between t h e two wavefor um s. 2-33
Operating Instructions-453 Α/ R 453A Substitu 9 . A dju st th e vertical P OSITIO N controls to center eac h ting t h e given values : waveform (or th e p oints on t h e d is p lay between w h ic h th e measu rement is ma d e) in relation to th e center h orizontal 50 μ s Χ 4 .5 line . Time Delay = 10 10 . Ad ju st th e h orizontal P OSITIO N control so t h e C h annel 1 (reference) waveform crosses t h e center h ori zontal line at α vertical graticule li n e . 11 . M eas u re t h e h orizontal d ifference between t h e C h annel 1 waveform an d t h e Ch annel 2 waveform (see F ig . 2-21) . 12 . Mu lti p ly t h e measu red d ifference b y th e setting of th e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . If swee p magnification is use d , d ivi d e t h is answer by 10 .
E xample . Assu me th at th e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h is set to 50 μ s, th e M AG switc h to Χ 10, and t h e h orizontal d ifference between waveforms is 4 .5 d ivisions (see F ig . 2-21) .
U sing
th e formula : horizontal ΤΙΜΕ /DI V Χ d ifference setting (divisio n s) Time Delay = magnification
Th e time d elay is 22 .5 microseconds . NOTE Do not use th e MIXED position of th e ΗΟ R / Ζ DlSPL AY switc h to ma k e time measurements with th e DEL A Y- TIME MUL TIPL I ER dial. /η th is mode, error is in tro duced into th e measurement due to th e special relationship between th e Α and Β sweeps .
Delayed Swee p Time
M easurements
T h e d elaye d sweep mod e can b e use d to ma k e acc u rate time measurements . T h e following measurement d etermines t h e time d ifference between two p u lses d isp layed on t h e same trace . T h is a pp lication may also b e use d to measure time d ifference from two different sources (dual-trace) or to meas u re time duration of α single p ulse . See Section 1 for measu rement accuracy . 1 . Connect th e sig n al to eith er in put connector . Set th e switch to d isp lay t h e c h annel u se d .
M OD E
2 . Set t h e V O LTS/DI V switch to ρ produce α display about four d ivisions in am p lit u d e . 3 . A d ju st th e Α Triggering controls for α stable d is p lay .
Ch a nnel 1 ( r efere n ce)
C h annel 2
11ιιιΕιιι
MMMMMMMMMM
.
..
ιιιιιιιιι
EMMMMMINNIMM
MM M0
MMMMENIMM MMENIMM
υ~. ι ι ι cα ιαυκο~
Fig . 2-21 . M easu ri ng time difference betwee n two pulses . 2- 34
4 . If p ossi b le, set th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to α swee p rate w h ic h d is p lays a b out eig h t d ivisions between th e pulses . 5 . Set th e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D URI N G Β and th e Β S WEEP M OD E switch to Β STA R TS A F T ER D EL AY TIME . 6 . Set th e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to α setting 1/100t h of th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V swee p rate . T h is p ro d u ces an intensified p ortion a b out 0 .1 d ivision in lengt h .
ΝΟΤΕ Do not c h ange th e Α L EVEL control setting or th e horizontal POSITION control setting in th e following steps as th e measurement accuracy will be affecte d.
Operating Instructions-453A/ R 453A 7 . Tu rn t h e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER dial to move t h e intensified p ortion to th e first p u lse . 8 . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PLAY switc h to Β (D EL AY E D SWEEP) . 9 . A d j ust th e D EL AY-TI ME MULTI PL I ER d ial to move th e p u lse (or t h e rising p ortion) to t h e center vertical line . N ote th e setting of t h e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial . 10 . Turn t h e DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial cloc k wise until t h e secon d p u lse is p ositione d to t h is same p oint (if several p ulses are d is p laye d , ret u rn to t h e Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β p osition to locate t h e correct p ulse) . Again note t h e dial setting . 11 . S u btract t h e first d ial setting from th e second and m u ltiply b y th e d elay time s h own b y th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . T h is is th e time interval between t h e p ulses .
DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial : 1 .31 on
DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial : 8 .81
~000=0
NNNNEEN EN NNEEMENNNE EMMMMM MM MMMMMMMMMM
131111~ , !III
E xam p le . Assu me t h e first d ial setting is 1 .31 an d t h e secon d d ial setting is 8 .81 with th e Α TI ΜΕ /DI V switc h set to 0 .2 microsecon d (see F ig . 2-22) .
U sing
t h e form u la :
Time Difference = ( d elaye d swee p )
second first dial - d ial setting setting
delay time Χ ( Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V setting)
Substituting t h e give n values : Time Difference= [8 .81 - 1 .31] Χ 0 .2 μ s T h e time d ifference is 1 .5 microseconds .
Delayed Swee p Magnification
T h e d elayed swee p feat u re of th e 453 Α can be u se d to p rovid e h igh er a p p arent magnification t h an is provided by th e M AG switc h . T h e swee p rate of t h e D EL AY E D S WEEP ( Β swee p ) is not actually increased ; t h e a p p arent magnificatio n is t h e resu lt of d elaying th e Β swee p an amou nt of time selected by th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch a n d t h e DELAYTIME MULTI PL I ER d ial before t h e d is p lay is p resented at th e swee p rate selecte d b y t h e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch . T h e following met h o d s u se th e Β STA R TS A F T ER D EL AY TIME p osition to allow th e d elayed p ortion to be p ositioned with th e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial . If th ere is too muc h j itter in th e d elaye d d is p lay, u se th e Triggered Delaye d Swee p M agnification p roce d u re . 1 . Connect th e signal to eith er in put connector . Set t h e M OD E switc h to d isp lay th e c h annel use d . 2 . Set the V O LTS/DI V switc h to p rod u ce α d is p lay a b out 4 d ivisions in am p litu d e . 3 . A d ju st t h e Α Triggering controls for α stable d is p lay . 4 . Set th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to α swee p rate w h ic h
d is p lays t h e complete waveform .
5 . Set th e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D URI N G Β an d th e Β S WEEP M OD E switc h to Β STA R TS A F T ER D ELAY TIME . ( Β ) Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP) disp lay.
F ig . 2-22 . M easuri n g time difference using delayed sweep .
6 . P osition th e start of th e intensified portion wit h t h e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial to th e p art of t h e d is p lay to be magnified .
2-35
Op erating I n structions-453Α/ R 453A 7 . Set t h e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to α setting wh ic h intensifies th e fu ll p ortion to b e magnifie d . T h e start of th e intensified trace will remain as p ositio n e d a b ove . 8 . Set t h e SWEEP) .
H O R IZ
Pu lse to be magn ifie d
DIS PL AY switc h to Β (D ELAY E D
9 . Time measurements can b e ma d e from th e d isp lay in th e conventional manner . Sweep rate is d etermined by th e setting of th e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . 10 . T h e a pp arent swee p magnification can be calculate d b y divi d ing t h e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h setting by th e Β TIME/ DI V switc h setting .
on
MEN
mom
ΙNEEMEENEEN MENEEMENNE ENNEEMENOM ( Α ) Α swee p d isp lay .
E xam p le . T h e app arent magnification of th e d is p lay s h own in F ig . 2-23 with an Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h setting of .1 ms and α Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h setting of 1 μ s is : A pp arent M agnification - Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V setting (delayed swee p ) Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V setting
ιrι:ι...ι~ι
NEENEENEEN
Substit u ting th e given val u es : A p p arent Magnification
ι
1 Χ 10 -4 1 Χ 10 -6
Th e a pp arent magnification is 100 times . Triggered Delaye d Sweep M agnificatio n . T h e d elaye d swee p magnification met h o d ju st d escribe d may p ro d uce too m u c h j itter at h ig h a pp arent magnification ranges . T h e T R IGG ER A BLE A F T ER D EL AY TIME p osition of th e Β S WEEP M OD E switc h p rovi d es α more sta b le d is p lay since th e d elaye d d is p lay is triggere d at t h e same p oint eac h time . 1 . Set up t h e d is p lay as given in ste p s 1 t h rou g h 7 d escri b e d a b ove . 2 . Set t h e Β S WEEP M OD E switc h to T R IGG ER A BLE
( Β ) Delaye d swee p disp lay .
Fig. 2-23 . U sing delayed sweep for swee p mag n ificatio n .
d ition cannot b e reme d ie d with t h e Β Triggering controls or by increasing t h e d is p lay am p litu d e (lower VO LTS/DI V setting), externally trigger t h e Β swee p . 5 . Wh en th e correct portion is intensifie d , set t h e H O R IZ DISPL AY switch to Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP) . Slig h t re-ad justment of th e Β LEVEL control may b e necessary for α stable d isp lay .
AF T ER D EL AY TIME .
3 . A d ju st th e Β LEVEL control so th e intensifie d p ortion on t h e trace is stable . (If an intensifie d p ortion ca n not be o btaine d , see ste p 4 .) 4 . Ina b ility to intensify t h e d esire d portion indicates th at t h e Β Triggering controls are incorrectly set or t h e signal d oes not meet th e triggering re q uirements . If th e con2- 3 6
6 . M easu rement a b ove .
an d magnification
Dis p laying Com p lex Signals
Using
are
as described
Delayed Swee p
Com p lex signals often consist of α num b er of in d ivi d u al events of differing am p litu d es . Since t h e trigger circu its are sensitive to c h anges in signal am p lit ud e, α sta b le d is p lay can normally b e o b taine d only w h en th e swee p is triggered by
Operating Instructio n s-453Α/ R 453A th e event(s) h aving t h e greatest am p litu d e . H owever, t h is may not p ro d u ce th e d esired d is p lay of α lower am p litud e event w h ic h follows t h e triggering event . T h e d elayed swee p feat u re p rovi d es α means of d elaying th e start of th e Β sweep by α selected amount following t h e event w h ic h triggers th e Α Swee p Generator . T h en, th e p art of t h e waveform w h ic h contai n s th e information of interest can be d is p layed .
U se
t h e following p rocedure :
1 . Connect t h e signal to eit h er input connector . Set t h e
MOD E switc h to dis p lay th e ch annel u sed .
2 . Set t h e V O LTS/DI V switc h to p ro d uce α d isp lay a b out four d ivisions in am p litude .
MENEEMENNE MENEEMEEME EMEEMOMMMM
ONNOMMUNNE 0 ιιιιυ6ίNο Wi ι i" EMENSEEMEN ( Α) r
r
T h is p ortio n of display cann ot be viewe d ad e-
q u ately beca u se Α sweep is tr iggered on larger a mp litu d e sign als at start of d is play .
3 . A d ju st th e Α Triggering controls for α stable d isplay .
MENNEEMENE
4 . Set th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to α swee p rate w h ich dis p lays th e com plete waveform .
MMMMMMMMMM
5 . Set th e H O R IZ DIS PLAY switch to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D URI N G Β an d t h e Β S WEEP M OD E switc h to Β STA R TS A F T ER D EL AY TIME . 6 . P osition th e start of th e intensified p ortion with th e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial to th e p art of t h e dis p lay to be magnified . 7, Set t h e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to α setting w h ic h i n tensifies th e fu ll portion to be magnifie d . T h e start of th e intensifie d trace will remain as p ositione d a b ove . 8 . Set th e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP) . 9 . Time measurements can be made from t h e d is p lay in th e convention al manner . Sweep rate is determined by t h e setting of th e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h .
E xam p le . F ig . 2-24 s h ows α complex waveform as d is-
p laye d on th e C R T . T h e circled p ortion of th e waveform cannot be viewed in any greater d etail beca u se t h e sweep is triggered b y t h e larger am p litu d e p u lses at th e start of t h e d is p lay, a n d α faster sweep rate moves t h is area of t h e waveform off th e viewi n g area . T h e secon d waveform s h ows th e area of interest magnified 10 times u sing Delaye d Swee p . Th e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial h as b een a d j usted so t h e d elayed swee p starts j ust b efore th e area of interest .
NEENEEMMMM
suffiammmmmm
ΜΜΜΜO-ιιιιΜΜΜ !"lUl"ΜΜ""/" EMBEEMENNE NEENEEMENE Area of in terest displayed by delayi ng Β swee p (( ΒΒ )STA RTS A F T ER D EL AY TIME mod e) . F ig . 2-24 . Disp laying α com p lex sig nal u si n g delayed swee p .
P ulse J itter M easurements In some app lications it is necessary to meas u re th e amo u nt of j itter on t h e leading ed ge of α p ulse, or j itter betwee n p u lses .
U se th e following p rocedure : 1 . Con n ect t h e signal to eit h er in p ut connector . Set th e
MOD E switc h to d is p lay th e c h annel u sed .
2 . Set t h e V O L TS/DI V switc h to dis p lay a b out four
d ivisions of t h e waveform .
3 . Set th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to α swee p rate w h ic h dis p lays t h e com p lete waveform . 2- 37
Op erati n g I nstructions-453 Α / R 453A 4 . Set t h e Α Triggering controls to obtain as sta b le α
d isp lay as possi b le .
5 . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D URI N G Β an d t h e Β SWEEP M OD E switc h to Β STA R TS A F T ER D EL AY TIME . 6 . Position th e start of t he i n tensified p ortion wit h t h e DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial so th e p ulse to be measu re d is intensified . 7. Set t h e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to α setting wh ic h intenp ortion of th e pu lse th at sh ows j itter.
sifies th e full
8 . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PLAY switch to Β (D EL AY E D SWEEP) . 9 . P ulse j itter is sh own b y h orizontal moveme n t of t h e p u lse (ta k e i n to account i nh erent j itter of Delaye d Swee p ) . M easure t h e amou n t of h orizo n tal movement . Be sure bot h varia b le co n trols are set to t h e calibrate d p osition . 10 . M ultiply t h e d istance measured in step 11 b y th e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h setting to obtain p u lse j itter i n time .
F ig . 2-25 . Meas u ri ng pu lse j itter . Delaye d Trigger Generator T h e Β GAT E ou tput signal can b e u se d to trigger an external d evice at α selected d elay time after th e start of Α Sweep . T h e d elay time of th e Β GAT E ou t pu t signal can be selecte d b y t h e setting of th e DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial an d Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . Α Sweep Triggere d Internally . Wh en Α swee p is triggere d intern ally to p ro d u ce α n ormal d is p lay, th e d elaye d trigger may b e o b taine d as follows . 1 . Obtain α triggere d d is p lay i n th e normal manner .
E xample . Assu me th at t h e h orizontal movement is 0 .5 d ivisio n (see F ig . 2-25), a n d t h e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h setting is .5 μ s .
U sing
3 . Select th e amo u nt of d elay from t h e start of Α Swee p with th e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial . Delay time can be calc u late d in t h e normal manner . 4 . Set t h e Β S WEEP M OD E A F T ER D EL AY TIME .
t h e form u la : Pu lse
J itter
=
h orizontal j itter
( d ivisions)
Χ
Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V setting
Su b stit u ting th e given val u e :
P ulse J itter = 0 .5 Χ 0.5 μ s T h e p u lse j itter is 0 .25 microsecon d . 2- 3 8
2 . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D URING Β .
switc h to Β STA R TS
5 . Connect th e Β GAT E signal to th e external e q ui p ment . 6 . T he d u ration of th e Β GAT E signal is d etermined b y th e setting of th e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . 7 . T h e external e q ui p ment will be triggere d at th e start of th e intensified p ortion if it respon d s to positive-going
Operating Instructions-453 Α / R 453A triggers, or at th e en d of th e intensified p ortion if it res p on d s to negative-going triggers .
nals may be of op p osite p olarity d ue to 180 ° p h ase d ifference ; if so, ta k e th is i n to account in th e final calculation .)
Α Sweep Triggered E xternally . T h is mo d e of operation can be u se d to p rod u ce α d elayed trigger wit h or wit h out α corres p on d ing d is p lay . Connect t h e external trigger signal t o th e Α ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T con n ector an d set t h e Α SO UR C E switc h to EXT . F ollow t h e o p eration given a b ove to obtain th e d elaye d trigger .
6 . Set th e C H 1 and C H 2 V O L TS/DI V switc h es an d th e V A R V O L TS/DI V controls so th e d isp lays are e q ual an d a b ou t five d ivisions in am p litu d e .
N ormal
8 . Set th e ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to α swee p rate wh ic h d is-
Trigger Generator
Ord inarily, t h e signal to be d is p layed also p rovides t h e trigger signal for t h e oscillosco p e . In some instances, it may be desira b le to reverse t h is sit u ation an d h ave th e oscilloscope trigger t h e signal so u rce . T h is can be d one by co n necting t h e Α GAT E signal to th e in p u t of t h e signal so u rce . Set th e Α LEVEL control fully cloc kwise, Α SWEEP M OD E switc h to A U TO T R IG, an d ad ju st t h e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h for th e d esire d d is p lay . Since th e signal source is triggered b y α signal t h at h as α fixed time relations h i p to t h e swee p , t h e out p ut of th e signal source can be d isplayed on t h e C R T as th o u g h t h e 453Α were triggere d in t h e normal man(t h is met h o d d oes not allow selection of trigger level or co u p ling) .
M ulti-Trace Ph ase Difference
7 . Set th e triggering controls to o b tain α sta b le d is p lay .
M easurements
Ph ase comparison b etween two signals of t h e same freq uency can b e ma d e using t h e d u al-trace feat u re of t h e 453 Α . T h is met h o d of p h ase d ifference measurement can b e use d up to t h e fre qu e n cy limit of t h e vertical system . To ma k e t h e comparison, u se t h e following p roce d u re .
p lays about one cycle of th e waveform .
9, M ove th e waveforms to th e center of t h e graticule w it h t h e vertical P OSITIO N controls . 10 . Turn t h e Α V A R control until o ne cycle of th e reference signal (C h annel 1) occu p ies exactly eig h t d ivisions h orizontally (see F ig . 2-26) . E ac h d ivision of th e gratic u~le rep resents 45 of th e cycle (360 - 8 d ivisions = 45 / division) ision) . T h e swee p rate can be state d in terms of d egrees as 45/ d ivision . 11 . M easu re t h e h orizontal d ifference between corresp ond ing p oints on t h e waveforms .
12 . Mu lti p ly th e measu re d d istance (in d ivisions) b y 45 ° /d ivision (swee p rate) to o b tain t h e exact amo u nt of p h ase d ifference .
1 . Set th e In p ut Cou p ling switc h es to t h e same p osition, d e p en d ing on th e type of cou p ling d esired . 2 . Set t h e M OD E switc h to eit h er C H O P or A LT . In general, C H O P is more suitable for low-frequency signals an d t h e A L T p osition is more s u itable for h ig h -fre q u ency signals . M ore information on d etermining th e mo d e is given u nd er Dual-Trace Operation in t h is section .
Channel l
(refere n ce)
22 ι
3 . Set th e ΙΝΤ T R IG switch to C H 1 O R Χ -Y . 4 . Connect th e reference signal to t h e C H 1 O R Χ con-
nector an d th e com p arison signal to t h e C H 2 O R Υ connector . T h e reference signal sh oul d p rece d e th e com p arison signal in time . U se coaxial ca b les or p robes w h ic h h ave eq ual time d elay to connect th e signals to th e in p ut connectors .
H orizo n tal
Differe n ce
ι Ί
1 5 . If th e signals are of o pp osite p olarity, pull the I NVER T switc h o u t to invert th e C h annel 2 d is p lay . (Sig-
C h a nn el2 (lagging)
ι ι ι
ι ι ι
ι
ι
8 Divisio n s (360°)
ι ι 1
F ig . 2-26 . M eas u ring p h ase d ifferen ce . 2- 3 9
Operating Instructions-453 Α/ R 453A E xam p le . Assume α h orizontal d ifference of 0 .6 division wit h α swee p rate of 45 ° / d ivision as s h ow n in F ig . 2-26 .
U sing
t h e form u la :
h orizontal Ph ase Difference = d ifference Χ sw eep rate (degrees/d iv) ( d ivisio n s) S u bstitu ting th e given values : Ph ase Difference = 0 .6 Χ 45 °
T h e p h ase d ifference is 27 ° .
H ig h
R esolution Ph ase
Measurements
More accurate d u al-trace ph ase measu rements can be made by increasing th e swee p rate (wit h o u t c hanging th e Α V A R control setting) . One of th e easiest ways to i n crease th e swee p rate is wit h th e M AG switc h . Delayed swee p magnification may also be u sed . Th e magnified swee p rate is d etermined by d ivi d ing t h e swee p rate ob taine d p reviously b y th e amoun t of swee p magnification . Exam p le . If t h e swee p rate were increased 10 times with th e magnifier, th e magnified swee p rate would be 45 ° / d ivision _ 10 = 4 .5 ° /d ivision . F ig . 2-27 s h ows th e same signals as u se d in F ig . 2-26 b u t wit h th e M AG switc h set to Χ 10 . W it h α h orizontal d ifference of six divisions, th e p h ase d ifference is : h orizontal magnifie d Ph ase Difference = d ifference Χ swee p rate ( d ivisio n s) ( d egrees/ d iv)
Channel l
Channel 2
(refere n ce)
S ub stit u ting th e given val u es : Ph ase Difference = 6 Χ 4 .5 ° T h e p h ase d ifference is 27 ° . X-Y Ph ase
Measurements
Th e X-Y p h ase measuremen t met h o d can b e used to meas u re t h e p h ase d ifference between two signals of t h e same fre q u ency . T h is meth o d p rovi d es an alternative met h o d of measurement for signal freq uencies up to about 100 k iloh ertz . H owever, above th is fre q uency t h e i nh erent p h ase d ifference between th e vertical an d h orizontal systems ma k es accurate p h ase measu reme n ts difficult . In t h is mode, one of th e sine-wave signals p rovid es h orizontal d eflection ( Χ ) wh ile th e ot h er signal p rovi d es t h e vertical d eflection ( Υ ) . T h e p h ase a n gle b etween th e two signals can be d etermined from t h e lissa j ous p attern as follows :
1 . Connect one of th e sine-wave signals to b ot h t h e C H 1 O R Χ an d th e C H 2 O R Υ connectors . ( N ote : ste ps 1 t h roug h 5 meas u re in h erent p h ase d iffere n ce b etween th e Χ an d Υ am p lifiers to provi d e α more accurate X-Y p h ase meas u rement ; not necessary below a bo u t 1 kHz) . 2 . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PLAY switc h to Χ -Y . Set th e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h to C H 1 O R X-Y and t h e Β SO UR C E switc h to Ι NT . 3 . P osition t h e d isp lay to th e center of t h e screen an d adju st th e V O L TS/DI V switc h es to p rod u ce α d is p lay less t h an six d ivisions vertically ( Υ ) and less th an 10 d ivisions h orizontally ( Χ ) . Th e C H 1 VO L TS/DI V switc h controls t h e h orizontal deflection ( Χ ) an d th e C H 2 V O L TS/DI V switc h controls t h e vertical d eflection ( Υ ) . 4 . Center th e disp lay in relation to t h e vertical graticule
ιFΑ' ,ι ιιι~ !==FAOMM MEMOME
EMENEEMEME MOMMEMEMEM Ι
Ι .6
H orizo n tal difference
Ι 01Ι
F ig . 2-27 . H ig h resol u tion ph ase- differe n ce meas u rement with i ncreased sweep rate . 2- 40
line . M easure t h e d istances Α and Β as sh own in F ig . 2-28 . Distance Α is t h e h orizontal measurement between th e two p oints wh ere th e trace crosses th e center h orizontal line . Distance Β is t h e maximum h orizontal wi d th of th e d is p lay.
5 . Divi d e Α by Β to obtain t h e sine of th e p h ase angle ( φ ) between th e two signals . T h e angle can th en b e obtaine d from α trigonometric table . T h is is th e in h erent p h ase sh ift of th e instrument . 6 . Connect t h e Υ signal to C H 2 O R Υ connector . R ep eat ste p s 2 th rough 5 to meas u re ph ase angle . If t h e d isp lay a p p ears as α d iagonal straig h t line, t h e two signals are eit h er in p h ase (tilte d u pp er righ t to lower left) or 180 ° out of p h ase (tilte d u pp er left to lower rig h t) . If t h e d is p lay
Operating Instrucltions-453 Α / R 453A 7 . Subtract th e in h erent p h ase sh ift from th e phase a ngle φ to o btain t h e actual p h ase difference . MENEIREMEN
E xam ple . Ass u me an in h erent p h ase difference of 2 ° with α d is p lay as s h own in F ig . 2-28 w here Α is 5 divisions an d Β is 10 d ivisions .
U sing
th e formula :
Sine φ = Α Β
Su b stituting th e given val
F ig. 2-28 . Ph ase-d iffere n ce measurement from an Χ - Υ d is p lay . is α circle, th e signals are 90 ° o u t of p h ase . F ig . 2-29 sh ows t h e lissa j o u s d isp lays p roduced b etween 0 ° an d 360° . N otice t h at a b ove 180 ° p h ase sh ift, th e resu ltant d is p lay is t h e same as at some lower angle .
u es :
Sine 0 = ό = 0 .5
From t h e trigonometric tables : φ = 300
MEMEMEMEME F ig . 2-29 . Ph ase of lissa j ous d isp lay . (Α ) 0 ° or 360° , ( Β ) 30 ° or 330 ° , (C) 90' or 270 ° , (D) 150 ° or 210 ° , ( Ε ) 180° . 2-4 1
Operati ng I n st ru ctions-453 Α/ R 453A Common- M o d e
R e j ection
5 . Set th e ΙΝΤ T R IG switch to
T h e ADD feature of t h e 453 Α ca n b e u sed to d isp lay signals w h ic h co n tain u nd esirable com p onents . T h ese und esirable com p onents can be eliminated t h roug h common-mo d e rej ection . T h e p recautions given u n d er Algebraic A dd ition sh o u l d be o bserved . 1 . Connect th e signal containing b oth th e desire d an d un d esired information to th e C H 1 O R Χ connector . 2 . Co n nect α sign al similar to th e u nwanted p ortion of th e C h annel 1 signal to t h e C H 2 O R Υ co n nector . F or exam p ie, in F ig . 2-30 α line-freq ue n cy sig n al is co n nected to C h annel 2 to cancel out t h e li n e-freque n cy co mp o n ent of t h e C h annel 1 signal . 3 . Set bot h I n p u t Co u p ling switch es to DC (AC if DC com p o n e n t of in p ut signal is too large) . 2 4 . Set t h e M OD E switc h to A L T . Set t h e V O L TS/DI V switc h es so t h e signals are about e q u al in am p litu d e .
MEMMEMEMOM
ιιιι
WM Ε
=W DE
ιER
N O RM .
6 . Set th e M OD E switc h to ADD . Pull th e I NVER T switc h so th e common-mo d e signals are of o pp osite p olarity . 7 . Ad j ust t h e C H 2 V O L TS/DI V switc h and C H 2 V A R control for maximum cancellatio n of th e common-mo d e signal . 8 . T h e sig n al w h ic h remains s h o u l d b e only t h e d esired p ortion of th e C h an nel 1 signal . T h e u n d esire d signal is cancelled o u t.
E xam p le . An exam p le of th is mod e of o peration is shown in Fig . 2-30 . T h e signal ap p lie d to C h a nn el 1 co n tains unwanted line-freq uency com p onents ( F ig . 2-30Α ) . Α correspon d ing line-frequ ency signal is connected to C h annel ( F ig . 2-30 Β ) . F ig . 2-30C sh ows t h e d esired portion of th e signal as d isp layed wh en commo n -mod e re j ection is use d .
MEMMEMEMEMEMEMEMEMS Fr LL N-0
----.
ιιίιιιιιιι ιιιιιιιιιι ιιιιιιιιιι ιιιιιιιιιι NOONιιιιιι ιιιιιιιιιι
F ig . 2-30 . Usi n g t h e ADD feat u re for common-mode re j ection . ( Α ) Ch an nel 1 sig n al co n tai ns d esired information alo ng with line-freq u ency com p on e n t, ( Β ) C h annel 2 sig n al co n tains li n e-freq uency only, (C) C R T d isplay u si ng commo n - m o de re jectio n .
S E CTIO N 3
453Α/ R 453A
CI R C U IT DESCRIPTION Change information, if any, affecting this section will be found at the rear of this manual.
Introduction circuitry use d in t h e 453Α Oscillosco p e . T h e d escri ption b egins wit h α d iscussion of t h e instrument using t h e basic bloc k d iagram s h own in F ig . 3-1 . T h e n , eac h circuit is describe d in d etail, using α d etailed bloc k d iagram to sh ow th e interconnections between t h e stages in eac h maj or circuit and t h e relations h ip of t h e front- p anel controls to t h e in d ivid ual stages . Α com p lete block d iagram is located in the Diagrams section at t h e rear of t h is ma n ual . T h is bloc k d iagram sh ows t h e overall relatio ns h i p between all of t h e circuits . Complete sc h ematics of eac h circuit are also given in t h e Diagrams section . Refer to t h ese diagrams t h roug h o u t th e followi n g circuit d escri p tion for electrical values an d relationsh i p . BLOC K DIAG R A M General T h e following d isc u ssion is provided to ai d in und erstand i n g t h e overall concept of th e 453Α before th e i nd ivi d ual circuits are d iscussed i n d etail . Α basic bloc k d iagram of t h e 453Α is s h own i n F ig . 3-1 . Only t h e basic i n terconnections between t h e in d ivi d ual b loc k s are s h own on t h is d iagram . E ac h b loc k re p rese nts α maj or circuit wit h in t h is instrume n t . T he number on eac h bloc k refers to t h e com p lete circuit diagram w h ic h is located at t h e rear of t h is manual . Signals to be d isplayed on t h e C R T are a pp lied to eit her th e C H 1 O R Χ a nd /or th e C H 2 O R Υ connectors . T h e in p ut signals are t h en am p lified by th e C h annel 1 Vertical P ream p and/or t h e C h annel 2 V ertical P ream p circuits . E ach V ertical P ream p circuit i n clu d es se parate vertical d efactor, flectio n position, in p ut co u pling, gain, varia b le atten u ation, an d balance controls . Α trigger- p ick off stage in t h e C h a n nel 1 Vertical P ream p circuit su pp lies α sam p le of t h e C hannel 1 signal to t h e Trigger P ream p circuit or t h e C H 1 O U T connector . T h e C h annel 2 V ertical P reamp circuit contains an invert feat u re to invert t he C h annel 2 signal as dis p laye d on t h e C R T . T h e out p ut of b ot h V ertical P ream p circuits is connecte d to t h e Vertical Switc h ing circuit . T h is circ u it selects t h e c h annel(s) to b e d is p layed . An outp ut signal from t h is ci r cuit is connected to th e Ζ
Axis Am p lifier circuit to b lan k out t h e b etween-ch a nn el switch ing tra n sients w h e n in th e ch o pp ed mod e of operation . Α trigger- p ic k off stage at t h e output of t h e V ertical Switching circuit p rovid es α sam p le of th e dis p laye d signal(s) to t h e Trigger P ream p circuit .
T h e o u t p ut of th e Vertical Switc h ing circuit is con nected to t h e Vertical Output Am p lifier t h roug h th e Delay L ine . T h e V ertical Out p ut Am p lifier circuit p rovi d es t h e final am p lification for t h e signal b efore it is connecte d to the vertical d eflection p lates of t h e C R T . T h is circuit includes t h e BEAM F I N D ER switc h w h ic h com p resses t he vertical an d h orizo ntal deflection wit h in t h e viewing area to ai d in locating an off-screen dis p lay . T h e Trigger P ream p circuit p rovi d es am p lificatio n for t h e internal trigger signal selected by t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h . T h is internal trigger sig n al is selecte d from eit h er t h e C h a nn el 1 V ertical P ream p circuit or t h e V ertical Switc h ing circuit . O ut p ut from t h is circuit is co n nected to th e Α Trigger Generator circuit and t h e Β Trigger Generator circuit . T h e Α a n d Β Trigger Ge n erator circuits p rod uce an outp ut pulse w h ic h initiates t h e sweep sig n al pro d uced by t h e Α or Β Swee p Generator circuits . T h e in p ut signal to th e Α and Β Trigger Ge n erator circuits can be ind ivi d ually selecte d from th e i n ternal trigger sig n al from t h e Trigger P ream p circuit, an extern al signal ap p lied to t h e ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T connector, or α sam p le of t h e line voltage a pp lied to the instrument . E ach trigger circu it contains level, slo p e, cou p ling, a nd source controls. T h e Α Swee p Generator circuit p rod u ces α linear sawtoot h output signal w h en initiate d by t h e Α Trigger Generator circuit . T h e slo p e of th e sawtoot h p roduced by t h e Α Swee p Generator circuit is co n trolled by t h e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . T h e o p erati n g mod e of t h e Α Swee p Generator circuit is controlled b y th e Α S WEEP M OD E switc h . In t h e A U TO T R IG position, t h e absence of an ad eq uate trigger signal causes t h e swee p to free run . In t h e N O RM T R IG p osition, α h orizontal swee p is presented only w h en correctly triggered by an ade q uate trigger signal . T h e SI N G LE S WEEP p ositio n allows o n e (and only one) swee p to b e initiated after t h e circ u it is reset wit h t h e RE S E T button . T he Α Swee p Generator circuit also p rod u ces an un b lan k ing gate sig n al to unblan k t he C R T so t h e d is p lay can be p re-
Circuit Descri p tion-453Α/ R 453A
3- 2
Circuit Descri p tion-453Α/ R 453A calibration of t h e instrument and t h e com p ensation of sented . T h is gate signal is coi n ci d ent wit h th e sawtoot h p robes . T h e PR O BE L OO P p rovi d es an accurate current pro d uced by t h e Α Swee p Generator circuit . Α gate signal, source for calibration of current-measuring p robe systems . w h ic h is also coinci d ent wit h t h e sawtoot h , is available at t h e Α GAT E connector on t h e si d e panel . T h e Α Swee p Generator circuit also p ro d uces an alternate sync p ulse, w h ic h is connected to t h e V ertical Switc h ing circuit . T h is CI R C U IT O PER ATIO N pu lse switc h es t h e d is p lay betwee n c h annels at t h e end of eac h swee p w h en t h e M OD E switch is in t h e A L T p osition . General T h e Β Sweep Generator circuit is basically t h e same as t h e Α Swee p Generator circuit . H owever, t h is circuit only p ro d uces α sawtooth out p ut signal after α d elay time d etermined b y t h e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch and t h e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial . If t h e Β S WEEP MODE switc h is set to t h e Β STA R TS A F T ER D EL AY TIME p osition, t h e Β Swee p Generator begins to p ro d uce t h e swee p immed iately following t h e selecte d delay time . If t h is switc h is i n t he T R IGG E RA BLE A F T ER D EL AY TIME p osition, t he Β Swee p Generator circuit d oes not p rod uce α sweep until it receives α trigger p ulse from th e Β Trigger Generator circuit after t h e selected d elay time . Th e out p ut of eit h er th e Α or Β Swee p Generator circuit is am p lified by t h e H orizontal Am p lifier circuit to p ro d uce h orizontal d eflection for t h e C R T in all p ositions of t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h except Χ -Y . T h is circuit contains α 10 times magnifier to increase t h e swee p rate ten times in any Α or Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h position . Ot h er h orizontal d eflection signals can be connected to t h e H orizontal Am p lifier by using t h e Χ - Υ mode of o p eration . Wh en t h e Β SO UR C E switc h is set to ΙΝΤ , t h e Χ signal is connected to t h e H orizontal Am p lifier circuit t h roug h t h e C H 1 V ertical P ream p circuit, t h e Trigger P ream p circuit and t h e Β Trigger Generator circuit ( H O R IZ DIS PLAY switch set to Χ -Y, Β SO UR C E switc h set to ΙΝΤ , and t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h set to C H 1 O R Χ -Y) . In t h e ΕΧΤ or ΕΧΤ = 10 p osition of t h e Β SO UR C E switc h , t h e Χ signal is obtained from α signal connected to t h e Β ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ I NPU T connector . T h e Ζ Axis Am p lifier circuit determines t h e C R T intensity an d blank ing . T h e Ζ Axis Am p lifier circuit sums t h e current in p uts from th e I N T EN SITY control, V ertical Switc h ing circuit (ch o p pe d b lan k ing), Α an d Β Swee p Generator circuits (unblan k ing), and t h e external Ζ AXIS I NPU T bin d ing p ost . T h e out p ut level of t h e Ζ Axis Am p lifier circuit controls th e trace intensity t h roug h t h e C R T Circuit . T h e C R T Circuit provi d es t h e voltages and contains t h e controls necessary fo r o p eration of t h e cat h o d e-ray tube . T h e P ower Su pp ly circuit p rovi d es th e low-voltage power necessary for o p eration of th is instrument . T h is voltage is d istribute d to all of th e circuits in t h is instrument as s h ow n by t h e P ower Distrubution d iagram . T h e Calibrafor circ u it p roduces α sq uare-wave out p ut wit h accurate am p litu d e an d freq uency w h ic h can be used to c h eck t h e
Th is section p rovi d es α d etailed descri ption of t he electrical o p eration an d relationsh i p of t h e circuits in t h e 453 Α . T h e t h eory of o peration for circuits uni q ue to t h is instrument is described in d etail i n t h is d iscussion . Circu its w h ic h are commonly use d i n t h e electronics ind ustry are not d escribe d in d etail . If more information is desire d on th ese commonly used circuits, refer to t h e following textboo k s : Te k tronix Circuit Conce p ts Boo k s (ord er from your local Te k tronix F iel d Office or re p resentative) . Cat h o d e- R ay 062-0852-01 .
Tubes,
Te k tronix
P art
No .
H orizontal Am p lifier Circuits, Te k tronix P art No . 062-1144-00 . Oscillosco pe Trigger Circuits, Tektronix P art No . 0621056-00 .
P ower Su pp ly Circuits, Te k tronix P art No . 0620888-01 .
Swee p Generator Circuits, Te k tro n ix P art No . 0621098-01 . Vertical Am p lifier Circuits, Te k tro n ix P art No . 0621145-00 . Ph illi p Cutler, "Semiconductor M cGraw- H ill, N ew York , 1964 .
Circuit
Analysis",
L loyd Ρ . H u n ter (Ed .), " H an d boo k of Semicond uctor E lectronics", secon d edition, McGraw- H ill, N ew Yor k , 1962 .
J acob M illma n
and H erb ert Taub, " P ulse, Digital, and Switc h ing Waveforms", M cGraw- H ill, N ew Yor k , 1965 .
T h e following circuit a n alysis is written aroun d t h e d etailed block d iagrams w h ic h are given for eac h maj or circuit . T hese d etailed bloc k d iagrams give t h e names of t h e i nd ivi d ual stages wit h in t h e ma j or circuits a n d sh ow h ow t h ey are connected toget h er to form t h e maj or circuit . T h e bloc k diagrams also s h ow t h e in p uts and out p uts for eac h circuit an d t h e relations h i p of th e front- panel controls to th e indivi d ual stages . T h e circuit d iagrams from w h ic h t h e detailed bloc k diagrams are d erived are sh own in th e Diagrams section .
3-3
Circu it Descri p tio n-453 Α/ R 453A NOTE Α // references to direction of current in this manual are in terms of conventional current; i.e., from plus to minus.
CH A NNEL
1 VERTICA L PRE A MP
General In p ut signals for vertical d eflection on t h e C R T can be connected to t he C H 1 O R Χ connector . In t h e Χ -Υ mod e of o peratio n , th is in put signal p rovides t h e h orizo ntal (Xaxis) d eflection ( H O R IZ DIS PL AY switch set to Χ -Y, Β SO UR C E switc h set to ΙΝΤ , an d ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h set to C H 1 O R Χ ) . Th e C h a nnel 1 Vertical P ream p circuit p rovi d es control of in p ut coupling, vertical d eflection factor, balance, vertical p osition, a nd vertical gain . It also contains α stage to p rovi d e α sample of th e C h annel 1 i np ut signal to t h e Trigger P reamp circuit to p rovi d e inter n al triggering from th e C h annel 1 sig n al only . F ig . 3-2 sh ows α d etailed bloc k diagram of th e C h annel 1 V ertical P reamp circuit . Α sch ematic of t h is circuit is s h own on d iagram 1 at t h e rear of th is ma n ual . In p ut Cou p l i ng Input sig n als a pp lied to t h e C H 1 O R Χ con n ector can be AC-cou p le d , DC-co up le d , or inter n ally disco n necte d . Wh en In p ut Coupling switc h S1 is in t h e DC p osition, t he in p ut signal is cou p led directly to t h e Inp ut Atte n uator stage . In t h e AC position, th e in p ut signal p asses t h roug h ca p acitor C1 . T h is ca p acitor p revents t h e DC com ponent of t h e sig n al
from passing to t h e am p lifier . T h e G N D position o pens t h e sig n al path a nd t h e in put to t h e am p lifier is co n nected to groun d . T h is p rovides α grou nd refere n ce wit h out t h e need to d iscon nect th e applied sig n al from t h e C H 1 connector . Resistor R2, co n nected across th e in p ut coupling switc h , allows C1 to be prech arge d in th e G N D p osition so t h e trace remai n s on screen w h e n switc h ed to th e AC position wit h α h ig h DC level a pp lie d . In p ut Attenuator
Th e effective overall C h annel 1 d eflection factor of t h e 453Α is d etermine d by t h e C H 1 V O LTS/DI V switc h . In all p ositions of th e C H 1 VO L TS/DI V switc h above 20 m V, t h e basic deflection factor of t h e V ertical Deflectio n System is 20 millivolts p er d ivision of C R T d eflection . To i n crease t h is basic deflection factor to the values ind icated on t h e front panel, p recision attenuators are switc h ed into t h e circuit . In t h e 5 and 10 m V p ositions, in p ut attenuatio n is not used . Instead , t h e gain of th e F eed back Amplifier is c h anged to decrease th e d eflection factor (see F eed back Am p lifier d iscussio n ) . F or th e C H 1 VO L TS/DI V switch p ositions above 20 mV, t h e attenuators are switc h e d into t h e circuit singly or in p airs to prod uce t he vertical d eflection factor indicate d on t h e fro n t panel . T h ese attenuators are fre q uencycom pe n sate d voltage divi d ers . F or DC and low-frequency signals, t h ey are p rimarily resistance d ividers an d t h e voltage attenuation is d etermined by th e resista n ce ratio in t he circuit . T h e reactance of t h e ca pacitors in th e circuit is so h ig h at low fre q uencies th at t h eir effect is negligible . How-
S5
Ι R75 Q84, VA R
Fig . 3-2 . C h annel 1 Vertical Pream p d etailed bloc k diagram .
3-4
~rτ C h annel 1 sig n al to
η94,
Amplifier
Vertical Switch ing circ u it
Circuit Descri p tion-453Α/ R 453A
h ig h er fre q uencies, t h e reactance of t he capacitors d ecreases and t h e attenuator becomes primarily α εαραεitance voltage d ivider . ever, at
In add ition to provid ing constant attenuation at all frequencies wit h in t h e bandwi dt h of t h e instrument, t h e In put Attenuators are desig n ed to maintain th e same in put RC c h aracteristics (one mego h m Χ 20 p F) for each setting of t h e C H 1 V O L TS/DI V switc h . E ac h attenuator contains an ad j ustable series ca p acitor to p rovi de correct attenuation at h ig h -fre q uencies an d an ad j ustable s h unt ca pacitor to provi de correct in put ca pacitance .
selected to p rovi d e t h e same amplitude AC and DC signal at t h e base of Q33. C24 couples h ig h -freq uency i n formation to t h e j unction of R 25- R 26, th ereby reducing th e load i n g at t h e base of Q43.
F ee dbac k Am plifier
F eedbac k Am plifier Q34 an d Q54 c h anges t h e overall gain of t h e Ch annel 1 V ertical P ream p to provide t h e correct deflection factor in the 5 an d 10 mV positions of t he CH 1 VO L TS/DI V switc h . Gain of t h is stage is determined by t h e ratio of R46- R 50 to R 43, R 44, or R45 . In t h e 5 mV position of th e C H 1 V O L TS/DI V switch , t h e networ k C43A-C43 B -C43C-C43D-C43 E - L 43A- R 43A- R 43C- R 43 E is connecte d into t h e emitter circuit of Q34. T h e ratio beIn p ut Stage tween R 46- R 50 and R 43 provides α gain of about 10 . T h e C h annel 1 signal from t h e In put Attenuator is conC43A, C43C, L 43A, and R43C are ad ju stable to provi de nected to th e In p ut Stage t h roug h th e networ k C17-C18hig h -freq uency pea k ing for t h e networ k . In t h e 10 mV posiC20- R 16- R 17- R 18- R 19- R 20- R 21 . R 16, R 17, and R 20 protion, conditions are t h e same exce pt t h at t h e networ k vi de t h e input resistance for t h is stage. T h ese resistors are C44A-C44 B -C44C- L 44A- R 44A- R 44 B - R 44C is connected part of t h e attenuation networ k at all C H 1 V O L TS/DI V i n to t h e circuit in place of t h e previous networ k . The ratio switc h positio n s. V aria b le ca pacitor C17 ad j usts t h e basic between R 46-1350 and R 44 provi des α gain of about five in p ut time constant for α nominal value of one mego h m Χ times in t h is CH 1 V OLTS/DI V switc h position . C44C 20 picofarads . T h e divider action of R 16- R 17- R 20 allows fre an d R 44C p rovid e h ig h q uency pea k ing for t h is about 98%ο of DC an d low-frequency signals to pass to t h e network . In t h e 20 mV an d h ig h er C H 1 V O L TS/DI V gate of FET (field-effect transistor) Q23A . C18, wit h t h e switc h positions, t h e gain of t h e F ee dbac k Am p lifier is stray ca pacitance in t h e circuit, forms an AC divid er wh ic h about 2.5 as esta b lis h ed by t h e ratio between R 46- R 50 an d maintains t h is same voltage division for h ig h -freq ue n cy sigR45 . Ad j ustable ca pacitor C45A p rovides h ig h -fre que n cy nals . R 18 limits t h e current d rive to t h e gate of Q23A . pea k ing for th e F eedback Am plifier stage. C49 and R 49 Diode C R 18 protects t h e circuit by clam ping t h e gate of p rovi d e h ig h -fre quency d am ping for t h e circuit. As menQ23A at about -12 .5 volts if α h ig h -amplitu d e negative tioned previously, t h e ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ B A L ad j ustment is set signal is a pplied to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector . Over-voltage to provide zero volts at t h e emitter of Q34 wh en th e in put protection for h ig h -am plitu d e positive signals is provi d ed by is at zero volts. Since t h ere is no voltage difference across forward conduction of Q23A . T h is current pat h is t h roug h emitter resistor R 43, R44, or R45, c h a n ging th e value of R 23, L 23, C R 36, an d CR 37 . t h e resistance d oes not ch ange t h e current i n t h e circuit. T h erefore, t h e trace position will not ch ange wh en switch ing between t h e 5 mV , 10 mV , and 20 mV positions of t h e C H 1 V O L TS/DI V switc h if t h e ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ B A L FE T Q23 B is α constant current source for Q23A and control is correctly ad j usted . also provides tem perature compe n sation for Q23A . ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ B AL ad j ustment R 30 varies t h e gate level of Q23 B to provid e α zero-volt level at t h e emitter of Q34 wit h no signal a pp lied . W it h α zero-volt level at t h e emitter of Q34, V ertical position of t h e trace is determined by t h e t h e trace position will not c h ange w h en switc h ing between setting of P OSITIO N co n trol R 40 . T h is control c h anges t h e t h e 5, 10, a nd 20 mV positions of t h e CH 1 V O L TS/DI V current into t h e emitter of Q34, α low-impedance point, switc h . wh ic h results in negligible voltage c h ange at th is point . However, th e c h ange in current from t h e POSITIO N control pro d uces α resultant DC voltage at t h e output of t h e DC an d low-frequency signals are con n ected from t h e F eedbac k Am p lifier stage to c h ange t h e vertical p osition of source of Q23A to t h e F eed back Am p lifier th rough R 23, t h e trace. C H 1 P ositio n Center adj ustment R55 is ad j usted L 23, Q33, and R 39 . L 23 isolates t h e base of Q33 from t h e to provid e α centered display wh en t h e C h annel 1 P OSI source of FE T Q23A . Diodes C R 34-C R 35 an d CR 36-C R 37 ΤΙΟΝ control is centered (wit h α zero-volt DC i n put level) . limit t h e d ynamic range of t h e signal at t h e base of Q33 an d prevent t h e following stages from being d amaged by α large voltage swing at t h e source of Q23A . T h e signal pat h for Zener diode VR 53 provides α low-impedance current h ig h -fre q uency sig n als is t h roug h C23, Q43, and C39. H ig h source for Q54. V ariable ca p acitor C54 provid es feedbac k freq uency signals at th e emitter of Q43 are connected to from t h e collector to t h e base of Q54 for amplifier sta b ilit h e base of Q33 t h roug h C38 . T h is allows Q33 to be d riven zation . Th e output signal from t h e F ee dbac k Am p lifier at h ig h freq uencies wh ile preventing t h e base circuitry of stage is connected to th e P ara p h ase Am p lifier stage and t h e Q33 from ca pacitively loading t h e in put FE T, Q23A . C38 is C h annel 1 Trigger P ick off stage.
3-5
u it
Circ
Descri
ption -453Α/R453A
C hannel 1 Trigger P ίckoff Q84 and Q94 are co nnected as α common-emitter ph ase inverter (paraphase am plifier) to convert the single-end ed The signal at the collector of Q54 in the F ee dback In p ut signal to α push-pull output signal . Gai n of this stage Amplifier stage is connected to the Channel 1 Trigger P ic kis determined by the emitter degeneration . As t h e resistance off stage throug h C R58 and R59. This sam ple of the betwee n the emitters of Q84 and Q94 increases, emitter Channel 1 in put signal p rovides internal triggering from the egeneratio n increases also to result in less gain throug h the d Channel 1 signal or X-axis deflection for Χ-Υ operation. stage. GAI N ad justment R90 varies the resistance between Q63 is connected as an emitter follower to p rovide isolation the emitters to control the overall gai n of the Ch annel 1 between the Trigger P ream p circuit an d t he F ee dback AmVertical P rea p lifier stage. It also p rovides α minimum load for the Feedback Am plifier stage and α low output im ped ance to the C HANNEL 2 VERTICA L PREAMP Trigger P ream p circuit. C R58 p rovides thermal compensation for Q63. CH 1 Trigger DC L evel adj ustment R60 sets General the DC level at the base of Q63 for α zero-volt DC output level from the Trigger P reamp circuit when the Channel 1 The Channel 2 V ertical P reamp circuit is b asically the trace is centered vertically . Output from t h e Channel 1 same as t h e C hannel 1 V ertical P ream p circuit. Only the Trigger P ic koff stage is connecte d to th e Trigger P reamp differences between the two circuits are d escribed here . circ uit throug h ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h S230 B . P ortions of this circuit not describe d in the following d escriptio n o perate in the same ma n ner as for the Chan nel 1 V ertical Pream p circuit (corresponding circuit numbers Paraphase Amplifier assigned in the 100-199 range) . F ig . 3-3 shows α d etailed bloc k d iagram of the Channel 2 V ertical P ream p circuit. Α The output signal from the F eedback Am plifier stage is sc hematic of this circuit is shown on diagram 3 at the rear h P h h h connecte d to t e arap ase Am plifier stage t roug VA R of this manual . (variable) control R75. Wh en th e V AR co ntrol is set to the cali brate d position (fully clockwise), R75 is effectively by-passed and maximum signal current reac hes the b ase of F ee dback Amplifier Q84 . Switch S75, ganged with t he V A R control, is open Basically, the Channel 2 F eedb ac k Amplifier operates as and the UN CA L neon bulb is disconnected . As the V A R described for Channel 1 . H owever, the Channel 2 V ertical control is rotated counterclockwise from the calibrated P ream p circuit does not h ave α trigger p ic koff stage . To d etent, S75 is closed an d UN CA L light DS75 ignites to provide α load at the collector of Q154 similar to the load in d icate that the vertical deflection factor is uncalibrate d . the Channel 1 Trigger P ickoff stage p rovi d es at the collector Th e signal app lied to t h e base of Q84 is continuously red uced as the V A R control is rotated countercloc kwise . of Q54, C159 an d R159 are co nnected into the circuit.
S105
C hannel 2 1
,
ι ι ι
Signal Το Vertical Switch ing Circuit
Fig. 3-3. Chan nel 2 Vertical Preamp detaile d bloc k diagram. 3-6
ι ι ι ι
Circuit Description-453 Α/ R 453A
P ara ph ase
P ream p
Amplifier
Th e basic C h an n el 2
P ara ph ase
Am p lifier configuration
an d o p eration is t h e same as for C h annel 1 . H owever, INVER T switc h S195 h as b een a dd e d in t h e C h annel 2 circuit . T h is switc h allows th e d is p layed signal from C h annel 2 to b e inverte d . VER TICA L
SW ITC H I N G
General T h e V ertical Switc h ing circuit d etermines if t h e C H 1 and/or t h e C H 2 V ertical P reamp out p ut signal is con n ecte d to t h e V ertical Out p ut Am p lifier circuit (t h roug h t h e Delay L ine Driver and Delay L ine stages) . In t h e A LT an d C H O P p ositio n s of t h e M OD E switch , bot h ch annels are alternately dis p layed on α s h are d -time basis . F ig . 3-4 s h ows α d etailed b loc k diagram of th e Vertical Switc h ing circuit . Α sch ematic of th is circuit is s h own on d iagram 5 at t h e rear of t h is manual .
Dio d e Gates T h e Diod e Gates, consisting of four d iod es eac h , can be t h oug h t of as switch es w h ich allow eit h er of th e V ertical
out p ut signals to be cou p led to t h e
out p ut and
V ertical Outp ut
C R 204 control t h e Channel C R 206 t h roug h C R 209 control the Ch annel
Am p lifier . CR 201 t h roug h
1
2
out p ut . T h ese d io d es are in turn controlled by t h e Switc h ing Multivibrator for dual-trace dis p lays, or by t h e MOD E switc h for single-trace displays .
C H 1 . In t h e C H 1 position of t h e M OD E switc h , -12 volts is a pp lied to t h e j unction of C R 207-C R 208 in t h e C hannel 2 Dio d e Gate t h roug h R 227 (see sim p lifie d d ia gram in F ig . 3-5) . T h is forwar d biases C R 207-C R 208 and reverse biases C R 206-C R 209, si n ce th e in p ut to t h e DelayL ine Driver stage is at ab out -5 .8 volts . C R 206-C R 209 bloc k h e C h annel 2 signal so it ca n not pass to t h e DelayL ine Driver stage . At t h e same time, i n h e C h annel 1 Dio d e Gate, C R 202-C R 203 are connected to ground t h roug h 8212 . C R 202-C R 203 are h eld reverse biased w h ile C R 201-C R 204 are forward biased . T h erefore, t h e C h annel 1 signal p asses to t h e Delay- L ine Driver stage .
t
t
C H 2 . In t h e C H 2 p osition of t h e M OD E switc h , t h e above con d itions are reversed . C R 202-C R 203 are connected to -12 volts th roug h R 217 an d C R 207-C R 208 are con n ected to groun d t h roug h R 222 . T h e C h annel 1 Diode Gate block s t h e signal an d th e C h annel 2 Diode Gate allows it to p ass .
N ormal Trigger Pick off N etwor k
Channel l
signal from
N ormal 0- (composite) trigger sign al to Trigger Pream p
Channel l
V ertical Pream p
DelayL i n e Driver Q24, Q294
Channel 2
sig n al from
V ertical signal to Delay L ine
Channel 2
V ertical Pream p
Altern ate trace sy n c pu lse fro m 0 Α Sweep Ge n erator
Ch o p pe d blan k i n g to Ζ Axis Am p lifier
01
F ig . 3-4 . V ertical Switch ing d etailed bloc k d iagram .
3-7
Circuit Description-453Α/ R 453A
Ch ann el 1 Dio d e Gate *ΟC R 202 CR 201
Sign al i n fro m
C h a n nel 1 Ve r tical P ream p
To
Delay- L i ne Driver
C R 206 V CR 207
Signal in from C han n el 2 Vertical P reamp
R 212
R 222
Ζ R 211
R217 Ζ
-12 ν
\
\_ - -
R 221 Ζ
S230A
Mn nF 1-- _ _ -/
Ζ R227
Signal p at h Reverse-biased d iode
-12 ν
F ig . 3-5 . E ffect of Dio d e Gates on sig n al path (simplified Ve r tical Switch i ng d iagram) . Co n ditio n s sh own for C H 1 p osition of M OD E switc h . Switc h i ng
M UIt i V i brd tor
Q234 is off and h ol d s t h e emitter of Q215 more negative t h an t h e emitter of Q225 . Wh en b ot h Q215 and Q225 were off t h e voltage at t h eir b ases b ecame a p p roximately e q ual . Now w h en Q234 comes back on, th e transistor wit h th e most negative emitter will start conducting first wit h th e resulting negative movement at its collector h olding th e
A LT . In t h is mo d e of o peratio n , t h e Switc h ing M ultivibrator operates as α bistable multivibrator . In t h e A L T position of t h e M OD E switc h , -12 volts is a p p lie d to t h e emitter of Alternate Trace Switc h i n g Am p lifier stage Q234 by t h e M OD E switc h . Q234 is forward b iased to su p ply other transistor off . T h e cond itions d escri b e d p reviously are current to th e "on" Switch i n g- Μυ ltivi b rator transistor reversed ; now t he Ch annel 1 Diode Gate is reversed b iased th roug h R 234, an d C R 218 or C R 228 . F or exam p le if and th e C h annel 2 signal passes t h roug h th e C h a nn el 2 Q225 Dio is con d ucting, current is su pp lie d to Q225 th roug h d e Gate . R 228 . Th e current flow th rough collector resistors R 221 and R 222 d ro p s t h e C R 207-C R 208 cat h o d e level negative R eference F eed back stage Q253 p rovid es common-mo d e so t h e C h annel 2 Dio d e Gate is block ed as for C h annel 1 voltage feedbac k from t h e Delay- L ine Driver stage to allow signal passes t h ro u g h t h e C h annel 1 only o peration . T h e t h e d io d e gates to be switc h ed wit h α minimum amplitu de Dio d e Gate to t h e Delay- L i n e Driver stage . switc h ing signal . T h e emitter level of Q253 is co n nected to t h e j unction of t h e Switc h ing Mu ltivibrator collector resis tors, R 211- R 212 and R 221- R 222 t h roug h C R 213 or T he alternate-trace sy n c p ulse is a p p lied to Q234 p ulse of eac h swee p . T h is negative-going sync C R 223 . T h e collector level of t h e "on" Switc h i ng M ultiat t h e end vibrator transistor is negative an d eit h er C R 213 or C R 223 is momentarily interru p ts t h e current t h roug h Q234 an d bot h forwar d biase d . Th is clam ps t h e cathod e level of t h e Q215 a nd Q225 are turne d off. Wh en Q234 turns on again forwar d -biased sh unt d iod es in t h e a p plica b le Diode Gate after th e alternate-trace sync p ulse, t h e c h arge on C218 d etermi n es w h eth er Q215 or Q225 conducts . F or exam p le, a b out 0 .5 volt more negative t h a n t h e emitter level of Q253 . T h e level at t h e emitter of Q253 follows th e average w h en Q225 was con d ucting, C218 was ch arged negatively voltage level at t he emitters of t h e Delay- L ine Driver stage . on t h e C R 218 si d e to t h e emitter level of Q215 and p ositively on t h e C R 228 si d e . T h is c h arge is stored w h ile T h e sh unt d io d es are clamped n ear t h eir switc h ing level and 3- 8
Circuit Descri ption-453 Α/ R 453A t h erefore t h ey
can be switc h e d very fast wit h α minimum
am p litu d e switc h ing sig n al . Th is maintains about t he same
current th roug h th e Diod e Gate sh unt d io d es so t h ey can be wit switc h ed h α minimum am p litu d e switc h ing signal, regar d less of t h e d eflection signal at th e anodes of t h e sh unt diodes .
CHO P. In t h e C H O P position of t h e M OD E switc h , t h e Switch ing M ultivi b rator free ru n s as an astable multivi b rator at a bout α 500- kH z rate . Th e emitters of Q215 an d Q225 are connected to -12 volts t h roug h R 218 an d R228 . At t h e time of turn-on, one of t h e transistors begins to con d uct ; for exam p le, Q225 . Q225 con d ucts t h e C h annel 2 current a nd p revents t h e C h annel 2 signal from reac h ing t h e Delay- L ine Driver stage . M eanw h ile, t h e C h a n nel 1 Dio d e Gate p asses t h e C h an n el 1 signal to th e Delay- L ine Driver .
-12 volts a pp lied to t h eir cat h odes t h roug h R 260 and R 270. Since both signals are a p plied to t h e Delay- L ine
Driver stage, th e out p ut signal is t h e algebraic sum of t h e signals on bot h Ch annel 1 and 2 . Delay- L ine Driver Out p ut of th e Diod e Gate stage is a pp lied to Delay-L ine Driver stage Q284 and Q294 . Q284 and Q294 are connected as o p erational amplifiers wit h feed bac k provided by R268-13269 and R278- R 279 an d th e d elay-li n e com pensation networ k . T h e d elay-line com p ensation networ k , C261C262-C263-C264-C265-C266- R 261- R 262- R 264- R 265, provides h ig h -fre q uency com p e n sation for th e Delay L ine . R289-C289 in t h e collector circuit of Q284-Q294 im p rove t h e h ig h -fre q uency reverse termination of t h e Delay L ine . Out p ut of t h e Delay- L ine Driver stage is connected to t h e Vertical Out p ut Am p lifier t h roug h th e Delay L ine .
T h e frequency-determining com ponents in th e C H O P mod e are C218- R 218- R 228 . Switc h ing action occurs as N ormal Trigger Pic koff N etwor k follows : Wh en Q225 is on, C218 attem pts to ch arge to -12 volts t h roug h R 218 . T h e emitter of Q215 slowly goes trigger The signal for N O RM trigger o peratio n is toward -12 volts as C218 c h arges . T h e base of Q215 is h el d o btained from t h e collector of Q284 . N ormal Trigger DC at α negative p oint determine d b y voltage divi d er Level adj ustment R285 sets t h e DC level of t h e normal R215- R 224 between -12 volts a n d th e collector of Q225 . trigger out p ut signal so th e sweep is triggere d at th e zeroWh en t he emitter voltage of Q215 reac h es α level slig h tly level of th e d is p layed sig n al w h en t h e Triggering LEVEL more negative t h an its base, Q215 cond u cts . The collector control is set to 0 . T h e normal trigger signal is connected to level of Q215 goes negative a nd p ulls t h e base of Q225 t h e Trigger P ream p th roug h S230B . R294 a n d R295 pronegative also, t h roug h d ivider R214- R 225, to cut Q225 off as p rovid e d to Q284 by vid e t h e same DC load forr allow Q215 to conduct . T h is actio n switc hes t h e Diode the N ormal Trigger P ick off Network . Gate stage to connect t h e opposite half to t h e Delay- L ine Driver stage . Again C218 begins to c h arge towar d s -12 volts but t h is time th roug h 8228 . T h e emitter of Q225 VERTICA L O UT PU T A MPL I F I ER slowly goes negative as C218 ch arges, until Q225 turns on . Q215 s h uts off and th e cycle b egins agai n . General
Th e Vertical Out p ut Am p lifier circuit p rovi d es th e final amplification for t h e vertical deflection signal . T h is circuit Diod es C R 218 a n d C R 228 h ave no effect in th e C H O P i n clud es th e Delay L i n e a n d t h e BEAM F I N D ER switch . mod e . Q253 o perates th e same in C H O P as i n AL T, to The BEAM F I N D ER switc h com p resses an overscanned d is allow t h e Diode Gates to be switc h ed wit h α minimum play wit h in t h e viewing area w h en pressed in . F ig . 3-6 signal level . s h ows α d etailed bloc k d iagram of th e V ertical Out p ut Am p lifier circuit . Α sch ematic of th is circuit is s h own on d iagram 6 at th e rear of t h is manual . T h e C h o pp e d Blan k i n g Amplifier stage, Q244, p rovi d es an output p ulse to th e Ζ Axis Amplifier w h ich blan k s out th e transition between t h e C h a n nel 1 trace and t h e C h a nn el Delay L ine 2 trace . Wh en the Switch ing M ultivi b rator c h anges states, th e current t h roug h Τ 241 momentarily c h anges . Α negative Delay L ine D L 301 p rovid es a pp roximately 140 ηαηο pu lse is applied to t h e b ase of Q244, to t u rn it off . T h e second s d elay for t h e vertical sig n al to allow t h e Swee p width of t h e p ulse at t h e base of Q244 is determined by Generator circuits time to initiate α sweep b efore t he vertiR 241 and C241 . Q244 cli p s t he signal ap p lied to its base, cal signal reac h es t h e vertical deflection p lates . T h is allows and t h e p ositive-going out pu t p ulse, w h ic h is coinci d e n t t h e i n strument to d is p lay the lea d ing ed ge of t h e signal wit h trace switc h ing, is a pp lied to t h e Ζ Axis Am p lifier originating t h e trigger p ulse w hen using internal triggering . circuit t h roug h R 245 . ADD . In t h e ADD position of t h e M OD E switc h , t h e Diode Gate stage allows bot h signals to pass to t h e DelayL ine Driver stage . T h e Diod e Gates are bot h h eld on by
P h ase Eq ualizer N etwor k
T h e Ph ase E qualizer N etwor k is com p rised of L 3011_302-1-311-C301-C302-C311-C312 . T h is networ k com pe n 3-9
Circuit Description -453A/R453A
Vertical deflection signal to vertical deflection plates
Vertical signal from Delay- L i n e Driver
Fig . 3-6 . Vertical O ut p ut Amplifier detailed bloc k diagram . sates for t h e p h ase distortion of t h e Delay L ine . C303-13303 and C313-13313 i n series wit h th e base-emitter resistance of Q304 and Q314 p rovi d e t h e forward termination for t h e Delay L i n e . Outp ut Am p lifier Q304 and Q314 are connecte d as common-base am p lifiers to p rovi d e α low i np ut im pedance to p ro perly terminate t h e Delay L ine (along wit h t h e Phase Eq ualizer N etwork ) . It also provid es isolation between the Delay L ine and th e following stages .
T h e out p ut of Q304 an d Q314 is connecte d to t h e bases of 0324 an d Q334 . T h e n etwor k C326-C327-C328-C336R328 provi d es h ig h -fre q ue n cy p ea k ing to com pe n sate for t h e ca p acitive loading of t h e d eflection p lates on t h e out p ut stage . C328, C336, an d R328 are ad j usta b le to p rovi d e o p tim u m res p onse . BEAM F I N D ER switc h S330 red uces t h e q uiescent current of Q324 and Ο 334, w h en p resse d , to com p ress an off-screen d is p lay wit h in t h e graticule area . N ormally, t h e collector current for Q324 an d Q334 is su pp lie d th ro u g h R 321, R322 an d t h e parallel combination of R323 a n d R333 . Wh en S330 is p resse d , -12-volts is connected to t h e collector circuit of Q324 an d Q334 t h roug h R 332 . T h is red uces t h e collector p otential of Ο324 an d Q334 to limit t h eir dynamic range an d com p ress t h e disp lay vertically wit h in t h e graticule area . Alt h oug h t h is com p resse d d is p lay is nonlinear, it p rovi d es α met h od of locating α signal th at is off screen vertically d ue to incorrect positioning or deflection factor,
w h en large signals d eflect t h e d is p lay off screen . Τ 357 p rovi d es h ig h -frequ e n cy balance for t h e Out p ut Am p lifier stage . Q364 an d Q374 p rovide t h e out p ut signal voltage to drive t h e C R T vertical d eflection p lates . LR 367 and LR 377 provid e d am p ing for t h e lea d s connecting t h e output signal to t h e deflection p lates .
T R IGG ER
PRE A MP
General T h e Trigger P ream p circuit am p lifies t h e internal trigger signal to t he level necessary to d rive t h e Α and Β Trigger Generator circuits . In put signal for t h e Trigger P reamp cir cuit is eith er α sam p le of t h e signal a p p lied to C h annel 1 or α sam p le of t h e com p osite vertical signal from t h e V ertical Switc h ing circuit . F ig . 3-7 sh ows α detailed b lock d iagram of t h e Trigger P ream p circuit . Α sc h ematic of t h is circuit is shown on diagram 7 at t h e rear of th is manual .
In p ut C i rcu i try
T h e internal trigger signal from t h e Vertical Deflection System is co n nected to t h e Trigger P reamp t h roug h ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h S230 B . Wh en th e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h is in t h e N O RM p osition, t h e trigger signal is α sam p le of t h e composite vertical signal in t h e Vertical Switc h ing circuit . T h is signal is ob tained from t h e collector of Q284 an d is α sam p le of th e d isp layed c h annel (or c h annels for d ual-trace o peration) . Since t h e signal source follows t h e dual-trace switc h i ng stage, t h e N O RM trigger signal also includes t h e c h o pp ed switc h ing transients w h en o perating in th e C H O P mo d e . Wh en t he ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h is in t he N O RM position, t h e C H 1 lig h ts DS400 and DS401 are d isconΟ 344 an d Q354 am p lify t h e out p ut of Q324 an d Q334 . n ected . Also, t h e sam p le of th e C h annel 1 signal is conT h e sig n al at th e collectors of 0344 an d Ο 354 is a pp lied to d to th e C H 1 O U T co nn ector . T h is output signal can Q374, tnecte h e out p ut tra n sistors, Q364 and t h roug h be use d to monitor C h annel 1 or it can be use d to casca d e C344- R 344- VR 344, C354- R 354- VR 354, and Τ 357 . VR 344 wit h C h annel 2 to p rovi d e α one millivolt/ d ivision minimum and VR 354 p revent saturation of Q344 and Q354 to imp lifier circuit deflection factor (wit h re d uced bandwidth ) . prove th e recovery of th e Vertical Out p ut Am 3- 1 0
Circuit Descri p tion-453 Α / R 453A S230 B ΙΝΤ T R IG Ι Ι
F rom Q63, C h 1 Vertical Pream p
F ro m Q284, Vertical Switc h i n g
Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι
I nter nal trigger signal to Α Trigger Ge n erator Internal trigger sign al to Β Trigger Ge n erato r DS400
DS401
Ι
Ι N O RM
ι
CΗ 1 ( Α Triggeri n g)
ςΗ 1 Ι ( Β Triggering)
F ig . 3-7 . Trigge r P rea m p d etaile d b lock d iagram .
In t h e C H 1 O R Χ -Υ p osition of t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h , t h e internal trigger signal is obtained from t h e emitter of Q63 in t h e C H 1 V ertical P ream p circuit . Now, t he internal trigger signal is α sam p le of only th e signal a pp lie d to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector . T h e CH 1 lig h ts are turned on to in d icate t h at t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG switch is in t h e C H 1 O R Χ -Υ p osition and t h e C H 1 O U T connector is d isco n nected from t h e circuit .
converts t h e trigger voltage signal at its base to α current
d rive for th e remain d er of t h e Trigger P ream p . C R 408 in t h e emitter circuit of Q404 provid es t h ermal com p ensation for th e am p lifier .
T h e signal current at t h e collector of Q404 is connected to t h e base of Q414 . Q413, Q414, an d Q423 are connecte d as α curre n t- d riven, voltage-out p ut o p erational am p lifier . The am p lified signal at t h e collector of Q414 is connecte d R402, R 403, an d R 404 terminate th e coaxial cables d irectly to th e base of Q413, an d to t h e base of Q423 from t h e trigger p ick off stages to p rovide α constant load throug h zener d iod e VR 421 . T h is ze n er diode p rovides α for t h ese stages . In t h e N O RM position of t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG DC voltage dro p w h ile t h e signal is connected to t h e b ase of switc h , t h e N O RM trigger signal from t h e V ertical Q423 wit h minimum attenuation . 0413 and Q423 are conSwitc h ing circuit is terminate d at th e in put to t h e am p lifier nected as emitter followers in t h e com p lementary symby R 404 . T h e C H 1 O R Χ - Υ trigger signal from t he C H 1 metry am p lifier configuration . T h is configuration overV ertical P ream p circu h is terminated at t h e C H 1 O U T comes th e basic limitation of emitter followers ; inability to connector by R 402 . I n t h e C H 1 O R Χ -Υ p osition, t h e C H rovide eq ual resp onse to bot h p ositive- an d negative-going p 1 O R Χ - Υ trigger signal is terminated at t h e in p ut to t h e p ortions of α signal . T h is is remed ied in t h is configuration am p lifier b y R 404, and t h e N O RM trigger signal is terminaby using an ΝΡΝ transistor for one emitter follower, 0413, ted by R 403 . and α ΡΝΡ transistor for t h e ot h er emitter follower, Q423 . Since Q413 is an ΝΡΝ transistor, it res pond s best to positive-going signals and Q423, being α ΡΝΡ transistor Amplifier Circuitry respo nd s best to negative-going signals . T h e result is α cirT h e internal trigger signal selected by t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG cuit w h ic h h as eq ually fast res p onse to bot h p ositive- a n d switc h is connecte d to t h e base of Q404 . Transistor Q404 negative-going trigger signals w h ile maintaining α low outΑ
3- 1 1
Circuit Description -453A/ R453A line, and external . Α fourth position of the Α SO UR CE switch p rovi d es 10 times atte nuation for th e external trigger sig n al .
put im p e d ance . Feed bac k from the out p ut of the Trigger P ream p circuit is connected to the base of Q414 th roug h R 419. This feedback provides more linear o peration . Total overall gain of the Trigger P ream p is about 10 . The am p lified internal trigger signal is connecte d to the Α a nd Β SO UR CE switches throug h R 427 and R 429 . Α
The internal trigger sign al is obtained from the Vertical Deflection System th roug h t he Trigger P ream p circuit . Th is signal is α sam p le of the signal(s) a pp lied to the CH 1 O R Χ an d /or C H 2 O R Υ connectors . Furt her selectio n of the internal trigger source is p rovide d by the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch to p rovide the internal trigger signal from b ot h c han nels or from C hannel 1 only (see Trigger P ream p d iscussion for details) .
T RIGG ER G ENER ATO R
General The Α Trigger Generator circuit pro d uces trigger p ulses to start the Α Sweep Generator circuit. These trigger pulses are d erived either from th e internal trigger signal from t h e Vertical Deflection System, an external signal connected to th e ΕΧΤ TR IG I NPU T connector, or α sam p le of the line voltage a pp lied to the instrument . Controls are p rovid ed in th is circuit to select trigger level, slo p e, cou p ling, and source . Fig. 3-8 shows α d etaile d block d iagram of the Α Trigger Generator circuit. Α sc hematic of th is circuit is shown on d iagram 8 at the rear of th is ma nual .
Th e line trigger is obtained from voltage d ivi d er R 1104R 1105 in the P ower Su pp ly circuit. This sample of the line fre q uency, about 1 .5 volts RM S, is cou p led to the Α Trigger Generator in the L I NE p osition of the Α SO UR CE switch. The Α CO UPLI NG switch should not be in the LF REJ position wh en usin g this trigger source . E xternal trigger signals app lie d to the Α ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T connector can be used to p roduce α trigger in the ΕΧΤ and ΕΧΤ - 10 positions of the Α SO UR CE switch. In put resistance (DC) is about one mego hm in both exter-
Trigger Source The Α SO UR CE switch, S430, selects th e source of th e Α trigger signal . Three trigger sources are available ; internal,
Pulse S haper Q484
S435
I Trigge r Τ D -ON C R 475
Pu lse
Am p lifier 0473
S430 SO UR C E
Α Trigger signal from Trigge r Pream p
ΙΝΤ 1
Ι C435 AC Ι
C436 L INE *__--0 Li ne trigger signal ΕΧΤ from Power Supply__Q ΕΧΤ - 10
I nput Stage
LF ρ ,R EJ
ο DC
0443,Q453
R 460
ιενει
Slope Comparator 0454, 0464
?F~
S455
F ig . 3-8. Α Trigger Ge nerator detailed block diagram .
3- 1 2
ι ι ι
A uto Mu ltivi brator 0485, 42494,
Q495
Trigger pulse
to Α Sweep Gen erator
Auto gate
to Α
Sweep Ge nerator
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι '
Circuit Descri ption-453Α/R453A ηαΙ p ositions . H owever, in t he LF REJ positio n of t he Α CO UPL I N G switch , th e med ium and h ig h -fre quency resistance d ro ps to about 90 kilohms d ue to the add ition of C436-R 436 in t he circuit . In the ΕΧΤ - 10 p osition, α 10 times freque ncy compensated attenuator is connected into the in put circuit. This attenuator reduces the in put signal am plitude 10 times to provi de more Α LEVEL control range while maintaining the one-megoh m Χ20 pF i np ut R C characteristics. Trigger Coupling T he Α CO UPL I N G switch offers α means of acce pting or rejecting certai n frequency components of the trigger signal. In the AC and LF REJ positions, th e DC component of the trigger signal is bloc ked by cou pling ca pacitors C435 or C436 . In the AC positio n , freque n cy components below about 30 h ertz are atte n uated . In the LF REJ position, freq uency components below about 30 k ilohertz are atte nuated . T he HF REJ position attenuates h ig h-frequency components of the triggering signal . The trigger signal is AC cou pled to t h e in p ut, atte nuating signals below about 30 h ertz an d a bove about 50 kilohertz . The DC position provi d es eq ual cou pling for all signals from DC to 60 megahertz .
wh ich t he sweep is triggere d . The refere n ce voltage for the comparator is provided by Α LEVEL control R 460 a nd Α Trigger L evel Center adjustment R 462 . The Α Trigger L evel Center ad justment sets the level at the base of Q464 so the d is play is triggered at the zero-volt DC level of the incoming trigger signal when t he Α LEVEL co ntrol is centered . The Α LEVEL control varies the base level of Q464 to select the point on the trigger signal where triggeri ng occurs . R458 establis hes the emitter current of Q454 and Q464 . The transistor with t he most p ositive base controls conduction of the comparator . F or example, assume that the trigger signal from the In put Stage is positive going and Q454 is forward biased . The increased cu rrent flow through R458 produces α larger voltage drop, and t he emitters of both Q454 an d Q464 go more positive . Α more positive voltage at the emitter of Q464 reverse b iases this transistor, since its base is held at the voltage set by the Α LEVEL control, and its collector current decreases. At the same time, Q454 is forward b iased a n d its collector current increases. N otice th at t h e signal currents at the collectors of Q454 an d Q464 are op posite in p h ase. The swee p can be triggered from eith er the negative-going or positive-going slope of the in put trigger signal by p roducing the trigger p ulse from either the signal at the collector of Q464 for - slo pe operation or the signal at the collector of Q454 for + slope operation. Th is selection is made b y SLOPE switch S455 .
In put Stage T he trigger signal from the Α CO UPL I N G switch is connected to the In put Stage th roug h t he networ k C440-R 438R439- R440- R 441 . R438- R439 provide the in put resistance for th is stage. The voltage-d ivider action of R438- R439 allows about 98% of DC or low freq uency signals app lied to R438 to be available at the j unction of R438 an d R 439 . C440 along with the stray ca pacitance in the circuit forms an AC d ivider wh ic h maintains about th is same voltage d ivision for h ig h -freq uency signals. R 440 limits the current d rive to the gate of FE T Q443 . Diode C R441 p rotects the circuit by clamping the gate of Q443 at about -12 .5 volts if α h ig h -am plitude negative signal is app lied to the ΕΧΤ T R IG INPUT connector. Over-voltage protection for h ig ham plitude positive sign als is p rovided by th e forward conduction of FE T Q443 . Q443 is connected as α source follower to p rovide α hig h in put im pedance and α low output im ped ance . As α result, this stage p rovi d es isolation between the Α Trigger Generator circuit and the trigger signal source . The output signal from Q443 is connected to the Slope Com parator stage throug h emitter follower Q453 . Diod e CR 449, C R 459, and VR 460 p rovide protection for the Slope Comparator stage transistors, Q454 and Q464 . Slope Comparator Q454 an d Q464 are connected as α d ifference am p lifier (com parator) to p rovid e selection of the slope and level at
Wh en th e Α LEVEL control is set to 0 (midra n ge), the base of Q464 is at about one volt positive, whic h correspon ds to α zero-volt level at the in put to this circuit (wit h correct calibration) . The base-emitter d ro p of Q464 sets t he common emitter level of Q454-Q464 to about +ρ.3 volt . Since the base of Q454 must be about 0 .65 volt more positive than the emitter before it can cond uct, the com parator switches arou nd the zero-volt level of the trigger signal (zero-volt level on the trigger signal corres pon d s to about one volt p ositive at th is p oint) . As the Α LEVEL co ntrol is turned clockwise toward +, the voltage at the base of Q464 b ecomes more positive . Th is increases the current flow throug h R 458 to p roduce α more p ositive voltage on the emitters of both Q454 an d Q464 . Now the trigger signal must rise more positive before Q454 is biased on . The resulta nt C RT d isp lay starts at α more positive p oint on the displaye d signal . Wh en the Α LEVEL control is in t h e region, the effect is the opposite, to p ro d uce α resultant C R T d is play wh ic h starts at α more negative point on th e trigger signal . The slope of the in put sign al wh ich triggers the Α sweep is d etermined by Α SLO PE switch S455 . Wh en the Α S LOPE switch is set to the - p osition, the collector of Q454 is connected to the +12-volt su pp ly throug h C R 456 an d R 467 . The anode of CR 466 is ground ed an d it is re-' verse biased . Now the collector current of Q464 must flow th roug h CR 465, R459, the p arallel combination C R475 and R 468- R 469- L469, and R467 to the +12-volt su pply 3-13
Circuit Descri ption-453A/R453A (see F ig . 3-9) . Since t h e out p ut p ulse from t h e Α Trigger o p erates in its low-voltage state . T h e current from one of Generator circuit is d erived from t h e negative-going portion t h e transistors in t h e Slo pe Com p arator stage is diverted of the signal a pp lied to t h e Trigger TD stage, t h e swee p is th roug h t h e Trigger TD stage by t h e Α SL O PE switc h . As triggere d on th e negative-going p ortion of t h e in put trigger t h is current increases d ue to α ch ange in t h e trigger signal, tunnel signal (signal a pp lied to Trigger TD stage is in p h ase with d io d e C R 475 switch es to its h igh -voltage state . L 469 th e in p ut signal for - slo p e triggering) . Wh en t h e Α SL O PE o pp oses t h e su dd en c h ange in current, w h ich allows more switc h is set to +, con d itions are reversed (see F ig . 3-10) . current to p ass t h roug h CR 475 and switc h it more q uick ly . As t h e current flow sta b ilizes, L 469 again conducts t h e Q464 is connected to t h e +12-volt su pp ly t h roug h C R 466 and R 467 . T h e anode of C R 456 is groun d e d to d ivert t h e maj or part of t h e current . H owever, t h e current t h roug h collector current of Q454 t h roug h t h e Trigger TD stage . C R 475 remains h ig h enoug h to hold it in its h ig h -voltage state . T h e circuit remains in t h is con d ition until t he current T h e signal a pp lied to t h e Trigger TO stage is now 180 ° out of p h ase wit h t h e in p ut trigger signal, so t h e swee p is trigfrom the Slo pe Com p arator stage d ecreases d ue to α c h ange gere d on t h e p ositive-going p ortion of th e in p ut signal . in t h e trigger signal a pp lie d to th e in put . T h en, t he current t h roug h C R 475 d ecreases an d it reverts to its low-voltage state . Trigger TD Pulse Am p l i f i er T h e Trigger TO stage s h apes t h e out p ut of t h e Slo pe Com parator to p rovi d e α trigger p ulse wit h α fast lead ing T h e trigger signal from t h e Trigger TO stage is connected ed ge . Tunnel d io d e C R 475 is q uiescently biased so it to t h e base of P ulse Am p lifier Q473 t h roug h R 472 . T h e
+12 V S455
S L QPE
-
Ι
R 467
- - -Ι
+75 V
R 473
C467
Ι
C473 ο
R 468
~CR 475
~
C466
-0 ΤΡ475 ρ L 469
R 469
R459
Av\A/--
I
Ι
: 5
C R 456
δ*
Q
ά
C R 455
Q473
R 472 ~.Υ
R 471
C R 466
CR 465
C u rrent pat h Reverse-biased d io de R 453 -12 V
F ig . 3-9 . Trigger p at h for negative-slope triggering (simplifie d Α Trigger Generator diagram) . 3- 1 4
Circuit Descri p tion-453A/ R 453A trigger p ulse at t h is p oint is basically α negative-going p ulse + ρ .5 volt . Α simultaneous negative-going p ulse wit h t he wit h α fast rise . T h e wi d t h of t he p ulse d epen d s upon t h e same wid th as t h e trigger p ulse is available at th e emitter of waves h a p e of th e in p ut signal an d t h e setting of t h e Α 0473 . T h is p ulse is connecte d to t h e Auto P ulse Am p lifier L E VEL control . Q473 is connecte d as an am p lifier wit h t h e stage . p rimary of p ulse transformer Τ 474 p rovi d ing t h e maj or collector loa d . T h e negative-going p ulse at t h e base of Q473 Auto Pulse Am p lifier d rives it into h eavy con d uction and t h e resulting current T h e negative-going trigger pulse from t h e emitter of increase of Q473 flows th roug h Τ 474, R474, Q473, C473, Q473 is connecte d to t h e base of Q484 th roug h R 481 . T h is and C467 . Due to t h e sh ort time constant of t h e RC netstage is similar to t h e P ulse Am p lifier stage . In d uctor L 484 wor k involving C473, t h e current of Q473 q uic k ly returns p rovi d es t h e collector load for t h is stage . T h e positive-going to t h e level d etermined by 8473 . T h e resultant signal at t h e p ortion of t h e trigger p ulse is cou p led to t h e Auto M ulticollector of Q473 is α p ositive-going fast-rise p ulse wit h t h e vibrator stage th roug h C R 484 . C R 483 clam p s t h e collector widt h d etermined by t h e time constants of t h e RC networ k of Q484 at about -0 .5 volt to eliminate negative transients . in t h e circuit . Τ 474 inverts th e out p ut p ulse to p ro d uce α negative-going trigger p ulse w h ic h is coinci d ent wit h t h e rise of t h e out p ut signal from t h e Trigger TD stage . T h is Auto M ultivibrator negative-going trigger p ulse is connected to t h e Α Swee p Generator circuit t h roug h C476- R 476 . C R 474 limits t h e T h e basic configuration of t h e Auto M ultivibrator stage collector of Q473 from going more positive t h an about is α monostable multivibrator ma d e up of Q485 an d Q495 .
+12 V
+7ς V R 473
R469 ~
~ ι 469
R 459
R 472
0473
R 471 C R 456
_V*
\,/
Ι
CR 455
C R 466
C R 465
Cu r rent pat h
R everse-biase d d iode R 453
-12
F ig .
V
3-10 . Trigger
pat h
for
p ositive-slo pe
triggeri n g (sim p lified Α Trigger Ge n erator diagram) .
3- 1 5
Circuit Descri ption-453Α/R453A
T his stage pro d uces th e control gate for th e auto trigger
circuits located in the Α Swee p Generator circ u it . Under q uiescent con d itio ns (no trigger signal), t he base of Q495 is n ear zero volts. The base of Q485 is h el d at about -0 .65 volt by the forwar d voltage dro p of C R484 . Since t h e b ase of Q495 is the most positive, it con d ucts and raises the, emitter level of Q485 p ositive enough to hold it off. C485 charges to about +13 volts where it is clam ped by C R486 and C R493. The base of Q494 is clam p ed at about +12 .6 volts by C R493, whic h reverse biases it . Since there is no current flow th roug h Q494, its collector level goes negative . Wh en α trigger signal is present, the positive-going p ulses from the Auto Pulse Am p lifier stage turn Q485 on th roug h C R484. The collector of Q485 goes negative a nd C485 d ischarges rapi d ly th roug h Q485, R490, an d R485 . As C485 d ischarges, the current flow throug h R 490 b iases Q495 off. Wh en C485 is fully disc h arge d , the current flow th roug h R490 ceases and Q495 comes bac k on to reset the multivibrator . Now C485 begins to charge towar d s +75 volts t h rough R 486 . Current also flows throug h R494, an d t he base of Q494 goes negative to bias it on . The collector level of Q494 rises positive to produce the auto gate out p ut for the Α Swee p Generator circuit.
F or low-frequency signals (below about 30 h ertz), C485 rec h arges to about +13 volts in about 85 milliseconds . Then, Q494 is biased off to end the auto gate (dis p lay free ru n s or is unstable) . H owever, if α re p etitive trigger signal turns Q485 on again before C485 h as charged to +13 volts, C485 is d ischarged com p letely again an d once more starts to charge towards +75 volts. Si nce the b ase of Q494 remains negative enough with α repetitive trigger signal to h ol d it in conduction, the auto outp ut level is continuous for α stable dis p lay (wit h correct Α LEVEL control setting) .
Trigger Generator circuit. Operation in t he AUTO T R IG position is much t he same as N O RM T R IG exce p t that α free-run n ing trace is dis p layed wh en α trigger p ulse is not p resent . In the SI N G LE S WEEP position, o p eration is also similar to N ORM TR IG exce p t that th e sweep is not recurrent. The following circuit d escri ption is given with t he Α SWEEP M OD E switch set to N O RM T R IG . Difference in operation for the ot her two modes are then discussed later.
N ormal Trigger M od e Op eration
Swee p Gate . The negative-going trigger p ulse generated by the Α Trigger Generator circuit is app lied to th e Swee p Gate stage throug h C R501 . Tu nnel diode CR 505 is quiescently biased on in its low-voltage state. When the negativegoing trigger pulse is a pp lied to its cathod e, the current t h roug h C R 505 increases and it ra p i dly switches to its h ig hvoltage state, where it remains u ntil reset by the Sweep Reset M ultivibrator stage at the end of the swee p . The negative-goi ng level at the cathode of CR 505 is connected to the base of Q504 throug h C503 an d R503 . Q504 is turned on and its collector goes positive. This positive-goi ng ste p is connected to the Disconnect Diod e throug h C509-R509 and to the Out p ut Sig nal Am plifier throug h C506-R506 . Output Signal Am plifier . T he p ositive-going gate pulse from the Swee p Gate stage a pp lied to the base of Q514 p ro d uces α negative-going p ulse at its collector. This pulse is connecte d to th e Ζ Axis Am p lifier circuit thro ugh R519 to unblan k t he CR T du ri ng swee p time . It is also connected to the H oldoff Ca p acitor throug h R 517 and CR 517 to discharge it com p letely at t h e beginning of each swee p .
The p ositive-going gate p ulse at the base of Q514 is also cou p le d from the emitter of Q514 to the emitter of Q524 . T he resulting p ositive-going signal at th e collector of Q524 Α SWEEP G ENER ATO R is coupled to the V ertical Switching circuit throug h C526 to p rovid e an alternate-trace sy nc pulse for d ual-trace General operation . It is also cou p le d to the Α GATE out put connector The Α Sweep Generator circuit prod uces α sawtoot h on the side panel throug h R529 . C R 528 and C R529 voltage whic h is am p lified by the H orizontal Am p lifier circlam p t he gate signal so it d oes not go more than about 0 .5 cuit to p rovi de h orizontal swee p d eflection on the CRT. volt n egative and 12 .5 volts positive. This output signal is generated on comman d (trigger p ulse) from the Α Trigger Generator circuit. Th e Α Swee p Generator circuit also p roduces an u n blan k ing gate to unblan k the C RT during the Α sweep time . I n add ition, this circuit Disconnect Diode . Disconnect Dio d e C R 533 is q uiesproduces several control signals for other circuits within cently cond ucting current th roug h R 506, R508, R509, this instrument and several output signals to the si de-panel R530, and R531 . This p revents timing current from Timing connectors . F ig . 3-11 shows α detailed b loc k d iagram of the Resistor R530 from charging Timing Ca pacitor C530 . The Α Sweep Ge nerator circuit. Α sc hematic of th is circuit is p ositive-going gate signal from Q504 reverse b iases C R533 the rear of th is manual . shown on d iagram 9 at an d interru p ts the q u iescent current flow . Now the timing current throug h t he Timing Resistor begi ns to charge Timing Capacitor C530 so the Sawtooth Swee p Generator stage can pro d uce α sawtooth output signal . The positiveThe Α SWEEP M OD E switch allows three modes of going gate signal also reverse biases C R547 to disconnect operation. In the N ORM TR IG position, α swee p is prot h e Swee p Start Am p lifier . Th e Disconnect Diode is α fast d uced only when α trigger p ulse is received from the Α
Circuit Description-453Α / R 453A
S530A
Auto gate fro m Au to Mu ltivi b rator Α swee p to Delay-P ic k off Comparator Β Swee p Generator
Sawtoot h Sweep --}" ~ Ge n erato r 0533, 0531
Trigger Pu lse from Α Trigge r Generator
Α sweep to H orizontal A m plifier
Α u n blan k i n g gate Alternate trace sy n c pu lse Α GAT E
F ig. 3-11 . Α Swee p Ge n er ator d etailed b lock diagra m . turn-off d iode wit h low reverse lea k age to red uce switc h ing time an d im prove timing li n earity at t h e start of t h e swee p .
Q533 t h roug h R 533 . T h is produces α p ositive-goi n g out p u t voltage w h ic h is con n ecte d to t h e base of Q531 t h roug h R 536 . Q531 am p lifies an d inverts t h e voltage c h a n ge at its base to p roduce α negative-going Sawtoot h outp ut . To proSawtoot h Sweep Generator . T he basic generator circuit vide α linear c h arging rate for th e Timing Ca p acitor, the is αswee M iller Integrator circuit . Wh e n t h e current flow t h roug h p out p ut signal is con n ecte d to t h e negative si d e of C R 533 is interru pte d b y t h e Sweep Gate signal, t h e Timing C530 . T h is feedback p rovi d es α constant c h arging current Ca pacitor C530 begi n s to c h arge t h roug h Timing R esistor for C530 w h ic h maintains α co n stant c h arge rate to p rod uce R 530, an d t he Α Swee p Cal A d j ustment R 531 . Th e Timing α li n ear Sawtoot h out p ut signal . T h e out p ut voltage conCapacitor a n d R esistor are selected by t h e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V tinues to go negative u n til the circuit is reset t h roug h t h e switc h to c h ange sweep rate . The Α Swee p Cal a d j ustme n t Swee p R eset M ultivibrator stage . T h e out p u t signal from allows calibratio n for accurate swee p timing . T h e Α V A R t h e collector of Q531 is connected to t h e H orizontal control, R 530Y (see Timing Switch diagram), provi d es variAm p lifier circuit t h roug h R 538, t h e Delay P ic k off Comable swee p rates by varying t h e c h arge rate of t h e Timing p arator stage i n th e Β Swee p Ge n erator circuit th roug h Capacitor . UN CA L lig h t DS530 W (see Diagram 12) in d iR 532, a n d t h e Β Swee p Start stage th roug h th e H O R Icates w h en th e swee p is n ot calibrated . ZO N TA L DIS PL AY switc h . T h e positive-going voltage at th e R 530 sid e of C530 as it c h arges toward +75 volts is connected to t he gate of FE T
Sweep R eset E mitter F ollower . T h e negative-goi ng sawtoot h voltage at t h e collector of Q531 is connecte d to t h e 3- 1 7
Circuit Descri p tion-453Α/ R 453A stage is turned on to rapidly d isc h arge th e Timi ng Ca p acitor b ase of t h e Swee p R eset E mitter F ollower stage Q543 . T h e e emitter of Q543 is coupled to and pull t h e gate of Q533 rapidly n egative to its o r igi nal negative-going sig n al at th to prod uce the retrace portio n of th e Sawtoot h signal . t level h e Sweep R eset M ultivibrator stage to d etermine swee p T h e Sawtoot h Swee p Generator stage is now rea d y to p rolength an d to t h e Sweep Start Am p lifier stage to set t h e d uce a n other sweep as soo n as t h e Swee p R eset Mu ltistarti n g point for t h e swee p . C R 542 connected to th e b ase vibrator stage is reset a nd anot h er trigger p ulse is received . of Q543 p rotects th is stage du ri n g instrumen t warmu p . Swee p Star t Am p lifier . T h e signal at th e emitter of Q543 goes negative alo n g wit h th e a p p lied Sawtoot h sig n al . T h is i n creases th e forward b ias on C R 543, w h ic h in turn decreases t h e forward b ias on C R 545 as t h e Sawtoot h goes n egative . Wh e n th e a no d e of C R 543 reac h es α level about o n e volt more negative th a n t h e level on t h e base of Q544, it is reverse b iase d to interru p t th e current flow t h roug h Q544 .
When Q575 is tur n ed on to e nd th e sweep, it remai n s i n co nd uction for α period of time to esta b lish α hol d off period and allow all circuits to return to th eir original conditions b efore t h e n ext swee p is produced . T h e h oldoff time is d etermi n e d b y t he c h arge rate of H oldoff Capacito r ς 550 . At th e start of t h e swee p , C550 is com p letely d isch arged by th e un b la nk ing gate at t h e collector of Q514 . It is h eld at th is level th roug h out th e sweep time . Wh e n th e Sweep Gate output end s, Q514 is cut off a n d C550 b egi n s to ch arge towar d +75 volts t h roug h R 552 a nd R551 . T h e T h e circ u it remains in t h is con d itio n until after th e positive-going voltage across t h e H ol d off Ca p acitor as it sweep retrace is complete . As t h e voltage at t h e emitter of charges is con n ected to th e b ase of Q575 t h roug h C R 552 Q543 return s to its original DC level at t h e e nd of the and VR 559 . Wh e n th e base of Q575 rises positive enou g h sweep , C R 545 is again forward biase d and Q544 cond ucts so it is reverse b iased , its collector level d ro ps negative and th roug h C R 547 to set th e q uiescent current t h roug h the Q585 comes bac k i n to cond u ction . T h e bias on th e Sweep Disco nn ect Diod e C R 533 . T h is establish es t h e correct Gate tun nel d iode C R 505 ret u rns to α level t h at allows it to starting point for t h e swee p . C R 546 clam p s t h e collector of accept t h e next trigger pulse (C R 505 is enabled) . H old off Q544 at about +0 .5 volt . T h is re d uces th e voltage swing at Capacitor C550 is c h ange d by t h e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h fo r t h e collector of Q544 and improves t h e res po n se time . the various swee p rates to provi d e t he correct h old off time . Sweep Start ad j ustment R758 (in t h e Β Swee p Generator Diagram 12 s hows α com p lete diagram of th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V circuit) sets t h e base voltage level of Q544 . The collector of etch . Q531 is h eld at t h is same voltage level th roug h the feed b ack loop comprised of Q533 and Q531, thereby setti n g t h e starting poi n t of th e Sawtooth output signal . T h e level th e Α S WEEP LEN GT H control is rotated co u nterestablisAs h ed b y t he Swee p Start ad j ustment is also connected k wise from t h e FULL p ositio n , R555 p laces α more cloc to th e Β Swee p Start Am p lifier so t h e Β sweep starts at t h e ositive level on t h e anod e of C R 556 t h a n is on t h e anode p same voltage level as th e Α sweep (exce p t i n M IX E D) . of C R 555 so C R 555 remains reverse biased . T h e Swee p R eset M ultivi b rator is reset as d escri b ed for FULL sweep h o peratio n at th e poi n t w h ere C R 556 (instea d of lengt Sweep Reset Multivi brator . T h e negative-goi n g Sawtoot h CR555) is forward b iase d . Si n ce th is occurs at α more posisignal at t h e emitter of Q543 is coupled to t h e cat h o d es of tive level on th e negative-going Sawtoot h , th e d is p laye d reverse C R 555 a nd CR 556 . T h ese diod es are q uiescently swee p is s h orter. T h us, R555 p rovi d es α variable swee p b iase d at th e start of t h e swee p . As t h e Sawtoot h voltage at lengt h for t h e Α swee p (from ab out 11 d ivisions in t h e its cat h od e goes negative, C R 555 is forwar d biased at α level ositio n to a b out four d ivision s in t h e fully cloc k FULL p about 0 .5 volt more n egative t h an t h e base level of Q575 ( Α positionn ot in Β EN DS Α detent) . In t h e Β EN DS Α wise S WEEP LEN GTH control in FULL position) . T h en t h e osition (fully countercloc kwise), α negative-going pulse p negative-going Sawtoot h sig n al from th e Swee p Reset from t h e Β Swee p Ge n erator circuit is con n ected to th e E mitter F ollower stage is connected to t he base of Q575 . base of Q575 through C R 575 at t h e end of t he Β swee p Q575 and Q585 are connected as α Sc h mitt bistable multitime . If th e Α swee p is still runni ng, t h is negative-going vibrator . Quiescently, at t h e start of t h e sweep, Q585 is p ulse turns Q575 on to en d t h e Α swee p also . Since t h e Α cond ucti n g an d Q575 is b iased off to p roduce α negative p ends immed iately following t h e e nd of t h e Β sweep, swee level at its collector . T h is negative level allows Sweep Gate t h is p osition p rovides t he maxim u m repetition rate tunnel d iode C R 505 to b e switched to prod uce α swee p as ( b rig h test trace) for Delaye d Swee p mo d e o peratio n . discussed previously . Wh e n t h e negative-going swee p signal is connecte d to t h e base of Q575 t h roug h C R 555, Q575 is eventually biase d on and Q585 is biase d off by th e emitter cou p ling between Q575 and Q585 . T h e collector of Q575 T h e HF STA B control, R551, varies t h e c h arging rate of rises positive an d CR 505 is switc h e d b ack to its low-voltage t h e H old off Ca pacitor to p rovide α sta b le d is p lay at fast in its low-voltage state roug h R 502 . C R 505 is h el d state t h sweep rates . T h is ch ange i n h old off allows sweep sy n c h roso it cannot accept i n coming trigger p ulses until after t h e t h e nization for less d isp lay j itter at t he faster sweep rates . T he Reset M ultivib rator stage is reset . T h is e nd s Swee p Amplifier HF STA B control h as little effect at slow sweep rates . n d th e Disconnect Sweep Gate stage out p ut a 3- 1 8
Circuit Descri p tion-453Α / R 453A t h roug h C R 555 or C R 556 at t h e end of th e swee p . Wit h Lam p Driver . T h e auto gate level from t h e Auto M ultiQ575 on, C R 505 is h el d in its low-voltage state to loc k out vibrator stage in t h e Α Trigger Generator circuit is conany incoming trigger p ulses . T h e circuit remains in t h is εοη nected to L am p Driver stage Q594, th roug h C R 591 and dition until reset by t h e Single-Swee p Reset Am p lifier C R 594 . T h is gate level is coinci d ent wit h t h e trigger pulse stage . generated by t h e Α Trigger Generator circuit and is p resent only w h en t h e instrument is correctly triggered . T h e positive-going auto-gate level saturates Q594 and its colReset Reset Single-Swee p Amplifier . Single-Swee p goes negative to about zero volts . T h is a pp lies about lector Am p lifier Q564 prod uces α pulse to reset t h e Sweep Reset 12 volts across DS596, Α S WEEP T R IG'D lig h t, an d it M ultivibrator stage so anot h er swee p can be p ro d uced in comes on . T h is lig h t remains on as long as th e auto-gate t h e SI N G LE SWEEP mod e of o p eration . Quiescently, Q564 level is p resent . Wh en t h e auto-gate level goes negative because t h e instrument is no longer triggered , C R 595 clam ps is b iased off and t h e RE S E T switc h is o pen . When t h e t h e base level of Q594 at about -0 .5 volt and Q594 is RE S E T button is p ressed , DS568 ignites an d t h e voltage at reverse biase d . T h e collector of Q594 rises positive and t h e base of Q564 goes negative . Q564 saturates an d p ro DS596 goes off . duces α positive-going out p ut p ulse . T h is p ulse h as sufficient am p litu d e to sh ut off Q575 and allow Q585 to conduct an d enable Sweep Gate tunnel d io d e C R 505 . Now t he Auto Trigger M o de Operation Α Swee p Generator circuit can be triggere d w h en th e next trigger p ulse is received . O p eration of t h e Α Swee p Generator circuit in th e A U TO T R IG position of t h e Α SWEEP M OD E switc h is th e same as for t h e N O RM T R IG p osition j ust described w h en α L am p Driver . In t h e SI N G LE S WEEP mo d e, th e cat h o d e trigger p ulse is a pp lied . H owever, w h en α trigger p ulse is not of C R 591 is connected to ground to b lock th e incoming p resent, α free-running reference trace is p roduced in t h e auto-gate level . Α S WEEP T R IG'D lig h t DS596 is d iscon A U TO T R IG mo d e . T h is occurs as follows : nected from the collector of Q594 and RE S E T lig h t DS597 T h e auto-gate level from t h e Auto M ultivibrator stage in t h e Α Trigger Generator circuit is also connected to C R 592 . Wh en t h e auto-gate level is p ositive (instrument triggered), t h e current flowing t h roug h C R 592 and R593 reverse biases C R 593 and Swee p Gate tunnel d iod e C R 505 o p erates as previously d escribe d for N O RM T R IG o peration . H owever, w h en t h e instrument is not triggered , t h e auto-gate level d ro p s negative and t h e reduction in current t h roug h C R 592 and R593 allows C R 593 to b ecome forwar d biase d . Now, w h en t h e Swee p Reset M ultivibrator stage resets at t h e e n d of t h e hol d off p eriod, t h e ad d itional current from R593-C R 593 flows th roug h C R 505 and is sufficient to automatically switc h t h e Swee p Gate tunnel dio d e bac k into its h ig h -voltage state . T h e result is t h at th e Α Swee p Generator circuit is automatically retriggered at t h e end of eac h h ol d off p erio d an d α free-running swee p is p roduce d . Since t h e swee p free runs at t h e swee p rate of t h e Α Swee p Generator circuit (as selecte d by t h e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h ), α brig h t reference trace is pro d uced even at fast sweep rates .
Single Swee p Operation General . O peration of th e Swee p Generator in t h e SI N G LE SWEEP p osition of t h e Α S WEEP M OD E switc h is similar to o p eration in t h e oth er mod es . H owever, after one swee p h as been p ro d uce d , th e Swee p Reset M ultivibrator stage d oes not reset . All succee d ing trigger p ulses are loc k ed out until t h e RE S E T button is p resse d .
is connecte d into th e circuit . T h e ano d e of C R 595 is also d isconnecte d from grou nd . Now t h e cond ition of Q594 is d etermine d by th e Swee p Reset Mbltivibrator stage . Wh en Q585 is off before t h e RE S E T button is p ressed , th e col-
lector level of Q585 is negative . Th e current th roug h R594-C R 595- R 587- R 588 sets th e base level of Q594 negative enoug h to bias it off . H owever, w h en t h e RE S E T button is p ressed an d Q585 turns on, its collector goes p ositive . Th is p ositive level allows t h e base of Q594 to go p ositive also and it is biased on . T h e collector of Q594 goes negative and t h e RE S E T lig h t comes on . Q594 and t h e RE S E T lig h t remain on until Q585 turns off again at t h e end of th e next swee p .
Β
T R IGG ER G ENER ATO R
General T h e Β Trigger Generator circuit is basically th e same as t h e Α Trigger Generator circuit . Only t h e d ifferences b etween t h e two circuits are d iscussed h ere . P ortions of t h e circuit not d escribed in t h e following discussion o p erate in th e same manner as for t h e Α Trigger Generator circuit (corresp ond ing circuit n u mbers are assigned in t h e 600-699 range) . F ig . 3-12 s h ows α d etailed block d iagram of t h e Β Trigger Generator circuit . Α sch ematic of th is circuit is shown on d iagram 10 at th e rear of t h is ma n ual . In p ut Stage
T h e Β In p ut Stage o p erates in basically t h e same manner In tas h e SI N G LE S WEEP p osition, t h e Α S WEEP M OD E d escribed for t h e Α Trigger Ge n erator circuit . H owever, switc h d isconnects th e ch arging current for t h e H ol d off in t h e Β Trigger Generator circuit, H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h Ca S801A p acitor . Now, Q575 remains on w h en it is forward biase d an d C R 638 bloc k th e Β Trigger Generator i n p ut 3- 1 9
Circuit Descri p tion-453Α/ R 453A
S635 113 SWEEP M Ι S801 Α Ι H O R IZ DIS PLAY Ι ι Ι Ι S615 Ι
Ι
Trigger TO C R 675
P ulse Amp lifier Ο684
CO UPL I N G 5610 SO
Ι
UR E C
ine
trigger
sign al fro m Power S upply
Ι Ι
Ι
Ι Β tr igger Ί sign al Ι C615 AC from Trigger ΙΝΤ P ream p 0-0ν L
Trigger p ulse to Β Sweep Generator
Ι Ι Ι Ι
Ι
Ι Ι ~ ι I np ut Stage Ο633
Slo pe Comparator Οβςq, Οβ 64
643 ο
L NE I
Ο
ΕΧΤ
S655 S L O PE R 660
ΕΧΤ T R IG OR Χ I NPUT
+10 Attenuator ΙL-~
E xter n al Ho r izo n tal Gai n N etwor k
E xte rnal h orizo ntal signal to H orizo ntal Amplifier
F ig . 3-12 . Β Trigger Ge n erator d etailed b lock d iagram . signal in t h e mod es w h ere Β triggering is not desire d . In t h e connected to its cat h ode th roug h R 642 b y S801A . T h e signal from t h e In put Stage is connected to t h e H orizontal Α position of t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switch , -12 volts is Amplifier connected to t h e cath od e of C R 635 and it is forward t h roug h C R 641 a nd E xternal H orizontal Gain b iased . Since t h e cat h od e of C R 638 is connecte d to +12 N etwor k R 644- R 645- R 646 . Gain of t h e E xternal H orivolts t h roug h R 638, C R 638 is reverse b iased and it bloc k s zontal circuit is set by R 645, E xt H oriz Gain, so α signal t h e trigger signal . In t h e Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β , Β a p p lied to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector p roduces t h e in d i cate AY E D S WEEP), and M IX E D positions, α secon d d h orizontal d eflection . (D EL switc h , Β SWEEP M OD E S635 determines w h et h er t h e Β trigger signal is bloc k ed or p assed to t h e Slo p e Com parator stage . If t h e Β S WEEP M OD E switc h is in t h e Β STA R TS A F T ER D EL AY TIME position, th e trigger signal is T h e external h orizontal signal can be obtaine d eit h er b loc k e d as in t h e Α p osition . H owever, t h e Β Swee p Genexternally from t h e Β ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ I N P U T connector erator essentially free ru n s i n th is position as controlle d by w h en t h e Β SO UR C E switc h is set to ΕΧΤ or ΕΧΤ = 10, or anoth er p ortion of th e Β S WEEP M OD E switc h located in t h e Β Sweep Gen erator circuit (see Β Swee p Generator d isinternally from C h annel 1 w h en t h e ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h is in th e C H 1 O R Χ - Υ p osition and t h e Β SO UR C E switc h is set cussio n ) . In t h e T R IGG ER A BLE A F T ER D EL AY TIME position, -12 volts is connected to t h e cat h o d e of C R 638 to ΙΝΤ . t h roug h R 639 rat h er t h an to C R 635 . T h is forward biases C R 638 a n d allows t h e Β trigger signal to p ass to t h e Β Slo p e Com p arator stage . Pulse Am p lifier In all p ositions of t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h exce pt Χ -Y, C R 641 is bac k biased since it is co nn ected to +12 volts t h roug h R 641 . In th e Χ - Υ p osition, C R 638 is reverse b iased b ecause its cat h o d e rises positive toward +12 volts a pp lied t h roug h R 638 . T h erefore, t h e trigger sig n al can not pass t h roug h C R 638 . C R 641 is forward b iased by -12 volts 3- 2 0
T h e P ulse Am p lifier i n t h e Β Trigger Generator o p erates much t h e same as in t h e Α Trigger Generator . H owever, since t here is no Auto circ u it in t h e Β Trigger Generator, α p ulse is available only at t h e collector of Q684 . T h e out p ut p ulse is a p p lied to t h e Β Swee p Generator t h roug h Τ 686 and R 688-C688 .
Circuit Descri p tion-453Α/ R 453A Β
S WEEP G ENER ATO R
Out put Signal Am plifier
General T h e Β Swee p Ge n erator circuit is basically t h e same as t h e Α Swee p Generator circ u it . Only t h e differences between t h e two circuits are d iscusse d h ere . T h e following circuits o p erate as d escribed for t h e Α Swee p Generator (corres p onding circuit numbers assigned in t h e 700-799 range) : Swee p Gate (C R 705, Q704), Disconnect Dio d e (C R 742), Sawtoot h Swee p Ge n erator (0743 and Q741), an d t h e Swee p R eset E mitter F ollower (Q753) . F ig . 3-13 s h ows α d etailed b loc k diagram of t h e Β Swee p Generator circuit . Α sc h ematic of t h is circuit is sh ow n on d iagram 11 at t h e rear of t h is manual .
B asically, t h e Β Out p ut Signal Am plifier is t h e same as t h e corres ponding circuit in t h e Α Swee p Generator circuit . Two unblan k ing gates are available from th e collector of 0714 . An unblan k ing gate is connected to t h e Ζ Axis Am p lifier circuit th roug h R 717 and t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switch to unblan k th e C R T to dis p lay t h e Β swee p . F or Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β op eration, add ition al u n blan k ing current is ad ded to th e Α unblan k ing gate during t h e Β swee p time . T h is pro d uces α dis p lay w h ic h is p artially υη b lan k ed during Α swee p time and furt h er unblan k ed d uring Β swee p time to p ro d uce α dis p lay w h ic h h as an i n tensified p ortion coincide n t wit h t he Β swee p time .
Mixed Sweep Unb la nk i n g Multivi brator 0779,Q790
Mixe d Sweep Unb la nk i ng to Ζ-Axis Amplifier
S635
Trigger pu lse from Β Trigger Ge nerator
Β un blan k i n g gate Ζ Axis Am plifier
to
Α i n tensified un blank ing gate to Ζ Axis Am p lifier
F ig . 3-13 . Β Swee p Generator detaile d bloc k d iagram .
3- 2 1
Circuit Descri p tion-453 Α/ R 453A Β
E n d s Α P ulse Amplifier
p ulse forces t h e Β Swee p Reset M ultivibrator to reset and end t h e Β swee p also .
Th e positive-going voltage as t h e Β unblan k ing gate en d s is cou p led to Β E nds Α P ulse Am p lifier Q734 t h roug h C731 an d C R 731 . Wh en t h e Α S WEEP LEN GT H control is in t he Delay M ultivibrator Β EN DS Α position, th is p ulse saturates Q734 to p roduce α negative-going out p ut p ulse at its collector . T h is negativeT h e Delay M ultivibrator, Q768 an d Q772, p rovi d es α going pulse is connected to t h e Α Sweep Reset M ultivibraloc k out for t h e Β Swee p Generator circuit d uring t h e Α for stage to reset t h e Α swee p at t h e end of t h e Β swee p for Swee p Generator reset an d h ol d off time to allow accurate measurements maximum delayed swee p re p etition rate . delaye d -swee p w h en th e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER dial is set near 0 . T h is stage p revents t h e Β Sweep Generator from being triggered before t h e Α Swee p Generator is triggered ( Β Swee p Generator must always b e Delay- P ic k off Com p arator triggered after th e Α Swee p Generator is triggered) . Th is T h e Delay- P ic k off Com p arator stage allows selection of circuit also p roduces α p ulse w h ic h resets t h e Β Swee p t h e amount of d elay from t h e start of t h e Α swee p before Reset M ultivibrator stage after t h e d elay p eriod so t h e Β t h e Β Sweep Generator is turned on . T h is stage allows t h e Swee p Gate tunnel d io d e can be enabled to p ro d uce α start of Β swee p to be delayed between 0 .20 an d 10 .20 swee p . times t h e setting of th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h . T h en, t h e Β Swee p Generator is turned on an d o perates at α swee p rate independ ent of t h e Α Swee p Generator (determine d by Transistors 0768 and Q772 are connected as α Sc h mitt setting of Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h ) . bistable multivibrator . Quiescently, Q772 is h el d on by t h e negative level at t h e collector of Q764A an d Q768 remains off . T h e circuit remains in t h is con d ition until t h e incoming Q764A and Β are connected as α voltage com p arator . In ρ` sw ee p switc h es t h e Delay- P ic k off Com p arator (see Delayt h is configuration, t h e transistor wit h t h e most p ositive Pic k off Com p arator discussion) . T h en, t h e base of Q772 b ase controls cond uction . Α d ual transistor, Q764, and α goes p ositive an d it turns off . At th e same time, t h e base of dual d io d e, C R 764, p rovi d e tem perature stability for t h e Q768 is p ulled negative by t h e collector level of Q764 B and com parator circuit . Q769 maintains α constant current it turns on . Th e collector of Q772 goes negative and α t h roug h t he conducting transistor . Reference voltage for negative-going out p ut p ulse is cou p led to t h e Β Sweep t h e com p arator circuit is provi d ed by DELAY-TIME Reset M ultivibrator stage t h roug h C774 . T h is pulse resets MULTI PL I ER control R760 . T h e voltage to t h is control is the Β Swee p Reset M ultivibrator w h ic h in turn enables t h e filtere d by R759-C759 to h old it constant and allow p recise Β Swee p Gate stage . delay p ic k off . T h e instrument is calibrated so t h at t h e ma j or d ial mark ings of R760 corres p ond to t h e ma j or d ivisions of h orizontal deflection on t h e graticule . F or M ixed Sweep weep U nblan k ί ng M uIt~ V ί brator if th e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial is set to Transistors Q779 an d Q790 com p rise α b istable multi5 .00, t h e Β Swee p Generator is d elayed five d ivisions of t he vibrator very similar in configuration to th e Swee p Reset Α swee p time before it can p rod uce α swee p ( Β swee p delay Multivi b rator . T h e p urpose of t h e M ixe d Swee p Un blan k ing time e q uals five times setting of Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h ) . M ultivibrator is to p rovi d e ad d itional unblan k ing d uring t h e Β swee p p ortion of α mixed swee p d is p lay . Because t h e Β Genh from t h e Α Sawtoot h Swee p Swee p Generator is normally running at α faster sweep rate Th e out p ut sawtoot th an t h e Α Swee p Generator in α mixed swee p d is p lay, th is erator stage is connected to t h e base of Q764A . T h e q uiesad d itional unblan k ing re d uces t h e intensity differences b e cent level of t h e Α sawtoot h biases Q764A on and its coltween t h e two p arts of th e d is p lay . lector is negative enoug h to h old Q772 in t h e Delay M ultivibrator stage in con d uction . As th e Α swee p out p ut sawtoot h begins to run down, t h e base of Q764A also goes negative . Wh e n it goes more negative th an t h e level at t h e During t h e Α Swee p portion of α mixed swee p dis p lay, base of Q764 B (establis h e d by t h e DELAY-TIME MULTItransistor Q779 is off and Q790 is on . At t h e en d of t h e PL I ER control), Q764 B ta k es over con d uction of t h e comparator an d Q764A s h uts off . T h is also switc h es t h e Delay d elay time α negative pulse is cou p led to th e base of Q779 from t h e collector of Q772 by ca p acitor C774 . Q779 is M ultivibrator stage to p roduce α negative-going reset p ulse . Swee p R eset M ultivi b rator turne d on and its collector goes positive . T h is positive to t h e Β movement is coupled to t h e base of Q790 t h roug h C780-11780, an d Q790 turns off . At t h e same time t h at Q779 is turne d on, t h e p ulse from C774 turns Q775 on an d its collector goes positive . T h e negative movement of t h e Wh en t h e Α swee p resets, Q764A is again returned to collector of Q790 an d t h e positive movement of th e colco nd uction and Q764 B is turned off . T h is also resets t h e lector of Q775 are a dd ed toget h er so t h at t he net ch ange at Delay M ultivibrator to p rod uce α p ositive-going outp ut p is still running, t h is p ositive-going t h e base of Q797 is an a pp roximate 0 .6 volt more p ositive pulse . If t h e Β swee 3- 2 2
Circuit Descri p tion-453Α / R 453A level . T he increase d con d uctio n of Q797 causes its collector to ste p slig h tly more negative to furt h er unblan k t h e C R T d is p lay . T h en at t h e en d of th e Β Swee p time, Q790 tur n s on a nd Q775 turns off . T h e negative movement at t h e base of Q797 is sufficient to cause total b lan k ing of t h e C R T so any remaining part of Α Sweep is not seen .
Wh en th e Β Swee p Reset M ultivibrator is reset by t h e Delay M ultivibrator, Q775 comes on a n d Q785 turns off . T h e collector of Q785 goes negative an d Β Swee p Gate tunnel diode C R 705 is enabled . T h e state in w h ic h C R 705 remains d e p e n d s upon t he Β S WEEP M OD E switc h an d t h e H O R IZ DIS PLAY switc h . Wh en Β S WEEP M OD E switch S635 is set to t h e T R IGG ER A BLE A F T ER D EL AY TIME p osition, C R 705 is b iased so it can be switc h ed to its h ig h M ixe d Swee p U nblan k ing Am p l i f i er voltage state by t h e next trigger p ulse from t h e Β Trigger Generator . H owever, in t h e Β STA R TS A F T ER D ELAY In t h e M IX E D position of th e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h , TIME p osition, t h e setting of H O R IZ DIS PL AY switch +12 volts is a pp lied to t h e collector of t h e M ixed Swee p Sg01A d etermines o peration of th e Β Swee p Gate tunnel Blan k ing Am p lifier Q797 t h ro u g h collector load resistor diod e . In t h e Α position, t h e Β trigger p ulses are block ed in R 797 . T h is activates Q797 so it can am p lify t he mixe d the Β Trigger Generator circuit so t h e Β Swee p Gen erator swee p unblan k ing gate at its base . Th e out p ut at t h e εοΙ cannot be triggered and does not p rod uce α swee p . In t h e lector of Q797 is a d ded to t h e Α unblan k ing gate (see H oriremaining positions of S801A, -12 volts is connecte d to zontal Disp lay Switc h , Diagram 14) to p ro du ce α com p osite the cath ode of C R 705 t h roug h R 786 an d R789 . T h is blanking n g gate for t h e Ζ -Axis Amplifier . voltage p ulls t h e cat h o d e of C R 705 negative enoug h so it automatically switc h es to its h ig h -voltage state after it is enabled by t h e Β Swee p Reset M ultivibrator stage . T h is Swee p Start Am p lifier p rod uces α free-ru n ning Β swee p reset similar to t h e no trigger A U TO T R IG mod e in t h e Α Sweep Generator, HowIn all positions of t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switch exce p t ever, since t h e Β Swee p is reset (an d automatically reMIXED, th e o p eration of Β Swee p Start Am p lifier Q754 is triggere d ) at α fixed point on t h e Α sweep sawtoot h , t h e t h e same as described for t h e Α Swee p Start Am p lifier d isp lay is relatively stable . T h e b est delaye d swee p stability stage . In t h e M IX E D position, th e Sweep Start control is p rovid e d in th e T R IGG ER A BLE A F T ER D EL AY TIME R758 is disconnecte d from th e base of Q754 and t h e Α p osition, since t h e Β swee p is triggere d by t h e trigger signal swee p sawtoot h is a pp lied . Now, th e p oint at w h ic h t h e Β in th is mo d e . Swee p Generator will start generating its sawtoot h waveform is constantly being c h anged by th e Α swee p sawtoot h . T h e outp ut waveform from t h e Β Swee p Generator ta k es t h e form of α com p osite sawtoot h waveform with t h e first and last parts occurring at α rate d etermined by t h e Α H O R IZO N TA L AMPL I F I ER Sweep Generator (last p art of com posite sweep blan k e d out), an d t h e mid d le p art at α rate d etermine d by t h e Β General Sweep Generator . T h e H orizontal Am p lifier circuit p rovides t h e output signal to th e C R T h orizontal d eflection p lates . In all positions of t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h exce pt Χ -Y, t h e h orizontal deflection signal is α sawtooth from eit h er t h e Α Swee p Generator circuit or t h e Β Sweep Generator circuit . In t h e Swee p R eset M ultivibrator Χ - Υ p ositio n , t h e h orizontal d eflection signal is obtained from th e In p ut Stage of t h e Β Trigger Generator . In T h e b asic Β Sweep Reset M ultivibrator configuration addition, t h is circuit contains t he h orizontal magnifier ciran d o p eration is t h e same as for t he Α Swee p Generator . cu it and t h e h orizontal p ositioning networ k . F ig . 3-14 H owever, several differe n ces d o exist . T h e Β Swee p Reset α d etailed block d iagram of t h e H orizontal Am p lifier Multivi b rator does not have α swee p lengt h networ k for circuit . Α schematic of t h is circuit is s h own on d iagram 13 variable swee p lengt h or α H oldoff Ca p acitor an d associate d at th e rear of t h is manual . circuit to reset t h e Β Swee p Reset M ultivibrator after t he retrace . Instead, th e n egative-going swee p from t h e Β Swee p Reset E mitter F ollower, 0753, is connected to t h e base of In p ut Am p lifiers Q785 t h roug h C R 748 . Dio d e C R 748 is forward biased w h en th e swee p voltage at t h e emitter of Q753 d ro p s about T h e in p ut signal for t h e H orizontal Am p lifier is selecte d 0 .5 volt more negative t h an t h e level at t h e base of Q785 by H O R IZ DIS PL AY switch S801A . In t he Α an d Α esta b lis h ed by voltage d ivid er R784- R 785 between +12 ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β p ositions of t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY volts an d t h e collector of Q775 . T h is negative-going sawswitc h , t h e sawtooth from the Α Swee p Generator is contoot h turns on Q785, an d its collector goes p ositive to nected to t h e base of t h e - In p ut Am p lifier, Q814, t h roug h switc h Β Swee p Gate tunnel d io d e C R 705 to its low-voltage R803 . In th e Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP) p osition, t h e Β sawstate, w h ic h resets t h e Β Swee p . Q785 remains on and h ol d s toot h is connecte d to t h e base of 0814 and in t h e M IX E D th e Β Sweep Gate tu n nel diode loc k ed out until t h e Β p osition, t h e com p osite sawtoot h from t he Β Sweep GenSwee p Reset M ultivibrator is reset by t h e Delay M ultierator is connected to t h e base of Q814 . Wh ic h ever sawvi b rator . toot h signal is connected to t h e base of Q814 p rod uces α 3- 2 3
Circuit Descri ption-453Α/ R 453A
Β sawtooth a n d mixed sawtoot h from Β Sweep Ge n erator
S330 BEAM F I N D ER
H orizontal deflection signal to h orizo n tal deflectio n plates E xter n al h orizontal sig n al fro m Β Trigger Generator
M AG
F ig. 3-14 . H orizontal A mp lifier d etailed b loc k d iagra m . current ch ange w h ic h is am p lified to p ro d uce α positivegoing sawtooth voltage at t h e collector . T h is p ositive-going sawtoot h signal is co n nected to th e base of Q834 in th e P ara ph ase Am p lifier stage .
Q814 . T h ese controls vary t h e q uiescent DC level at t h e base of Q814 w h ich in turn sets t h e DC level at th e h orizontal d eflection p lates to determine th e h orizontal position of t h e trace . C804-13804 eliminate common-mo d e n oise from t h e p osition controls .
In t h e Χ -Υ positio n of t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switch , t h e Paraph ase Am p l i f i er external h orizontal signal from t h e Β Trigger Generator circuit is con n ected to t h e base of t h e + In p ut Amplifier, T h e out p ut of t h e + and - Input Amplifier stages is Q824, th roug h R 821 . T h e Α an d Β sawtoot h signals are connected to P ara p h ase Am p lifier Q834 a n d Q844 . T h is grounded by t h e H O R IZ DISPL AY switc h . T h e Β SO UR C E stage converts t h e single-e n d ed in p ut sig n al from eit h er switc h selects eith er t h e internal signal from C h annel 1 In p ut Am p lifier stage to α push-pull out p ut sig n al w h ich is ( ΙΝΤ T R IG switch set to C H 1 O R Χ -Y) or an exter n al necessary to d rive the h orizontal deflection p lates of t h e signal connected to th e ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ I NPU T co n necC R T . In all p ositions of t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h tor . When t he internal signal is selected, t he C h an nel 1 exce p t Χ -Y, α positive-going sawtooth signal is connected to deflectio n factor as indicate d b y t he C H 1 V O L TS/DI V t h e base of Q834 t h roug h Q814 . T h is p roduces α negativeswitc h ap plies as H orizontal V olts/Divisio n . M ore informagoing sawtooth voltage at th e collector of Q834 . At t he tion on t h e external h orizontal circuitry is contained in t h e same time, t h e emitter of Q834 goes positive and t h is Β Trigger Generator circuit d iscussion . c h ange is connected to t h e emitter of Q844 t h roug h t h e gain-setting network , R 835-13836- R 845-13846 . In all positions of th e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h exce p t Χ -Y, no signal H orizontal p ositioni n g is provid e d by P OSITIO N control is co n nected to t h e base of Q844 th roug h Q824 so Q844 R 805A, and F I NE control R 805 B con nected to t h e base of
3-24
Οί
Circuit Description -453A/ R 453A
o p erates as t h e
emitter- d riven section of α p ara p h ase am p lifier . T h en, t h e p ositive-going c h ange at its emitter is am p lifie d to p ro d uce α p ositive-going sawtoot h signal at t h e collector . T h us t h e single-en d ed in p ut sawtoot h signal h as been am p lifie d an d is available as α push-pull signal at t h e collectors of Q834 and Q844 .
In t h e Χ - Υ p osition of t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switch , t h e external h orizontal d eflection signal is connected to t h e base of Q844 t h roug h Q824 a n d th e sawtoot h signal at t h e base of Q814 is d isconnected . Now, t h e circuit o perates muc h t he same as j ust d escri b ed for α sawtoot h in p ut . Α p ositive-going external h orizontal deflection signal p ro d uces α negative-going c h ange at th e base of Q844 w h ich decreases t h e current flow t h roug h t h is transistor . T h e collector of Q844 goes p ositive w h ile t h e emitter-cou p le d signal to Q834 p ro d uces α negative-going change at t h e collector of Q834 . T h is stage also p rovi d es ad j ustment to set t h e normal and magnified gain of t h e H orizontal Am p lifier circuit, and t h e M AG switc h to p rovide α h orizontal swee p wh ic h is 10 magnified times . F or normal swee p o p eration ( M AG switc h set to O FF), R835 an d R836 control th e emitter degeneration between Q834 and Q844 to set t h e gain of t h e stage . R835, N ormal Gain, is a d j uste d to p rovide calibrated sc swee p rates . Wh e n M AG switc h S801 B is set to t h e Χ 10 p ositio n , R845 an d R846 are co n necte d in parallel wit h R 835 an d R836 . T h is additional resistance decreases th e emitter degeneration of t h is stage to increase t h e gain of t h e circuit 10 times . R845, M ag Gain, is ad j usted to p rovi d e calibrate d magnified swee p rates . Wh en t h e M AG switc h is set to Χ 10, M AG ON lig h t DS849 is con n ected to t h e +150-volt su pp ly t h roug h R 849 . DS849 ignites to in d icate t h at t h e swee p is mag n ified . In t h e Χ - Υ p osition of t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h , t h e mag n ifier is co n nected into t h e circuit by S801A so t h e h orizontal gain is correct for external h orizontal o peration regard less of t h e setting of t h e M AG switc h . H owever, bot h sid es of DS849 are connected to groun d so it can not ignite .
Μαg Register ad j ustment R855 balances t h e q uiescent DC current to t h e base of Q863 and Q873 so α centerscreen d is p lay d oes n ot c h ange position w h en th e M AG switc h is c h anged from Χ 10 to O FF . BEAM F I N D ER switch S330 red uces h orizontal scan by limiting t h e current available to Q884 and Q894 . N ormally t h e collectors of t h ese transistors are returned to +150 volts . H owever, w h en th e BEAM F I N D ER switc h is p resse d in, th e p ower from t h e unregulated +150-volt su pp ly is interru p ted and th e collector voltage for Q884 and Q894 is su pp lied from +75 volts t h roug h C R 884 . Since t h e collectors are returned to α lower p otential, t h e out p ut voltage swing is red uced to limit t h e h orizontal deflection wit h in t h e graticule area . Ζ AXIS A MPL I F I ER General The Ζ Axis Amplifier circuit controls t h e C R T intensity level from several in p uts . T h e effect of t h ese in p ut signals is to eith er increase or d ecrease t h e trace intensity, or to comρ le vel γ blan k p ortions of t he d isp lay . F ig . 3-15 s h ows α detailed block diagram of t h e Ζ Axis Am p lifier circuit . Α h ematic of t h is circuit is s h own on diagram 15 at th e rear of th is manual .
Input Amplifier
T he in p ut transistor, Q1014, i n t h e In p ut Am p lifier stage is α current- d riven, low-input im p ed ance am p lifier . It p rovides termination for t h e in p ut signals as well as isolation between t h e i n put signals a n d t he following stages . T h e current signals from th e various co n trol sources are connected to t h e emitter of Q1014 and t h e sum o r d ifference of t h e sig n als d etermi n es t h e collector conductio n level . C R 1015 an d C R 1016 in t h e collector p rovi d e limiting p rotection at minimum intensity . Wh en t h e I N T EN SITY control is set fully countercloc k wise (minimum), th e collector current of Q1014 is re d uced and its collector rises Outp ut Amplifier p ositive . C R 1015 is reverse biase d to block t h e control curT h e push-pull out p ut of th e P ara p h ase Amplifier is conrent at t h e base of Q1023, and C R 1016 is forward biased to nected to t h e Out p ut Am p lifier . E ach half of t h e Out p ut p rotect t h e circuit by clam p ing th e collector of Q1014 Am about p lifier can be considere d as α single-en d e d , feedbac k 0 .5 volt more p ositive th an t he emitter level of am p lifier w h ic h am p lifies t h e signal current at its in p ut to Q1023 . T h is limiting action also ta k es p lace wh en α p ro d uce α voltage out p ut to drive t h e h orizontal d eflection blan k i n g signal is a pp lied . T h e clam p ing of C R 1016 allows p lates of t h e C R T . T h e am p lifiers h ave α low i np ut imQ1014 to recover faster to p rod uce α sh ar p er d isp lay wit h p e d ance and re q uire very little voltage ch ange at t h e in p ut su d d en c h anges in blan k ing level . At normal intensity levels, to p roduce t h e d esire d output c h ange . Diod es C R 1016 is reverse biased an d t h e signal from Q1014 is C R 851-C R 852 and C R 861-C R 871 p rotect t h e am p lifier cou p led to emitter follower Q1023 th roug h C R 1015 . from bei n g overdriven by excessive current swing at t h e collectors of Q834 an d Q844 . N egative feed back is p rovi d ed from t h e collectors of t h e final transistors, Q884 an d Th e in p ut signals vary th e current drive to t h e emitter of Q894, to t h e bases of t h e i n p ut transistors t h roug h 01014, w h ic h p roduces α collector level t h at d etermi n es C882-13882 an d C892- R 892 . C882 an d C892 a d j ust the t h e b rilliance of th e dis p lay . I N T EN SITY control R1005 transient res ponse of t h e am p lifier so it h as good li n earity sets t h e q u iescent level at t h e emitter of Q1014 . Wh en at fast swee p rates . R1005 is turne d in t h e cloc k wise directio n , more current
3- 2 5
Circuit Description -453A/ R 453A
C1036
R 1036
I
N T EN SITY
V ertical Ch op pe d
B lan k ing Sign al from V e r tical Switc h ing Circ uit
R 1005
Input Amplifier Q1014, Q1023
O u t pu t Amplifier
Q1024,01034 Q1043 /
U n bla nk i n g gate to C R T circuit
R 1004
E xternal B la r ι k ing R 1011 from Ζ AXIS I NPU T ------^V1V`V Connector Α an d Β u nbla nk i n g gate from Swee p Ge n e r ator circ u its
R 1012
F ig . 3-15. Ζ Axis Amplifier detailed b lock d iagra m . from th e I N T EN SITY control is a d ded to th e emitter circuit of Q1014, w h ic h results in an increase in collector current to p rovid e α brig h ter trace . H owever, t h e vertical ch o pp e d blan k ing, Ζ Axis In p ut, a nd swee p unblan k ing signals ( Α , Β , an d mixed ) d etermine w het h er t h e trace is visible . T h e vertical c h op ped blan k ing signal blan k s t h e trace during d ual-trace switc h ing . T h is signal decreases t h e current t h roug h Q1014 d uring t he trace switch ing time to blan k t h e C R T d isp lay . T h e external blan k ing in p ut allows an external signal connected to t h e Ζ AXIS I NPU T connector to ch ange th e trace intensity . Α p ositive-going signal connected to t h e Ζ AXIS I NPU T connector d ecreases trace intensity a nd α negative-going signal increases trace intensity . T h e Α , Β , an d mixed unblan k ing gate signals from th e Α an d Β Swee p Generator circuits blan k th e C R T during swee p retrace an d recovery time so th ere is no d isp lay on t h e screen . Wh en t h e Swee p Generator circuits are reset an d recovere d (see Α and Β Sweep Generator d iscussion for more information), the next trigger initiates th e swee p an d an unblan k ing gate signal is generated by t h e Α or Β Swee p Generator circuit th at goes negative to allow t h e emitter current of Q1014 to reac h t h e level establish ed by t h e I N T EN SITY control and t h e ot h er blan k ing in p uts .
cou p led com p lementary am p lifier . T h is configuration p rovides α li n ear, fast outp ut signal wit h minimum q uiesce n t p ower .
T h e overall Ζ -Axis Am p lifier circuit is α s h unt-feedbac k o p erational am p lifier wit h feed bac k from t he Out p ut Am p lifier stage to t h e In p ut Am p lifier stage th roug h C1036-C1037- R 1036 . T h e out put voltage is determined by th e in p ut current times t h e fee d bac k resistor an d is s h ow n by t h e formula : Ε ουτ = ι ιη Χ R fb w h ere R fb is R1036 . T h e unblan k ing in p ut current c h ange is a pp roximately two milliam p eres . T h erefore, t h e out p ut voltage ch ange is about 60 volts (2 mA Χ 30 .1 k Ω ) . C1036 a d j usts t h e feedbac k circuit for o p timum h ig h -fre q uency res p onse .
Ζ ener d io d e VR 1043 connected between +75 volts an d +150 volts t h roug h C R 1044, R 1044, an d R 1043 p roduces α +90-volt level at th e cat h o d e of VR 1043 . T h is voltage establis h es t h e correct collector level for Q1043 . C R 1045 connected from base to emitter of Q1043 im p roves t h e res p onse of Q1043 to negative-going signals . Wh en t h e base of Q1043 is driven negative to cutoff, C R 1045 is forward Out p ut Am p l i f i er b iased an d conducts t h e negative-going portion of t h e υη T h e resultant signal p ro d uced from th e various in p uts by blan k ing signal . T h is p rovides α fast falling edge on t h e t h e In p ut Amplifier stage is connected to th e base of un b lan k ing gate to q uic k ly turn t h e d is p lay off . T he out p ut unblan Q1024 t h roug h C1029 an d to t h e base of Q1034 t h roug h k ing gate at t h e emitter of Q1043 is connected to R 1024 . T h ese transistors are connected as α collectort h e C R T circuit th roug h R 1046 .
3- 2 6
Circuit Description-453Α/ R 453A
C RT
CI R C U IT
General
T h e C R T Circuit provides th e h ig h voltage and co n trol circuits necessary for o p eration of th e cat h o d e-ray tube (C R T) . F ig . 3-16 s h ows α detailed bloc k diagram of t h e C R T Circuit . Α sc h ematic of t h is circuit is sh ow n on d iagram 16 at th e rear of t h is manual .
H igh -V oltage Oscillator Q930 and associated circuitry comprise t h e h ig h -voltage oscillator to prod uce th e d rive for h ig h -voltage transformer Τ930 . Wh e n h e instrume nt is tur n ed on, t h e current h roug h R 925 c h arges C913 positive a nd Q930 is forward biased . T h e collector current of Q930 i n creases and α voltage is d evelo ped across t h e collector wind i ng of Τ 930 . Th is p rod uces α corresponding voltage increase i n he feed b ack winding of Τ930 w h ic h is con n ected to t h e base of Q930, and it conducts eve n h arder . Wh ile Q930 is on, its base cu rrent exceeds t h e current t h roug h R 925 and C913 c h arges n egatively . E ventually t h e rate of collector current increase i n Q930 becomes less t h an t h at re q uired to maintain t h e voltage across t h e collector winding, an d h e outp ut voltage d rops . T h is turns off Q930 by way of t h e feedback voltage to t h e base . Th e voltage waveform at t h e collector of Q930 is α si n e wave at t he reso n ant freq uency of Τ930 . Q930 remai n s off u ntil α little less t h a n one cycle
t
t
t
t
later w h en C913 discharges sufficiently to raise t h e voltage at th e base of Q930 p ositive enoug h to bias Q930 i n to cond uction agai n . T h e cycle re p eats at α freq uency of 40 to 50 k ilo h ertz . T h e am p litu d e of sustaine d oscillatio n de pen d s upon t h e average current delivered to t h e base of Q930 .
F use F 937 p rotects t h e +12-volt Su p p ly if t h e H ig h voltage Oscillator stage is sh orted . C937 a n d L 937 p reve n t th e current c h anges at t h e collector of Q390 from affecting h e+12-volt regulator circuit .
t
High-Voltage
R egulator
F eedbac k from t h e secondary of Τ 930 is connected to the b ase of Q914 t h roug h t he voltage d ivider networ k 8903- R 910 . T h is sam p le of t h e output voltage is compared to t h e -12-volt level at t h e emitter of Q914 . Any ch a n ge i n t h e level at t h e base of Q914 pro d uces an error signal at th e collector of Q914 w h ic h is am p lified by Q914 and Ο913 and a pplied to t h e b ase of Q923 . Am p litu d e of t h e oscillations at th e collector of 0930 is d etermined by th e average DC level at th e emitter of Q923 .
R egulatio n occurs as follows : If th e output voltage at t h e -1960 V test point starts to 9ο positive (less n egative),
Un bla nk i n g gate fro m Ζ Axis Amplifier
U n r eg u lated voltage fro m +12 V olt Rectifier, P ower S upp ly Circu it
F 937
ASTIG
0-
E xter n al B lank ing to Ζ Axis Am p lifier
F ig . 3-16 . C R T Circ u it d etaile d bloc k d iagram . 3- 2 7
Circuit Description -453A/ R 453A α sam p le of t h is positive-going voltage is a pp lied to t h e base of 0914 . Q914 is forward biase d and it, in turn, forward biases Q913 a n d Q923 . T h is results in α greater bias current to t h e b ase of Q930 t h roug h th e feedback win d ing of Τ 930 . Now, Q930 is biase d closer to its conduction level so it comes i n to con d uction sooner to produce α larger in d uced voltage i n t h e secondary of Τ 930 . Th is increase d voltage a pp ears as α more negative voltage at t h e -1960 V test p oint to correct t h e original p ositive-going c h ange . By sam p ling th e out p ut from t h e cath ode su pp ly in t h is manner, th e total out put of t h e h ig h -voltage su pp ly is h el d constant .
CRT
Control Circuits
F ocus of th e C R T dis p lay is controlled b y F OC U S control R967 . ASTIG a d j ustment R985 w h ic h is used in conjunction wit h t h e F OC U S control to p rovide α well-defi n ed d is p lay, varies th e p ositive level on t h e astigmatism grid . Geometry a d j ustment R982 varies t h e p ositive level on t h e horizontal d eflection p late sh ield s to control t h e overall geometry of t h e d is p lay .
Out p ut voltage level of th e h ig h -voltage su pp ly is controlled b y H ig h V oltage adj ustment R900 in t h e base circuit of Q914 . T h is adj ustment sets t h e conduction of Q914 to α level w h ic h establis h es α -1960-volt o p erating p otential at t h e C R T cat h o d e .
Two ad j ustments control t h e trace alignment by varying t h e magnetic field around t h e C R T . Υ Axis Align ad j ustment R989 controls th e curre n t t h roug h L 989 w h ic h affects t h e C R T b eam after vertical d eflection but before h orizontal d eflection . T herefore, it affects only t he vertical ( Υ ) com p onents of t h e dis p lay . T R AC E R OTATIO N adj ustment R980 controls t h e current t h roug h L 980 an d affects both vertical and h orizontal rotation of the beam .
H ig h
E xternal
V oltage
R ectifiers
an d Outp ut
H ig h -voltage transformer Τ 930 h as t h ree outp ut win d ings . One winding provides filament voltage for t h e cat h o d e-ra y tube . T h e filament voltage can be su pp lied from t h e h ig h -voltage su pp ly since t h e cat h o d e-ray tube h as α very low filament current drain . T h e cat h od e and filament
are connected toget h er t h roug h R 975 to elevate t h e filament and p revent cat h o d e-to-filament brea kd ow n . Two h ig h -voltage win d ings provid e t h e negative and positive accelerating voltage an d th e C R T grid bias voltage . All of t h ese out p uts are regulated by t h e H ig h - V oltage Regulator stage in th e primary of Τ 930 to h ol d t h e out p ut voltage constant .
P ositive accelerating potential is s u pp lie d by voltage triplex C R 953, C R 955, and C R 957 . Regulate d voltage output is a b out +12 kilovolts . Ground return for th is su pp ly is t h roug h t h e resistive h elix insi d e th e cat h o d e-ray tube to groun d t h roug h VR 963 . T h e negative accelerating p otential for th e C R T cat h od e is su pp lie d by h alf-wave rectifier C R 952 . Voltage out p ut is a b out -1 .96 kilovolts . Α sam p le of t h is out p ut voltage is connecte d to t h e H ig h - V oltage Regulator stage to p rovid e α regulated h ig h -voltage out p ut .
H alf-wave rectifier C R 940 p rovi d es α negative voltage for t h e control gri d of t h e C R T . Out p ut level of t h is sup p ly is set by C R T Gri d Bias ad j ustment R940 . N eon bulbs DS973, DS974, and DS975 provide p rotection if th e voltage d iffere n ce between the control gri d an d cat h ode exceed s about 165 volts . T h e unblan k ing gate from t h e Ζ Axis Am p lifier is ap p lied to th e p ositive si d e of t h is circuit to p roduce α c h ange in out p ut voltage to control C R T intensity, unblan k ing, d ual-trace bla nk ing, an d inte n sity mod ulation . 3- 2 8
Ζ Axis In p ut
Signals a pp lied to t h e Ζ AXIS I NPU T connector (see Ζ Axis Am p lifier sch ematic) are a pp lied to t h e C R T cat hode t h roug h C979-C976- R 976 . DC an d low freq uency Z-axis signals are b loc k ed from t h e C R T Circuit by C979 . However, t h ey are connecte d to t h e Ζ Axis Am p lifier circuit to p rod uce an increase or decrease i n intensity, d epending upon p olarity . C976 and C979 cou p le h ig h -freq uency signals d irectly to th e C R T cat h o d e to p roduce t h e same resultant d is p lay as th e Ζ Axis Am p lifier circuit p roduces for low-frequency signals . T h is co nfiguration o p erates as α crossover networ k to p rovide nearly constant intensity modulation from DC to 50 mega h ertz .
L O W-VO L TAG E
PO WER
S UPPL Y
General T h e L ow-V oltage P ower Su pp ly circuit p rovides t h e o p erating power for t h is instrument from t h ree regulated su pp lies and one unregulated su pp ly . E lectronic regulation is used to p rovide stable, low-ripple out p ut voltages . E ac h regulate d su pp ly contains α s h ort-p rotection circuit to p revent instrument d amage if α su p ply is ina d vertently s h orted to ground . T he Power In p ut stage includes t h e L ine Voltage Selector assembly . T h is assembly allows selection of t h e nominal o perating voltage and regulating range for t h e instrument . F ig . 3-17 sh ows α detailed block d iagram of t h e Power Su pp ly circuit . Α sc h ematic of t h is circuit is s h own on d iagram 17 at t h e rear of t h is manual . Power In p ut
P ower is a pp lie d to t h e p rimary of transformer Τ 1101 th roug h t h e 115-volt line fuse F 1101, PO WER switc h S1101, th ermal cutout S1104, Voltage Selector switc h S1102, an d Range Selector switc h S1103 . T h e Voltage
Circ uit Descri ption-453Α/R 453A
R ange Selector ι
V oltage
ι '
51103
Selector
P OWER
51102
S1101
+150 V R ectifier CR 1202, CR 1212
+75 V R ectifier C R1172
,+
F1204
+150 V (unreg)
+75 V
-
R 1187 ~
+75 V C u rre n t L imiti n g 011 89
Ι
+75 V
Feedbac k
Amplifier 01184, \Ο 1193
U nreg u late d
+12 volts to H igh- Voltage Oscillator, CRT Circuit
~` -12 V
+12 V
Line Inp ut
(90-136 V, 180-272 V, AC, RMS)
R ectifier C R 1142
+12 V
P ower
+12 V -~ Current L i miting 01159
Input
R 1159
+12 V F eed b ac k
Amplifier 01154, \01163
-12 V
-12 V Rectifier C R1112
Series
rl_~ -12 V C urrent L imiting 01129
A
R egulator 01137
--'j
R 1108 SCA LE
R 1107
Ι Ι LLUM Ι ~
DS1107 (~) 1
F ig .
R eference V R 1114
Amplifier 01114, 01124, 01133
R 1129 6.3 V olt RMS Sou rce
-,2 V
-,2-V
Feedback
ί
~ -12 ν
R 1104 1 DS1108
POWWER N
1DS1109~ Line trigger sign al to Trigger Generators
R 1105
3-17 . Power Supply d etaile d bloc k d iagram .
3- 29
Circuit Descri ption-453Α /R453A Selector switch S1102 connects the s p lit p rimaries of T1101 in p arallel for 115-volt nominal o p eration, or in series for 230-volt nominal o peration . Α second line fuse, F1102, is connected into this circuit when the Voltage Selector switch is set to the 230 V p osition to p rovi d e the correct p rotection for 230-volt o peration (F 1102 current rating is one-half of F 1101) . Range Selector switch S1103 allows the instrument to regulate correctly on h igher or lower than normal line voltages . E ach half of the p rimary h as ta p s above an d below the nominal voltage p oint (115 or 230 volts) . As Range Selector switch S1103 is switched from L O to Μ to HI, more turns are effectively added to the p rimary win d ing and the turns ratio is d ecreased . This configuration compensates for h igher or lower than normal line voltage to extend t he regulating range of the L ow-Voltage P ower Sup p ly . Thermal cutout S1104 provi d es thermal p rotection for this instrument . If the internal tem perature of the instrument exceed s α safe o p erating level, S1104 o pens to interru p t the a pp lie d p ower . When the temperature returns to α safe level, S1 104 automatically closes to re-a pp ly the p ower .
-12-Volt Supply The following d iscussion inclu d es the d escri p tion of the -12 V Rectifier, -12 V Series Regulator, -12 V Feedback Am p lifier, -12 V Reference, and -12 V Current L imiting stages . Since these stages are closely relate d in the p roduction of the -12-volt regulate d out p ut voltage, their o p eration is most easily un d erstoo d when discusse d as α unit .
The -12 V Rectifier assembly CR1112 rectifies the out-
p ut at the secon d ary of T1 101 to p rovide the unregulated voltage source for this su pp ly . CR1112 is connected as α bridge rectifier an d its out p ut voltage is filtered by C1112 before it is a pp lied to the -12 V Series Regulator Q1137 . Transistors Q1114, Q1124, and Q1133 o p erate as α feed back-stabilized regulator circuit to maintain α constant -12-volt out p ut level . Q1114 an d Q1124 are connecte d as α d ifferential am p lifier to com p are the feedback voltage at the base of Q1124 against the reference voltage at the base of Q1114 . The error outp ut at the collector of Q1114 reflects the d ifference, if any, between these two in p uts . The change in error-out p ut level at the collector of Ο 1124 is always in the same d irectio n as the change in the fee d back in p ut at the base of Q1124 (in p hase) . Zener dio d e VR1114 sets α reference level of about -9 volts at the base of 01114 . Α sam p le of the out p ut voltage from this su pp ly is connected to the base of Q1124 through 3- 3 0
d ivider 131121-131122-R1123 . R1122 in this divi d er is adjustable to set the out put level of this su pp ly . Regulation occurs as follows : If the out p ut level of this su pp ly d ecreases (less negative) d ue to an increase in loa d , or α decrease in in p ut voltage (as α result of line voltage changes or ri pp le), the voltage across d ivider R 1121-R 1 122-R 1 123 Be creases also . This results in α more positive feedback level at
the base of Q1124 than established by the -12 V Reference stage at the base of Q1114 . Since the transistor with the more p ositive base controls the con d uction of the d ifferential am p lifier, the out p ut current at the collector of Q1114 d ecreases . This d ec rease in out put from Q1114 allows more current to flow through Q1133 to result in increase d con d uction of -12 V Series Regulator Q1137, The loa d current increases and t he out p ut voltage of this su pp ly also increases (more negative) . As α result, the feedback voltage to the base of Q1124 returns to the same level as the base of Q1 1 14 . Similarly, if the out put level of this su pp ly increases (more negative), the out p ut current of Q1114 increases . The fee d back t hrough Q1133 reduces the conduction of the -12 V Series Regulator to decrease the out p ut voltage of this su pp ly,
The -12 Volts adjustment R 1122 determines the d ivi d er ratio to the base of Q1124, an d thereby d etermines the fee d back voltage . This a d justment sets the out p ut level of the su pp ly in the following manner : If R 1122 is a d justed so the voltage at its variable arm goes less negative (closer to groun d ), this a pp ears as an error signal at the base of 01124 . In the same manner as d escribed p reviously, this p ositive-going change at the feedback in p ut of the differential am p lifier increases the con d uction of the -12 V Series Regulator to p ro d uce more current through the load, and thereby increase the outp ut voltage of this su pp ly . This p laces more voltage across d ivider 131121-131122-131123, an d t he d ivid er action returns the b ase of Q1124 to about -9 volts . N otice that the feedback action of this su pp ly forces α c hange in the out p ut level which always returns the base of Q1124 to the same level as the base of Q1114 . I n this manner, the out put level of the -12-Volt Su pp ly can be set exactly to -12 volts by correct adjustment of R1122 . The -12 V Current L imiting stage Q1129 p rotects the -12-Volt Su p ply if excess current is deman d ed from this su pp ly . All out put current from the -12-Volt Su p ply must flow through R 1129 . Transistor Q1129 senses the voltage dro p across R1129 . U nd er normal o perating cond itions, there is about 0 .3-volt d ro p across R 1129, which is not sufficient to forward bias Q1129 . H owever, when excess current is d eman d ed from the -12 V Series Regulator d ue to α s hort circuit or similar malfunction at the out p ut of this su pp ly, the voltage dro p across R 1129 increases until it is sufficient to forward bias Q1129 . The collector current of Q1129 results in α red uction of current through Q1133 to decrease the conduction of Q1137 and limit the out p ut current .
Circuit Description-453 Α / R 453A +12- V olt Supply T h e unregulated voltage a pp lied to t h e +12-V olt Su p ply is also connecte d to t h e H ig h -V oltage Oscillator stage in t h e C R T circuit .
t h e fa n . T h e f u ll-wave output of t h e +150 V R ectifier is filtered b y C1202-C1204- R 1204 to provide an out p ut level of a b out +150 volts . F use F 1204 p rotects th is su pp ly if t h e output is sh orted .
6 .3- V olt RM S AC Source Basic o p eration of all stages in t h e +12- V olt Su p p ly is T h e 6 .3-volt RM S secon d ary winding of T1 101 provides similar to t h e -12-V olt Su pp ly . H owever, the +12 V F eed p ower for the P O WER ON lig h t, DS1107, an d t h e scale bac k Am p lifier p rovides inversion in th e fee d bac k p at h . T h e illumination lig h ts, DS1108 an d DS1109 . T h e curre n t reference level for t h is su pp ly is establish ed by t h e grou nd th roug h t h e scale illumination lig h ts is co n trolled by t h e connection at t h e emitter of 01154 . F eed bac k voltage to t h e by base of Q1154 is p rovi d e d divider SCA LE Ι LLUM control, R1108,tochange t h eillumination of t h e graticule lines . Divider R1104- R 1105 p rovides α R1151- R 1152- R 1153 between t h e out put of th is su pp ly sam p ling of th e li n e voltage to t h e Α a n d Β Trigger Genan d regulate d -12 volts . T h e -12 volts is hel d stable by t h e erator circuits for internal triggering at t h e line freq uency . -12-V olt Su pp ly as d iscusse d p reviously . T herefore, any C1105 reduces noise on t h e line freq uency signal . c h ange at t h e outp ut of t h e +12- V olt Su pp ly a pp ears at t h e base of Q1154 as an error signal . T h e out p ut voltage is regulate d in t h e manner d escribed p reviously for t h e -12- V olt Su pp ly . Diode C R 1152 p rovides t h ermal com p en sation for t h e +12 V F ee d bac k Am p lifier . C R 1164 p rotects VO L TAG E DIST R I BU TIO N Q1154 from damage if th e out p ut of t h is su pp ly is sh orted Diagram 17 also sh ows t h e d istrubution of t h e out p ut to α more positive su p ply . voltages from t h e P ower Su pp ly curcuit to t h e circuit boar d s in th is instrument . T he decou p ling networ k s w h ic h p rovi d e decou p led o perating voltages are sh own on t h is +75- V olt Supply Diagram and are not repeated on t h e i n d ivi d ual circ u it d iagrams . O p eration of t h e +75- V olt Su pp ly is t h e same as d escribed for t h e ot h er su pp lies . T h e unregulated out p ut of t h e +150-V olt Su pp ly is connected to the +75 V F eedback CA L I BR ATO R Am p lifier to p rovid e sufficient collector su pp ly for stable o p eration . T h e unregulated +150 volts connected to zener General diode VR 1209 t h roug h R 1209 establis h es α voltage level at The Calibrator circuit p roduces α sq uare-wave out p ut t h e cath od e of V R 1209 of abo u t +108 volts . T h e d ro p with accurate am p litu d e an d freq uency . T h is out p ut is across R1186 sets th e correct base level for Q1193 and th e available as α s q uare-wave voltage at t h e 1 kH z CA L co n nech e level d ro p across V R 1185- R 1 185 sets t correct collector f or or as α sq uare-wave current t h roug h th e si d e- p anel for Q1184 . Diode C R 1182 provid es th ermal com p ensation PR O BE L OO P . F ig . 3-18 sh ows α d etaile d block d iagram of for the +75 V F eedbac k Am p lifier . t h e Cali b rator circuit . Α sc h ematic of th is circuit is s h own on d iagram 18 at t h e rear of th is manual . Two means of overload p rotectio n are provid ed for t h is su pp ly . T h e +75 V Current L imiting stage Q1189 o perates in α manner similar to that d escribed p reviously to control t h e co n d uction of t h e +75 V Series Regulator th rough C R 1188 an d Q1193 . Ιη a dd ition, F 1437 p rovi d es overload p rotection for t h is su pp ly . Diode CR1198 p rotects t h e +75- V olt Su pp ly from d amage if it is s h orted to t h e -12-V olt Su pp ly . +150-Volt
U nregulate d
Su pp ly
Rectifiers C R 1202 an d C R 1212 p rovi d e t h e rectifie d voltage for t h e +150-V olt Su pp ly . H owever, t h is secon d ary wind ing of Τ 1101 does not su p p ly t h e full p otential necessary to obtain th e +150-volt outp ut level . To p rovi d e t h e re q uired out p ut level, t h e negative si d e of t h is su pp ly is connecte d to t h e outp ut of t h e +75- V olt Su pp ly so t h e two su pp lies are effectively connected in series between groun d an d t h e +150-volt out p ut . T h e out p ut from t h is secondary win d ing of TI 101 also p rovides t h e o p erating p otential for
Oscillator Q1255 an d its associated circ u itry com p rise α tune d collector oscillator . F req uency of oscillation is d etermined by t h e L C circuit made up of t h e p rimary of variable transformer Τ 1255 in p arallel wit h C1255 . T h e accuracy an d stability re q uired to p rovi d e an accurate time and freq uency reference is obtained by using α ca pacitor an d transformer w h ic h h ave eq ual but o pposite tem p erature coefficients . T h e oscillations of t h e L C circuit, Τ 1255-C1255, are sustai n e d by t h e feed b ac k win d ing of Τ 1255 connected to t he base of Q1255 . C1266 connects α sam p le of t h e out p ut of t h e L C circuit to t h e base of Q1265 . T he regenerative fee d bac k from t h e emitter of Q1265 to t h e emitter of Q1255 p roduces fast c h angeover between Ο 1255 an d 01265 to p rovi d e α fast risetime on the out p ut sq uare wave . F req uency of t h e out p ut s q uare wave can be a d j uste d by 3- 3 1
Circuit Descri ption-453 Α/R453A
CALIBRATOR 51275
Oscillator Q1255,01265
PROBE LOOP 5 m A SL
F ig . 3-18 . Calibrator detailed block diagram . varying the cou p ling to the feed back wind ing of Τ 1255 . T he sq uare-wave signal at the collector of Q1265 is connected to the Outp ut Am p lifier . Out p ut Am p lifier
Output D i vi d er Output Divi d er 131275-R1276-131277 p rovid es two outp ut voltages from the Calibrator circuit . In the 1 V CALI BRATOR switch position, voltage is obtained from the
collector of Q1274 through R1274 . In the .1 V CALIThe out p ut signal from the oscillator stage saturates BRATOR switch p osition, the out p ut is obtaine d at the Q1274 to p ro d uce the accurate s q uare wave at the output . junction of voltage divi d er R1275 an d 131276-131277 to When the base of Q1274 goes positive, Q1274 is cut off an d p rovid e one-tenth of the p revious out p ut voltage . the out p ut signal d ro p s negative to ground . When its base goes negative, Q1274 is d riven into saturation an d the outp ut signal rises p ositive to about +12 volts . The out p ut of Collector current of Q1274 flows through t he PROBE the +12-Volt Su pp ly is adjuste d for an accurate one-volt L OOP on the side p anel . Output current is α fiveout p ut signal at the 1 kHz CAL connector when the milliampere square wave . CALIBRATOR switch is set to 1 V .
453Α/ R 453A
SE CTION 4 MAINTENANCE Change information, if any, affecting this section will be found at the rear of this manual.
Introduction T h is sectio n of t h e manual contai n s mai n tenance information for use in p reventive maintenance, corrective mai n tenance, or troubles h ooti n g of t h e 453Α .
t h e covers in p lace necessitates more freq uent cleani n g . T h e front cover p rovides dust protectio n for t h e front p anel an d t h e C R T face . T h e front cover s h oul d be installed for storage or trans p ortation .
R emoval
Air F ilter . T h e air filter s h ould be visually c h eck e d every few wee k s a nd cleaned or re p laced if d irty . M ore T h e to p an d bottom covers of t h e instrument are h eld in freque n t ins p ectio n s are required u n d er severe operati ng p lace by t h umb screws located on eac h si d e of t h e instruconditions . T h e followi n g procedure is suggested for clea n ment . To remove t h e covers, t h e th umb screws an d ing t h e filter . If t h e filter is to be re p lace d , ord er new air sli d e t h e covers off t h e instrument . T h e covers p rotect t h e filters from your local Tek tro n ix F iel d Office or represe n tinstrume n t from d ust in t h e interior . T h e covers also direct ative ; ord er b y Te k tronix Part No . 378-0033-00 . t h e flow of cooli ng air a n d re d uce t h e EMI rad iatio n from Cover
t h e instrument .
PREVEN TI VE
M AI N T EN A N C E
1 . Remove t h e filter by p ulling it out of t h e retaining frame on th e rear p anel . Be careful not to d ro p any of t h e accumulate d d irt into t h e instrument .
General
P reventive maintenance consists of cleaning, visu al ins p ection, lubrication, etc . P reventive mai n tenance, p erformed on α reg u lar basis may p revent instrument brea k d own and will im p rove th e reliability of th is instr u ment . T h e severity of t h e environment to w h ich t h e 453 Α is su bj ecte d d etermi n es t h e freque n cy of maintena n ce . Α co nvenient time to p erform p reventive maintenance is preced ing recali b ration of th e instrument . Cleaning General . T h e 453 Α s h oul d be clea n e d as often as o p erating con d itions req uire . Accumulation of d irt in th e instru ment can cause over- h eating a nd com ponent brea k down . Dirt on com po n ents acts as an insu lati n g blan k et an d p revents efficient h eat dissi pation . It also p rovi d es an electrical cond u ction p at h .
2 . F lus h th e loose d irt from t h e filter wit h α stream of h ot water . 3 . P lace t h e filter in α solution of mild detergent an d h ot water and let it soa k for several mi n utes . 4 . S q ueeze t h e filter to was h o u t any dirt w h ic h remains. 5 . Rinse th e filter in clear water an d allow it to d ry . 6 . Coat t h e d ry filter wit h an air-filter a d h esive (available from air con d itioner su pp liers, or order Tek tronix P art No . 006-0580-00) . 7.
L et
t h e ad h esive d ry t h oroug h ly .
CAUTION Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which might damage the plastics used in this instrument. Avoid chemicals which contain benzene, toluene, xylene, acetone, or similar solvents. T h e to p and bottom covers p rovide p rotection agai n st d ust in t h e interior of th e instrument . O p eration wit h out
8 . Re-install t h e filter in t h e retai n ing frame .
E xterior . L oose d ust accumulate d on t h e outside of t h e 453Α can be removed wit h α soft clot h or small brus h . T h e brus h is particularly useful for d islod ging dirt on a n d around th e fro nt- p anel controls . Dirt w h ich remains ca n be removed wit h α soft clot h dam pene d in α mild d etergent and water solution . Abrasive clea n ers sh ould n ot be use d .
M ai ntenance-453 Α/ R 453Α C R T . Clean t h e p lastic lig h t filter, facep late p rotector, a n d t h e C R T face wit h α soft, lint-free clot h d ampene d wit h d enature d alco h ol . T h e o p tional C R T mes h filter can be cleane d in th e following manner .
F an . T h e fan-motor bearings are seale d and d o not re q uire lubrication .
Visual
Ins p ection
T h e 453 Α s h oul d be ins pected occasionally for suc h 1 . H old t h e filter in α vertical position a nd brus h lig h tly defects as b ro k en connections, bro k en or damaged ceramic wit h α soft Νο .7 water-color brus h to remove lig h t coatings stri p s, im p ro p erly seated transistors, d amaged of d circuit ust or li n t . board s, and h eat-d amaged parts . 2 . Greasy resi d ues or dried-on d irt can be removed wit h α solution of warm water a n d α neutral-pH li q uid detergent . U se t h e brus h to lig h tly scrub t h e filter . 3 . Rinse t he filter t h oroug h ly i n clean water and allow to air d ry, 4 . If any li n t or d irt remains, use clean low-pressure air to remove . Do not u se tweezers, or ot h er h ar d cleani n g tools on t h e filter, as t h e s p ecial finis h may be d amaged . 5 . Wh en not in use, store t h e mes h filter in α lint-free,
d ust- p roof container suc h as α p lastic bag .
Interior To . D u st in t h e interior of t h e instrument s h ould be removed occasio n ally due to its electrical con d uctivity und er h ig h - h umi d ity cond itio n s . T h e b est way to clean t h e interior is to blow off t h e accum u lated d ust wit h d ry, lowvelocity air . Remove any dirt w h ic h remai n s wit h α soft brus h or α cloth d am pe n ed wit h α mil d d etergent an d water solutio n . Α cotton-tip p ed app licator is useful for cleaning in narrow s p aces or for cleaning ceramic terminal stri p s and circuit boar d s . T h e h ig h -voltage circuits, p articularly p arts located in t h e h ig h -voltage com p artment and t h e area surroun d i n g t h e post-deflection anod e connector, s h ould receive s p ecial attentio n . E xcessive dirt in t h ese areas may cause h ig h voltage arci n g and result in im p ro p er instrument o peration .
L ubrication General . T h e relia b ility of potentiometers, rotary switc h es and ot h er moving p arts can be maintaine d if t h ey are ke p t p ro p erly lu b ricate d . U se α cleaning-ty p e lubricant (e .g ., Te k tronix P art No . 006-0218-00) on switc h co n tacts . L u b ricate switc h d etents wit h α h eavier grease (e .g ., Te k tronix Part No . 006-0219-00) . P otentiometers w h ic h are not p ermanently seale d sh ould be lu b ricate d wit h α lubricant w h ic h d oes n ot affect electrical ch aracteristics (e .g ., Te k tronix P art No . 006-0220-00) . T h e pot lubricant can also be used on sh aft b us h ings. Do not over-lu b ricate . Α lubrication kit containing t h e necessary lubricants a n d instructions is available from Te k tronix, I n c . Ord er Tek tronix P art No . 003-0342-01 . 4- 2
T h e corrective p rocedure for most visible d efects is o b vi ous ; h owever, p articular care must be ta k en if heat- d amaged com p onents are found . Over- h eating usually indicates ot h er trou b le in t h e instrument ; t h erefore, it is im portant th at t h e cause of over- h eating b e correcte d to p revent recurrence of t h e damage . Trans i stor C h ec k s
P erio d ic c h ec k s of t h e transistors in t he 453Α are n ot recomme n de d . T h e best c h ec k of transistor p erforma n ce is act u al operatio n in t h e instrument . M ore d etails on c hec k i ηg transistor o p eration are given un d er Trou b les h ooti n g .
R ecalibration assure accurate measurements, c h eck t h e calibration of th is instrument after eac h 1000 h ours of o p eration or every six mont h s if use d infreq uently . In addition, re p laceme n t of com p onents may necessitate recali b ration of t he affected circuits . Com p lete calibration instructions are given in t h e Cali b ratio n section . T h e calibratio n proced ure can also be h el pful in localizing certain troubles in t h e instrument . In some cases, minor troubles may b e revealed a nd/or corrected b y recalioration .
T R O UBLE S H OOTI N G
Introduction
is p rovi d ed to facilitate t h e 453Α . Information containe d in troubles h ooting of ot h er sections of t h is ma n ual s h oul d be used along wit h t h e following information to aid in locating t h e defective comp onent . An understa n d ing of t h e circuit operatio n is very h el pful in locati n g tro u bles . See t h e Circuit Descri p tio n section for complete information .
T h e following informatio n
Troublesh ooting Ai d s Diagrams . Com p lete circuit diagrams are given on fol d out p ages i n t h e Diagrams section . T h e com p o n ent number
Mai ntena n ce-453Α / R 453 Α an d electrical value of eac h com p onent in t h is instrume n t are sh ow n on t h e d iagrams (see first p age of th e Diagrams section for d efinition of t h e reference designators used to ide n tify components in t h is instrument) . E ac h main circuit is assigne d α series of com p onent numbers . Ta b le 4-1 lists t h e main circuits in t h e 453Α an d t h e series of com po n ent numbers assigned to each . Im p ortant voltages and waveforms are also s h own on t h e diagrams . T he portions of t h e circuit mounte d on circuit boards are enclosed wit h blue lines . TA BLE 4-1 Com p onent Com p onent N umbers on Ι Diagram Diagrams N umber
N umbers
Circuit
necting wires and /or connectors . T h e circuit b oard s are also outline d on th e diagrams wit h α blue li n e to s h ow w h ich p ortions of t h e circuit are located on α circuit board . Wiring Color-Cod e . All insulated wire and cable used in th e 453Α is color-coded to facilitate circuit tracing . Signal carryi n g lea d s are i d entifie d wit h one or two colored stri p es . Voltage su pp ly lea d s are identified wit h t h ree stri p es to in d icate t h e a pp roximate voltage using t h e ΕΙΑ resistor color cod e . Α w h ite bac k grou n d color indicates α p ositive voltage an d α tan bac k groun d ind icates α negative voltage . T h e widest color stri p e i d entifies th e first color of t h e co d e . Ta b le 4-2 gives t h e wiri n g color code for t h e p ower-sup p ly voltages used in t h e 453 Α . TA BLE 4-2
P ower Su pply Wiring Color Code 1-99 1 C h annel 1 Vertical Pream p 100-199 3 C h annel 2 Vertical P ream p Bac k 200-299 5 Vertical Switc h ing ground F irst Secon d Th ird 300-399 6 Vertical Output Amplifier Color Stripe Stri p e Stri p e Su pp ly 400-429 7 Trigger P reamp -12 volt Tan Brown Red Blac k 430-499 8 Α Trigger Generator Blac +12 volt Wh ite Brown Re d k 9 Α Swee p Generator 500-599 ite V iolet Green Blac k +75 volt Wh 600-699 10 Β Trigger Ge n erator +150 volt Wh ite Brown Green Brown 700-799 11 Β Swee p Generator 800-899 13 H orizontal Am p lifier 900-999 C R T Circuit 16 1000-1099 15 Ζ Axis Am p lifier Resistor Color-Cod e . In add ition to t h e brown com p osition resistors, some metal-film resistors and some wire1100-1199 17 P ower Su p p ly and woun d resistors are used in t h e 453Α . Th e resistance values Distri b ution of wire-woun d resistors are p rinted on t h e b od y of t h e 1250-1299 1 18 1 Calibrator com p onent . T h e resistance values of com p osition resistors an d metal-film resistors are color-co d ed on t h e com ponents wit h ΕΙΑ color-code (some metal-film resistors may have Switc h Wafer I d entification . Switc h wafers sh own on t h e the value p rinted on t h e bo d y) . T h e color-cod e is rea d startdiagrams are co d ed to indicate t h e p osition of t h e wafer in ing wit h t h e stri p e nearest t h e end of t h e resistor . Com p oth e com p lete switch assembly . T h e numbered p ortion of sition resistors h ave four stri pes w h ic h consist of two sign ifth e co d e refers to t h e wafer number cou n ting from th e icant figures, α multi p lier, and α tolerance val u e (see F ig . front, or mounting en d of t he switc h , towar d t h e rear . T h e 4 - 1) . M etal-film resistors h ave five stri pes consisting of th ree letters F an d R ind icate w h et h er t h e front or rear of t h e significant figures, α multi p lier, an d α tolerance value . wafer p erforms t h e particular switc h ing function . F or example, α wafer d esignate d 213 in d icates t hat t h e rear of t h e secon d wafer from t h e front is used for t h is p articular Ca pacitor Mark ing . T h e ca p acitance values of common switc h ing f u nction . d isc ca p acitors a n d small electrolytics are mar k ed in microfarads on t h e side of t h e com ponent bo d y . T h e w h ite ceramic ca p acitors used in t h e 453 Α are color cod ed in Circuit Boards . F ig . 4-4 s h ows th e location of t h e circuit p icofarad s using mo d ifie d ΕΙΑ co d e (see F ig . 4-1) . b oards wit h in t h is instr u ment along wit h t h e assembly numbers . T h e assembly numbers are also used on t h e d iagrams an d in t h e p arts list to aid in locating t h e boar d s . Diod e Color Cod e . T h e cat hod e e nd of eac h glassP ictures of t he circuit b oard s are s h own i n F igs . 8-1 t h roug h encased diode is in d icate d b y α stri p e, α series of stri pes, or 8-14 . T h ese p ictures are locate d in t h e Diagrams section, on α d ot . F or most silicon or germanium d iod es wit h α series of th e b ac k of t h e page o pp osite t h e circuit d iagram, to ai d t h e stri p es, t h e color-cod e also i d entifies th e Te k tronix P art cross-referencing betwee n t h e diagrams a nd t h e circuitN umber using t h e resistor color-code system (e .g ., α d io d e b oard p ictures . E ach electrical com p onent on t h e boar d s is color-cod ed p in k -, or b lue-brown-gray-green ind icates Te k i d entifie d by its circuit number as well as t h e i n tercontronix P art N umber 152-0185-00) . T h e cath od e an d ano d e 4-3
Mai ntenance-453Α/ R 453A a nd
R esisto r
2
1
Comp ositio n Resisto rs:
0
Μ
Τ ~~ %
Colo r Silve r Gold B lac k
'' I .
Brow n 10 Metal- Film Resisto rs:
R ed
Ι I
Multiplier _ Sig n ifi- ι cant R esisCa p aci-1 F ig ur es _tons to r s Ι -- ---
Ι
Ι
1
_
10 - 2 10 -1 1
Ceramic Ca p acito rs:
3 (D@ and Ο -m u ltip lier;
9-
-1st, 2 nd and 3r d sig n ificant fig ures;
ΟΤ
Ι Ι Ι
6 7 8
Ι Ι
10
Ι 2 Ι 10 2 Orange 3 Ι 10 3 +100 Yellow Ι 4 Ι 10'
Bl u e V iolet Gray
Capacitor Color Co d e
Ι Ι Ι
---
Tolera n ce Ca p acito rs to rs --Ι ±10% ±5% --
-----
Resis-
1
---
10
±1 %
Ι Ι
2 10 3 10'
Ι Ι
±2% ±3% ±4 01.
Ι Ι
Ι
10 -2
Ι
---
Ι
±20% o r 2 pF * :±-l % or 0 .1 p F * ±2%
=3 %
0/0
-0%ο
_ ±0.5
+80% -20% o r 0 .25 pF *
*F or capacita n ce of 10 p F or less.
-tole ra n ce ;
NOTE : Ο and /or @. color co de fo r ca p acito r s d e p e nds upon ma nu facture r and capacitor ty pe. May n ot b e prese n t i n some cases .
tem p erature coefficie nt .
F ig . 4-1 . Color co d e for resistors and ceramic capacitors. en d of metal-encased d iod es can be i dentified by t h e diode sym b ol mar k ed on t h e body .
wit h in 3% . Test p robes must b e insulated to prevent accid ental s h orting .
Transistor L ead Configuration . F ig . 4-2 s h ows the lead config u rations of th e transistors u se d in t h is instrument . Th is view is as seen from t h e bottom of t h e tra n sistors .
P urpose : To c h ec k voltages and for general troublesh ooting i n t h is i n str u ment .
Troubles h ooting E qui pment T h e following eq ui p ment is useful for troubles h ooting th e 453Α . 1 . Transistor Tester Descri p tion : Te k tronix Tracer or eq uivalent .
NO ΤΕ Α 20,000 ohmslνο lt VO M can be used to ch eck the voltages in th is instrument if allowances are made for the circuit loading of th e V OM at hig h -impedance points . 3 . Test Oscilloscope
Ty pe
576
Tra n sistor-Curve
P ur pose : To test t h e semicond uctors use d in t h is instrument .
Descri p tion : DC to 20 mega h ertz freq uency res p onse . 5 millivolts to 10 volts/d ivision deflection factor . U se α 10 Χ p robe . P ur p ose : To c h ec k waveforms in t h is instrument .
2 . M ultimeter
Troublesh ooting Tech ni ques
Descri ption : V TVM, 10 mego h m in p ut im p ed ance an d 0 to 500 volts range ; o h mmeter, 0 to 50 mego h ms . Accuracy,
T h is troubles h ooting p roced ure is arranged i n an order w h ich ch eck s t h e sim p le possibilities before p rocee d ing
4-4
M ainte n ance-453Α/ R 453A
Γf
Γ
Β
C
Β
Ε
Gate
Drain
Ϊ ,\
Sou rce
~ί'
Gate D r ai n ® So ur ce
®
Gate Drai n So u rce
F ield - E ffect Transistors
P lastic-Cased Tra n sistors
ιι ,~. /
~ι ~ ~/
C
Metal-Cased T ra n sistors F ig . 4-2 . E lectrod e config u ratio n for se m ico n d uctors in t h is i n str u ment . wit h exte n sive troubles h ooti ng . T h e first few c h eck s assure p roper co nn ection, o p eration, a n d calibration . If t h e trouble is n ot located by th ese c h ec k s, t h e remaini n g ste p s aid in locating t h e defective compo n ent . Wh en th e defective componen t is located , it s h ould be re placed following t h e re p laceme n t proced ures given u nder Corrective M aintena n ce .
use d wit h t h is instrument is o perati n g correctly . C h eck th at t h e signal is p ro p erly connected and t h at t h e interco n necting cables are not d efective . Also, ch ec k th e p ower source .
3 . V isual C h ec k . Visually c hec k t h e p ortion of Υ th e instrument in w h ic h t h e tro u ble is locate d . Many troubles can be located b y visual i n d ications suc h as unsol d ere d connectio n s, bro k e n wires, d amaged circ u it boar d s, dam1 . C h ec k Control Settings . Incorrect control settings ca n age d com p one n ts, etc . ind icate α trouble t h at does not exist . If t h ere is any question about t h e correct function or o peratio n of any control, see t h e Operating I n structio n s section of t h is manual .
4 . C h ec k Instrument Calibration . Ch ec k the cali b ration of t h is i n strument, or th e affecte d circuit if t h e tro ub le exists in one circuit . T h e appare n t trouble may only be a result of mis-a d j ustme n t or may be correcte d by cali2 . C h ec k Associated Eq ui p ment . B efore p rocee d ing wit h bration . Complete calibration instructio n s are given in th e troubles h ooting of t h e 453 Α , c h eck t h at t h e eq ui p me nt Cali b ratio n section of t h is manual . 4-5
Maintenance -453 Α/ R 453A 5 . Isolate Trouble to α Circuit . To isolate trouble to α circuit, note t h e trouble symptom . T he symptom often i d entifies t h e circu it in w h ic h t h e trou b le is located . F or exam p le, p oor focus i nd icates t h at t h e C R T (i n cludes h ig h voltage) circuit is p robably at fault . Wh en trouble sym p toms a pp ear in more t h an one circuit, c h ec k affected circuits by ta k ing voltage an d waveform rea d ings . Also c h ec k for th e correct out p ut signals at th e si d e- p anel out p ut connectors wit h α test oscillosco p e . If t h e signal is correct, t h e circuit is work ing correctly up to th at p oint . F or exam p le, correct amplitu d e a nd time of t he Α gate out waveform indicates th at t h e Α Trigger Generator and Α Swee p Gate circuits are o p erating correctly .
Incorrect o p eration of all circuits often ind icates trouble in t h e p ower su p p ly . C h ec k first for correct voltage of t h e i n dividual sup p lies . H owever, α d efective com p onent elsew h ere in t h e instrument can a pp ear as α p ower-su pp ly trouble an d may also affect t h e o peration of ot h er circuits . Table 4-3 lists t h e tolerances of t h e p ower su pp lies in t h is instrument . If α p ower-su pp ly voltage is with in t h e listed tolerance, th e su p ply can be assumed to be wor k ing correctly . If outside t h e tolerance, th e su pp ly may b e misad j usted or o p erating incorrectly . U se t h e p rocedure given in t h e Cali b ration section to a d j ust t h e p ower su p p lies . TA BLE 4-3
Power Su pp ly Tolerance P ower Su p ply
Tolerance
-12 volt +12 volt +75 volt -1960 volt
±0.12 volt 12 .1 volts, ±0 .12 volt' ±0 .75 volt ±58 .5 volts
'Adju ste d for correct o u t p ut from t h e Cali b rator circuit ; see Calibra τ ion procedu re .
F ig . 4-3 p rovides α guide to ai d in locating α defective circuit . T h is c h art may not inclu d e c h ec k s for all p ossi b le defects ; use ste p s 6-8 in suc h cases, Start from t h e top of th e ch art and p erform t h e given c h eck s on t h e left si d e of th e page until α ste p is found w h ic h is n ot correct . F urt h er c h ec k s and/or t h e circuit in w h ic h t h e trou b le is p robably locate d are listed to t h e rig h t of t h is ste p . After t h e d efective circuit h as b een located , p rocee d wit h ste p s 6 t h roug h 8 to locate t he defective com ponent(s) . 6 . C h ec k Circuit B oard Interconnections . After t h e trouble h as been isolate d to α particular circuit, ch ec k t h e p in connectors on th e circuit board for correct connection . 4- 6
Th e circuit boar d p ictures in Section 8 sh ow t h e correct con n ections for eac h b oar d . T he p in connectors used in t h is instrume n t also provide α convenient means of circuit isolation . F or exam p le, α s h ort i n α p ower su p p ly can be isolate d to t h e power sup p ly itself b y d isco n necting t h e p in connectors for t h at voltage at t h e remaining boar d s . 7 . C h ec k V oltages an d Waveforms . Often th e d efective com p onent can be locate d by c h ec k ing for th e correct voltage or waveform in t h e circuit . Ty p ical voltages a n d waveforms are given on t h e d iagrams.
ΝΟΤΕ
Voltages and waveforms given on th e diagrams are not absolute and may vary slig h tly between instru ments. To obtain operating conditions similar to th ose used to take these readings, see th e first diagram page. 8 . C h ec k Individual Com ponents . T h e following p roced ures d escribe met h ods of c h eck ing in d ivid ual com p on ents in t h e 453Α . Com p onents w h ic h are sol d ered in p lace are best c h ec k e d by d isconnecting one end . T h is isolates t h e measurement from t h e effects of surround ing circuitry . Α . T R A N SISTO R S . T h e b est c h eck of transistor operation is actual p erformance un d er o p erating con d itions . If α transistor is sus p ecte d of being defective, it can best be c h ec k e d by substituting α new com p onent or one w h ic h h as b een ch ec k ed p reviously . H owever, be sure t h at circuit conditions are not s u c h that α re p lacement transistor mig h t also be d amaged . If substitute transistors are not availa b le, use α dynamic tester (suc h as Te k tronix Ty p e 576) . Static-ty p e testers are not recommend e d , since t h ey do not c h eck o p eration un d er simulated o p erating conditions . Β . DIOD E S . Α d io d e can be c hec k ed for an o p en or s h orted con d ition by measuring t h e resistance between terminals . Wit h an o h mmeter scale h aving an internal source of b etween 800 millivolts and 3 volts, t h e resista n ce s h oul d be very h ig h in o n e direction and very low w h en t h e lea d s are reverse d .
Do not use an o h mmeter scale th at h as α h igh internal current. H igh currents may damage th e diode . Do not measure tunnel diodes with an o h mmeter, use α dynamic tester (such as α Te k tronix Type 576 Transistor-Curve Tracer) .
Maintenance-453Α/ R 453A S p ecial P arts . i n add ition to t h e stan d ar d electro n ic comp onents, some special com ponents are used in th e 453 Α . T h ese compone n ts are ma n ufactured or selecte d by Te k tronix, Inc . t o meet s p ecific p erformance requirements, or are manufacture d for Te k tronix, Inc . i n accordance wit h our specifications . T h ese s p ecial com p onents are ind icated in th e E lectrical P arts L ist by an asteris k p receding t h e p art D . I N D U CTO R S . C h eck for o p en in d uctors b y c h eck ing n umber . M ost of t h e mec h anical p arts used in t h is instruconti ment n uity wit h an o h mmeter . S h orte d or p artially s h orted h ave been manufacture d b y Te k tronix, Inc . Or d er all inductors can usually be found by c h eck ing t h e waveform s pecial parts d irectly from your local Te k tronix F iel d Office response w h en h igh -freq uency sig n als are p assed t h roug h or rep resentative . t he circuit . P artial sh orting often red uces h ig h -fre q uency resp onse (roll-off) . C . RE SISTO R S . C h ec k th e resistors wit h an o h mmeter . C h ec k th e E lectrical P arts L ist for t h e tolera n ce of t h e resistors use d in t h is instrument . Resistors normally do not need to be re p laced unless t h e measured value varies wi d ely from t he sp ecified value .
Ε . CA P ACITO R S . Α lea k y or s h orte d ca p acitor can best be d etected by c h ec k ing resistance wit h an o h mmeter on t h e h ig h est scale . Do not exceed t h e voltage rating of t h e ca pacitor . T h e resistance rea d ing s h oul d be h ig h after initial c h arge of t h e ca p acitor . An o p e n capacitor ca n best be d etected wit h α ca p acitance meter or by ch ec k ing w h et h er t h e ca p acitor passes AC signals . 9 . Re pair an d Rea dj ust t he Circuit . If any d efective p arts are located, follow t h e re p lacement p roce d ures given in t h is sectio n . B e sure to c h ec k t h e performa n ce of any circ u it t h at h as been re p aired or t h at h as h ad any electrical components re p laced . CO RRE CTI VE M AI NT EN A N C E General Corrective maintenance consists of component re p laceme n t an d instrument re pair . S pecial tec h niques re q uired to re p lace com p onents in t h is instrument are give n h ere . Obtaining
Re p lacement Parts
Standard P arts . All electrical an d mech anical p art rep lacements for t h e 453Α can be obtai n ed t h roug h your local Te k tronix F iel d Office or re p resentative . H owever, many of th e stan d ar d electronic com po n ents can be obtai n ed locally in less time t h an is re q uired to order th em from Te k tronix, Inc . B efore p urc h asing or ord ering rep lacement parts, c h eck th e parts list for value, tolerance, rating, and d escri p tio n .
NOTE When selecting replacement parts, it is important to remember th at th e p h ysical size an d sh ape of α component may affect its performance in th e instrument, partic u larly at high fre q uencies . Α // replacement parts sh ould be direct replacements unless it is known th at α different component will not adversely affect instrument performance .
Ord eri n g P arts . Wh en ord eri n g replaceme n t p arts from Te k tronix, Inc ., include t h e followi n g information : 1 . I n strume n t ty pe . 2 . Instrument serial num b er . 3 . Α d escri ption of t h e p art (if electrical, include circuit number) . 4 . Te k tronix P art N umber . Sol d ering Tech ni q ues WARNING Disconnect th e instrument from th e power source before soldering.
Th e reliability and accuracy of t h is instrument can be maintained only if p ro p er sol d ering tech ni q u es are used when re p airing or re p lacing parts . General sol d ering tec h niq ues w h ic h apply to maintena n ce of any p recisio n electronic eq ui p ment sh oul d be used w h en work ing on t h is instrument . U se only 60/40 rosin-core, electronic-grade sol d er . T h e ch oice of sol d ering iron is determined by t h e re p air to be made . Wh en sold ering on circuit board s, use α 35- to 40-watt p e n cil-ty pe sol d ering iron wit h an 1/8-inc h wi d e, we d ge-s h a p e d ti p . Keep th e ti p p roperly tinned for b est heat transfer to t h e solder j oint . Α h ig h er wattage solderi n g iron may se parate th e wiring from t h e base material . Avoi d excessive h eat ; a pp ly only enoug h h eat to remove t h e component or to ma k e α goo d solder j oint . Also, apply only enoug h sold er to ma k e α firm sol d er j oint ; d o not apply too muc h solder . F or metal terminals (e .g ., switc h terminals, potentiometers, etc .), α h ig h er wattage-rating sol d ering iron may be re q uired . M atc h t h e soldering iron to t h e wor k being d one . F or example, if t h e component is connecte d to t h e c h assis or ot h er large h eat-ra d iating surface, it will re q uire α 75-watt or larger sol d ering iron . T h e pencil-type sol d ering iron use d on t h e circuit boards can be use d for soldering to switc h terminals, p otentiometers, or metal terminals mo u nte d in p lastic h ol d ers . 4- 7
M aintenance-453Α/R 453A
οι
τι
Υ Ο Ο ό. d
°Q ά Υσ ν $ d -ύ ατ ό
ο έ Ι 1
ί
ο ; ` d
φ ά Υ . ρ Lφ -λ φ ό. ν 2` α α Ε έ υ α `ω c d m 3ο ο _ α ύότ Ν > d
Υ Φρ ρ t 'σ ' φ U ~ ε
Ι οι ΖΙ d 5 0
ώ έ ,°: τε α ε
m
υ υ m Ο G ώ > ο m
ω c χ ο υ s Ζ εo Ο t: 3 χ υ
-_ α 3
λ
Ν α Ο ε Ο ί
ό α .' > d ε
α
a Ι ΖοΙι
ξ Q
Ψ
υ ξ .ο ° m α Ή Ζm m υ, Οα ί F αΝ =
ξό Ο
.. Ι έΙ
ι
ου Ι
C~ Ι ΟΙ
ε Ι
Ο Ι
σ
ά °ά L
Ο ά
>
Ι
Q
~3 3 Ο .°.' α Δ ά d d L,. 9C α
.Ε α υ> ή
ύ 4
ΟΨ j
ό. Ο α
Μ 3, σ αΥ αΟ φ F ύ
F
L_ 3
d> εσ ._ ώ οι . ο
ο F Ψ α Δ έ ο Ν ε ύ m :~ Ο Δ Ν y εΟ -σ ,Ψυ ~
~3 ο
Ο λ = Z F Ζ
C φ > ό έμ ο. έΟ ύ Ο FQ
F Ν Q υ ε C σ~ ό υ έ 3 ά Ν Ο ευ. Ο . C 4 Ε
ώο m η 7ο α _ α ο Ο ° μ υ t ρ ~ Υ G _C ; L ε υ > $ υ
Ψ
τ
υ
Ο
λ
υ
Ι
75σ αΙεα
Ο
Ζ L ρ ά σι
2
σ
Υ ό φ υ έ υ
m
ύ .3 Ε y α σ
r λ ύ α α Ντ d υ 75 ο F F W ?Υ φ Φ L Νυ
Fυ Ο Ο
Ο
d Ιρ τ° 1 ά α υΙσ ° Ιό υ Ζ 3 Ο ά
Ο Ζ
Ζ
F α ε Ο χ $ υΖ ΟΟ L F '3d Ψ Ν Δ φ Ο ξ ._ %~ ύ
Ό Ζ Ο
d dά α G Ο Ο Οα m
Ο α ε L
α
ι
α φν έο σ F Ο α
υε ε s°
ρ ό
έ : .η ._> -ο ~ "-α υ> Δ.~ υ : ε. S C Ο ε ρ _ εώ ά α
ρ0
ε Ο υ
_ Ν ΟΟ = ,η > L 9 s_ * C Ι Οε υ
υ
%~ ? Ψ
λ
α
χ υ ο L
α ` .. Ζ - το Ο
λ α ό. i
F Ζ ?
Ψ υ Ο Ο α ρε ό
d σ ,υ α άΨ 2 Ο m Ν 0 3 Ν
M ai ntenance-453 Α/ R 453Α
Ma intenance-453 Α/R453Α Component
R e p lacement WA RN I N G
Disconnect the instrument from the power source before replacing components.
1 . Disconn ect all p in co nnectors wh ic h come t h roug h holes in the board. 2 . Remove all screws h olding th e b oard to the chassis. 3. The board may now be lifted for maintena nce or access to areas beneat h the board.
R emoving the R ear Panel . The rear panel must be removed for access to the rear sub panel . Th is panel can b e removed by removing the Ζ Axis grou nd stra p and t h e rear feet . Swing-O ut Chassis. Some of the controls and co nn ectors are mou nted on α swing-out chassis on the rig ht si de of this instrument. To reac h t he rear of this c h assis or the com po n ents mounted be hind it, first remove the top cover from the instrume nt. Then , loosen the captive securing screw so the ch assis can swing outwar d . Circuit Boa rd R eplacemeηt. If α circuit b oard is d amaged beyond repair, the entire assembly includi ng all soldered-on components can b e re p laced. P art numb ers are given in t he Mec h a nical P arts L ist for either the completely wired or the u nwired b oard . NOTE Even th ough un wired boards are available without components, use of the completely wired replacement boa rd is recommended du e to the large number of comp onents mounted on most of th e boards.
Most of the components mo u nted on the circuit board s can b e replaced without removing the board s from the i nstrume nt. Observe the solderi ng precautions given und er Soldering Techn iq ues i n t his section. H owever, if the bottom side of the b oard must be reac hed or if the b oar d must be moved to gain access to ot her areas of the instrument, only t h e mo un ting screws need to be removed . The inte rconnecti ng wires on most of the boards are long enoug h to allow the board to be moved out of the way or turned over without discon necting the p i n con n ectors . GENER AL:
M ost of the co nnectio ns to the circuit boards are made wit h pin conn ectors . H owever, several co nn ections are soldered between the atte n uators and Vertical P ream p board . See the special removal instructio ns to remove these as α un it .
U se the following proced ure to remove α circuit board . 4-10
I
'
4. To com p letely remove the board, disconnect the remaining p in connectors . 5 . L ift the circuit b oard out of the i nstrume nt. Do not force or ben d t he board. 6. To re p lace the board, reverse the order of removal. Correct location of the p in connectors is show n by the circuit b oard p ictures in Section 8 . VER TICA L PREAMP UN IT REMOVAL :
U se the following p roce d ure to remove the V ertical P re-
ι
amp board and t he atte nuators as α unit .
1 . Remove th e screw (mou nte d with α washer) whic h hold s the M OD E-ΙΝΤ-T R IG switch (rear of board) to the chassis. The ot her screw may be left in place. 2 . Remove the screw (wit h fi ber was her) from the center of the b oard . 3 . Un sol d er the co nnections on t h e M OD E- ΙΝΤ-T R IG switch wh ic h do not go to the V ertical P reamp b oard .
4. Disconnect all p in connectors w hic h lead off of the V ertical P ream p b oard . 5. Remove the attenuator sh ield and remove the nu ts (four) located und er t his shield at each sid e of the input connectors . 6. Remove the V A R , CH 1 and C H 2 V O LTS/DI V, POSITIO N , I np ut Coupli ng, ΙΝΤ T R IG, and M OD E kn obs. 7. Remove the securing nuts on the vertical POSITION an d th e ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ BAL controls . 8. Remove the three screws at th e rear of the board .
,
ι ι ,
ι ι
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
Maintenance-453 Α / R 453A 9 . L ift up on t h e rear of t h e assembly and sli d e it out of t h e i n strume nt .
10 . T h e board may now be removed from the V ertical P ream p unit as follows : α . Disconnect all p in connectors remaini n g on t h e board . b . U nsol d er all connections on t he rear side of t h e board w h ic h connect between t h e atte n uators and t h e b oard . O b serve th e sol d eri n g p recautions given in t h is section . ε . Remove th e remai n ing screw w h ich h ol d s t h e MOD E -ΙΝΤ -T R IG switc h to t h e b oard .
d. Remove t he four screws h old ing t h e b oar d to t h e attenuators . 11 . To re p lace t h e unit, reverse t h e ord er of removal . Be sure t h e GAI N and I NVER T exte n sions are positioned correctly i n t h e corres po nd ing front-panel h oles .
Cat h ode- R ay Tube R eplacement . cat h ode-ray tube, proceed as follows :
To
re p lace
t he
W A RN I N G Use care when handling α C RT. Protective clothing and safety glasses should be worn . Avoid striking it on any object which might cause it to crack or implode . When storing α C RT, place it face down on α smooth surface with α p rotective cover or soft mat under the faceplate to protect it from scratches.
T h e C RT protects t h e interference . may lose its
s h ield s h o u ld be h an d led carefully . T h is sh iel d C R T d is p lay from d istortion due to magnetic If t h e s h iel d is dro pp e d or struc k s h ar p ly, it s h ielding ability .
T h e following procedure outlines t h e re p lacement of t h e cath od e-ray tube :
removal
a nd
Α . REM O V A L : 1 . Remove th e to p an d bottom covers an d rear p a n el as d escribed p reviously . 2 . Remove th e lig h t filter or face p late p rotector.
3 . Disco nn ect th e C R T a n ode connector . Grou nd t h is lead and t h e anod e connectio n to disc h arge any stored c h arge . 4.
U nsold er t h e
trace-rotation lea d s at t h e C R T s h ield .
5 . Un sold er t h e y-axis rotation lea d s at th e Υ Axis Alig n control . 6 . Disco nn ect t h e deflection- p late connectors . Be careful n ot to ben d th e deflectio n - p late pins . 7 . Remove t h e C R T soc k et . 8 . Remove th e two nuts (by t h e graticule lig hts) w h ic h hol d t h e front of t h e C R T s h iel d to th e su bp anel . 9 . Remove t h e graticule lig h ts from t h e stu d s a n d position t h em away from t h e sh iel d . 10 . L oosen t he two h ex- h ead screws insi d e t h e rear of t h e C R T sh ield . Remove t h e s h ield angle clam ps an d mounting screws . 11 . Slid e th e C R T assembly to t h e rear of t h e instrume n t until t h e face p late clears t h e mounting studs . T h en, lift t h e front of t h e C R T assembly up an d slid e it out of t h e instrument . 12 . L oosen t h e th ree screws on th e C R T clamp insi d e t h e C R T sh ield . Do not remove t h e screws . 13 . H old th e left h an d on t h e C R T face p late and p ush forward on t h e C R T base wit h th e rig ht h a nd . As t h e C R T starts out of t h e sh ield , gras p it firmly with t h e left h and . Wh en th e C R T is free of th e clam p , sli d e t h e s h ield comp letely off t h e C R T . Be careful not to bend th e neck p ins . Β . REPL AC EMEN T : 1 . Insert th e C R T into th e s h ield . B e careful not to bend pins . Seat t h e C R T firmly against t h e sh iel d .
t h e n ec k
2 . Tig h ten t h e bottom clam p screws-insi d e t h e C R T s h ield . Recommen d ed tig h te n ing torq ue : 4 to 7 i n c h -I b s. Do not tig h ten t h e screws on t h e sides . 3 . P lace t h e lig h t mas k over t h e C R T face p late . 4-11
Ma i ntenan ce-453 Α / R 453Α 4 . U sing α met h od similar to t hat for removal (ste p 11) re-insert t h e C R T assembly i n to t h e instr u ment . Be s u re t h e C R T face p late seats p ro p erly in t h e su b panel . 5 . Tig h ten th e two remaining screws on t h e insi d e of t h e C R T s h ield . 6 . Re p lace th e s h iel d angle clam p s an d mou n ting screws οη th e rear sub panel . Tig h ten t h e two h ex- h ea d screws i n side t h e rear of t h e C R T sh ield . 7 . Re p lace t h e graticule lig h ts and securing n uts . 8 . Re p lace t h e C R T soc k et . 9 . Reconnect t h e ano d e connector . Align t h e j ac k on t h e C R T a n d t h e p l u g in t h e connector a n d p ress firmly on t h e i n sulated cover to sna p th e p lug into place . 10 . Reco nn ect t h e trace-rotation an d y-axis lead s .
basing . All transistor soc k ets in th is i n strument are wire d for t h e basing u sed for metal-case transistors . Transistors w h ic h h ave h eat ra d iators or are mounted on t h e ch assis use silicone grease to increase h eat transfer . Re p lace t h e silicone grease w h en re p lacing t h ese tra n sistors .
WA RN I N G Handle silicone grease with care. Avoid getting silicone grease in the mouth or eyes. Wash hands th orough ly after use . Two transistors in bot h t h e C h annel 1 a nd C h annel 2 P ream p circuit ( V ertical P ream p circuit board ) are p erman-
ently mou n ted in special tem p erature com p ensation block s . T h ese transistors (along wit h t h e tem perature com p ensation b loc k ) must be replaced as α unit . Wh en re p lacing t h e unit, p lace it so t he reference information faces t h e left si d e of t h e i n strument and t h e ΡΝΡ transistor (labeled on side of u n it) is toward t h e front of t h e instrument .
F use R e p lacement . Ta b le 4-4 gives th e rati n g, locatio n , and function of t h e fuses used in t h is instrument .
11 . Reconnect th e d eflection- p late connectors . Correct location is indicated on t h e C R T s h iel d . 12 . A d j ust th e H ig h V oltage, T R AC E R OTATIO N , ASTIG, Υ -Axis Alig n , and Geometry ad j ustme n ts . A d j ustment p roced ure is given i n t h e Calibratio n section . Also ch eck t h e basic vertical and h orizontal gain . Transistor R eplacement . Transistors s h o u ld not be rep lace d u nless actually defective . If remove d from th eir sock ets during routine maintenance, return t h em to th eir original soc k ets . U nnecessary re p lacement of transistors may affect t h e cali b ration of t h is instrument . Wh en transistors are re p lace d , c h ec k t h e o p eration of t h at p art of t h e instrument w h ic h may be affected .
F use Ratings Circuit
L ocation
R ating
F 937 F 1101
2 Α F ast 2 Α F ast
F 1102
1 Α F ast
F 1204
0 .25 Α F ast
F 1472
0 .5 Α F ast
Rotary
P O WER switch must be turned off before removing orreplacing transistors.
ι
TA BLE 4-4
N umber
Switc h es .
F unction
Rear su b panel L i ne Voltage Selector assem b ly L i ne Voltage Selector assem b ly By power transformer By power transformer
Indivi d ual
wafers
H ig h
voltage
115-volt line
230-volt line +150 volts +75 volts
or
mec h anical
p arts of rotary switc h es are normally not re p laceable . If α switc h is d efective, re p lace t h e entire assembly . Rep laceme n t switc h es can be ordered eit h er wire d or υη wired ; refer to t h e P arts L ist for t h e applica b le p art numbers .
Re p lacement transistors s h ould be of t h e origi n al ty p e or α d irect re p lacement . F ig . 4-2 s h ows t h e lea d configuration Wh en re p laci n g α switc h , tag t h e lead s and switc h correspond terminals wit h ing i dentification tags as t h e of t he transistors used in t h is instr u ment . Some p lastic case switc as h α transistors lea h ave lea d configurations w h ic h do n ot agree with d s are disco nn ected . T hen, use t h e ol d t h ose s h own h ere . If α transistor is re p lace d by α transistor guid e for installing t h e new one . An alternative meth od w h ich is ma d e by α d ifferent man u facturer th an t h e origiis to draw α sk etch of th e switc h layout an d record th e wire color at eac h terminal . Wh en sold ering to t h e new ηαΙ , c h eck t h e ma nu facturer's basing d iagram for correct 4- 1 2
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
ι
M ai ntenance-453Α/ R 453Α switch be careful that the solder d oes n ot flow beyond the rivets on the switch terminals . Spring tension of the switch contact can b e d estroyed by excessive solder .
T he swing-out chassis on the right side of the instrument provides access to the si d e of the ΤΙΜΕ /DIV and HORIZ DISPLAY switches . The top an d bottom of these switches can b e reached for easier re p air or removal by removing the Β Swee p board (top) or the Α Sweep board (bottom) .
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
Power Transformer Re p lacement . Re p lace the p ower transformer only with α direct-replacement Tektronix transformer . When removing the transformer, tag the leads with the correspond ing terminal numbers to ai d in connecting the new transformer . After the transformer is re p lace d , check the performance of the com p lete instrument using the P erformance Check proced ure . P ower Chassis . The power transistors and other h eat d issipating power-su pp ly components are mounte d b elow the L ow-Voltage Regulator board . Remove the L owVoltage Regulator b oard to reach t hese com p onents . To reach t he un d erside of the chassis, remove the fan through t he rear subpanel .
H igh-Voltage Com partment . T he components locate d in the h igh-voltage compartment can be reached for maintenance or re p lacement by using the following p roced υ re . 1.
Remove the bottom
d escribed in this section,
cover of the instrument as
2 . Remove the h igh-voltage shiel d . 3 . Remove the three screws which hol d the cover on the h igh-voltage com partment .
4 . To remove the com p lete wiring assembly from the h igh-voltage com p artment, unsol d er the post- d eflection anode lea d (heavily insulated lea d at si d e of com p artment) . The other lead s are long enough to allow the assembly to b e lifted out of the com p artment to reach the parts on the un d er si d e . 5 . To re p lace the h igh-voltage com p artment, reverse t he or d er of removal .
ΝΟΤΕ Α // solder joints in the high-voltage compartment should have smooth surfaces. Any protrusions may cause high-voltage arcing at high altitudes.
R ecalibration
After
R e pair
After any electrical com p onent h as b een re p laced, the calibration of that p articular circuit should be checked , as well as the calibration of other closely related circuits . Since the low-voltage su pp ly affects all circuits, calibration of the entire instrument should be checked if work has been done in the low-voltage sup p ly or if the power transformer h as been re p lace d . The P erformance Check p rocedure p rovi d es α quick an d convenient means of checking instrument o p eration . Instrument
R e p ackaging
If the 453 Α is to be ship p ed for long distances by commercial means of transp ortation, it is recommen d ed t hat the instrument be re packaged in the original manner for maximum p rotection . The orginal shi pp ing carton can be saved and use d for this purpose . The Rep ackaging illustration in the Mechanical P arts Illustrations shows h ow to re p ackage the 453 Α an d R453A, an d gives the part numbers for the repackaging components . N ew shipping cartons can b e obtained from Tek tronix, Inc . Contact your local Tektronix F ield Office or representative .
M ai nten ance-453Α/ R 453Α
( Α4) Β Sweep Board Β Trigger Gen erator Β Sweep Generator H orizo n tal Am p lifier (Α3) Α Sweep Board Trigger Pream p Α Trigger Ge n erator Α Sweep Generator Calibrator
( Α2) V ertical Outp u t ( Α6) L ow- V oltage Am Reg u lator B oard plifier Board
(Al) V ertical Pream p B oard Ch annel 1 In p u t Preamp C h annel 2 Ιπρυ t P reamp V ertical Switch ing
(Α5) Ζ Axis Amplifier an d H ig h -Voltage Reg u lator Boar d
F ig . 4-4. L ocation of circuit boards i n t he 453Α .
4- 1 4
453 Α / R 453Α
SECTION 5 CA L IBRA ΤΙΟΝ Change information, if any, affecting th is section will be found at th e rear of th is manual.
Introduction To ass u re instr u ment acc u racy, c h ec k th e cali b ration of t h e 453Α every 1000 h o u rs of operation, or every six mont h s if used infre q uently . Before com p lete cali b ration, t h orou g h ly clean and ins p ect t h is instr u ment as outlined in t h e M aintenance section . Te k tronix
F iel d
Service
Tek tronix, I n c . p rovides com p lete instrume n t re pair and recalibration service at local F iel d Service Ce n ters a n d t h e F actory Service Center . Contact your local Te k tronix F ield Office or rep resentative for furt h er information .
Using
T h is
P roced ure
General . T h is section p rovi d es several feat u res to facilitate c h ec k ing or adju sting th e 453 Α . T h ese are : Index . To ai d in locating α ste p in th e Performance C h ec k or A d ju stment p roced ure, an in d ex is given p rece d ing P art Ι - P erformance C h ec k an d Part ΙΙ - A d j ustment p roce d u re .
Performance C h eck . T h e p erformance of th is instru ment can be c h ec k e d with o u t removing th e covers or ma k ing internal a d j ustments b y p erforming only P art Ι Performance C h ec k . T h is p roce d u re ch ec k s t h e instrument against th e tolerances listed in th e Performance Re q uirement column of Section 1 . Screw d river a d ju stments accessi b le from th e outsid e of th e instr u ment are ad ju sted as p art of th e P erformance C h ec k p roced u re . In ad dition, α crossreference is provi d ed to t h e ste p in P art Ι Ι - A d ju stment w h ic h will retu rn th e instrument to correct cali b ration . In most cases, th e a d j ustment ste p can be p erformed wit h o u t c h anging control settings or e qu i p ment connections . A d j ustment P rocedure . To return t h is instr u me n t to correct cali bration wit h th e minimum num b er of step s, p erform only P art Ι Ι -A d ju stment . T h e A d j ustme n t proced u re gives t h e recommen d e d cali b ration p roced u re for all circuits in t h is instr u ment . It also includes c h ec k proce d u res for t h ose f u nctions w h ic h cannot be c h ec k ed with ou t removing th e covers (e .g ., power-s u pp ly rip p le) . P roced ures are not given for c h ec k s w h ic h can b e ma d e wit h o u t removing t h e covers ; see Part Ι - P erformance C h ec k for th e p roced ure for th ese c h ec k s .
P artial Procedure . Α partial c h ec k or a d j ustment is often d esira b le after re p lacing com p onents, or to tou c h up th e a d j ustment of α portion of t h e instrument between maj or recali b rations . To c h ec k or ad ju st only p art of th e instr u ment, set th e controls as given u n d er P reliminary Control Settings and start wit h th e n earest Equ i p ment Requ ire d list p rece d ing t h e d esired p ortion . To p revent unnecessary recalibration of ot h er p arts of t h e instr u ment, read ju st only if th e tolerance given in t h e C HE C K- p art of t h e ste p is not met . If re-a d ju stment is necessary, also c h ec k t h e calib ration of any ste p s listed in t h e I N T ER ACTIO N - p art of th e ste p . Com p lete Performance C h ec k /Ad j ustment . To comp letely c h ec k and ad ju st all p arts of t h is instru ment, p erform both P arts Ι a n d ΙΙ . Start th e com p lete p roced ure by a d ju sting t h e p ower su pp ly as given i n t h e A d j ustment proce du re . T h en p erform t h e A d j ustment p roce d u re for α portion of t h e instr u ment (e .g ., V ertical System A dju stment) an d follow th is with th e P erformance C h ec k for t h e same p ortion (e .g ., Vertical System C h ec k ) . T h is meth o d will assu re t h at th e instr u ment is bot h correctly ad j uste d and p erforming with in all given sp ecifications . / ΜΡΟβΤΑΝΤΝΟΤΕ All waveforms sh own in th is section were tak en with α Tek tronix Oscilloscope Camera System, unless noted oth erwise .
T E ST E Q U I PMEN T
RE Q U I RE D
General The following test e qu i p ment an d accessories, or its equ ivalent, is re qu ired for com p lete cali b ration of t h e 453Α . S pecifications given for t h e test e q u i p ment are th e minim u m necessary for accurate cali bration . T h erefore, some of th e s p ecifications liste d h ere may be somew h at less p recise t h an t h e actu al p erformance ca p a b ilities of th e test e q u i p ment . All test e q ui p ment is ass u med to b e correctly calibrated an d o p erating wit h in t h e liste d s p ecifications . Th e P erformance C h ec k a nd Ad ju stment proce d u res are based on th is recommen d e d e q u i p ment . If ot h er equ i p ment is su b stitute d , control settings or cali b ration setup may nee d to be altere d to meet th e re qu irements of th e eq ui p -
Cal ibration-453 Α/R453A ment used . Detaile d o p erating instructions for the test equipment are n ot given in this p roce d ure . Refer to the instruction manual for the test equi p ment if more information is need ed .
Special
Calibration Fixtures
Special Tektronix calibration fixtures are u sed in this p roce d ure only where they facilitate instrument calibration . These sp ecial calibration fixtures are available from Tektronix, Inc . Or d er b y p art number through your local Tektronix F iel d Office or re p resentative . Calibration Eq ui p ment Alternatives
5 . Test-oscillosco p e system . B an d wi d th, DC to 50 megah ertz ; minimum deflection factor, five millivolts/ d ivision ; accuracy, within 3% . Tektronix 453 Α Oscillosco p e with Ρ 6054 P robe recomrr ι en d e d . 6 . V ariable autotransformer . 2 M ust b e ca p able of supplying at least 120 volt-am p eres over α range of 90 to 137 volts (180 to 274 volts for 230-volt nominal line) . (If autotransformer d oes not h ave an AC voltmeter to indicate out p ut voltage, monitor the out p ut with an AC voltmeter with α range of at least 137 or 274 volts, RMS .) F or exam p le, General Radio W10MT3A M etere d V ariac Autotransformer . (Use General Rad io W20HMT3A for 230-volt nominal o p eration .)
All of the test equi p ment is required to completely check an d ad just this instrument . H owever, some of the 7 . P recision DC voltmeter . Accuracy, within 0 .02% ; resolution, items used only for the P erformance Check can be d elete d 50 microvolts ; range, zero to 100 volts . F or without com p romising the measurement ca p abilities of this example, F luke M o del 825Α Differential DC Voltmeter . instrument . F or exam p le, the low-frequency sine-wave generator is used only in the P erformance Check, an d may be deleted if the user d oes not d esire to check common8 . DC V oltmeter (VOM) . 2 Range, zero to 2500 volts ; mode rejection ratio or low-frequency triggering ca p abilities accuracy, checke d to within 1°/ο at -1960 volts . For of this instrument. E q uipment u sed only for the Perforexample, Tri p lett M odel 630-NA .3 mance Check procedure is indicated by footnote 1 ; items require d only for the A d justment p roce d ure are ind icated by footnote 2 . 9 . Square-wave generator .2 Must h ave the following outp ut capabilities (may b e obtaine d from se p arate generators) : 12 volts am p litu d e into 50 ohms at one kilohertz Test Eq ui p ment with α risetime of 12 nanosecon d s or less ; 500 millivolts into 50 ohms at 100 k ilohertz with α risetime of one ηαηο1 . Time-mark generator . M arker outp uts, F ive seconds second or less . Tektronix Ty p e 106 S q uare-Wave Generator to 10 nanosecon d s ; marker accuracy, within 0 .1% . Tekrecommen d ed (meets both output requirements) . tronix 2901 Time-Mark Generator recommen d ed . Accessories 2 . H igh-fre q uency constant-am p litu d e sine-wave generator . F re q uency, 350 kilohertz to above 50 megahertz ; reference frequency, 50 kilohertz ; out p ut am p litu d e, variable from five millivolts to five volts into 50 ohms or 10 volts unterminate d ; am p litude accuracy, within 3% of reference as output frequency changes. Tektronix Ty p e 191 Constant Am p litu d e Signal Generator recommen d ed .
10 . 18-inch cable . Im pedance, 50 ohms ; ty p e, RG-58/U ; connectors, BNC . Tektronix P art No . 012-0076-00 (su pp lie d accessory) .
3 . Stan d ard am p litu d e calibrator . Output signal, onekilohertz sq uare wave an d p ositive DC voltage ; output am p litu d e, five millivolts to 50 volts ; am p litu d e accuracy, within 0 .25% ; must h ave cho pp ed d isp lay feature (for Performance Check only), Tektronix calibration fixture 067-0502-01 recommen d ed .
12 . F ive-nanosecond cable . Im pedance, 50 ohms ; type, RG-213/U ; connectors, GR874 . Tektronix P art No . 017-0502-00 .
4 . L ow-fre q uency sine-wave generator .' F requency, 60 h ertz to one megahertz ; outp ut am p litu d e, variable from 0 .5 volt to 40 volts p eak to p eak . For exam p le, General Radio 1310- Α Oscillator (use General Rad io Ty p e 274 QBJ Adapter to p rovi d e BNC out p ut) . ' Re q uired only for Performance Check .
5- 2
11 . 42-inch cable . Im p e d ance, 50 ohms ; type RG-58/U ; connectors, BNC . Tektronix P art No . 012-0057-01 .
13 . In-line GR termination . Impe d ance, 50 ohms ; wattage rating, two watts ; accuracy, ±2% ; connectors, GR874 in p ut with BNC male outp ut . Tektronix P art No . 017-0064-00 . 2 Re q uired only for A djustment proced ure . 3 If α precision voltage divi d er is available for use with t he precision DC voltmeter (such as F luke 80 Ε -2), it can be u sed in place of this meter .
Cal ibratio η -453Α/ R 453Α 14 . BN C 103-0030-00 .
Τ
connector .'
Te k tronix
P art No .
15 . BN C to alligator cli p a d apter .' Connectors, BN C female an d two alligator cli p s . Te k tronix P art No . 013-0076-00 . 16 . Dual-i n put co u p ler . M atc h ed signal tr ansfer to eac h input . Te k tronix cali b ration fixture 067-0525-00 . 17 . 5Χ G R atte nu ator . Im p e d ance, 50 o h ms ; acc u racy, ±2% ; connectors, G R 874 . Te k tronix P art No . 017-0079-00 .
P reliminary Control
Settings
Set th e 453Α controls as follows (for bot h P erformance C h ec k an d Ad ju stment proced u re) :
Dis p lay Controls INTENSITY
F OC U S
SCA LE Ι LLUM
Midrange
Adju st for well d efine d
d is p lay As d esired
V ertical Controls ( b oth c h an n els if a pp lica b le) 18 . 10 Χ p robe .' Tek tronix Ρ 6061 recommen d ed 20 (s up p lied accessory) . 19 . G R to BN C a d a pter . Ad a p ts G R 874 connector to C BN C female connector . Te k tronix P art No . 017-0064-00 . Pu 20 . BN C termi n atio n (two) . Impedance, 50 o h ms; wattage rati ng, two watts ; acc u racy, ±2°/ο ; connectors, BN C . Te k tronix P art No . 011-0049-01 . 21 . C u rrent-meas u ring p ro be and p assive termination .' Sensitivity, two mill iam p eres/mil Ι ivolt ; accuracy, wit h in 3°/ο . Te k tronix Ρ6021 Current P ro b e wit h 011-0105-00 P assive Termination recommen d e d . 22 . 1 Χ p ro b e . Te k tronix Ρ6011 recommend ed .
VO L TS/DI V
VA R POSITIO N in pu t Co u p ling M OD E ΙΝΤ Τ R Ι G I NVER T
mV Calibrate d M i d ra n ge DC H 1 N O RM she d in
Triggering Controls ( b oth Α a nd Β ) LEVEL S L O PE CO UPL I N G SO UR C E
0 + AC ΙΝΤ
Swee p Controls
DELAY-TIME F ully countercloc k wise MUL TI PL I ER 23 . 1 In p ut RC normalizer . 2 Time constant, one megoh m Α an d Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V ms Χ 20 p icofarads; atten u ation, 2 Χ ; connectors, BN C . Te kΑ VA R Calibrate d tronix cali b ration fixt u re 067-0538-00 . Α S WEEP M OD E AU TO T R IG Β S WEEP M OD E TR IGG ER A BLE AF T ER D EL AY TIME Ad j ustment Tools H O R IZ DIS PL AY Α MAG O FF 24 . Screw d river . T h ree-inc h sh aft, 3/32-inc h bit . F or Α S WEEP LEN GT H FULL exam p le, Xce L ite R-3323 . P OSITIO N M i d range PO WER ON 25 . L ow-ca p acita n ce screw d river . 2 1 1/2-inc h sh aft . Te k tronix P art No . 003-0000-00 . Si d e- Panel Controls 26 . CA T u ning tool . 2 H an d le an d insert for 5/64-inc h (ID) cores . Te k tronix P art No . 003-0307-00 and 003-0310-00 .
h ex
Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V V A R IA BLE CA L I BR ATO R
L .1 V
Performance
Ch eck -453Α/ R 453A
P A R T Ι - PERF O RM A N C E C HE C K Introduction
Th e followi n g p roce d ure c h ec k s th e p erformance of t h e
453 Α with out removing t h e covers or ma k ing internal a d ju stments . All tolerances given in t h is p roced u re are b ase d on Section 1 of th is manual . In d ex to
P art
Ι -
Performance
C h eck
DIS PL AY an d Z-AXIS C HE C K 1 . C h ec k Astigmatism
P age 5-6
2 . C h ec k Trace Alignment
P age 5-6
3 . C h ec k Υ -Axis Alignment
P age 5-6
4 . C h ec k E xternal Ζ -Axis O p eration
Page 5-6
6 . C h ec k C h annel 1 an d 2 Gain 7 . C h ec k Add e d
M o de
8 . C h ec k C h annel Acc u racy
O p eration
1 an d 2 Deflection
9 . C h ec k C h annel V olts/Division Range
1
10 . C h ec k C h annel Deflection F actor
1
an d
2
V aria b le
an d 2 Cascad e d
Β
H ig h - F req uency
P age 5-13
21 . C h ec k Α Rej ect O p eration
and
Β
L ow- F re qu ency
P age 5-13
22 . C h ec k Single Swee p Op eration 23 . C h ec k O p eration
Switc h
P age 5-14
L evel
Page 5-14
Triggering
P age 5-15
an d
Page 5-16
Sweep
Timi n g
P age 5-17
M ag n ified
Sweep
P age 5-18
26 . C hec k O peration
Au to
P age 5-8
P age 5-14
Slo p e
Β
Page 5-7
L ine
Β
Recovery
Time
P age 5-8 P age 5-8 P age 5-8
P age 5-9
an d 2 Casca d ed
P age 5-9
H O R IZO N TA L
SYST EM C HE C K
27 . C h ec k Acc u racy 28 . C h ec k Acc u racy
Α
Α
an d an d
Β
Β
30 . C h ec k Delay-Time mental L inearity 31 . C h ec k Delay-Time
M ulti p lier
Re j ection
Page 5-10 Page 5-10
33 . Ch ec k Α Swee p
Incre-
J itter
T R IGG ER SYST EM CHE C K 17 . C h ec k Α an d Β Internal Triggering O p eration
Page 5-11
L engt h
34 . C hec k Β E n d s Α Op eration 35 . C h ec k Range
Α
an d Β
ι ι ι ι
'
P age 5-19
29 . C h ec k Delay-Time Accuracy
32 . C h ec k M ixed Swee p Op eration
16 . C h ec k Am p lifier Crosstal k
5-4
an d
Α
and
Ban d wi d th
Common- M od e
and
Α
P age 5-9
C h ec k
20 . C h ec k Α Re j ect O p eration
1
I
25 . C hec k Operation
12 . C h ec k C h o p p e d Operation
15 . Ratio
P age 5-11
Β
P age 5-7
Page 5-9
14 . C h ec k C h annel 1 U pp er Ban d wi d th L imit
L ow- F requ ency
19 . C h ec k Α an d Triggering O p eration
an d Β Triggering
11 . C h ec k Alternate Operation
13 . C h ec k U pp er V ertical L imit of C h annels 1 an d 2
Page 5-11
24 . Ch ec k Α Control Range
VER TICA L SYST EM C HE C K 5 . C h ec k C h annel 1 an d 2 Step Attenuator Balance
18 . C h ec k Α an d Β E xternal Triggering
Op eration
ι ι
Variable Control
Page 5-19 P age 5-20 Page 5-20
1
Page 5-20
Page 5-21
1
Page 5-21
36 . C h ec k Χ Gain
P age 5-21
37 . C h ec k Χ -Υ O p eration
P age 5-22
ι ι
P erformance Check-453 Α /R453A Page 5-22
38 . Check Χ - Υ Phasing
M od e
P age 5-22
40 . Check Calibrator Repetition Rate
P age 5-23
41 . Check Calibrator Voltage Out p ut
P age 5-23
39 . Check Χ B and wi d th in Χ - Υ
P reliminary P roce d ure
L oo p
P age 5-24
43 . Check Α and Β Gate Outp ut Signal
Page 5-24
P erformance
Check
NOTE
The performance of th is instrument can be ch ecked at any temperature with in th e 0° C to +50° C range unless stated oth erwise.
OUTPUT SIGNALS CHECK
42 . Check Current Through Probe
for
1 . Connect the 453 Α to α p ower source which meets the voltage an d frequency requirements of this instrument . 2 . Set the controls as given un d er P reliminary Control Settings . Allow at least 20 minutes warmup before p ro ceeding .
NOTES
P erformance C h ec k -453Α / R 453A DIS PL AY and Z-AXIS C HEC K
E q ui p ment R eq uired
5 . F ive-nanosecon d G R ca b le
1 . Time-mar k generator 2 . H ig h -fre qu ency generator
constant-am p litu d e
sine-wave
6 . In-line 50-o h m G R termi n atio n 7 . BN C Τ connector
3 . 18-inc h 50-o h m BN C cable
8 . BN C to alligator-cli p ad a p ter
4 . 42-inc h 50-o h m BN C ca b le
9 . T h ree-inch screw d river
Control Settings Set th e controls as given u n d er P reliminary Control Settings . 1 . C h ec k Astigmatism α . Connect t h e 1 kH z CA L connector to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector with t h e 18-inc h BN C cab le . b . C HE C K -C R T d isp lay is well d efined . c . If necessary, adju st th e F OC U S co n trol and ASTIG n t (si d e p anel) to o b tain best d isp lay d efinition . adj ustme 1
d. Disconnect t h e cab le .
20
d. M ove α mar k er to th e center vertical line wit h t h e h orizontal P OSITIO N control . e . C HE C K- M ar k er aligns wit h center vertical line wit h in 0 .1 d ivision total from to p to bottom of t h e gratic u le . f . CA L I BR ATIO N -See ced u re .
ste p 10 of A d j ustme n t p ro-
4 . C h ec k E xternal Ζ -Axis O peration α . Change th e following control settings : C H 1 VO LTS/DI V C h annel 1 P OSITIO N A SOURCE Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V
V M i d range ΙΝΤ μs
2 . C h ec k Trace Alignment α . P osition th e trace to th e center h orizontal line wit h th e C h an n el 1 P OSITIO N control . b . C HE C K -Trace aligns wit h center line wit h i n 0 .1 d ivision from left to rig h t graticule line . c . If necessary, a dju st t h e T R AC E R OTATIO N ad j ustment (side p anel) so t h e trace is parallel to t h e center h orizontal line . 3 . C h ec k Υ -Axis Alignment α . Connect th e time-mar k generator to t h e C FI 1 O R Χ connector wit h th e 18-inc h BN C ca b le .
b. Set t h e mark ers .
time-mar k
generator
for one-millisecon d
c . Turn t h e C h annel 1 P OSITIO N control fully co u ntercloc k wise to move th e b aseline of t h e mar k er d is p lay as far below t h e bottom of th e gratic u le as p ossi b le .
5- 6
b . Connect th e h ig h -fre q uency constant am p lit u d e sine wave generator to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector wit h t h e fivena n osecon d G R cable, in-line 50-oh m G R termination, a n d th e BN C Τ connector . c . Set th e generator for α five-volt p ea k -to- p ea k o u t p u t ( u se cali b rate d o u tp u t p osition of generator) at its reference fre q uency (50 kilo h ertz) .
d . Remove th e groun d stra p from b etween th e Ζ AXIS I NPU T b in d ing p osts . e . Connect t h e out p u t of t h e BN C Τ connector to t h e Ζ AXIS I NPU T b in d ing p osts with t h e 42-inc h 50-o h m BN C cable and th e BN C to alligator cli p ada p ter ; connect b lac k lead of alligator clip to groun d p ost . f . C HE C K -C R T d is p lay for noticeab le intensity modulation (I N T EN SITY control setting may need to b e reduce d to obser v e mo d ulation) . g . Disconnect all stra p .
test e q ui p ment an d re p lace grou nd
P erformance C h eck -453 Α/ R453A VERTICA L SYST EM C HE C K Eq ui p ment R eq uired 1 . Stan d ar d am p litu de cali b rator
6 . 18-i n c h 50-o h m BN C cable
2 . H ig h -fre qu ency sine-wave generator
7 . F ive-nanosecon d G R cable
3.
L ow-fre q uency
8 . In-Line 50-o h m G R termination
sine-wave generator
4 . 42-inc h 50-o h m BN C cable
9 . 5Χ G R atten u ator
5 . Dual-in pu t cou p ler
10 . Th ree-inc h screw d river
Control Settings Set th e controls as given un d er P reliminary Control Settings . 5 . C h eck B alance
C h annel
1
an d
2
Ste p
Attenuator
α . Set t h e C h annel 1 and 2 In pu t Cou p ling switc h es to GN D.
b . P osition th e trace to th e center h orizontal line wit h C h annel 1 P OSITIO N control .
t he
c . C HE C K -C h ange t h e C H 1 V O L TS/DI V switc h from 20 m V to 5 m V . Trace s h ou l d not move more th an 0 .1 d ivision vertically .
ΝΟΤΕ
Use the BEAM F I N D ER switch to locate th e trace if
it is deflected off screen wh en switch ing to 10 or 5 m V.
d . If n ecessary, ad j ust t h e C h a n nel 1 ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ B A L ad j ustment (front p anel) for no trace s h ift as th e C H 1 V O L TS/DI V switc h is c h ange d from 20 m V to 5 m V . e . Set t h e M OD E switch to C H 2 . f . P osition t h e trace to t h e center h orizontal line with h e C h annel 2 P OSITIO N control .
t
g . C HE C K- C h ange t h e C H 2 V O L TS/DI V switc h from 20 m V to 5 m V . Trace sh o u l d not move more t h an 0 .1 d ivision vertically .
h . If necessary, ad j ust th e C h annel 2 ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ BA L u adj stment (front p anel) for no trace sh ift as th e C H 2 V O L TS/DI V switc h is ch a n ged from 20 m V to 5 m V .
6 . C h ec k
C h annel
1 and 2 Gain
α . C h ange th e followi n g control settings : ι rι ι αηα ι νυιια/ υιν C H 1 an d 2 In put Cou p ling MOD E Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V
ιυ m DC CH 1 .5 ms
b . Connect t h e stan d ard am p litu d e cali b rator ou t p ut connector to th e C H 1 O R Χ and C H 2 O R Υ connectors wit h α 42-inc h BN C ca b le an d t h e d ual-in p ut cou p ler . c . Set th e stan d ar d am p lit ud e calibrator for α 0 .1-volt s q uare-wave o u t pu t .
d . Center th e d isp lay on th e gratic u le . e . C HE C K -C R T d isp lay for five divisions of d eflection . f . If necessary, a dj ust t h e C h annel 1 GAI N ad ju stment (front p anel) for exactly five d ivisions of d eflection . g . Set th e M OD E switc h to ADD .
h . Pull t h e I NVER T switc h . i . Center t h e dis p lay wit h control .
j.
th e
C h annel 2 P OSITIO N
C HE C K -C R T d isp lay for straig h t line . 5-7
P erformance Chec k-453 Α/R 453A
k. If necessary, adju st the Channel 2 GAI N ad j ustment (front p anel) for straig ht li ne. 7. Chec k Add ed
Mod e Operation
α. P us h in the I NVER T switch .
f. C HE C K-U sing th e CH 2 V OLTS/DI V switch an d standard am plitud e calibrator settings given in Table 5-1, chec k the vertical d eflection accuracy within 3°/ο in each position of t h e CH 2 V O LTS/DIV switch. 9. Chec k C hannel 1 an d 2 V ariable Range
b . Set th e standard am plitude calibrator for α 50-millivolt square-wave output . c. C HE CK -C RT dis play five d ivisions ±0 .15 d ivision in am p litu d e. 20 8. Ch ec k C hannel 1 an d 2 Deflection Accuracy α . Set the MOD E switch to CH 1 . b . Set the Channel 2 In put Co up ling switch to G N D . c . CHE CK-Using the CH 1 V OLTS/DIV switch an d stan dard am plitude cali brator settings given in Ta b le 5-1, chec k t he vertical deflection accuracy within 3°/ο in each position of the CH 1 VO LTS/DIV switch .
d . Set the MOD E switch to CH 2 . e. Set the Channel 1 Inpu t Co u pling switch to G ND an d 2 In put Cou pling switch to DC .
the Ch annel
Volts/Division
α. Set the standard am p litude calibrator for α 0.1-volt square-wave outpu t. b . Ch ange th e following control settings : C H 1 an d 2 V O LTS/DI V C H 1 an d 2 In put Cou pling
AC
mV
c . CHE C K-Turn the Ch annel 2 VA R control fully co untercloc kwise (minimum gain) . Display sh oul d be reduce d to two d ivisions or less (ind icates adequate range for continuously variable deflection factors between th e calibrated steps) . Channel 2 UN CA L lig ht must be on wh en the Channel 2 V A R control is not in the cali brate d p osition. d . Set the MOD E switch to CH 1 . e. CHE CK-T urn th e Channel 1 VA R control fully countercloc kwise (minim um gain) . Display sh ould be redu ce d to two divisions or less (indicates adeq uate range for continuously variable d eflection factors between the calibrated step s) . Ch annel 1 UN CA L light m u st be on when Channel 1 V A R control is not in the cali brate d p osition .
TA BLE 5-1 f. Disconnect all test eq ui p ment.
Vertical Deflection Accuracy VO LTS/DI V switch setting
Standar d am plitude calibrator output
Vertical d eflection in divisions
5 mV 10 mV 20 mV
20 millivolts 50 millivolts 0.1 volt
4 5 5
50 mV 0.2 volt .1 0.5 volt .2 5 1 volt .5 2 volts 5 volts 1 2 10 volts 20 volts 10 50 volts 5-8
4 5 5 4 5 5 4
M aximum
error for ±3°/ο accuracy (divisions) ±0 .12 +0 .15 Previously set in step 6 ±0 .12 ±0 .15 ±0 .15 ±0 .12 ±0 .15 ±0 .15 ±0'12 ±0 .15
10 . Chec k C hannel 1 an d 2 Cascad ed Deflection F actor α . Connect the CH 1 OUT connector (side panel) to th e CH 2 O R Υ connector with the 18-inc h 50-o hm BN C cable. b . Connect the stan d ard am plitude cali brator to the CH 1 OR Χ connector with α 42-inc h BN C cable . c . Ch ange th e following control settings : C H 1 and 2 V O LTS/DI V C H 1 an d 2 V AR C H 1and 2 I nput Coupling
mV Cali b rated DC
d . Set the stan d ard am p litud e calibrator for α fivemillivolt squ are-wave output .
P erformance C h ec k -453Α / R 453A b t h e d isplay wit h th e C h annel e . Center control .
f . Set th e
M OD E
1 P OSITIO N
switc h to C H 2 .
g . Center on th e display wit h t h e C h annel 2 P OSITIO N control .
h. C HE C K -C R T d isplay five d ivisions or greater in am p litu d e (less th an one millivolt/d ivision minim u m d eflection factor) .
. Connect t h e h ig h -fre q u ency constant-am p lit u d e sine wave generator to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector th ro u g h th e five-nanosecon d G R ca b le an d t h e in-line 50-o h m G R termination . c . Set t h e generator for α six- d ivision d is p lay, centere d th e graticule, at its reference fre q uency (50 kiloh ertz) .
d . With out c h anging th e outp ut am p litude, increase th e out p ut freq ue n cy of t h e generator until th e d is p lay is red u ced to 4 .2 d ivisions (-3 d B point) . e . C HE C K -O u tp u t fre q uency of generator must b e 60 mega h ertz or h ig h er . Actu al fre qu ency ---- mega h ertz .
i . Disconnect all test e qu i p ment .
f . Set th e C H 1 V O L TS/DI V switc h to 10 m V .
11 . C h ec k Alternate O p eration α . Set th e M OD E switc h to A LT .
g . Repeat p arts c an d d of t h is step .
b. P osition t h e traces about two d ivisions apart . c . T u rn th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h t h rou g h out its range .
d . C HE C K -Trace alternation b etween C h annel 1 an d 2 a t all swee p rates . At faster sweep rates, alternation will not be a pp arent ; instead d is p lay ap p ears as two traces on t h e screen . 12 . C h ec k
C h o pped O peration CH O P
c . Set th e Α LEVEL control for α sta b le d isp lay . d . C HE C K -D u ration of eac h com p lete cycle between 3 .4 an d 5 d ivisions (500 kilo h ertz ±20%) .
Vertical Band wi d t h
α . C h ange t h e following co n trol settings : 20 C H 1 VO L TS/DI V mV M OD C E H 1 Α 20 ΤΙΜΕ /DI V μs
j.
Re p eat p arts c and d of t h is step .
Ι . Set t h e
.5 μ s
b . P osition th e traces a b out fo u r d ivisions a p art .
13 . C h ec k U pper C h annels 1 an d 2
i . Set t h e C H 1 V O LTS/DI V switc h to 5 m V .
k . C HE C K -Out p ut freq uency of generator m u st be 40 mega h ertz or h ig h er . Act u al freq u ency ---- mega h ertz .
α . C h ange th e following control settings :
MOD E Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V
h . C HE C K-Out p ut fre q u ency of generator m u st be 50 mega h ertz or h ig h er . Actual fre q uency ---- mega h ertz .
L imit of
M OD E
switc h to C H 2 .
m . Disconnect th e termination from connect it to t h e C H 2 O R Υ connector .
C h annel
1 an d
η . Re p eat p arts c an d d of th is ste p . ο . C HE C K -O u t p u t fre qu ency of generator must be 40 mega h ertz or h ig h er . Actual freq ue n cy ---- mega h ertz . ρ . Set th e C H 2 νΟιΤ S/DI V switc h to 10 m V .
q. Re p eat p arts c an d d of th is ste p . r . C HE C K -O u t p ut frequ ency of generator m u st be 50 mega h ertz or h igh er . Actual fre q uency ---- mega h ertz,
5- 9
P erforma n ce Check -453A/R 453A s. Set th e C H 2 VO L TS/D I V switc h to 20 m V .
d. C h ange t h e following control settings :
ADD t . Repeat parts c an d d of th is step . Pu
M OD E
υ . C HE C K -Outp ut fre qu ency of generator m u st b e 60 mega h ertz or h igh er . Act u al fre q uency ---- mega h ertz . ν . Disconnect all test e q u i p ment . 14 . C h eck C h annel 1 an d 2 Casca d e d Upp er wi d t h L imit
I NVER T
lle d o u t
e . C HE C K -C R T d is p lay for 0 .4- d ivision or less d eflection (common-mo d e rej ection ratio 20 :1 or b etter) . f . Disconnect all test e q ui p ment .
B an d -
16 . C h ec k Am p lifier Crosstal k
α . Connect th e h ig h -fre q uency generator to t h e C H 1 O R α . Connect t h e h ig h -frequ ency constant amplitu d e generΧ connector with th e five-nanoseco n d GR cable and in-line ator to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector with th e five-nanosecon d 50-o h m G R termination . G R cable, 5 Χ GR atten u ator, an d in-line 50-o h m G R termination, in give n ord er . b . C h ange t h e following co n trol settings : b . Connect th e C H 1 O U T connector to th e C H 2 O R Υ connector with t h e 18-inch 50-o h m BN C cable .
Pu
c . Set th e C H 2 V O L TS/DI V switc h to 5 m V .
d. Set th e generator for α six- d ivision d isp lay, centered on t h e gratic u le, at its reference fre qu ency (50 kilo h ertz) . e . With o u t c h anging th e ou tp u t am p litude, increase t h e o u tput fre qu e n cy of t h e generator u ntil th e d eflection is re d u ce d to 4 .2 d ivisions (-3 d B p oint) . f . C HE C K -O u t p u t fre q uency of generator must be 25 mega h ertz or h ig h er . Act u al fre qu ency ---- mega h ertz . g . Discon n ect all test e qu i p ment . 15 . C h ec k Common- Mo d e
R ej ection R atio
α . Ch ange t h e following control settings : 20 C H 1 an d 2 VO LTS/DI V mV Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V .1 ms
C H 1 VO L TS/DI V MOD E I NVER T
c . Set t h e constant-amplit ud e generator for an eig h td ivision d isp lay at one kilo h ertz .
5- 1 0
1 s h ed n
i
c . Set t h e generator for α two-division d isp lay at 20 mega h ertz .
d . Set th e M OD E switc h to C H 2 . e . Set t h e C H 1 an d CH 2 VO L TS/DI V switch es to 20 mV . f . C HE C K -C R T d is p lay for 0 .2- d ivision or less d eflection (amplifier crosstal k ratio 100 :1 or better) . g . Disconnect th e termination from C h annel 1 and connect it to th e C H 2 O R Υ connector .
h . Set th e C H 2 VO L TS/DI V switc h to .2 . i . Set th e generator for α two-division d is p lay at 20 megah ertz . j.
20 b . Connect t h e low-frequency generator to th e C H 1 O R Χ an d CH 2 O R Υ connectors wit h th e five- n anosecon d G R ca b le, in-line 50-o h m G R termination, an d th e d ual-in p ut co u p ler .
.2
CH
C h ange th e following control settings :
CH
2 V O L TS/DI V MOD E
mV
CH 1
k . C HE C K -C R T dis p lay for 0.2-d ivision or less d eflection . Ι . Disconnect all test e qu i p ment .
Performance C hec k -453Α/ R 453A
T R IGG ER
C HE C K
SYST EM
Eq ui p ment R eq uire d 1 . H ig h -fre qu e n cy generator
co n stant-am p litu d e
sine-wave
6 . In-Line 50-ohm G R termination 7 . G R to BN C female a d a p ter
2 . L ow-fre q uency sine-wave generator
8 . BN C Τ connector
3 . Time-mar k generator
9 . 18-inc h 50-o h m BN C cable
4 . 10 Χ p robe
10 . 50-o h m BN C terminatio n (two)
5 . F ive-nanosecon d G R ca b le
11 .
Control Settings
42-inc h 50-o h m BN C ca b le
g . C h ange th e following control settings :
Set t h e controls as given u n d er P reliminary Control Settings . 17 . C h ec k Α an d Β Internal Triggering O p eration α . Connect t h e h ig h -frequ ency constant-am p litude sinewave generator to th e C H 1 O R Χ connector with h e fivenanosecon d G R cable an d in-line 50-o h m G R terminatio n .
t
b . C h ange t h e following control settings : C H 1 V O L TS/DI V 50 mV Α and Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V .1 μ s Α S WEEP M OD E N O RM
T R IG
c . Set th e generator for α 0 .3-d ivision d isp lay at 10 megah ertz .
d. C HE C K -Stable C R T d is p lay can be obtained with th e Α CO UPL I N G switc h set to AC, LF REJ, an d DC ( Α LEVEL control may b e a d j uste d as necessary to obtain stable d is p lay) . T h e Α SWEEP T R IG'D lig h t must be on w h en t h e d is p lay is stable .
H O R IZ DIS PLAY MAG
Α X10
h. Set t h e generator for α 1 .5- d ivision d isplay at 60 mega h ertz .
i . C HE C K -Sta ble C R T d is p lay can be o b taine d wit h t h e Α CO UPL I N G switc h set to AC, LF REJ, an d DC ( Α LEVEL an d HF STA B controls may b e a d ju ste d as necessary to obtain α sta b le dis p lay) . Disp lay j itter sh o u l d not exceed 0 .1 d ivision (one nanosecond) .
j.
C h ange th e following control settings :
Α LEVEL Α CO UPL I N G H O R IZ DIS PL AY
Set for stable Α d is p lay AC Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP)
k . C HE C K -Stable C R T d is p lay can b e o b tained wit h th e Β CO UPL I N G switc h set to AC, LF REJ, an d DC ( Β LEVEL control may b e a d ju ste d as necessary to obtain stable d isp lay) .
e. C h ange th e following control settings : Α CO UPL I N G Α LEVEL H O R IZ DIS PL AY
AC Set for stable Α dis p lay Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP)
f . C HE C K -Sta b le C R T d is p lay can be obtaine d wit h t h e Β CO UPL I N G switc h set to AC, LF REJ, an d DC ( Β LEVEL control may be a dju sted as necessary to obtain α stable d is p lay) .
Ι . Disconnect all test e q ui p ment . 18 . C h ec k Α an d Β
E xternal
Triggering O peration
α . C h ange t h e following control settings : Α an d Β SO UR C E H O R IZ DIS PL AY MAG
ΕΧΤ Α O FF 5- 1 1
Performance C h eck -453Α/ R 453A b . Connect t h e h ig h -frequency constant-am p litude sinewave generator to th e C H 1 O R Χ co n nector t h roug h t h e five-nanosecond G R cable, G R to BN C ad a pter, BN C Τ connector, an d 50-o h m BN C termination . Connect t h e output of t h e BN C Τ connector to t h e Α ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T connector wit h t h e 18-inc h 50-o h m BN C ca b le a n d t h e 50-o h m BN C termination .
c . Set t h e generator for α one- d ivision d isp lay (50 millivolts) at 10 mega h ertz .
d. C HE C K -Stable C R T d is p lay can be o b tained wit h t h e Α CO UPL I N G switc h set to AC, LF REJ, an d DC ( Α LEVEL control may b e a d ju ste d as necessary to o b tain sta b le d isp lay) . e . Disconnect t h e termination from th e Α ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T connector an d connect it to t h e Β ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ INPUT connector .
f . C h ange t h e following control settings :
A SOURCE
Α LEVEL H O R IZ DIS PL AY
ΙΝΤ Set for stable Α d is p lay Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP)
g . C HE C K -Stable C R T d is p lay can be obtaine d wit h t h e Β CO UPL I N G switc h set to AC, LF REJ, and DC ( Β LEVEL control may be a d ju ste d as necessary to obtain sta b le d is p lay) . 5
h . Disconnect th e termination from t h e Β ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ INPU T connector an d connect it to t h e Α ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T connector . i . C h ange t h e following control settings :
A SOURCE
H O R IZ DIS PL AY MAG
ΕΧΤ Α Χ 10
j . Set t h e generator for α four- d ivision d is p lay (200 millivolts) at 10 megah ertz .
k . W it h out c h anging th e outp u t am p litu d e, increase th e out p ut fre q u ency of th e generator to 60 mega h ertz . Ι . C HE C K -Sta b le C R T dis p lay can b e obtaine d with th e Α CO UPL I N G switc h set to AC, LF REJ, an d DC ( Α LE V EL an d HF STA B controls may b e ad ju sted as necessary to obtain stable d isplay) . 5- 1 2
m . Disconnect th e termination from t h e Α ΕΧΤ T R IG IN PU T connector an d connect it to t h e Β ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ I NPU T connector . η . C h ange t h e following control settings : Α SO UR C E Α LEVEL H O R IZ DIS PL AY
ΙΝΤ Set for stable Α dis p lay Β (D EL AY E D SWEEP)
ο . C HE C K -Sta b le C R T d is p lay can b e o b tained with th e Β CO UPL I N G switc h set to AC, LF REJ, an d DC ( Β LEVEL control may be a d ju sted as necessary to obtain sta b le d is p lay) . ρ . Disconnect all test e q ui p ment . 19 . C h ec k O peration
Α
an d
Β
L ow- F req uency
Triggering
α . Con n ect t h e low-frequency sine-wave generator to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector wit h t h e 42-inc h 50-o h m BN C ca b le, BN C Τ connector, an d t h e 50-o h m BN C termination . Connect t h e out p ut of t h e BN C Τ co n nector to t h e Α ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T connector wit h t h e 18-i n ch 50-o h m BN C cable a n d α 50-o h m BN C terminatio n .
b. C h ange t h e following control settings : Α an d Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V H O R IZ DIS PL AY MAG
ms Α O FF
ε . Set th e generator for α 0 .3- d ivision d isplay at 60
h ertz .
d. C HE C K -Sta b le C R T d is p lay can b e obtained with th e Α CO UPL I N G switc h set to AC, HF REJ, an d DC ( Α LEVEL control may be ad ju ste d as necessary to obtain α stable d is p lay), e . C h ange t h e following control setti n gs : Α CO UPL I N G Α LEVEL HO R IZ DIS PL AY
AC Set for stable Α d is p lay Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP)
f . C HE C K -Stable C R T dis p lay can b e o b tained with th e Β CO UPL I N G switc h set to AC, HF REJ, an d DC ( Β LEVEL control may b e ad j usted as necessary to o btain stab le d is p lay) .
P erformance C h ec k -453 Α / R 453A g . C h ange th e following control settings : Α and Β SO UR C E H O R IZ DIS PL AY
ΕΧΤ Α
h . Set t h e generator for α one- d ivision d is p lay (50 millivolts) at 60 h ertz . i . C HE C K -Sta b le C R T d is p lay can be o b taine d with t h e Α CO UPL I N G switc h set to AC, HF REJ, and DC ( Α LEVEL control may be a dju sted as necessary to o b tain sta b le dis p lay) . j.
C h ange th e following control settings :
Α CO UPL I N G
AC ΙΝΤ Set for sta b le Α dis p lay Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP)
A SOURCE
Α LEVEL H O R IZ DIS PL AY
k . Disconnect th e termination from t h e Α ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T connector an d connect it to th e Β ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ NPU T connector .
I
Ι . C HE C K -Stable C R T d isp lay ca n b e o b taine d wit h t h e CO UPL I N G switc h set to AC, HF REJ, an d DC ( Β Β LEVEL control may b e ad j uste d as necessary to o b tain stable d is p lay) . 20 . C h ec k Op eration
Α
an d
Β
H ig h - F req uency R ej ect
α . C h ange th e following control settings :
HF REJ Α an d Β CO UPL I N G ΙΝΤ Α an d Β SO UR C E 20 Α an d Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V μs Α H O R IZ DIS PL AY b . Set th e low-frequency generator for α 0 .3- d ivision display at 50 kilo h ertz . c . C HE C K -Sta b le C R T d isp lay can b e o b taine d wit h t h e Α LEVEL control .
d . Wit h o u t c h anging th e ou tpu t am p litu d e, set t h e generator to one mega h ertz . e . Set th e M AG switc h to Χ 10 . f . C HE C K -Stable C R T d is p lay cannot b e o b tained at any setting of t h e Α LEVEL control .
g . With out c h anging t h e o u tpu t am p litu d e, return t h e generator to 50 kilo h ertz .
h . C h ange th e following control settings : A COUPLING Α LEVEL H O R IZ DIS PL AY M AG
AC Set for stable Α d is p lay Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP) O FF
i . C HE C K -Stable C R T d is p lay can be obtained with th e Β LEVEL co n trol . With o u t c h anging t h e ou tpu t am p litu d e, set th e generator to one mega h ertz . j.
k . Set t h e
M AG
switc h to Χ 10 .
Ι . C HE C K -Sta b le dis p lay cannot be obtained at any setting of t h e Β LEVEL control .
21 . C h ec k O p eration
Α
an d
Β
L ow- F re q uency
R ej ect
α . C h ange t h e following control settings : Α and Β CO UPL I N G Α and Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V H O R IZ DIS PL AY M AG
LF REJ .1 ms Α O FF
b. Set th e low-frequency generator for α 0 .3- d ivision display at 30 kilo h ertz . c . C HE C K -Sta b le C R T dis p lay can be ob taine d wit h t h e Α LEVEL control .
d. With out c h anging t h e o u t pu t am p litud e, set th e generator to 60 h ertz . e . Set t h e Α and Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to 2 ms . f . C HE C K -Stable C R T disp lay cannot b e ob tained at any setting of th e Α LEVEL control . g . Wit h out c h anging t h e out pu t am p lit u d e, set th e generator to 30 kilo h ertz . 5- 1 3
P erformance
C h ec k -453 Α / R 453A
h. C h ange th e following control settings : Α CO UPL I N G Α and Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V Α LEVEL H O R IZ DISPL AY
AC .1 ms Set for stable Α dis p lay Β (D EL AY E D SWEEP)
i . C HE C K -Sta b le C R T d is p lay can b e obtained with th e Β LEVEL control .
b . Set t h e low-frequency generator for α fo u r- d ivision
d is p lay at one kilo h ertz .
c . C HE C K -C R T d isp lay starts on p ositive slope of t h e waveform .
d . Set th e Α S L O PE switc h to - .
j . With out c h anging t h e ou tp u t am p lit u d e, set t h e gener-
e . C HE C K -C R T d is p lay starts on negative slo p e of t h e waveform .
k . Set th e Α an d Β TI ΜΕ /DI V switc h to 2 ms .
f . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP) .
ator to 60 h ertz .
Ι . C HE C K -Stable C R T d isplay cannot b e o b tained at any setting of t h e Β LEVEL control . 22 . C h ec k Single Sweep O peration α . C h ange th e following control settings : Α an d Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V 5 H O R IZ DIS PL AY
Α
g . C HE C K -C R T d is p lay starts on p ositive slo p e of th e waveform .
h. Set t h e Β S L O PE switc h to - . i . C HE C K -C R T d is p lay starts on negative slo p e of th e waveform .
ms
b . Set th e low-frequency generator for α five- d ivision
d is p lay at one k ilo h ertz .
j.
Disconnect all test e q ui p ment .
c . C h ange th e following control settings : Α LEVEL Fully cloc k wise SI N G LE SWEEP Α S WEEP M OD E
d . Pu s h th e RE S E T bu tton once . e.
C HE C K-RE S E T
lig h t comes on w h en bu tton is
24 . C h ec k Α an d Β Triggering
Level
Control
R ange
α . Connect th e low-frequency generator to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector with th e 42-inc h BN C ca b le an d t h e BN C Τ connector . Connect th e out p u t of th e BN C Τ connector to th e Β ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ I NPU T connector with t h e 18-inch BN C ca b le .
p resse d an d remains on until swee p is triggered .
f . Slowly rotate th e Α LEVEL control countercloc k wise . 1 g . C HE C K -Α single-swee p disp lay (one swee p only) is p resented w h en th e Α LEVEL control is in th e triggerable region . RE S E T lig h t goes off at t h e end of th e swee p and remains off u ntil t h e RES E T button is p resse d again . 23 . C h ec k Α an d Β Slo pe Switc h
O peration
α . C h ange t h e following control settings : Α and Β LEVEL Β CO UPL I N G Α and Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V Α S WEEP M OD E 5- 1 4
0 AC .5 ms AU TO T R IG
b. C h ange t h e following control settings : C H 1 V O L TS/DI V Α and Β LEVEL Α an d Β CO UPL I N G
B SOURCE
M i d range DC ΕΧΤ
c . Set t h e generator for α fo u r- d ivision d is p lay at one kilo h ertz . d . C HE C K - R otate t h e Β LEVEL control th roug h o u t its range an d c h ec k t h at d isp lay can be triggere d at any point along t h e negative slo p e of th e waveform (in d icates Β LEVEL control range of at least + an d - two volts) . Display is not triggered at eit h er extreme of rotation .
P erformance C h ec k -453 Α / R 453A e . Set t h e Β S L O PE switc h to + . 1 f . C HE C K - R otate th e Β LEVEL control th ro u gh o u t its range and c h ec k th at d isplay can be triggere d at any p oint along th e p ositive slo p e of th e waveform . Dis p lay is not triggere d at eith er extreme of rotation . g . C h ange t h e following control settings : 10 C H 1 V O L TS/DI V B SOURCE ΕΧΤ =10
h . Set t h e generator for α fo u r- d ivision d is p lay at one kilo h ertz . i . C HE C K - R otate th e Β LEVEL control t h rou g h ou t its range an d c h ec k t h at d isplay can b e triggered at any point along th e p ositive slo p e of th e waveform (indicates Β LEVEL control range of at least + an d - 20 volts) . Display is not triggered at eit h er extreme of rotation . j . Set th e Β S L O PE switc h to - .
k . C HE C K - R otate th e Β LEVEL control th ro u gh out its range and c h ec k th at dis p lay can be triggere d at any p oint along th e negative slo p e of th e waveform . Dis p lay is not triggered at eit h er extreme of rotation . Ι . C h ange th e following control settings : ΕΧΤ =10 A SOURCE Α S10 WEEP M OD E N O RM T R IG H O R IZ DIS PL AY Α 2 m . Disconnect t h e ca b le from t h e Β ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ NPU T connector an d connect it to th e Α ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T connector . I
η . C HE C K - R otate t h e Α LEVEL control t h roug h out its range an d c h ec k t h at d isp lay can be triggered at any point along t h e negative slo p e of th e waveform (in d icates Α LEVEL control range of at least + and - 20 volts) . Dis p lay is not triggere d at eit h er extreme of rotation . ο . Set t h e Α S L O PE switc h to + . ρ . C HE C K - R otate th e Α LEVEL control th ro u gh out its range an d ch ec k th at d is p lay can be triggere d at any p oint along th e p ositive slo p e of th e waveform . Dis p lay is not triggered at eit h er extreme of rotation .
q . C h ange t h e following control settings : C H 1 VO LTS/DI V A SOURCE
ΕΧΤ
r . Set th e generator for α fo u r-division d is p lay at one kilo h ertz . s . C HE C K - R otate t h e Α LEVEL control t h rou g h o u t its range an d c h ec k t h at d is p lay can be triggered at any point along t h e p ositive slo p e of th e waveform (in d icates Α LEVEL control range of at least + an d - two volts) . Display is not triggere d at eith er extreme of rotation . t . Set th e Α S L O PE switc h to υ . C HE C K - R otate t h e Α LEVE L control t h roug h o u t its range an d c h ec k t h at d is p lay can b e triggered at any point along t h e negative slope of th e waveform . Disp lay is not triggered at eit h er extreme of rotation . ν . Disconnect all test e q u i p ment .
25 . C hec k Α and Β
L ine Triggering
O p eration
α . Connect th e 10 Χ probe to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector .
b . C h ange th e following control settings : C H 1 VO L TS/DI V Α an d Β SO UR C E Α and Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V
L I NE ms
c . Connect th e p ro b e tip to t h e same line-voltage so u rce w h ic h is connecte d to th is instrume n t .
d . C HE C K -Stable C R T d isplay, triggered on t h e correct
slope .
e . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Β (D ELAY E D SWEEP) . f . C HE C K -Sta b le C R T d is p lay, triggered on th e correct slo p e . g . Disconnect all test eq ui p ment . 5- 1 5
Performance Check -453A/ R 453A generator c . Set t h e time-mar k 26 . C h eck Auto R ecovery Time and Operation mar k ers . α . C h ange t h e following control settings :
for
50-millisecon d
d . C HE C K -Stable C R T d is play can be o b taine d wit h t h e Α LEVEL control . M ar k er m u st be at th e start of t h e swee p .
C H 1 and 2 VO L TS/DI V .5 Α S L O PE + AC Α CO UPL I N G Α SO UR C E ΙΝΤ 50 Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V μs Α S WEEP M OD E A U TO T R IG H O R IZ DIS PLAY Α
e . Set t h e time-mar k generator for 0 .1-secon d mar k ers .
b. Connect th e mar k er outp u t of t h e time-mar k generator to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector with th e 42-inc h 50-o h m BN C cable an d t h e 50-o h m BN C termination .
f . C HE C K -Swee p free runs an d stable d is p lay cannot be obtained with t h e Α LEVEL control . If sta b le d is p lay is obtained , mar k er must not b e at t h e start of t h e swee p .
N OTE S
g . Disconnect all test e qu i p ment .
Performance Chec k-453 Α/R453A H O R IZO NTA L SYST EM CHEC K Eq ui pment Req uire d 1 . Time-mar k generator
5. 50-o hm BN C termination
2 . Standard am plitu d e cali brator
6. F ive-nanosecond G R ca ble
3 . H ig h-fre qu ency constant-am p litu de si ne-wave generator
7. In-line 50-o h m G R termination
4 . 42-i nch 50-o hm BN C ca ble
8. Dual-in pu t coupler
TA BLE 5-2
Control Settings Set th e controls as given un der P reliminary Control Settings. 27 . Ch ec k Α an d Β Swee p Timing Accuracy α . Connect the marker output of the time-mar k generator to the CH 1 O R Χ connector with the 42-inc h 50-o h m BN C cable an d t he 50-o hm BN C termination . b . Change the following control settings : .5 NO RM T R IG Set for stab le d isp lay
CH 1 V OLTS/DI V Α S WEEP MOD E Α LEVEL
c . CHE CK-U sing th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch an d timemark generator settings given in Table 5-2, chec k Α sweep timing with in 0.24 d ivision (wit h in 3%) over the mi dd le eight divisions of th e d is p lay (if outside the 0°C to +40'C range, see Section 1 for applicable tolerances) . NOTE Unless otherwise noted,
u se the middle eight h ori-
zontal divisions when chec k ing timing.
d . Set the Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch to 1 ms . e. Set the time-mar k generator for one-millisecon d markers. f. P osition the second marker to the second vertical line of the graticule . g. CHE C K-F ourt h marker with in 0.1 division (with in 5%ο) of the fourth vertical line .
Α and Β Timing Accuracy Α and Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch setting
Time-mar k generator output
.1 μs .2 μ s .5 μ s 1 μs 2 μs 5 μs 10 μs 20 μs 50 μs .1 ms .2 ms .5 ms 1 ms 2 ms 5 ms loms 20 ms 50 ms .1 s .2 s .5 s
0.1 microsecond 0.1 microsecon d 0.5 microsecon d 1 microsecon d 1 microsecond 5 microsecon d 10 microsecon d 10 microsecon d 50 microsecon d 0.1 millisecon d 0.1 millisecond 0.5 millisecon d 1 millisecon d 1 millisecon d 5 millisecond 10 millisecon d 10 millisecon d 50 millisecon d 0.1 second 0.1 second 0.5 second
C RT d is play (mar kers/ division) _1 _2 1 1 2 _ 2 _2 1 _ 2 _2 _2 1
Α Swee p Only 1 s 2s 5s
1 second 1 second 5 second
1 2 1
h . P osition the third marker to th e th ird vertical line .
i . C HE C K-F ifth marker with in 0.1 division of the fi f th vertical line . 5- 1 7
Performance C h ec k -453 Α / R 453A j. Contin u e t h is c h ec k for eac h two-division
p ortion of swee p with in t h e center eigh t d ivisions of t h e graticule .
g . P osition t h e th ird d is p layed mar k er to th e th ird vertical line .
k . CA L I BR ATIO N -See ste p s 21, 22, 23, and 27 of A dj ustment p rocedure .
h. C HE C K - F ift h d isp layed mar k er with i n 0 .1 d ivision of th e fifth vertical line .
Ι . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Β (D EL AY E D
i . Contin u e th is c h ec k for eac h two- d ivision p ortion of th e d is p laye d swee p wit h in t h e center eig h t d ivisions of t h e graticu le .
th e
S WEEP) .
m . Set t h e Β LEVEL control for α sta b le dis p lay .
j . CA L I BR ATIO N -See ced u re .
η . C HE C K - U sing th e Α and Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h a nd time-mar k generator settings given in Ta b le 5-2, c h ec k Β sweep timing wit h i n 0 .24 d ivision (wit h in 3°/ο ) over th e mi dd le eig h t d ivisions of t h e d is p lay (if o u tsi d e th e 0 ° C to +40 ° C range, see Section 1 for a p plicab le tolerances) . CA L I BR ATIO N -See step 25 of A dju stment p roced u re . ο.
28 . Check Α an d Β
M agnified
Swee p Accuracy
α . C h ange t h e following control settings :
H O R IZ DIS PL AY Α M AG Χ 10 H orizontal POSITIO N Centere d 1 b . C HE C K - U sing th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switch a nd timemar k generator settings given in Ta b le 5-3, c h ec k Α magni1 fied swee p timing with i n 0 .32 d ivision (with in 4°/ο ) over t h e mid dle1 eig h t d ivisions of t h e total magnifie d d isplay (if outsi d e th2 e 0 ° C to +40 ° C range, see Section 1 for a pp lica b le tolerances) . N ote th e portions of t h e total magnified swee p lengt h1 to be excl ud e d from measurement . M agnifier ligh t m u st be on . Th e vertical d eflectio n factor m u st be re d uced 2 to .1 to d is p lay th e 10-nanosecon d mar k ers . 1 1 c . Set th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to 1 ms . 1 1 2 d . 20 Set t h e time-mar k generator for 0 .1-millisecond 1 mar k ers . 1 1 e. P osition t h e secon d dis p layed mark er to t h e second vertical line of t h e gratic u le . 1 f . C2 HE C K - F ourth d isp layed mar k er wit h in 0 .1 d ivision (wit h in1 5%) of t h e fourth vertical line .
5- 1 8
ste p 23 of A dju stment p ro-
TA BLE 5-3 Α and Β Α and Β TIME/ DI V switch setting
Magnifie d Accuracy
Timemar k generator out p ut
C RT d isp lay (mar k ers/
d ivision)
.1 μ s
10 nanosecon d Ι
1
.2 μ s
10 nanosecon d Ι
2
.5 μ s
50 nanosecond Ι
1
1 2 5 10 20 50 .1 .2 .5 1 2 5 10
μs μs μs μs μs μs ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms 50 ms .1 s .2s .5s
0 .1 0 .1 0 .5 1 1 5 10 10 50 0 .1 0 .1 0 .5 1 1 5 10 10 j 50
microsecon d microsecond microsecon d microsecon d microsecon d microsecond microsecon d microsecon d microseco nd millisecond millisecond ~ millisecon d millisecond milliseco n d millisecond millisecon d millisecond millisecon d
0 .1 secon d 0 .1 secon d 0 .5 secon d
F irst an d last
t h ree d ivisions F irst a nd last 3 .5 divisio n s F irst two d ivisions
2
1
2
2
Α Swee p Only 1 s 2s 5s
Portio n s of total magnified swee p lengt h to exclu d e from measurement
F irst d ivision
P erformance C h ec k -453 Α / R 453A secon d mar k er . N ote th e exact d ial read ing, t h en set th e dial to 9 .00, an d rotate sligh tly until th e swee p starts at th e to p of th e tent h mar k er . DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial setting must be 8 .00 d ivisions h ig h er, + or - th e allowable error given in Ta b le 5-4 (if outsi d e t h e 0 ° C to +40° C range, Ι . C HE C K - U sing t h e Α an d Β TIME/DIV switc h an d see Section 1 for a pp licable tolerances) . time-mar k generator settings given in Table 5-3, ch ec k ' Β magnified sweep timi n g wit h in 0 .32 d ivision (wit h in 4%) over t h e mi dd le eig h t divisions of t h e total magnifie d display (if o u tside t h e 0 ° C to +40 ° C range, see Section 1 for NOTE applicable tolerances) . Sweep will start at top of th ird marker at 1 .00 and nineteenth marker at 9 .00 fo r sweep rates whic h are 29 . C h ec k Delay-Time Accuracy multiples of two (e.g ., 2 μ s, 20 μs, .2 ms, etc .). If in do u bt as to th e correct setting of th e DEL AY-TIME α . C h ange th e following control settings : MUL TI PL IER dial, set th e ΗΟβ / Ζ DISPLAY switch to Α /ΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β and chec k wh ich mar k er is Β S WEEP M OD E Β STA R TS A F T ER intensified. DEL AY TIME MAG O FF c . CA L I BR ATIO N -See ste p s 21, 22, an d 25 of Ad ju stment p roced u re . b . C HE C K - U sing t h e Α TIME/DIV switc h , Β TIME/DIV switc h , an d time-mar k generator settings given in Table 5-4, c h ec k d elaye d swee p accuracy wit h in th e given tolerance . 30 . C h ec k Delay-Time Multiplier Incremental F irst set th e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial to 1 .00 an d L inear i ty rotate th e d ial u ntil t h e sweep starts at th e to p of th e α . C h ange th e following control settings : k . Set th e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP) .
TA BLE 5-4 Delayed Sweep Accuracy
DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER Α TIME/DIV Β ΤΙΜΕ /D 1 V
9 .00 1 ms 10 μ s
Α TIME/ Β TIME/ TimeAllowable DI V DI V mar k error for given generator b. Set th e time-mar k for mar k ers . switch switc h generator accuracy setting setting out p ut 0 ° C to +40 ° C 1 μs .1 μ s 1 microsecond 2 μs .1 μ s 1 microsecon d 5 μs .5 μ s 5 microsecond 10 μ s 1 μs 10 microsecond 20 μ s 1 μs 10 microsecond 50 μ s 5 μs 50 microsecon d .1 ms 10 μ s 0 .1 millisecon d .2 ms ±12 10 μ s 0 .1 millisecon d minor dial .5 ms 50 μ s 0 .5 millisecon d d ivisions (±1 1 ms .1 ms 1 millisecon d .5%) 2 ms .1 ms 1 millisecond 5 ms .5 ms 5 millisecond 10 ms 1 ms 10 millisecon d 20 ms 1 ms 10 millisecon d 5_0_ms 5 ms 50 millisecon d .1 s 10 ms 0 .1 secon d .2 s e 10 ms 0 .1 secon d .5 s 50 ms 0 .5 secon d ±20 mi n or d ial 1s .1 s 1 second divisions 2s .1 s 1 second (±2 .5%) 5s .5s 5 secon d S
one-millisecon d
NO ΤΕ
if th e display is not exactly 8.00 dial divisions between 1 .00 an d 9.00 as measured in step 29, use parts ι through k to compensate for th is error . Th en, the incremental linearity of th e DELAY-TIME MUL TlPL/ER dial can be read directly from th e dial. If the difference is exactly eigh t divisions, proceed to part / of th is step. ε . Set th e Α TIME/DIV switc h to .5 ms ; t h en return th e Β TIME/DIV switc h to 10 μ s .
d. Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Α . . Set th e Α VA R control for one mar k er eac h d ivision
between t h e first- an d ninth - d ivisio n vertical lines.
f . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PLAY switc h to Β (D EL AY E D WEEP) .
5- 1 9
Performa n ce Ch ec k -453Α / R 453A g. c Set t h e D EL AY-TI ME MUL TI PL I ER d ial to 1 .00 an d rotate slig h tly u ntil α mar k er is d is p layed at t h e start of t h e sweep . N ote th e d ial rea d ing .
. C HE C K - J itter on t h e leading e d ge of t h e p ulse s h oul d not exceed 0 .5 division (1 p art in 20,000) . Disregard slow d rift .
h . Set t h e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial exactly 8 .00 d ial d ivisions h ig h er th an t h e rea d ing in p art g .
d. T u rn th e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial to 9 .00 an d ad ju st so th e pu lse is d is p layed near t h e ce n ter of t h e gratic u le .
i . Tu rn t h e Α V A R control slig h tly so α mar k er is d isp laye d at t h e start of t h e swee p .
j. Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D U RI N G Β a nd c h ec k t h at t h e tenth mark er is intensified .
k . Return t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP) a n d rep eat parts g th roug h j u ntil t h e d ifference b etween th e mar k ers at about 1 .00 an d 9 .00 is exactly 8 .00 d ial d ivisions . Ι . Set t h e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial to 9 .00 ; t h en rotate th e d ial slig h tly so α mar k er is d is p laye d at th e start of t h e swee p . m . N ote th e exact D EL AY-TI ME MUL TI PL I ER d ial reading ; th e d ifference between th is rea d ing an d 9 .00 is t h e basic d ial error to b e u sed in c h ec k ing linearity . η . Set th e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial to 8 .00 ; th en rotate th e d ial slig h tly so α mar k er is d isp layed at t h e start of t h e swee p . ο . C HE C K -Dial reading sh o u l d be 8 .00 ±2 minor d ial d ivisions (with in 0 .2%) . Ta ke into account t h e b asic d ial error at 9 .00 . ρ . Re p eat t h is c h ec k at eac h ma j or d ial d ivision b etween 8 .00 a nd 1 .00 . 31 . C h ec k Delay-Time
J itter
α . C h ange t h e following control settings : 1 .00 DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER Α ΤΙΜΕ 1 /DI V ms Β ΤΙΜΕ 1 /DI V μs b rate d Cali Α VA R
b. Position th e p ulse near th e center of th e d isp lay area wit h t h e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER dial . 5- 2 0
e . C HE C K - J itter on lea d ing e d ge of t h e pu lse s h o u l d not excee d 0 .5 division . Disregard slow d rift . 32 . C h ec k M ixed Swee p Operation α . C h ange t h e following control settings : D EL AY-TI ME MUL TI PL I ER Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V H O R IZ DIS PL AY
10 .00 .5 ms Α
b . C HE C K -Timi n g betwee n second and te n th mar k ers . N ote t h e error for part d . c . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to M IX E D .
d . C HEC K -Timing b etween secon d an d tent h mar k er wit h in 0 .16 d ivision ± t h e Α swee p error n ote d in p art b (with in 2°/α ± measure d Α swee p error) . e . Set th e DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial to 0 .20 . f . Set mar k ers .
th e
time-mar k
ge n erator
for
0 .5-millisecon d
g . C HE C K -Timing between secon d and tenth mar k er with in 0 .16 d ivision .
33 . C h ec k Α Swee p
L engt h
α . Set th e time-mar k generator millisecon d mar k ers .
for
one-
an d 0 .1-
b . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switc h to Α . c . Set t h e Α LEVEL control cloc kwise to obtain α sta b le d is p lay in th e p ositive triggering area .
d . M ove th e elevent h mar k er to t h e center vertical line wit h t h e h orizontal P OSITIO N control .
Performance C h ec k -453 Α / R 453A e . C HE C K - Α swee p length m u st be at least 10 divisions as sh own b y t h e divisions of d is p lay to th e rig h t of th e center vertical line . L arge mar k ers in d icate d ivisions and small mar k ers indicate 0 .1 d ivision .
UN CA L Α O R Β lig h t must b e on w h en Α VA R control is not in calibrated position .
g . C h ange th e following control settings :
f . Position t h e first mar k er to t h e left graticule line . Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V 1 Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V Cali Α VA R g . T u rn th e Α S WEEP LEN GT H control to 4 DI V (not in Β S WEEP M OD E Β EN DS Α d etent) . H O R IZ DIS PL AY
h. C HE C K - Α swee p length m u st b e four d ivisions or less . 34 . C h ec k Β
E n d s Α O peration
α . C h ange t h e following control settings : Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V H O R IZ DIS PL AY Α SWEEP LEN GT H
.1 ms Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β Β EN DS Α
c . C HE C K -C R T d is p lay en d s after t h e intensified p ortion at all DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial settings .
Variable
Control
h . Position t h e mar k ers to th e far left and rig h t graticule lines wit h t h e h orizontal POSITIO N control . i . Turn th e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V V A R IA BLE control (on si d e
b . Rotate th e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial t h rou g h o u t its range .
35 . C h ec k Α and Β
5 ms ms b rated TR IGG ER A BLE AF T ER D EL AY TIME Β (D EL AY E D SWEEP)
R ange
α . C h ange th e following control settings : DELAY-TIME 0 .20 MUL TI PL I ER 20 Β ΤΙΜΕ 1 /DI V C ms H O R IZ DIS PLAY Α λ S WEEP LEN GT H FULL
p anel) fully cou ntercloc k wise .
j. C HE C K -C R T d is p lay for fo u r- d ivision maxim u m s p acing b etween mar k ers (in d icates a d e q uate range for continuously variable swee p rate between calibrated steps) . UN CA L Α O R Β lig h t m u st be on wh en Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V V A R IA BLE control is not in CA L p osition .
k . Disconnect all test e q ui p ment .
36 . C h ec k Χ Gain α . C h ange t h e following control settings :
C H 1 V O L TS/DI V mV M OD E H 2 I N TT R IG CH 1 O R Χ-Υ Β CO UPL I N G DC H O R IZ DIS PL AY Χ-Υ H orizontal P OSITIO N Centered b . Set t h e time-mar k ge n erator for 10-millisecon d F I NE Centere d mar k ers . c . Set th e Α LEVEL control for α stable d is p lay .
d. P osition th e mar k ers to t h e far left an d rig h t gratic u le lines wit h th e h orizontal P OSITIO N control . e . Turn th e Α VA R control f u lly cou ntercloc k wise . f . C HE C K -C R T d isplay for four- d ivision maxim u m s p acing between mar k ers (in d icates a d eq u ate range for contin u ously varia b le swee p rate between calibrated ste p s) .
b . Connect t h e standar d am p litu d e cali b rator to th e C H 1 O R Χ connector with t h e 42-inc h BN C cable . c . Set t h e stan d ard am p litu d e calibrator for α 0 .1-volt s q uare-wave o u tpu t .
d. Increase th e I N T EN SITY control setting until t h e display is visi b le (two d ots a b ove five d ivisions a p art) . e . M ove th e d is p lay to th e center of t h e graticule with th e C h annel 1 P OSITIO N control . 5- 2 1
P erformance C h ec k -453 Α / R 453A f . C HE C K -C R T d isp lay for five d ivisions ±0 .25 d ivision of h orizontal d eflection . g . CA L I BR ATIO N -See ste p 28 of A d j ustment p roce-
d ure .
37 . C h eck Χ - Υ O p eration α . Set t h e Β SO UR C E switc h to EXT .
ιι ιι ιι
b . Connect th e stan d ar d am p lit ud e calibrator to t h e Β I
d. Center t h e dis p lay (two d ots) with th e h orizontal POSITIO N control . e . C HEC K -C R T dis p lay for h orizontal d eflection between 6 .5 a nd 8 .7 d ivisions (270 mill ivolts/ d ivision, ±15%) . f . Set th e stan d ard amplitu d e cali b rator for α 20-volt s qu are-wave ou t p ut . g . Set t h e Β SO UR C E switc h to ΕΧΤ =10 . h . C HE C K -C R T d is p lay for h orizontal d eflection b etween 6 .2 an d 9 .2 divisions (2 .7 volts/ d ivision, ±20%) .
ι
1
ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ NPU T connector,
c . Set t h e stan d ard am p lit u d e cali b rator for a two-volt squ are-wave o u tp u t .
ι
ι
Fig .
5-1 . Ty p ical C R T disp lay
0 .42 division or less
w h e n ch eck ing
Χ -Υ ph asi n g .
d . Center t h e d is p lay vertically an d h orizontally wit h t h e C h annel 1 an d 2 POSITIO N controls . e . C HE C K -C R T dis p lay for an o p ening at th e center h orizontal line of 0 .42 d ivision or less (3 ° or less p h ase s h ift ; see F ig . 5-1) . f. Disconnect all test equ i p ment .
39 . C h ec k Χ
B andwi d t h
in Χ - Υ
M od e
α . Connect t h e h ig h -fre qu ency constant-am p lit ud e sinewave generator to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector with t h e fivenanosecon d G R cable an d t h e in-line 50-o h m G R termi n ation .
i . Disconnect all test e q ui p ment . 38 . C hec k Χ - Υ Ph asing α . Connect th e h igh -fre qu ency sine-wave generator to t h e C H 1 O R Χ an d C H 2 O R Υ con nectors wit h t h e fivenanosecon d G R cable, in-line 50-o h m G R termination, an d th e d ual-in p ut cou pler .
b. Set th e Β SO UR C E switc h to ΙΝΤ . c . Set th e generator for eigh t d ivisions of vertical an d h orizontal d eflection at an out p ut fre qu ency of 50 kilo h ertz .
b . Set t h e generator for eig h t d ivisions h orizontal d eflection at its reference fre q u ency (50 kilo h ertz) . c . With out c h anging th e ou tp ut am p litude, i n crease t h e o u tp u t fre q uency of th e generator until t h e h orizontal d eflection is red u ced to 5 .6 d ivisions (-3 d B p oint) .
d . C HE C K -Out p u t fre q uency of generator m u st be five mega h ertz or h ig h er . Actual freq uency ------ megah ertz . e . Disconnect all test e q ui p ment .
P erformance Chec k-453Α/R453A
O UTPU T SIGNA LS CHE C K Eq ui pment R equired 1 . Time-mar k generator 2. Standard am p litu de cali brator 3. Test-oscillosco pe system
Control Settings Set the controls as given u nder P reliminary Control Settings . 40 . Ch ec k Calibrator R epetition Rate α. C hange the following control settings : CH 1 and 2 V OLTS/DIV .5 M OD E ALT Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V .1 ms CA LI 1 BR ATO R V b. Connect the 1 kH z CA L connector to the CH 1 O R Χ connector with the 18-inc h BN C cable . c . Connect the time-mar k generator to the CH 2 O R Υ connector with t h e 42-inc h 50-ohm BN C ca ble and t he 50-o hm BN C termination . d. Set the time-mar k generator for one-millisecon d markers. e. Position the d is play vertically so th e ti ps of the markers fall just below the rising portions of th e square wave . f. Set th e Α LEVEL control so b ot h waveforms are stable . g . P osition the rising portion of th e second calibrator cycle to the center vertical line .
h. Set 10 the MAG switch to Χ 10 . i. C HE C K-Differe nce between calibrator waveform lead ing ed ge and t he marker lead ing ed ge n ot to exceed 0.5 d ivision (0 .5°/ο accu racy).
4. 18-inc h 50-o hm BN C cable 5 . 42-inc h 50-o hm BN C cable 6. 50-o h m BN C termin ation 7 . Current-measuring probe
j . CA L I BR ATIO N-See step 6 of Adj ustment proce du re . k. Disconnect all test equ ipment . 41 . Check Calibrator V oltage Output α. C hange t h e following control settings : C H 1 VO LTS/DI V
A SOURCE
Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V
.1
L INE 5 ms
b . Con nect the 1 kH z CA L co nnector to the u nknown in put connector of the standard am plitude cali brator with the 42-i nch BN C cable. ε . Set th e standard am plitud e cali brator for α positive one-volt DC ou tpu t in the ch opp ed mo de . d. Connect the standard am plitu de calibrator ou tput to the CH 1 O R Χ connector. e. Set the Α LEVEL control for α stable d is play . f. P ositio n th e to p of the waveform onto the d is p lay area with the Channel 1 P OSITIO N control, g. C HE C K-Difference between the stan dar d am p litude cali brator outpu t level an d t he 453Α calibrator output is 0.1 d ivision or less (one volt o u tput, ±1°/ο; see F ig . 5-2) .
h. Change the following control settings : C H 1 VO LTS/DI V CA L I BR ATO R
mV .1 V
i. Set the standard am p litude cali brator for α p ositive, 0.1-volt DC outpu t in th e ch opp ed mode . 5- 23
Performance C h ec k -453 Α/ R 453A
ι
EMENEENO M
RON
calibrator s
NNNIMENWAM
Cuomo.-MUM MEM MENEVIEN Error sha.n by MEE difference here No MENEM F ig .
MENOMONEE 11MENEEMENE
' NONE
5-2. Ty pical C R T disp lay wh e n calibrator .
ch eck i ng
IONEEMENION
0.5 division
voltage o u t pu t of
j.
P osition t h e to p of t h e waveform onto th e disp lay area with t h e C h annel 1 P OSITIO N control .
k . C HE C K -Difference between th e stan dar d am plitu de cali b rator o u tp u t level an d th e 453Α calibrator outp u t is 0.1 division or less (0 .1 volt o u tp u t, ±1%; see F ig . 5-2) . Ι . CA L I BR ATIO N -See step 2 of Ad j ustment proce dure. m . Disconnect all test eq ui pment . 42 . Ch ec k Current Th roug h P robe Loo p α. Connect th e current-measuring probe an d passive termination to t h e C H 1 O R Χ connector.
F ig .
5-3. Typical C R T d is p lay wh e n ch eck ing cali b rator current.
ΝΟΤΕ
Th is step only chec k s for th e presence of current in
th e PR O BE L OOP. Th is current will remain with in th e stated 1 % accuracy due to th e tolerance of th e divider resistors and tolerance of the calibrator output voltage . If it is necessary to verify th e accuracy of th e calibrator current, use α current-measuring meter with an accuracy of at least 0.25%.
f. Disconnect all test e q ui pment .
43 . Ch ec k Α an d Β Gate Output Signal
b. Set t h e passive termination for α sensitivity of 2 mA/m V .
α . Set t h e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to 1 ms . B e su re t h e Α S WEEP LEN GT H control is set to FULL .
c. Clip t h e current-measu ring pro b e around t h e PR OBE L OO P on th e si de panel .
b. Connect th e Α GAT E connector (on si d e panel) to t h e test-oscilloscope wit h th e 42-inc h BN C cable.
d . C h ange th e following control settings : CH 1 5 V O L TS/DI V Α SO UR C E Α ΤΙΜΕ 1 /DI V
mV ΙΝΤ ms
e. C HE C K -C R T d is p lay 0 .5 d ivision in am plit u de (five milliamperes ; see F ig . 5-3) . 5- 24
c. Set t h e test oscillosco p e for α vertical d eflection factor of five volts/d ivision at α swee p rate of two millisecon ds/ division . d . C HE C K -Test oscillosco pe dis p lay for 2 .4 d ivisions ±0 .24 d ivision of vertical deflection with th e bottom of th e waveform near th e zero-volt level (12 volts ±10%) . Gate d u ration sh ould be abo u t 5 .5 divisions (a b o u t 11 times th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h setting) .
P erformance C h ec k -453A/ R 453A e . Disconnect th e cable from th e Α GAT E connector an d connect it to t h e Β GAT E connector . f . C h ange th e following control settings : 2 Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V Β ΤΙΜΕ 1 /DI V H O R IZ DIS PLAY Β S WEEP M OD E
ms ms Β (D EL AY E D SWEEP) Β STA R TS A F T ER D EL AY TIME
g, C HE C K -Test-oscillosco p e d is p lay for 2 .4 d ivisions ±0 .24 d ivision of vertical d eflection wit h t h e bottom of t h e waveform near t h e zero-volt level (12 volts ±10%) . Gate d uration should be a b out 5 .5 d ivisions (a b out 11 times t h e Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h settings) . T h is com p letes th e Performance C h ec k p roce d ure for t h e 453 Α . If t h e instrument h as met all tolerances given in th is p roced ure, it is correctly calibrated and wit h in t h e s p ecified tolerances .
NOTES
Adjustment-453A/ R453Α
PART 11 - ADJUSTMENT
15 . Ad ju st Channel 1 an d 2 Gain (GAI N)
P age 5-34
Volts/ 16 . Ad ju st Channel 1 and Division Switch Series Com p ensation (C6C, C7C, C8C, C9C, C106C, C107C, C108C, C109C)
P age 5-34
17 . Ad just Ch annel 1 and 2 Volts/ Division Switch S h unt Com p ensation (C613, C713, C813, C9B, C17, C106 B , C10713, C108 B , C109 B , C117)
Page 5-35
Page 5-36
PO WER-S UPPL Y and CA L I BR ATIO N AD JU ST MEN T
18 . A d j ust H ig h-Fre quency Com p ensation (C263, C265, R 49, C49, R 328, C336, C328, C54, C45A, R 149, C149, C154,
1 . Adj ust -12-V olt P ower Sup p ly (R 1122)
P age 5-28
ς 143Α, L 143A, R 43C, C43C, C43A, L 43A, R 44C, C44C,)
2. Ad just +12- Volt P ower Sup p ly (Adju st Cali brator Out p ut Voltage) (R 1152) .
Page 5-28
Supp ly
Page 5-29
19 . Ad ju st Α and Β Trigger Level Centering (13462, R 662)
Page 5-40
4. Ad ju st H ig h- Voltage Su pp ly (R 900)
P age 5-29
P age 5-40
5. Chec k Low-Voltage Power Sup p ly
P age 5-29
20 . Ad ju st Channel 1 Only and Normal Trigger DC L evel (1360, R 285)
6 . Ad ju st Calibrator R e p etition R ate (T1 255)
P age 5-30
Introd uction proce d u re retu rns the 453Α to correct T h e following 2 cali bration . All limits an d tolerances given in th is p roced ure are cali bration gui d es, and sh o u ld not be inter p reted as instrument sp ecifications except as listed in the Performance Requirement column of Section 1 . The actual operation of the instrument may exceed the given limits or tolera nces if the instrument meets the P erformance R eq uirements as checked in Part Ι - Performance Chec k of th is section. Index to Part ΙΙ - Ad justment
3 . A d ju st ( R 1182)
+75- Volt P ower
R i pp le
DISPL AY and Z-AXIS AD JU ST MENT
C154A,
R
144C,
R 143C,
C144C,
TRIGG ER SYST EM AD JU ST MENT
21 . Ad just Sweep Start an d Α Sweep Cali bration ( R531, R 758)
Page 5-42
22 . Adj ust Normal Gain ( R835)
P age 5-43
23 . Ad ju st Magnifie d Gain ( R 845)
P age 5-43
8. Adj ust Trace Alignment (T R AC E
Page 5-31
24 . Ad ju st Magnifier R egister ( R855)
P age 5-43
9. Ad j ust Astigmatism (ASTIG)
Page 5-31
25 . Ad ju st Β Sweep Cali bration (R 741)
P age 5-44
26 . Ad ju st Α an d Β One- M icrosecond Timing (C530A, C740A)
P age 5-44
L inearity (C882,
P age 5-44
Page 5-31
11 . Ad ju st CRT Geometry ( R982)
Page 5-32
12 . A dj ust Ζ -Axis Com pensation (C1036)
P age 5-32
V ertical System Ad ju stment 13 . Ad ju st Channel 1 an d 2 Ste p Attenuator Balance (ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ BA L)
P age 5-33
1 and 2 P osition
P age 5-33
14 . Ad just Channel Center (R 55, R 155)
,
H O R IZONTA L SYST EM AD JU STMENT
P age 5-31
10 . Adj ust Υ Axis Alignment ( R989)
,
C143C,
7 . Adjust CRT Grid Bias ( R940) R OTATIO N )
1
27 . Ad just H ig h-S p ee d C892)
28 . Adjust Χ Gain ( R645)
1
,
,
P age 5-45
Preliminary P roce d ure F or Adjustment NOTE This instrument should be adjusted at an ambient temperature of 25 °C ±5°C for best overall accuracy.
ι
'
ι
Adjustment-453Α/R453A 1 . Remove the to p an d bottom covers from the 453 Α. 2. Connect the autotransformer to α s uitable power source .
I
'
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
5. Set the controls as given un der Preliminary Control Settings (given prior to P art Ι - P erformance Check) . Allow at least 20 minutes warm up before proceeding .
3 . Connect the 453Α to the autotransformer output .
ΝΟΤΕ
4 . Set the autotransformer output voltage to the center of the voltage range selected by the L ine V oltage Selector assembly .
Titles for external controls of this instrument are capitalized in this procedure (e.g., INTENSITY). Internal adjustments are initial capitalized only (e.g., High Voltage).
NOTES
Ad j ustment-453A/ R 453A
P O WER-S UPPL Y
an d CA L I BR ATO R AD JU ST MEN T
Eq ui p ment R e q uired 1 . Autotra n sformer
6 . 18-inc h 50-o h m BN C ca b le
2 . P recision DC voltmeter
7 . 42-inc h 50-o h m BN C cable
3 . DC voltmeter (V O M)
8 . 50-o h m BN C termination
4 . Time-mar k generator
9 . T h ree-inc h screw d river
5 . 1 Χ pro b e
Control Sett i ngs Set th e controls as given u nder P reliminary Co n trol Settings . 1 . Adj ust -12- Volt
P ower Su pp ly
α . C h ange th e following control settings : I N T EN SITY Α LEVEL Α SWEEP M OD E I BR ATO R CA L1
Co u ntercloc k wise Clock wise N O RM T R IG V
b . Connect t h e p recision DC voltmeter b etween t h e -12-volt test p oint (see F ig . 5-4) an d c h assis groun d . c . C HE C K - M eter rea d ing ; -12 volts ±0 .32 volt .
d . AD JU ST- -12- Volts ad ju stment R1122 (see F ig . 5-4) for α meter rea d ing of exactly -12 volts . e . I N T ER ACTIO N -C h ange in setting of R1122 may affect operation of all circuits wit h i n t h e 453 Α . 2 . A dj ust +12-Volt P ower Su pp ly brator Out p ut V oltage)
(A dj ust Cali-
α . Connect th e p recision DC voltmeter b etween th e center contact of t h e 1 kH z CA L co n nector an d c h assis groun d .
b. Remove Q1255 (see F ig . 5-6) from its soc k et . c . C HE C K - M eter rea d ing ; +1 volt ±0 .003 volt .
d. AD JU ST-+12 Volts ad ju stment R1152 (see F ig . 5-4) for α meter rea d ing of exactly +1 volt . e . Set th e CA L I BR ATO R switch (on side p anel) to .1 V . f . CH E C K - M eter rea d ing ; +0 .1 volt ±0.001 volt. g . AD JU ST-If necessary, com p romise t h e setting of R1152 for correct calibrator outp u t for bot h c h ec ks c and f.
h . Re p lace 01255 in its soc ket . F ig . 5-4. Low-voltage power su pply test poi nts a nd adju stme n ts ( L ow-V oltage Reg u lator circu it board ) . 5-28
ι ι ι ι ι ι
i . Connect th e p recision DC voltmeter b etween t h e +12-volt test p oint (see F ig . 5-4) an d c h assis ground .
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
ι
Adj ustment-453Α / R 453A j . C HE C K -Meter read ing ; +12 .1 volts ±0 .12 volt .
b . C HE C K - M eter rea d i n g ; -1960 volts ±58 .8 volts .
k . I N T ER ACTIO N -C h ange in setting of R1152 may affect o p eration of all circ u its wit h in t h e 453 Α . 3 . A dj ust +75-Volt I
I
P ower
Su pp ly
α . Connect th e p recision DC voltmeter b etween t h e +75-volt test point (see F ig . 5-4) and c h assis gro u n d .
c . AD JU ST- H igh V oltage ad ju stment R900 (see Fig . 5-5) for -1960 volts .
d . I N T ER ACTIO N -C h ange in setting of R900 may affect o p eration of all circuits wit h in t h e 453Α . e . Disconnect all test e qu i p ment .
b. C HE C K - M eter rea d ing ; +75 volts ±0 .278 volt . c . AD JU ST- +75 V olts a dj ustment R1182 (see F ig . 5-4) for α meter read ing of exactly +75 volts . d . Rec h ec k th e -12- V olt an d +12- V olt s u p p lies ; rea dju st if necessary . e . I N T ER ACTIO N -C h ange in setti n g of R1182 may affect o p eration of all circuits with in th e 453 Α . f . Discon nect all test e q ui p ment .
'
4 . A dj ust
H ig h -Voltage
Su pp ly
Power
Su pp ly
R i pp le
α . Connect th e 1 Χ p robe to t h e C H 1 O R Χ con n ector.
b. C h ange th e following control settings : I N T EN SITY Α LEVEL Α S WEEP M OD E
M idrange
M i d range AU TO T R IG
th e
c . Connect th e p ro be ti p to t h e 1 kH z CA L connector .
4 ι f t h e precision high-voltage divider is available for use with t h e precision DC voltmeter, it sh o u l d be use d for t h is step .
d . Set th e C h annel 1 GAI N ad ju stment for exactly four divisio n s of vertical deflection ( p reliminary adju stment to ass u re acc u rate ri pp le measurement) .
α . Connect th e DC voltmeter ( V O M) 4 between -1960 V test point (see F ig . 5-5) an d c h assis ground .
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
5 . C h ec k L ow- Voltage
F ig . 5-5 . L ocation of hig h -voltage and 2-axis test points a nd adjustments ( b ottom of in stru m entI . 5-29
ι
Ad j ustment-453 Α / R 453A generator e . C h a n ge t h e following co n trol setti n gs : d. Set t h e time-mar k for one-milliseco nd mar k ers . CH 5 1 VO L TS/DI V mV C h annel 1 In p u tCou p ling AC A SOURCE L I NE e . P osition t h e display so th e ti p s of th e mar k ers fall j ust /DI V below th e rising p ortions of t h e sq u are wave . Α ΤΙΜΕ 5 ms f . C HE C K -0 .4 d ivision maximum p ea k -to-pea k (two millivolts) line fre qu ency ri pp le on t h e -12- V olt, +12- V olt, an d +75- V olt su pp lies w h ile c h anging t h e a u totransformer out p ut voltage t h rou g h out th e regulating range selected b y the L ine V oltage Selector assembly on t h e rear p anel . P ower-su pp ly test p oints are s h own in F ig . 5-4 . NOTE
R ipple tole rances are provided as guides to correct instrument o peration . Actual values may exceed these limits without loss of measurement accuracy if th e instrument meets th e specifications given in Section 1. g . Ret u rn t h e autotransformer o u t p u t voltage to t h e center of t h e regulating range selected b y th e L ine V oltage Selector assem b ly . (If th e li n e voltage is near t h e center of th e regulati n g range, t h e 453Α can be connected directly to th e line for t h e remain d er of th is procedure .)
h . Disconnect all test e q u i p ment . 6 . A dj ust Calibrator
f . Set t h e Α LEVEL control so both waveforms are stable .
g . C HE C K -C R T d isp lay for one cycle of calibrator waveform for eac h mar k er .
h . AD JU ST-Calibrator F req uency adj ustme n t Τ 1255 (see F ig . 5-6) for one cycle of calibrator waveform for eac h mar k er ( p reliminary ad ju stme n t) .
'
i . Set the ΙΝΤ T R IG switc h to C H 1 O R Χ -Y, j. C HE C K -C R T dis p lay for slow drift or no drift of t h e time mar k ers .
k . ADJUST-T1255 for minimum mar k ers (final a d j ustment) .
d rift of th e time
Ι . Disconnect all test e q u ipment .
R e petition R ate
ι ι ι ι
α . C h ange th e following control setti n gs : 50 mV C H 1 VO LTS/DI V .5 C H 2 VO LTS/DI V M OD E ALT ΙΝΤ A SOURCE .5 ms Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V
b . Connect t h e 1 kH z CA L co n nector to th e C H 1 O R Χ connector wit h th e 18-inc h BN C cable . c . Connect t h e time-mark generator to th e C H 2 O R Υ connector wit h th e 42-inc h 50-o h m BN C cable an d t h e 50-o h m BN C termi n ation .
'
Fig . 5-6 .
L ocation of calibrator a d j ustments .
Ad justment-453Α/R453A DISPL AY and Z-AXIS AD JU ST MENT '
E qui p ment R e q uire d 1 . DC voltmeter (V OM)
5. 42-inc h 50-o hm BN C ca ble
2 . Time-mar k ge nerator
6 . Th ree-inch screwd river
3 . Test-oscillosco p e system
7 . L ow-capacitance screwd river
4. 18-inc h 50-o hm BN C cable
Control Settings Set the controls as given un der P reliminary Co ntrol Setti n gs . 7. Adjust C RT Gri d
B ias
α. Connect the DC voltmeter (V OM) betwee n ΤΡ 1047 (see F ig . 5-5) an d ch assis grou n d . '
b. Set th e Α SWEEP MOD E switch to SI NGLE SWEEP . ε. Set the I N TEN SITY control for α meter read ing of +12 volts.
'
ι
'
1 ι
d . AD JU ST-C R T Grid B ias ad ju stment R940 (see F ig . 5-5) so the d ot on the C R T is ju st exting u ish e d (it may be necessary to turn the h orizontal POSITIO N control cloc kwise to b ring the d ot onto th e viewing area).
CA U TIO N Do ηο tallow α brigh t spot to remain stationary for an extended period, as it may burn th e C R T ph osph or.
ε . M ove the trace to the center h orizontal line with t he Channel 1 POSITIO N control.
d. Set the F OC U S control for as thin α trace as p ossi b le . e. CHE CK -T h e trace sh oul d be parallel with th e center horizontal line . f.
AD JU ST-T RAC E
R OTATIO N adjustment
(si de
p anel) so the trace is parallel to the ce nter h orizontal line . 9. Ad j ust Astigmatism α. Connect th e time-mar k generator to the CH 1 OR Χ connector with th e 18-inc h BN C cable. b. Set the time-mar k generator for one-millisecon d markers. c. Change the followi ng control settings : CH 1 V O LTS/DIV Α LEVEL
.5 Sta b le d is p lay
d. C HE C K-M ar kers are well d efine d with o p timum setting of th e F OC US control . e. Disconnect all test eq u i p ment .
8 . Ad just Trace Alignment α. Set the Α SWEEP M OD E switch to AUTO TR IG .
e. AD JU ST- F OC US control an d ASTIG adju stment (si d e panel) for best definition of the markers . 10 . Adjust Υ Axis Alignment α. C hange th e following control settings :
50 CH 1 V O LTS/DI V mV b . Set the I NTEN SITY control for α visi ble trace . Channel 1 POSITIO N Countercloc kwise 5- 3 1
ι
Ad j υ stme nt-453Α / R 453 Α e . C HE C K - B owing an d tilt of mar k ers is less th an 0 .1 d ivision total from to p to bottom of t h e gratic u le (eac h 0 .1-millisecon d mar k er re p resents 0 .1 d ivision) .
'
f . AD JU ST-Geometry ad j ustment Η 982 ς see rig . 5- 5) for minimum bowing of t h e trace at t h e left and rig h t e d ges of t h e gratic u le .
I
g . I N T ER ACTIO N - R ec h ec k ste p 10 .
h . Disconnect all test eq u i p ment . 12 . A d j ust Ζ -Axis Com p ensation Fig . 5-7 . L ocation of Υ Axis Align a dju st me n t (left side of instr u me n t) .
M ove
b.
α mar k er to t h e center vertical line with th e
h orizontal POSITIO N control .
c . M ar k er aligns with center vertical line wit h in 0 .1 division total from to p to b ottom of th e graticule .
d . AD JU ST- Υ Axis Align ad ju stmen t R989 (see F ig . 5-7) to align t h e mark ers with t h e center vertical line . 11 . A d j ust C R T Geometry α . Set th e Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V switc h to .5 ms an d ad ju st th e Α VA R control to d isplay exactly one mar k er for eac h ma j or gratic u le d ivision .
b. Connect th e trigger ou t p u t of th e time-mar k generator to t h e Α ΕΧΤ T R IG I NPU T connector with th e 42-inc h BN C ca b le . c . Set th e time-mark generator for mar k er outp u t of one an d 0 .1 millisecon d and trigger o u t p u t of one millisecon d .
d . Set t h e Α SO UR C E switc h to EXT . If necessary, ad ju st th e Α LEVEL control to p rovide α stable d isplay .
5- 3 2
α . C h ange t h e following control settings :
A SOURCE
Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V Α VA R
ΙΝΤ .1 μ s Calibrated
b . Connect th e 10Χ p robe to th e in p u t of th e test oscillosco p e . C h ec k th e p robe com pensation . c . Connect t h e p robe ti p to ΤΡ 1047 (see F ig . 5-5) ; connect th e p ro b e groun d to c h assis gro u n d with α s h ort grou n d ing stra p .
d . Set th e test oscilloscope for α vertical d eflection factor of 0.5 volts/ d ivision (five volts/d ivision at p robe tip) at α swee p rate of 0 .1 microsecon d /division .
e . Set th e INT EN SITY control for t h ree d ivisions of vertical d eflection on t h e test oscillosco pe . P osition t h e display so th e lead ing edge of th e waveform is d is p laye d . f . C HE C K -Test oscilloscope d is p lay for o p timum s q u are lead ing corner on unblan k ing gate . g . AD JU ST-C1036 (see F ig . 5-5) for o p timum s qu are corner on th e u n blan k ing gate .
h. Disco n nect all test eq u i p ment.
ι ι ι ι ,
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
ι
Ad justme nt-453Α/R453Α
ι
VER TICA L SYST EM AD JU ST M EN T Eq ui pment R eq uire d
ι
1 . DC voltmeter (V OM)
7 . 5Χ G R attenuator
2 . Stan d ard am p litude cali br ator
8. In-line 50-o h m G R termination
3 . Squ are-wave gen erator
9. 20-pF in put normalizer
4 . 42-inc h 50-o hm BN C cable
10 . Th ree-inch screwdriver
5. D u al-i nput cou p ler
11 . L ow-ca p acitance screwdriver
6. F ive-nanosecon d G R ca ble
12 . Tuning tool
Control Sett i ngs Set th e controls as given und er Settings .
13 . Adj ust Channel
Balance
1
an d
P reliminary
Control
2 Step Attenuator
α. Set the Channel 1 and 2 In put Coup li ng switch es to GN D.
b.
P osition
t he Chan nel I
ι ι
'
the trace to the center h orizontal line with 1 P OSITIO N control .
g. CHE CK-C h ange the CH 2 VO L TS/DI V switch from 20 mV to 5 mV. Trace sh ould not move more tha n 0 . 1 d ivision vertically .
h . AD JU ST-C h annel 2 ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ BAL ad justment (front panel) for mi n im u m trace shift as th e CH 2 V O LTS/ DI V switc h is changed from 20 m V to 5 m V. 14 . Adj ust Channel 1 an d 2 Position Center α. Connect t h e DC voltmeter b etween p in connector "Ζ" on the V ertical P ream p board (see F ig . 5-8) an d c hassis groun d .
c. CHE C K-C hange the C H 1 V O L TS/DI V switch from 20 mV to 5 m V . Trace shou ld not move more than 0.1 d ivision vertically .
ΝΟΤΕ
Use the BEAM FINDER switch to locate the trace if it is deflected off sc reen when switching to 10 or 5 m V. d. AD JU ST-C han nel 1 ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ BA L ad j ustment (front panel) for minim u m trace sh ift as the CH 1 VO LTS/ DI V switch is ch ange d from 20 mV to 5 m V . e. Set th e MOD E switch to CH 2. f. P osition th e trace to the center h orizontal line with
, th e Channel 2 P OSITIO N control .
Fig. 5-8. Location of ρο sition center test points an d a dj usmen tts ( Vertical P reamp board). 5- 33
ι
Ad j ustment-453Α/R453A b. Set , the Ch annel 2 P OSITIO N control for α mete r read ing of zero volts. (T he dot on the Channel 2 POSITIO N control sh ould be centered; if not, loosen the set screw an d mechanically reposition the k nob.)
ε . C HE C K-Trace with in one d ivision of the ce nter h orizontal line . d . AD JU ST-C H 2 P osition Center ad ju stment R 155 (see F ig . 5-8) to p osition the trace to the ce nter line .
d . Position the d is play to the center of the gratic u le with t he Channel 1 POSITIO N control . e . C HECK-C RT d isplay am plitude.
exactly five d ivisions
f. AD JU ST-Ch annel 1 GAI N ad ju stment (front p anel) for exactly five d ivisions of d eflectio n. g. C hange the following control settings :
ADD M OD E e. Set th e M OD E switch to CH 1 . Pu INVER T f. Connect th e DC voltmeter b etween p in connector "W" on the V ertical P ream p b oar d (see F ig . 5-8) and c h assis ground . g. Set the Chan nel 1 P OSITIO N control for α meter reading of zero volts. (T he dot on t h e Ch annel 1 POSITIO N control sh ould be centered; if not, loosen th e set screw an d mech anically re position th e k nob .)
h . CHE CK -Trace with in one d ivisio n of the center h orizontal line . 50 i. AD JU ST-C H 1 P osition Center adju stment R55 (see F ig . 5-8) to p osition the trace to t h e center line . Pu j.
I NTER ACTION -R e-chec k step 13 .
k. Disconnect all test equ ipment. 15 . Adjust Channel 1 an d 2 Gain α. Change the following control settings : CH 20 1 and 2 V O LTS/DI V mV C hannel 1 and 2 I nput DC Coupling Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V .5 ms
in
lled out
h . CHE CK-C RT d isp lay for straig ht line . i. ADJU ST-C hannel 2 GAI N ad ju stment (front p anel) for straight line d isplay. j . Disconnect all test equipment .
16 . Adj ust Channel 1 and 2 Series Compensation
V olts/Division Switch
α. C h ange the following control settings : CH 1 and 2 VOLTS/DI V MOD E I NVER T Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V
mV
CH 1
shed i n .2 ms
b . Connect the square-wave generator h ig h-amplitu d e output connector to the CH 1 O R Χ connector with the five-nanosecon d G R cable, 5Χ G R attenuator, and 50-o hm i n-line termi nation in given or der .
c. Set the square-wave ge nerator for six divisions of onek ilohertz signal .
d . Set t h e Α LEVEL co ntrol for α stable d isplay .
e. CHE C K-C RT d isplay at each C H 1 V O LTS/DI V switc h p osition listed in Ta ble 5-5 for square corner with in b . Connect the standard am p litu de cali brator to the CH 0.12 d ivision. Readju st the generator ou tput at each switch 1 O R Χ and C H 2 O R Υ connectors with the 42-inch BN C position to provide six divisions of d eflection. cable an d the d u al-i nput coup ler. c. Set the stan dard am plitu de calibrator for α 0 .1-volt square-wave output. 5-34
f. AD JU ST-C H 1 V O LTS/DI V switch series compensa. tion as given in Table 5-5 for opti mum square corner on the
'
ι ι
ι
I
ι ι
ι
ι ι ι ι
ι
ι ι
ι
Adjustment-453A/ R 453Α TA BLE 5-5 C H 1 and 2 VO LTS/DIV Series Compensation C H 1 and 2 Channel l VO LTS/DIV series switch com pensation setting
series com pensation
50 mV C6C .1 C7C
C1 06C C107C
.2
C8C
Ch annel 2
C9C
j. AD JU ST-C H 2 VO LTS/DI V switch series compensation as give n in Table 5-5 for op timum square corner on the d is played waveform (use low-capacitance screwdriver) . R eadj ust th e generator outpu t at eac h switch position to provide six d ivisions of d eflection. Fig. 5-9 shows the location of the ca pacitors .
C108C
R emove 5Χ attenuator
2
i . C HE C K-C R T display at each C H 2 VO L TS/DI V switch p osition listed in Table 5-5 for square co rner with in 0.1 2 division . Rea dju st the generator output at each switch p osition to provide six divisions of d eflectio n .
k . Disconnect all test equ ipment . C109C 17 . Adj ust C h annel 1 and 2 Compensation
d isplayed waveform ( u se low-capacitance screwdriver), Read just th e generator o u tp u t at eac h switc h p osition to provide six d ivisions of deflection . F ig . 5-9 shows th e location of the ca pacitors. 9. Disconn ect the termination from Channel 1 an d connect the sign al to the C H 2 O R Υ connector with t he fivenanosecond G R ca ble, 5Χ G R attenuator, an d in-line 50ohm G R termination . h. Set the MOD E switch to C H 2.
S h unt
V olts/Division
Switc h
α . Con n ect th e s q uare-wave generator hig h -amplitude o u tp u t connector to th e C H 2 O R Υ connector wit h th e five-nanosecon d G R cable, 5Χ G R attenuator, in-line 50ohm G R termination, an d 20 p F in put R C normalizer, i n
given ord er .
b. Set the CH 2 VO LTS/DI V switch to 20 mV . c. Set the square-wave generator for six d ivisions of onekiloh ertz signal .
d. CHE CK-C RT d is play at each C H 2 VO LTS/DI V switch position listed in Ta ble 5-6 for square corner with in 0.12 d ivision . R ea d just the generator outpu t at each switch position to provid e six divisions of d eflection. TA BLE 5-6 CH 1 an d 2 V O LTS/DIV S hunt Com pensation CH 1 an d 2 VO LTS/DI V switch setting C17 20 mV C6 50 mV
.1 C107 .2 C108
Ch annel 1 s hunt compensation
Channel 2 shu nt compensation
13 C7 B C8 B
C117 C106 B B B
R emove 5Χ attenuator Ad ju st C11 for best compro m ise 2 F ig . 5-9.C109 C9 B Location of CH 1 and 2 V OLTS/DIV switch compensation . .5
1
Ad j ust C111 for best compromise B
5- 35
ι
Adj ustment-453Α/R453A e. AD JU ST-C H 2 V OLTS/DI V switch s hunt com p ensation as given in Table 5-6 for o p timum squ are corner on the dis p layed waveform (use low-capacitance screwdriver) . R ea d ju st the generator output at each switch position to provi d e six d ivisions of d eflection (maxim u m of about three d ivisions obtainable in the 2 position) . F ig . 5-9 shows the location of the ca p acitors.
R ea d ju st the generator ou tpu t at each switch position to
f. Disconnect the normalizer from Ch annel 2 an d connect the signal to the C H 1 O R Χ connector with the fivenanosecond G R ca b le, 5Χ G R attenuator, in-line 50-o hm G R termination, and 20 p F in p ut R C normalizer, in given ord er .
18 . Ad just
g . Set the M OD E switch to CH 1 .
h. CHE CK-C RT d isplay at each C H 1 V OLTS/DI V switch position listed in Ta ble 5-6 for sq uare corner with in 0.12 d ivision . R ea d just the generator out p ut at each switch position to p rovi d e six d ivisions of deflection . i . AD JU ST-C H 1 V O LTS/DI V switch s hunt compensation as give n in Ta b le 5-6 for o p timu m squ are corner on the dis p layed waveform (use low-capacitance screwd river) .
p rovide six d ivisio n s of d eflection (maxim u m of about three d ivisions obtainable in the 2 position) . F ig . 5-9 shows the location of the ca p acitors . j.
Disconnect all test eq uipment.
H ig h -F re q uency Comp ensation
S ELECT E D CO MP O NENTS Th e
Vertical Preamp circuit board has four selected components which provide high -frequency compensation for th e Vertical Deflection System . It sh ou ld not be necessary to re-select th ese components unless th e devices for wh ich th ey compensate h ave been c h anged. Use Table 5-7 to select th ese components. If mo re than one component needs to be selected, select the components in th e o rder given in th is table . Th e location of each selected comp onent is sh own in Fig. 5-10. Table 5-7 lists th e range of component values wh ich provide correct compensation .
TA BLE 5-7 Selected Components Selected Con Range of valued (to Device(s) for whic h d itio n s for selectcomponent p rovi d e α 2 to 3% this provides α coming (20 mV/Div, fourdivision 100 kH z total compensating pensating effect signal a pp lie d ) effect) .001 to .01 μ F
Q23, Q33
M OD E CH 1 10 μs/DI V MAG OFF
Select for best flat to p over first 2 to 5 microseconds
2 . C44A
0 to 4.7 pF
F eed bac k Am p lifier
MOD E C H 1 .1 μ s/Div M AG O FF
Select to match 10 mV res p onse to 20 mV .
3. C264
14 to 47 p F
Delay line
M OD E C H 1
Select for best flat top over first 0.2 to 0 .6 microsecon d
4. C138
.001 to .01 μ F
Q123, Q133
M OD E C H 2 10 μs/DI V M AG O FF
Select for best flat top over first 2 to 5 microsecon d s
5. C144A
0 to 4.7 p F
Feedbac k Am p lifier
MOD E C H 2 .1 μs/DI V M AG O FF
Select to matc h 10 mV res ponse to 20 mV
6 . R 195
24 k to 300 k Ω
Q84, Q94, Q184, Q194
M OD E CH 2
Select for b est match of Channel 2 to Ch annel 1 over first 0.5 microsecon d
2 μs/DI V M AG O FF
2 μ s/DI V MAG O FF
ι
ι ι
Selection p roce d ure
1 . C38
5-36
'
ι ι ι ι ι
ι
ι ι
ι
ι ι
Ad ju stment-453 Α/ R 453A
ι
ι
ι ι ι
ι
ι ι ι F ig . 5-10 . (Α) Location of hig h -freq u ency com p e nsatio n a d ju stments on V ertical P ream p boar d , ( Β ) Location of hig h -freq u ency compen satio n on V ertical O u tput board .
a dj ustments
C38 an d C138 are selecte d from among t h e following capacitors .
'
.001 μ F .0015 μ F .0022 μ F .0027 μ F .0033 μ F .0047 μ F .01 μ F
283-0067-00 283-0114-00 283-0119-00 283-0142-00 283-0041-00 283-0083-00 283-0079-00
200 200 200 200 500 500 250
V V V V V V V
±10% ±20% ±5% ±5% ±5% ±5% ±20%
C44A an d C144A are selected from among t h e follown g ca p acitors.
i
0.68 p F 1 pF
ι
281-0537-00 281-0627-00
500 V 600 V
±0 .136 pF
1 .5 2.2 3.3 4.7
pF pF
C264 pacitors . 14 18 22 27 33 39 47
281-0529-00 281-0604-00 281-0626-00 281-0618-00
pF
pF
pF pF pF pF pF pF pF
is
selected from 281-0577-00 281-0578-00 281-0511-00 281-0512-00 281-0629-00 281-0603-00 281-0519-00
500 500 500 200
V V V V
±0 .25 p F ±0 .25 p F ±5% ±0 .5 p F
among th e following ca500 500 500 500 600 500 500
V V V V V V V
±5% ±5% ±2 .2 pF ±2 .7 pF ±5% ±5°/ο ±4 .7 p F 5- 37
Adjustment-453Α /R453A α . C hange the following control settings : CH 1 an d 2 V OLTS/DIV ΑΤΙΜΕ /DIV
20 mV . ςμ s
b . Connect the fast-rise + out p ut of the square-wave
generator to the CH 1 OR Χ connector with t he fivenanosecon d G R cable, 5 Χ G R attenuator, an d in-line 50-ohm GR termination . c . Set the square-wave generator for fast-rise o p eration at 100 k ilohertz . Set the outp ut am p litu d e for α six- d ivision d is p lay .
d . CHECK-CRT d is p lay for op timum square-wave response with aberrations not to excee d 0 .12 division p eak to p eak . ΝΟΤΕ Use α viewing h ood or re duce the ambient ligh t /eve/ to aid in checking h igh -frequency response. e . ADJUST-C263 and C265 (see F ig . 5-10A) for optimum s q uare-wave res p onse with minimum aberrations . U se low-capacitance screwdriver . f . M ove the lea d ing ed ge of the waveform to the vertical center line with t he h orizontal P OSITION con trol .
g . Change the following control settings : Α ΤΙΜ Ε/DI V
.2 μs
M AG
Χ 10
h . CHECK-CRT d isplay for optimum square-wave resp onse with aberrations not to exceed 0 .12 d ivision p ea k to p ea k . NOTE /η th e following steps, change th e MAG switc h from Χ10 to OFF an d compare th e response at both sweep rates. Th en adjust for th e best overall response. s i . ADJUST-R49, C49, R328, C336, C328, C54, an d C45A (see F ig . 5-10), in given or d er, for o p timum
5-38
square-wave response with minimum aberrations . U se the low-capacitance screwdriver to a d just the variable capaci tors . Re p eat these ad justments until o p timum resp onse is obtaine d .
j . Set the
M ODE
switch to CH 2 .
k . Disconnect the termination from Channel connect it to the CH 2 OR Υ connector .
1
an d
Ι . C HECK-CRT d is p lay for op timum sq uare-wave res p onse with aberrations not to exceed 0.12 d ivision p eak to peak .
ι ι
ι ι
m . ADJUST-R149, C149, C154, an d C145A (see F ig . 5-10 Α ), in given ord er, for o p timum square-wave
response with minimum aberrations . U se the lowcapacitance screwdriver to a d just the variable ca p acitors . Re p eat these a d justments u ntil o p timum res p onse is obtained . F inal results of this a d justment shoul d p rod uce similar response for Channels 1 an d 2 .
NO ΤΕ if response of Channel 1 and 2 cannot be matched by making th e adjustments given here, see th e procedure for selecting R195 given in Table 5-7.
ι ,
η . Set the CH 2 V OLTS/DIV switch to 10 mV . ο . Set the square-wave generator for α six-d ivision display . ρ . C HECK-CRT d isp lay for o p timum square-wave res p onse with aberrations not to excee d 0 .12 d ivision p eak to p eak .
q. ADJUST-R144C an d C144C (see F ig . 5-10A), in given or d er, for op timum square-wave res p onse . U se the low-capacitance screw d river to adjust the variable capacitors . Re p eat these adjustments until o p timum resp onse is obtaine d .
'
r . Set the CH 2 V OLTS/DIV switch to 5 mV . . Set the sq uare-wave generator for α six-division d isplay .
ι
ι ι ι
' '
Adjustment-453A/R453A t . CHECK-CRT d is p lay for optimum square-wave response with aberrations not to exceed 0.12 d ivision peak to p eak.
υ . ADJUST-R143C, C143C, C143A, and L143A (see i n given order, for optimum square-wave response with minimum aberrations . U se the [owcapacitance screwdriver to adjust the variable capacitors . Re peat these a d justment until optimum resp onse is obtained.
γ. ADJUST-R43C, C43C, C43A, an d L 43A (see F ig . 5-10Α), in given order, for optimum square-wave response with minimum aberrations . U se the low-capacitance screwd river to adjust the variable capacitors . Repeat these adjustments until optimum response is obtained .
F ig . 5-10 Α),
ν. C hange the following control settings : CH 1 V OLTS/DIV M ODE
5 mV CH 1
Ζ , Set the CH 1 V OLTS/DIV switch to 10 mV . αα . Set the square-wave generator for α six-division
d isplay .
ab . CHECK-CRT display for optimum square-wave resp onse with aberrations not to exceed 0.12 d ivision peak to peak .
ac . ADJUST-1344C and C44C (see F ig . 5-10A), in given ω. Disconnect the termination from Channel 2 an d order, for optimum square-wave response with connect it to the CH 1 OR Χ connector. minimum aberrations . U se the low-capacitance screwdriver to adjust the variable ca pacitors. Re peat these adjustments until optimum response is obtained . χ. C HECK-CRT display for optimum square-wave response with aberrations not to exceed 0.12 d ivision p eak to p eak . ad. Disconnect all test equi pment .
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
NOTES
Ad j ustment-453 Α / R 453A T R IGG ER SYST EM AD JU ST MENT E qui pment 1.
R e q uired
H ig h - F re q uency
sine-wave generator
2 . F ive- n anosecon d G R cable
3.
In-line 50-o h m G R termination
4 . T h ree-inc h screw d river
Control Settings
g . C h ange t h e following control settings :
Set t h e controls as given un d er Prelimi n ary Control Settings .
Α LEVEL Β LEVEL H O R IZ DIS PLAY
19 . A dj ust Α an d Β Trigger
L evel
Centering
α . C h a n ge th e following control settings : mV C50 H 1 V O LTS/DI V 20 ΤΙΜ Ε /DI V μs Α N O RM T R IG Α S WEEP M OD E b . Connect t h e high -frequency sine-wave generator to the C H 1 O R Χ connector wit h t h e five-nanoseco nd G R cable and t h e in-line 50-o h m G R termination . ε . Set t h e generator for α 0 .3- d ivision d is p lay at 50 kilo h ertz (if necessary, u se t h e A U TO T R IG position to obtain α 0 .3-division disp lay) .
d . Set th e Α LEVEL control to 0 . e . C HE C K -Sta b le C R T dis p lay is p resented . f . AD JU ST- Α Trigger Level Center a d j ustment R462 (see F ig . 5-11) for α stable d is p lay .
Sta b le dis p lay 0 Β (D EL AY E D SWEEP)
h . C HE C K -Stable C R T d isplay is p resented . i . ADJUST-13 Trigger L evel Center a d ju stment R 662 (see F ig . 5-13) for α stable d is p lay . 20 . Adjust C hannel DC L evel
1
Only an d
N ormal
Trigger
α , C h ange th e following control settings : ΙΝΤ T R IG Α CO UPL I N G Α SW EEP M OD E H O R IZ DIS PL AY
CH 1 OR Χ-Υ DC AU TO T R IG Α
b . Center th e dis p lay about th e ce n ter h orizontal line with th e C h a n nel 1 P OSITIO N control . c . C HE C K-Stable C R T d is p lay is p resented .
ι ι ι ι ι
ι
ι
ι
ι ι
ι
d . AD JU ST-C h annel 1 Trigger DC L evel ad ju stment R60 (see F ig . 5-12) for α stable display .
ι ι
F ig . 5-11 . L ocation of Α Triggering a d ju stment ( Α swee p b oar d ) . 5- 4 0
F ig . 5-12 . Location of Triggeri ng DC level a djustments ( Vertical Preamp board ) .
ι
ι
Adjustment-453Α/R 453Α e . Set the ΙΝΤ TRIG switch to N ORM .
g . ADJUST-Normal Trigger DC Level R285 (see F ig . 5-12) for α stable d isp lay .
f . CHECK-Stable CRT d is p lay is presented .
ι ι
ι ι
ι
ι ι
ι ι ι ι
ι
ι
ι ι ι
h . Disconnect all test equi p ment .
NOT ES
ad justment
Ad j υ stment-453 Α / R 453 Α
HO R IZO NTA L
SYST EM AD JU ST MENT
Eq ui pment R e q uire d 1 . Time-mar k gen erator
4 . 50-o h m BN C termination
2 . Standard am p lit u d e calibrator
5 . T h ree-inc h screw d river
3 . 42-inc h 50-o hm BN C cable
6.
Control Settings Set t h e controls as given under P reliminary Control Settings .
21 . Ad j ust bration
Swee p
Start
an d
Α
Swee p
Cali-
α . Connect th e time-mar k generator to th e C H 1 O R Χ connector with th e 42-inc h 50-o h m BN C cable and th e 50-o h m BN C termination . b . C h ange th e following control settings : C H 1 V O LTS/DI V Β ΤΙΜΕ 5 /DI V Β S WEEP MOD E
H O R IZ DIS PL AY ε . Tu rn t h e cou ntercloc k wise .
D EL AY-TI ME
d . CHECK-DELAY-TIME exactly 0 .20 .
.5
μs Β STA R TS A F T ER D ELAY TIME Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β
MULTI PL I ER d ial f u lly
L ow-capacitance
screw d river
i . C HE C K -Intensifie d second m ar k er .
p ortion
of
d is p lay
starts at
j . AD JU ST-Swee p Start a d ju stment R 758 (see F ig . 5-13) so intensified p ortion starts at second mar k er ( p reliminary adj ustment) .
k . Set t h e D EL AY-TI ME MULTI PL I ER dial to 9 .00 .
Ι . C HE C K -Intensifie d tenth mar k er .
p ortion of d is p lay
starts at
m . AD JU ST- Α Swee p Cal a dj ustment R 531 (see F ig . 5-13) so intensifie d p ortion starts at tenth mar k er (preliminary adju stment) . η . Set t h e H O R IZ DIS PL AY switch to Β (D EL AY E D S WEEP) .
MUL TI PL I ER d ial setting
e . AD JU ST-If t h e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial is not correctly p ositio n e d wh en fully countercloc k wise, loosen t h e set screw an d mech anically rep osition t h e d ial to 0 .20 .
one-millisecond
h . Set t h e DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER d ial to 1 .00 . 5- 4 2
ι ι
ι ι ι ι ι ι
ι
f . R e p eat p arts c th ro u g h e until t h e DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial is correctly p ositione d wh en f u lly co u ntercloc k wise . g . Set t h e time-mar k generator for mar ke rs .
ι ι ι ι ι ι
F ig . 5-13 . L ocation of Β Triggering and Β Sweep A dj ust ments ( Β Swee p boar d) .
ι ι ι
A d j ustment-453 Α / R 453A ο . Set t h e exactly 1 .00 .
DELAY-TIME
MUL TI PL I ER
d ial
to
ρ . C HE C K -Dis p layed pulse starts at th e beginning of th e swee p .
q. AD JU ST-Sweep Start a d ju stment R758 (see F ig . 5-13) so d isplayed p ulse starts at th e b eginning of th e sweep . r . Set t h e exactly 9 .00 .
DELAY-TIME
MUL TI PL I ER
d ial
to
s . C HE C K -Displaye d p ulse starts at t h e beginning of t h e swee p . t . AD JU ST- Α Sweep Cal ad ju stment 8531 (see F ig . 5-13) so d is p laye d pu lse starts at th e beginni n g of t h e swee p . υ . Re p eat p arts ο t h ro u g h t an d read ju st if necessary . 22 . Ad j ust
N ormal
Gain
α . Set th e H O R IZ DISPL AY switc h to Α .
ι
NO ΤΕ
Unless otherwise noted, use the middle eight horizontal divisions when checking or adjusting timing. c . ADJU ST- N ormal Gain a d ju stment R 835 (see F ig . 5-14) for one mar k er each d ivision . T h e secon d and tenth mar k ers m u st coincid e exactly wit h t h eir res p ective gratic u le lines (re p osition dis p lay slig h tly with t h e h orizontal POSITIO N control if necessary) .
d. AD JU ST- M ag Gain a d ju stment R845 (see Fig . 5-14) for οπ e mark er eac h d ivision . T h e secon d an d te n t h mar k ers m u st coinci d e exactly with t h eir resp ective graticu le lines (re p osition th e dis p lay slig h tly with t h e h orizontal FINE control if necessary) .
24 . A d j ust
M agnifier R egister
α . Set t h e mark ers .
time-mar k
generator
for
five-millisecond
b. P osition th e mi dd le mar k er (th ree mark ers on total magnifie d sweep) to th e center vertical line . c . Set th e
M AG
switc h to O FF .
d . C H E C K - M i dd le mar ker s h o u l d remain wit h in 0 .2 d ivision of th e center vertical line . e . AD JU ST- M ag Register ad ju stment R855 (see F ig . 5-14) to p osition t h e mi dd le mar k er to th e center vertical line .
d. I N T ER ACTIO N -C h eck ste p s 23-28 .
M agnified
c . C HE C K -C R T d isp lay for one mar k er eac h d ivision between th e first an d ninth graticule lines .
e . I N T ER ACTIO N -C h ec k ste p s 24, 27, and 28 .
b . C HE C K -C R T d is p lay for one mar k er eac h d ivision between t h e first a n d nint h gratic u le lines .
23 . Ad j ust
Fig . 5-14. L ocation of H orizo n tal A mp lifier a djustments ( Β Sweep board ) .
Gain
α . Set f t h e time-mar k generator for 0 .1 mar k ers. b . Set th e M AG switch to Χ 10 .
milliseco n d
. Set t h e
M AG
switc h to Χ 10 .
g . Re p eat p arts b th roug h e until no s h ift occurs wh en t h e MAG switc h is set to O FF .
5-4 3
ι ι ι
Ad jυst ment-453 Α/R453Α 25 . Adjust Β Sweep Calibration α. C hange t h e following control settings : Stable Α dis play Α LEVEL 0.20 DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER 2 ms Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V 1 ms Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V T R IGG ER A BLE AF TER Β S WEEP M OD E DEL AY TIME Β (D EL AY E D SWEEP) H OR IZ DISPL AY O FF MAG b. Set the time-mar k ge nerator for one-millisecon d markers. c. Set the Β LEVEL control for α stable display . d . CHE C K -C RT display for one marker each division between the first an d ninth graticule lines. e. AD JU ST-Β Swee p Cal adjustment R 741 (see F ig . 5-13) for one marker each d ivisio n.
F ig . 5-15. Location of one-microsecond timing adjust ments (beh in d
swing-out side panel) .
h . CHE C K-C R T d is play for one mar ker each d ivision between th e first an d nint h d ivision graticule lines. i. AD JU ST-C740A (see F ig . 5-15) for one marker each d ivision ( use low-capacitance screwdriver) . 27 . Adj ust
26 . Adj ust Α and Β One-M icrosecond Timing α. C h ange the following control settings : Α and1 Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V μs HO R IZ DIS PLAY Α b. Set the time-mar k generator for one-microsecond markers. c. Set th e Α LEVEL control for α stable d isplay .
d. CHE CK -C RT d isp lay for one mar k er each division
between the first an d ninth gratic u le li n es .
e . AD JU ST-C530A (b eh in d swing-out si de panel ; see F ig . 5-15) for one marker each division (use lowcapacitance screwd river) .
f. Set the H OR IZ DISPL AY switch to Β (D EL AY E D SWEEP) . g. Set th e Β LEVEL control for α stable d isplay . 5- 44
H ig h-S peed L inearity
α. C hange the following control settings : CH 1 VO LTS/DI V Α an d Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V H O R IZ DISPL AY
.1 .1 μ s Α
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
b. Set the time-mar k generator for 10-nanosecond mar kers. c. Position the disp lay h orizontally so starts at the left edge of the gratic u le .
the swee p
d. Set the MAG switch to Χ 10 .
ι
e. Set th e Α LEVEL an d HF STAB controls fo r α stable d is p lay . f . CHE C K-C R T disp lay for optimum linearity over the ce nter eig ht d ivisions of th e graticule. g. AD JU ST-C882 and C892 (see F ig . 5-14) for optim u m linearity over the center eigh t d ivisio ns of the graticule (attempt to k ee p C882 an d C892 nearly equal i n ca pacitance, by adjusting each capacitor about the
i
ι
ι
Ad justment-453Α/R 453Α same amou nt) . ad j ustment.
U se low-capacitance screwd river for t h is
h. Disconnect all test equi pment .
28 . Ad just Χ Gain α. C h ange the following control settings : CH 20 1 and 2 V OLTS/DI V mV MOD E CH 2 ΙΝΤ TR IG CH 1 O R Χ -Υ Β CO UPL I N G DC H O R IZ DISPL AY Χ -Υ M AG OFF
b. Connect th e stan d ard am p litu d e cali brator to the C H 1 O R Χ connector with t h e 42-inc h BN C cable.
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
c. Set the stan d ar d am p litu d e cali brator for α 0.1-volt square-wave output .
d . Increase the I NTEN SITY control setting u ntil the d is p lay is visible (two dots about five divisions a p art) . e . M ove the display to the center of th e graticu le wit h the C h annel 1 P OSITIO N control . f. CHE C K-C R T d isp lay for five divisions h orizontal d eflection . g . AD JU ST-Ext H oriz Gain adju stment R645 (see F ig . 5-13) for five d ivisions h orizontal deflection . T h is completes the Calibration Procedu re for the 453Α . Disconnect all test eq ui p ment an d secu re the swing-out si d e p anel . Re p lace the to p an d bottom cover.
5- 45
NOTES
453 Α / R 453A
R AC KM OUN TING Change information, if any, affecting this section will be found at the rear of this manual.
th e stationary an d ch assis sections an d allows t h e R 453A to be extended ou t of th e rac k . Wh en t h e instrument is T h e Tek tronix R 453A Oscilloscope is designed to mou n t sh i pp e d , th e stationary an d intermed iate sections of t h e in α stan d ard 19-inch rac k . Wh e n mounted in accord a n ce trac k s are p ac k age d as matc h ed sets an d sh oul d not b e wit h th e following mo u nting p roced ure, t h e instrument will se p arated . To i d entify t h e left or righ t assembly, note t h e meet al Ι electrical an d environmental c h aracteristics given in p osition of th e automatic latc h (see F ig . 6-1) . Wh en Section 1 . mounene t d i t hk rac,eumccu th atoati lat h s h ol d b e at th e to p of b oth assemblies . T h e ch assis sections are installed on t h e instrument at t h e factory . Instrument Dimensions Introduction
ι
ι
Α d imensional d rawi n g s h owing th e maj or d imensions of t h e R 453A is s h own in F ig . 6-11 .
T h e h ard ware nee d ed to mount t h e sli d e-out trac k s is sh own in F ig . 6-2 . Since th e h ardware su pp lied is inte n d ed to ma k e t h e trac k s com patible wit h α variety of ca b inet rac k s an d installation meth od s, not all of it will be needed R ac k Dimensions for t h is installation . U se only t h e h ard ware th at is re qu ired H eigfor ht . At least seven inc h es of vertical space is re q uired th e mounting meth od used . t o mount th is instr u ment in α rac k . W id th . M inim u m wi d t h of th e o p ening b etween t h e left and rig h t front rails of th e rac k must be 17 5/8 inc h es . T h is allows room on eac h si d e of th e instr u ment for t h e slide-o u t trac k s to o p erate freely, p ermitting t h e instr u ment to move smooth ly in an d ou t of t h e rac k . Dept h . Total d ept h necessary to mo u nt th e R 453A in α cab inet rac k is 18 inc h es . T h is allows room for air circulation , p ower cord connections and th e necessary mo u nti n g h ard ware . Slide-Out Trac k s
ι ι
T h e slide-o u t trac k s p rovided with th e R 453A p ermit it to be exten d ed out of th e rac k for maintenance or calibration wit h out removing t h e instrument from t h e rac k . In t h e fully extende d p osition, t h e R 453A can be tilted up so t h e b ottom of t h e instrument can be reach e d for maintenance or cali b ration . To operate th e R 453A in t h e exten d ed p osition, be sure th e p ower cord an d any interconn ecti n g ca b les are long eno u g h for t h is pu rp ose .
The sli d e-out trac k s consist of two assem b lies-one for t h e left si d e of t h e instrument and o n e for t h e rig h t si d e . F ig . 6-1 s h ows th e com p lete sli d e-ou t trac k assem b lies . T h e stationary section of eac h assembly attac h es to t h e fro n t and rear rails of t h e rac k , an d th e c h assis section is attach ed to th e instrument . Th e interme d iate sectio n sli d es between
M ounting P roced ure The following mounting p roced ure u ses t h e rear su pp ort k it (see F igs. 6-3 and 6-4) to meet th e environmental c h aracteristics of th e instr u ment (s h oc k an d vibration) . Two alternative mounting meth od s are d escri b ed at th e en d of th is p rocedure ., H owever w h en mou nted accord ing to t h ese alternative meth ods, th e instrument may not meet th e given environmental c h aracteristics for sh oc k an d vi b ration . The mo u nting flanges of t h e station ary sections may be mou nted in front of or be h ind th e front rails of t h e rac k , d e p en d ing on th e ty p e of rac k . If th e front rails of th e rac k are ta pp e d for 10-32 screws, t h e mou nting flanges are p lace d in front of t h e rails. If th e front rails of th e rac k are not ta p ped for 10-32 screws, t h e mou nting flanges are p laced b e h ind th e front rail an d α bar nut is used . F ig . 6-5 sh ows th ese meth o d s of mounting t h e stationary sections . Th e rear of t h e stationary sections must be firmly su pp orted to p rovi d e α s h oc k-mounted installation . T h is rear su p port must be locate d 17 .471 inc h es, ±0 .031 inc h , from th e outsi d e su rface of t h e front rail w h en th e mo u nting flange is mounted ou tsi d e of th e rail, or 17 .531 inch es, ±0 .031 inch , from th e rear surface of t h e front rail w h en th e mounting flange is mounte d beh in d th e front rail . If th e cabinet rac k d oes not h ave α strong s u pporting member locate d th e correct d istance from th e front rail, an a d ditional su pp ort m u st b e ad d ed . T h e instru ment will not meet t h e environmental s p ecifications u nless firmly su p p orte d at
Rackmounting-453 Α/R453Α
th is
point . F ig . 6-4 illustrates α typical rear installation using the rear su pp ort k it an d gives the necessary dimension s.
9 . R emove t h e neo p rene washers from the su pp ort p ins an d place the spacers on the pi ns. Replace the neo p re ne washers.
U se the following p roced ure to install the R 453A in α rac k :
part of the instru ment) are a pp roximately even with the
1 . Select the pro p er front-rail mounti ng h oles for the stationary section usi ng the meas urements shown in F ig . 6-5. 2α. If the mo unting flanges of the stationary sections are to b e mounted in front of th e front rails (rails ta ppe d for 10-32 screws), mo unt each stationary section as shown in Fig. 64A.
2b . If t h e mo unting flanges of th e stationary sections are to be mounte d b eh in d t he front rails (rails not ta pped for 10-32 screws), mo u nt each stationary sectio n as shown in F ig . 6-4Β .
3 . Attach an angle b racket to b oth rear rails of the rack through the s p acer b lock, stationary sectio n an d into the rear rail of the rack. Note that the h oles in the spacer b lock are not centered . Be su re to mou nt the bloc k with t he n arrow e d ge toward th e front of the rack; ot herwise, the instrument may not sli d e all the way into the rack . Do not tighte n the mou nting screws . Fig . 6-6 shows the parts in the rear su pp ort k it and the ord er in wh ic h t hey are assembled .
4. Assemble the su pp ort p in to the angle b racket in the order shown in Fig . 6-6 . L eave the spacer (was her) off, bu t nstall the neop rene washer .
i
,
5. Install α s u pport bloc k on each side of the instrument as sh own in F ig . 6-7. 6 . R efer to F ig . 6-8 to insert th e instrument in the rac k . Do not co n nect the p ower cord or install th e securing screws until all a d justments h ave b een made . 7 . W it h the instruments pu she d all the way into the rac k , the angle b rackets so the neo p re ne washers on the su pp ort p ins are seated firmly against the rear of the instrument and the support p ins are correctly p ositione d in the su pp ort block on th e rear of th e instrument . Tighten all screws . a d just
8. Pull the instrument p artially out of t h e rac k.
10. P osition the instrument so the pivot screws (wi d est
front rails.
11 . Ad ju st the alignment of the stationary sections accord ing to the proced ure outlined in Fig . 6-9. (If the rear alignment is changed , rec hec k th e rear su pp ort p ins for correct alignment.) 12 . After t h e trac ks operate smoothly, connect t h e
p ower cord to the power source .
13 . P ush the instrume nt all the way into the rack and secu re it to the rack with t he securing screws and washers as shown in F ig . 6-8.
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
,
NO ΤΕ
The securing screws are an important par t of th e
sh ock -mounted installation . If th e front rails are not
tapped fo r th e 10-32 securing screws, other means must be provided for securing th e instrument to th e rack.
Alternative R ear
Mounting Met ho d s CAUTION
Although th e following meth o ds provide satisfacto ry mounting un der normal conditions, they do not p rovide solid support at the rear of the instrument. If th e instrument is subjected to severe sh ock or vibration when mounted using the following methods, it may be damaged.
An alternative method of su p porting th e rear of the instru ment is shown in Fig . 6-10 . The rear su pp ort brackets su p plie d with the instru me nt allow it to be mounted in α rack wh ic h h as α s p acing between th e front and rear rails of 11 to 24 inches . F ig . 6-10 Α ill u strates the mo unting method if the rear rails are tap p ed for 10-32 screws, an d F ig . 6-10 Β illustrates the mounting method if the rear rails are not ta pp ed for 10-32 screws . Th e rear su pp ort kit is not u sed for th is installation . If the rack d oes not have α rear rail, or if the distance between the front an d rear rails is too large, the instrument may be mounted without the use of the slide-o ut trac ks.
ι ι ι ι ι
ι '
R ac k mou nting-453 Α/R453A
the instructions given in F ig . 6-8 . No furt her a djustments F asten the instrument to the front rails of the rack with t he req uired un d er normal conditions . secu ringare screws and washers. This mounting method s houl d be use d only if the instru ment will not be su bjecte d to shoc k or vi bration an d if it is installe d in α stationary location . Sli d e-Out Trac k Lubrication Removing or Installing the Instrument
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
After initial installation and ad j ustment of the slide-out tracks, the R 453A can be removed or installe d by following
The slide-out track s normally re q uire no lubricatio n. The special finish on the sliding su rfaces provides permanent lubrication . H owever, if th e trac ks do not sli d e smooth ly even after pro p er a d j ustment, α t h in coating of p araffin rubbed onto th e sliding surfaces may im prove o p eration .
6-3
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
R ac kmounting-453Α/R 453A
Mechanical stop
ASSEMBL Y F O R RIG HT SID E
Stop latch hole
Mounting flange Stationary section
Intermediate sectio
ASS EMBL Y
F O R LEF T
n
SID E
F ig .
6-1 . Slide-o u t track asse mb lies .
10-32
10-32 FHS screw
ΡΗ 5
screw
i4 ea)
(8 Cal
8 υί
Τυρρ (~ λ
10-32
,= 10
H nί shiηg was hers (4 ea)
F ig . 6-2. H ar dware needed to mo un t t he i nstrument in the cabinet rack.
6-4
\ P lasr ic wash ers ί 4 Ca l
ι ι ι
R ac kmounting-453 Α/R453A
Securing h oles (top pe d fo 10-32 sc rews ) 1Ιτ inch (for cor rect p osition of curi ng
holes)
F ig . 6-3. L ocati ng the mo un ti ng holes for the left statio nary sectio n. Same d imensions apply to righ t statio n ary section.
R ail ta pped for 10-32 sc rews
L eft front
rail
ca bi net
of
MISS
rac k
ι
ο _
= η
WWI
__- Untappe d h oles
s
~
ι
Ο
*Note : ( Α ) F ront rail ta pped for 10-32 sc rews
( Β) Un tapp e d
front r ail
Ι Use FH S screws . if a re co unte rsunk.
f ront
rail h oles
F ig . 6-4. M et ho d s of mounti ng the stationary section to the front rails.
6- 5
R ack mounting-453 Α / R 453A
F ig . 6-5 . S upporti n g t h e rear of th e statio n ary sectio n s : ( Α ) Di mensions necessary ; ( Β ) Com p leted installation .
R ac k mounting-453Α/ R453A
R ea r of statio n a ry section S u pp o rt
bloc k (mo un ted on instrument)
S upp o r t
pin
(2
ea)
Neop r ene s upp o rt was h er (2
ea)
F ig .
F ig .
Spacer
6-6.
R ear S u pp ort k it .
6-7 . I nstalling t he s upport bloc k on
the instr u ment . 6-7
R ack mounting-453 Α / R 453A
TO IN S ER T THE R 453A : 1 . Pull th e intermed iate section ( Α ) of eac h sli d e-out trac k ou t to its fu lly exten d e d position . 2 . Insert t h e ch assis section ( Β ) (on instrument) i n to t h e i nterme d iate sections. 3 . P ress bot h stop latch es (C) a nd p u sh t h e instr u me n t i n to t he rac k u ntil t h e latc h es sna p into t h e sto p latc h h oles (D) . 4 . Co nn ect t h e p ower cord to t h e power so u rce . 5 . Agai n p ress t h e sto p latc h es (D) an d pu sh t h e instr u ment all t h e way i n to t h e rac k . 6 . To sec u re t h e R453A to t h e rac k , insert t h e 4 sec u ring screws ( Ε ), wit h fi n is h i n g was h ers an d teflon was h ers, t h ro u gh t h e slots in t h e instr u ment front pa nel and screw t h em into t h e fro n t rails of t h e rac k .
TO 1.
REM O VE
THE R 453A :
R emove t h e securi ng a nd wash ers ( Ε ) .
screws
2 . Pull t h e i n str u ment o u twar d u ntil th e stop latc h es sna p into t h e sto p latc h h oles . 3 . Disconnect t h e power cord . 4 . P ress b ot h sto p latc h es (D) an d pull th e instr u men t o u t of t h e rack .
F ig. 6-8 . P roced u re for inserti n g or removing t h e i n strument after th e sli de-o u t track s h ave been i nstalle d .
6-8
R ackmou nting-453Α/R 453Α
TO ADJUST ALIGNMENT: 1 . Position the instrument with the pivot screws approximately even with t he front rails. 2.
L oosen the mounting screws at t he front of both stationary sections (left side shown) .
3. Allow t he tracks to seek t heir normal positions with the instrument centered in the rack . 4. Tighten the mounting screws . 5. Push t he instrument all t he way into the rack . If tracks d o n ot slide smoothly, check for correct spacing between t he rear supports . 6. Check the vertical positioning of the R453A front panel with respect to adjacent instruments or panels. If not correct, re position as necessary.
F ig . 6-9. Alignment adjustments for correct operation. DEEP RACK CONFIGURATION : 10-32 Left
ι
Left rear rail of cabinet rack
rear
rail of cabinet rack
10-32 PHS screw (2 ea)
8-32
Rail
ta pp ed fo r 10-32 sc rews
FHS
8-32
Ke ps nut
(2
sc rew (2 ea)
ΝΠρ9ΑΠAW
ea)
a
Stationa ry sectio n of
Stationa r y sectio n of
slideout track
SHALLOW RACK CONFIGURATION:
slideout track
S HALLOW
RACK CONFIGURATION: 8-32 FHS screw (2 ea)
8-32 FHS screw
=K (2 ea)
L eft rear rail
ErmM .
of
cabinet rack
WITΐ"ίS.......4ϊ:....:ξ Statio n a r y
R ail tapped for 10-32 screws
section of slideout track
Stationary section of slid eout track (Β)
U nta pp e d
rear
rail
F ig. 6-10. Alternative method of installing the instrument using rear su pport b rackets . 6- 9
R ac k mo u nting-453Α/ R 453A
VIEW
RE A R
οφ ΙΙΙΓΓ
ΙΙθοΙ
AI R
INTAKE AREA Ο
~ιc
,19
ίτ Ι
ΦιΦ
Ο
2 .597
FIX ED P O WER CO R D
r-
0.28ι
2 T 3.207
Φο
2 .062 ~- Φ . Βτ9
\~ .ν
TILT POSITION ΙΟ 5° ΑΒΟVΕ ΤΗΕ HOR IZONTA L
\ \
R AIL T rt μ: KNESS
9.3Ι0
Ι Ι .380
-i
R AI L NOTES
Ι . ALL DI MENSIO N S A RE REFEREN C E DI MEN SIO N S E XCEPT AS N OT E D
RACK RAIL TYPES
ALTERNATE ~ ΤΥΡΕ
ΜΌΙ ΝΤΓ, ΙΝG RAI D
Ι 9.Ι 25 -0. 062 ΕΑΘΙΝΕ 7 OPENI NG FOR Ι9" PANEL
LLE AR
0.625 { 0625 0.500 {
0.400 1.250 40 1 .250 Q-400 1250
05004 06255 0 625 ~ 0 ΣΟΟ 0625 0625 05004{ 0625 Ο625 {
TOP θ BOTTOM
"TAP W 1Ο -32 NF -2
F ig .
Ι
DRILL ING Ο. Ι 25,-- Ο. ΙΘ7
TA MOUN TIN G RAIL
ΘΤ ~~ PEN ING
1.250 Q,}ΟΟ 12500 Ο. οο
4250 -0.000
I VER SAL -1 UNΤΥΡΕ
0625
0.625 Ο ΟΟ
GAIB I NE 7
.Ι 0
dANE I
DUNTING
S P ACE 1750 M ULTIPLE S
0256 -0000\ TOP θ BOTTOM
\1
TAP W ΙΟ -32 NF -2\
6-11 . Dimensional Drawi n g .
ι ι ι ι ι
Rac kmounting-453 Α/ R453Α
οοοο
ι ι
ά
ό
ι 5 ι
Ι1
all
Ν s
ι ι ι
~jj
Jim 2
Ν
υ
ο ο ο
Γ
6-11
ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι
PARTS L IST ABBREV IATIONS ΒΗΒ
binding h ea d b r ass
int
inter n al
BHS
bin d i n g h ea d steel
Ig
lengt h or long
ca p .
ca p acitor
met .
metal
cer
ce ramic
mtg h dw
mo u nting h a rd wa r e
com p
com p osition
OD
o u tsid e d iameter
conn
connector
ΟΗΒ
oval h ea d b rass
C RT
cat h o d e- ray tu be
OHS
oval h ead steel
Ρ/Ο
p art of
ΡΗΒ
pan hea d brass
PH S
pan h ea d steel
p lstc
p lastic
PMC
p aper, metal cased
poly
p olysty re n e
p rec
p recision
PT
p a p er, t u b u la r
co cs k u nters u n k
DE
do u ble en d
dia
d iameter
d iv
d ivisio n
elect .
electrolytic
EM C
electrolytic, metal cased
EMT
electrolytic, metal t u b u lar
ext
exte r nal
ΡΤΜ
p a p er o r p lastic, t u b u lar, mol d e d
F & Ι
foc u s a n d intensity
RHB
ro u n d h ea d brass
FHB
flat h ea d brass
RH S
ro u nd h ead steel
single SE end FH S flat h ea d steel F il ΗΒ
fillister h ead brass
S N or S/ Ν
serial nu mber
switc h F il H S fillister h ea d steel S or SW h
h eig h t or h ig h
TC
tem p eratur e com p ensated
h ex .
h exagonal
ΤΗΒ
t ru ss h ead brass
ΗΗΒ
h ex h ea d brass
t hk
t h ic k
HH S
h ex h ead steel
TH S
tr u ss h ea d steel
HS B
h ex soc k et brass
tub.
t u b u lar
H SS
h ex soc k et steel
var
va riable
ID
insi d e diamete r
ω
wi d e or widt h
inc
i n candescen t
WW
wi r e-wo u nd
P A R TS O R D ER I N G I NF O RMATIO N Re p lacement p arts are available f r om Office or re p r esentative .
or t h ro u g h your local Te k tro n ix,
I n c . F ield
C h anges to Te k tronix instr u ments a r e sometimes ma d e to accommo d ate im p r ove d com p one n ts as t h ey become available, an d to give you t h e benefit of t h e latest circ u it im p rovements d evelo p e d in o u r enginee r ing d e p a r tment . It is t h erefore im p ortant, w h e n ord ering p arts, to incl u d e t h e followi n g i n fo rmation in your or d er : P art n u mbe r , instr u me n t ty p e o r nu mber, serial or model n u mber, and mo d ification n u mber if a pp licable . If α p art you h ave ord ere d h as bee n re p lace d wit h α new or im p r oved p art, yo u r local Te k tro n ix, I n c . F iel d Office o r r e p resentative will co n tact you co n cer n i n g any c h ange in p a r t nu mber .
S PE CIA L N OT E S A N D SYMB O L S X0 0
P art
first a dd e d at th is serial nu mbe r
ΟΟΧ
P art
remove d after t h is serial n u mber
*000-0000-00
U se 000-0000-00
Asteris k p rece d ing Te k tronix P art Nu mber in d icates man u fact u re d by or for Te k tronix, Inc ., or rewor k ed or c h ec k e d com p onents . Pa
rt nu mber i n d icate d is d irect re p laceme n t .
453Α/ R453A
IN DEX
O F ELE CT R ICA L P A R TS L IST P age No .
Title CH ASSIS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Α1 VERTICA L PREAMP Circ u it
B oa rd
7-1
Assem b ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Α2 VERTICA L O U TPU T Circ u it B oa r d Assembly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Α3 Α SWEEP Ci r c u it B oard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Α4 Β
S WEEP
Ci r c u it B oa r d Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Α5 Ζ AXIS Circ u it B oa r d Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Α6
L OW V OLTAG E RE GUL ATO R
Ci r cu it
B oa r d
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
453 Α / R 453A
SE CTIO N
7 ELE CT R ICA L PA R TS LIST Val u es
a re fixe d
C k t. No .
un less
ma rke d V a riable.
Te k tro n ix P a r t No .
Serial/ Model No . Disc
Eff
Descri p tio n
C H ASSIS Moto r Β 1200
147-0027-00
Β 010100
Β 1200
147-0033-01
Β 090000
Tolera n ce ±20% un less ot h erwise in d icated . C1 C3 C6 B C6C C7 B C7C C7 E C8 B C8C CH
MT *285-0697-04 281-0617-00 281-0064-00 281-0102-00 281-0064-00 281-0100-00 281-0505-00 281-0099-00 281-0083-00
Β 089999
48-40 48-62
Hz
Hz
Ca p acitors
0.1 μ F 15 pF 0.25-1 .5 p F, Var 1 .7-11 pF, Va r 0.25-1 .5 p F, Va r
Ce r Tub. Air Tu b.
1 .4-7 .3 pF, Va r 12 pF 1 .3-5 .4 pF, Va r 0.25-1 .5 pF, Va r 50 p F
Air Cer Ai r Tub. M ica
600 V 200 V
500 V
10%
C8D 281-0544-00 (nomi n al val u e) Selecte d 5.6 p F 281-0100-00 C9 B Ai 1 .4-7.3 pF, Va r r C9C 0.25-1 .5 pF, Va r Tu b. 281-0086-00 C9 E 500 pF M ica C9D 281-0593-00 3.9 p F ( n omi n al val u e) Selected C9 F C10 C11 C13 C43E
281-0547-00 281-0529-00 281-0099-00 281-0617-00 281-0578-00
2.7 p F 1 .5 pF 1 .3-5 .4 pF, 15 p F 18 pF
Va r
C44 B 281-0592-00 C73 281-0534-00 C100 283-0092-00 C101 MT *285-0697-04 C103 281-0617-00
4.7 pF 3.3 p F 0.03 μ F 0.1 μ F 15 p F
CI 06B CI 06C
0 .25-1 .5 pF, Va r 1 .7-11 pF, V a r 0 .25-1 .5 p F, V a r
C107 B
281-0064-00 281-0102-00 281-0064-00
Ce r Ce r Ce r Ce r
C1 07C Ai 281-0100-00 1 .4-7.3 ρ F, Va r C107E 500 281-0505-00 12 p F CI 08B 281-0099-00 C1 08C T C108 E
281-0083-00
1 .3-5 .4 pF, 0.25-1 .5 p F , 50 pF
Ce r Ce r Air Ce r Ce r
Va r Va r
10%
10%
500 V 500 V
10% ±0 .25 pF
200 V 500 V
5%
500 V 200 V 600 V 200 V
±0 .5 p F ±0.2 5 pF +80%-20%
Tu b.
Ai r
T ub.
r
Ce r
V
10%
Ai r ub. M ica
10%
E lectr ical Parts List-453A/R453A
C H ASSIS C kt . No .
Te k tronix P art No .
(cont)
Se rial/ M odel No . Disc
Desc r i ptio n
E ff
Cap acito rs (cont) ( n ominal val u e) Selecte d
5 .6 pF
281-0544-00 Ai 281-0100-00
C1 08D Cl09 B
Var
1 .4-7 .3 pF,
r
Tub ., 0.25-1 .5 p F, V a r Mica 281-0086-00 500 p F
C109C
Cl09 E Cl09D
281-0593-00
3.9
pF
2.7
pF
( n omi nal val u e) Selected Ce r
500 V
Ai r Ce r Ce r
200 V 500 V
Cl09 F C110 C111 Cl13 Cl43 E
281-0547-00 281-0529-00 281-0099-00 281-0617-00 281-0578-00
281-0592-00
4 .7 pF
Cl73
281-0534-00
3.3 pF 0 .022 μ F 0 .022 μ F 0 .03 μ F 22 p F 12 pF
Ce r Ce r Ce r Ce r Ce r Ce r
1 .8 pF 0.01 Ιι F 100 p F 4 .5-25 p F, V a r 84 p F
Ce r Cer Ce r Ce r Ce r
C144 B
1 .5 pF
283-0080-00
C295
C365 C432 C433A
283-0080-00 283-0092-00 281-0510-00 281-0505-00
C433 B C435 C436 C530A C530 B
281-0557-00 283-0013-00 281-0523-00 281-0010-00 283-0097-00
C296
C530C C530D C530 E C530 F C530G C530 H C530 J C530 K C550C C550D
*295-0089-00
281-0523-00 281-0523-00 283-0032-00 281-0551-00 285-0699-00
C615 C616
'I nd ividu al t i mi n g ca pacito r s ca pacitor to be re p lace d .
in
mu st
be
o rd e re d by t h e
E xa mple :
285-ΧΧΧΧ - ΧΧ Th e
7-2
lette r su ffix and th e tolera n ce s h o u l d b e t h e sa m e fo r
9
5%
±5 p F ±0.25 pF +80%-20% +80%-20% +80%-20% 10%
500 V 1000 V 350 V 1000 V
350 V 350 V 500 V 500 V 100 V
0 .047 μ F 0 .47 μ F 4 .7 μ F 0 .1 μ F 0 .03 1ι F
E lect. E lect. E lect r r
35 V
35 V 35 V 25 V 200 V
Ce r Ce r r
V 500 V 500 V
digit part
10%
±0 .25 p F
2%
Timi n g capacito r assem b ly
Ce r Ce r
5 °% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% +80%-20% +80%-20%
10%
1000 V 350 V
n u m b er, lette r su ffix a nd tole ra n ce pr i n te d on th e timi n g
Fall
25 V 25 V 200 V 500 V 500 V
Ce r Cer Ce r Ce r ΡΤΜ
0.01 μ& 100 p F
th is assem b ly
500 V
100 p F 100 pF 470 p F 390 pF 0 .0047 μ F
Soo 22 p F 281-0510-00 12 pF 281-0505-00 Ce 1 .8 pF 281-0557-00 283-0013-00 281-0523-00
500 V
Ce r
0 .001 μ F 0 .01 μ F 0 .1 μ F 1 ρι F 101&
290-0282-00 C550 E 290-0283-00 F C550 290-0284-00 C550G Ce 283-0081-00 C559 Ce 283-0092-00 C569 C602 C613A C613 B
Var
1 .3-5 .4 pF, 15 p F 18 p F
Ce r
of t h e tim i n g ca p acito rs i n t h e asse mb ly .
E lect rical Parts
C HASSIS C kt. No .
Te ktron ix P a rt No .
List-453Α/R453A
(cont)
Serial/Model No . Disc
E ff
Description
Ca pacito rs (co nt)
C740A 281-0010-00 4.5-25 pF, Var C740 B1000 283-0097-00 84 pF, Ce r V C740C 0.001 μF C740D 0.01 μF *295-0079-00 ng ca pacitor assembly C740 ETimi 0.1 μF C740 F C740 H
281-0523-00
100 p F
C886 C906 C911
285-0572-00 283-0044-00 290-0159-00
0.1 μF 0.001 μF 2 [ι F
C808
290-0267-00
Β010100 13 100000
Β099999
2%
Ce r
350 V
ΡΤΜ Ce r E lect .
200 V 3000 V 150 V
47 μF 47 /t F 0.015 μF 0.015 μF 0.015 μF
Elect . E lect. Ce r Ce r Ce r
35 V 25 V 2500 V 2500 V 2500 V
+80%-20% +80%-20% +80%-20%
+80%-20%
1 μF
Elect .
35 V
C937 C937 C940 C945 C952
290-0312-00 290-0287-00 283-0120-00 283-0120-00 283-0120-00
C953 C955 C957 C961 C963
283-0021-00 281-0556-00 281-0556-00 283-0096-00 283-0057-00
0.001 μF 500 pF 500 p F 500 p F 0.1 μF
Cer Ce r Cer Cer Ce r
5000 V 10,000 V 10,000 V 20,000 V 200 V
C966 C972 C976 C979 C985
283-0120-00 283-0079-00 283-0120-00 283-0060-00 285-0572-00
0.015 μF 0.01 μF 0.015 μF 100 pF 0.1 μF
Ce r Ce r Cer Ce r ΡΤΜ
2500 V 250 V 2500 V 200 V 200 V
C1105 C1111 C1112 C1141 C1142
283-0080-00 285-0566-00 290-0281-00 285-0566-00 290-0281-00
0.022 μF 0.022 μF 1500 μF 0.022 μF 1500 μF
Cer ΡΤΜ Elect. ΡΤΜ Elect.
25 V 200 V 25 V 200 V 25 V
+80%-20% 10%
C1171 C1172 C1172 C1191 C1200
285-0566-00 290-0280-00 290-0018-00 283-0006-00 285-0696-00
ΡΤΜ
10%
Cer ΡΤΜ
200 V 150 V 150 V 500 V 600 V
10%
ΡΤΜ
150 V 200 V
10%
Β 010100 13 100000
Β099999
13 010100
Β069999
Cl200 MT 285-0922-00 Β070000 C1201 285-0566-00
C1202 C1202
290-0280-00 290-0018-00
13010100 13100000
Β099999
C1204 C1204 C1211
290-0214-00 290-0405-00 285-0566-00
Β010100 13 100000
Β099999
0.022 Ι_ιF 200 /ιι F 200 /ιF 0.02 μF 0.5 1- F
E lect . E lect .
0.6 μF 0.022 μF 200 μF 200/ ιF
Elect. E lect .
10 μF 10 μF 0.022 μF
Elect . Elect . ΡΤΜ
C1203 Cer 283-0008-00 ΧΒ 120000 0.1 ,ιι F
'I nd iv idu al ti m i n g ca p acito rs in t h is asse m bly m ust capacitor to b e r e p lace d.
be
o rd e re d by t h e
9
d igit part n umber,
E xa mp le :
285-ΧΧΧΧ-ΧΧ The letter suffix and t h e tole rance should be the same for all of the ti ming
lette r suffix
10%
+80%-30% +80%-20% 5%
10%
150 V 150 V
500 V 250 V 150 V 200 V and
tole ra n ce pr i n te d
+50%-10% on
th e
timing
Fcapac i to rs
in t he assembly . 7- 3
Electrical Parts
L ist-453Α/R453A
CH ASSIS (cont) Te ktronix P art No .
Ckt. No .
Serial/Model No . Disc
Descri ption
E ff
Se m icon d u ctor Device, Diodes CR552 C R555 C R556 CR 884 CR911
*152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0061-00 *152-0185-00
C R940 C R940
152-0192-00 *152-0429-00 152-0192-00 *152-0429-00 152-0408-00
CR952 C R952 C R953
Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Te k S pec R e p laceable
Silico n Silico n Silicon Silicon Silicon 13010100 8100000 13 010100 Β100000
Silico n R ectifie r Silico n Silicon
Β099999
by 1 Ν4152
VARO 7701-5Χ Replaceable by VG-5X VARO 7701-5Χ Replacea ble by VG-5X 10,000 V, 5 mA
R ectifie r
Β099999
by 11\14152 by 1N4152 by 1 Ν4152
10,000 V, 5 mA Silicon 152-0408-00 CR955 10,000 V, 5 mA Silico n 152-0408-00 CR957 MR 1032A (Moto rola) Silico n 152-0198-00 1112A, B,C,D CR MR 1032A (Moto rola) Silicon 152-0198-00 CR 1142A, B,C,D 1 Ν3194 Silicon 152-0066-00 CR1172A, B,C,D
C R1202 C R 1212 VR 559 VR 963
1 Ν3194 Ν3194 1 Ν756Α 8.2V, 0.4 W, 5% 1 Ν987Β 400 mW, 120 V, 5%
Silicon Silico n Zener Ze ner
152-0066-00 1 152-0066-00 152-0217-00 152-0428-00
Delay Line Delay L ine Assembly
*119-0168-01
D L301
Bu lbs Neo n, Neon, Neon, N eon, Neon,
150-0030-00 DS75 150-0030-00 DS175 150-0035-00 DS400 150-0035-00 DS401 150-0035-00 DS530W
Incan d escent #21070
150-0046-00
DS596
260-0717-00
DS5972 DS849 DS973 DS974
N eon, N eon, N eon,
150-0035-00 150-0030-00 150-0030-00
N eo n ,
150-0030-00 150-0045-00 150-0047-00
DS975 D51107 DS1108 DS1109
NE-2 V NE-2 V Α1 D Α1 D Α1 D
Α1 D
NE-2 V NE-2 V NE-2 V
Incandescent #685 I n can d esce n t #C N 8-398 I n can d esce n t #C N 8-398
150-0047-00
Fu ses F937 " F 1101 F l 102 Fl 204 Fl 437 'Furn is h e d as α
7- 4
159-0021-00 159-0021-00 159-0022-00 159-0028-00 159-0025-00 u nit
wit h
5569 .
2Α 2Α 1Α 114A 1/2Α
3AG 3AG 3AG 3AG 3AG
F ast- Β 1 ο F ast- Β 1 ο
F ast- Β 1 ο F ast- Β 1 ο F ast- Β1ο
E lect rical Parts List-453Α/R453A
C HASSIS Ck t. No .
Te k tro n ix P a r t No .
(cont)
Serial/ M o d el No . Disc
Descri p tion
Eff
Connectors J1
131-0955-00 131-0955-00 131-0274-00 131-0955-00 131-0274-00
BN C, rece p tacle, elect r ical BN C, r eceptacle, elect r ical BN C BN C, r eceptacle, electr ical BN C
J 579 J 601 J729
131-0955-00 131-0955-00
BN C, rece p tacle, elect r ical BN C, recep tacle, elect r ical
.1101 J 402 J430 J 529
131-0274-00
BN C
In d uctors L884 L937 L980 L989
108-0254-00 *108-0422-00 *108-0321-00 *108-0295-00
LR 6 F LR 106 F LR 367 LR 377
*108-0282-00 *108-0282-00 *108-0328-00 *108-0328-00
600 Ι.ιΗ 80 ΙιΗ Trace rotatio n Υ Axis alig nme n t
ΧΒ 130000 ΧΒ 130000
0.13p.1-1 (wo u nd on α 30Q 0.13 /ιΗ (wo un d on α 30 Ω 0.3 μ.Η (wound on α 220 Ω 0.3 IM (wo un d on α 220 Ω
resisto r) r esisto r) r esistor) r esistor)
Tr ansisto r s
Q364 Q374 Q884 Q894 Q930
*151-0124-00 *151-0124-00 *151-0140-00
Q1133 Q1137 Ql137 Q1163 Ql167
*151-0136-02 *151-0140-00 151-0337-00 *151-0136-02 *151-0140-00
B01 0100 Β100000
Β099999
13 010100
Β099999
Ql167 Ql197
151-0337-00 151-0149-00
13100000
R esisto r s R2
R3 R6C R6 E R6 F
*153-0524-00
Silicon
TO-5 Te k
ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-5 Selected from 2Ν3119 TO-5 Selected from 2Ν3119 TO-3 Selected from 2Ν3055
Silico n Silicon Silicon Silicon Silicon
ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-5 Re p laceable by 2Ν3053 TO-3 Selected f rom 2Ν3055 TO-3 Selected from 2 Ν3055 TO-5 R eplaceable by 2Ν3053 TO-3 Selected from 2Ν3055
Silico n Silico n
ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-3 Selected f r om 2Ν3055 TO-66 2Ν3441
Silico n Silico n Silico n
a r e fixed, com p osition, ±10% 315-0105-00 317-0620-00 322-0643-00 322- Οδ 44-00 315-0220-00
ΝΡΝ
S p ec
(matc h ed pai r )
R esisto rs u nless
13010100
ot h e rwise in dicated .
Β129999 Χ
1 ΜΩ 62 Ω 600 k Ω 666.6 k Ω 220
1/4 1/8 1 /4 1/4 1/4
W W W W W
Pr ec Pr ec
5% 5% 1 1 5% 7-5
Electrical
Parts L ist-453 Α/ R453A CH ASSIS (cont)
C kt .
No .
Te k t r o n ix P a rt No .
Serial/ Mo d el No . Disc
E ff
Resistors R7C R7E R7F R8C
322-0620-00
250 kΩ 47 Ω
R9C R9 E R9F
R 13
R30 R 31 R40
111 k Ω
315-0560-00 322-0624-01 321-1289-01 315-0470-00 317-0220-00
56 Ω
311-0326-00
10 kΩ, 270 k Ω 2 .5 k Ω , 3 kΩ
R 43 E R 44 B
321-0111-00 315-0102-00 316-0103-00 311-0385-00 R 75 3 R76
321-0114-00
R 77
316-0154-00 316-0106-00
R 78
R81 R90 R91
321-0055-00 311-0169-00 321-0017-00
R 102 R103
322-0643-00 322-0644-00
RI 06E
R106 F
315-0220-00
RI 07C
322-0620-00
R107E
321-0618-00
RI 07F R 108C R1 08E
Va r
Β010100
Β129999Χ
7-6
unit w i th 575.
1 /α W
5%
1/α W 1/α W
5% 5%
1/α W 1/α W 1/8 W
Prec
1
W
P rec
1
Var
1/8
1/α W
78 W
5%
62 Ω 600 k Ω 666 .6 k Ω 22 Ω
1/α W '/α W 1/α W
Prec Pr ec
800 kΩ
1/α W
Pr ec
'/α W
Pr ec Pr ec
250 kΩ
10 k Ω, Var 270 kΩ 2 .5 kΩ , V a r 3 kΩ 13 k Ω 140 Ω
as α
5 5%
150 k Ω 10 ΜΩ
311-0326-00
'Furn is h e d
72 %
1
R130 R 131
321-0111-00
Prec
Pr ec
56 Ω 990 k Ω 10.1 k Ω 47 Ω 22 Ω
R171
5% 1/τ
/α W
315-0560-00 322-0624-01 321-1289-01 315-0470-00 317-0220-00
R 143 E R 144 B
Pr ec
150 Ω
R 108 F
R 140
/τ % /° 1/τ
1 5%
47 Ω 900 k Ω 111 k Ω
315-0274-00 *311-0994-00 315-0302-00 315-0133-00
Prec
1 5%
Prec
315-0470-00 322-0621-01 321-1389-01
RI 09C R 109 E R1 09F R 113
yα W
1
1/8 W 1/α W 1/α W
1 ΜΩ
317-0620-00
W
Prec
140 Ω 1 kΩ 10 k Ω 2509, V a r
36 .5 Ω 100 Ω, 14 .7 Ω
315-0105-00
R 106C
Va r
13 k Ω
R71 R73 R 74
Prec
1/α W 1/α W 18 W / '/α W ν8 W
10 .01 k 47 Ω 22 Ω
315-0274-00 *311-0994-00 315-0302-00 315-0133-00
'/α W 7/α W 11α
900 kΩ
321-1389-01
R8F
(cont) 800 42
321-0618-00 315-0470-00 322-0621-01
HE
Desc ri p tio n
yα W 1/α W 1/α W
'/α 1 /α '/α 1 /α 1/8
W W W W W
Pr ec
P rec Prec
5
1 1
5%
1
1
5 1/τ % 7τ % 5 °/° 1/2% '/τ 5 °/° 5 °/°
1/α W
5%
1/α W 1/α W
5% 5%
να W
Prec
1%
Electrical Parts List--4 53A/ R453A
CH ASSIS (cont) C k t . No .
Te k t r onix P art No .
Se r ial/ Model No . Disc
Resisto rs R 173 R 174
R175' R176 R 177
R 178 R181 R190
191
R
R364
365
R
Descri p tio n
E ff
(cont)
315-0102-00 316-0103-00
1 kΩ 10 k Ω
316-0154-00
150 .(2 150 k Ω 10 ΜΩ
316-0106-00
36.5 Ω 100 Ω,
321-0055-00 311-0169-00 *310-0623-00
316-0100-00
433 B
R
435
301-0914-00 301-0114-00 315-0104-00
R 436
315-0104-00
R 528
316-0106-00 323-0400-00 323-0371-00
R460'
530A R 530B R
R 530C
1
V ar
10 ΜΩ 143 k Ω 71 .5 kΩ
R 530G
325-0077-00
11 .5 ΜΩ
R 530 J R 530 K R530 K R530 L R530 L R530 M
325-0073-00
R530 M R 530 N R530 W
323-0711-00
R530Y°
311-0554-00
13010100
Β 139999
323-0710-00
13010100
13 139999
323-0712-07 323-0711-00 323-0710-00
R530X
323-0711-00 316-0154-00 315-0272-00
532
301-0221-00
R
7.15 ΜΩ
Β140000
Β140000 13 010100
13 140000
Β139999
3.57 ΜΩ
1 .43 ΜΩ 1 .43 ΜΩ
715 k Ω
715 k Ω 715 k Ω 715 k Ω 715 k Ω
150 k Ω 2 .7 kΩ 20 kΩ,
220 Ω
Var
5% 5% 5°%
'/4 W '/4 W 1/2 W 1/2 W 1/2 W 1/2 W '/4 W
10 ΜΩ
323-0712-00
1
P rec
100 k Ω
325-0075-00
Pr ec
'/Θ W '/4 W '/2 W '/2 W '/4 W
R 530 E
R530 H
4W
1%
100 Ω
10 k Ω,
325-0072-00
1%
1
71 .5 kΩ 71 .5 kΩ 3 .3 ΜΩ
R530 F
Prec Pr ec
'/8 W
P rec
323-0371-00 323-0371-00 315-0335-00
R 530D
1
'/8 W
10Q 910 k Ω 110 k Ω 100 k Ω
311-0553-00
Pr ec
'/4 W '/Θ W
'/4 W '/4 W
100 Ω
R433C
1%
150 k Ω 150 k Ω
321-0097-00
R
Prec
'/4 W
R401 R402
321-0097-00 316-0100-00
5%
10 Ω
650 Ω
316-0154-00 316-0154-00
'/Θ W '/4 W
4W
650 Ω
*310-0623-00
R403 R430
V ar
14.7 Ω
321-0017-00
R374 R400
Var
250 Ω,
311-0385-00 321-0114-00
'/4 W '/4 W
5% P rec
1 1 °%
Prec
1 1 5%
P rec
P rec
1 W 1 W 1 W
Prec
1 W W
Prec Pr ec
1/2 '/2
W
1/2 W 1/2 W '/2 W 1/2 W 1/2 W '/4 W 1/4 W 1/2
W
Prec Prec
Prec
1%
1 °% 1
1 %
1/2
P rec Prec
1/10% 1/2 % 1/10%
Prec
1/10%
P rec
P rec
'/2
1 / 10°%
5% 5 °%
`Furn is h e d as σ unit wit h 5175 . 'Furn is hed as α unit wit h R 551 .
'Furnis hed as α unit with 5530 Υ .
7-7
E lectrical
P arts List-453 Α/ R453A
C H ASSIS Te ktronix P a r t No .
Ck t. No .
(cont)
Se rial/ Model No . Disc
E ff
Descriptio n
Resisto rs (cont ) R551 ' 311-0553-00 R552 323-0381-00 R555 311-0191-00 R558 323-0353-00 R569 302-0104-00
R601 R 613B R613C R 615 R 616
316-0100-00 301-0914-00 301-0114-00 315-0104-00 315-0104-00
R 660
311-0555-00
74 ΠΑ R 7408 R 740C R 7AOD R
740E
R
R 74 Π F
100 910 k Ω 110 k Ω 100 k Ω 100 k Ω
143 k Ω 71 .5 k Ω 71 .5 k Ω 71 .5 k Ω
315-0335-00
3.3 Μ9
325-0075-00
7.15 ΜΩ
R 740 Κ
323-0712-00
1 .43 ΜΩ
323-0710-00
715 kΩ 715 kΩ 3.3 kΩ
R 740 J
325-0073-00
740L UAW R74 ΠΝ R740P
323-0710-00
R
323-0711-00 315-0332-00
74 ηχ
R
315-0272-00
R740Y`
311-0554-00
R
760 801 R802
311-0386-00 321-0286-00 321-0286-00
R 805Α, Β
311-0542-01
R
Var
10 ΜΩ 11 .5 ΜΩ
740H
R
72
W
P rec
1
72
W W
Prec
1
1/2
1/4 W 1/2 W 1/τ W 1/4 W 1/4 W
10 kΩ,
323-0400-00 323-0371-00 323-0371-00 323-0371-00
325-0072-00 325-0077-00
R 74 ηG
10 k Ω, Var 90.9 kΩ 10 k Ω, V ar 46.4 kΩ 100 k Ω
3.57 ΜΩ
715 k Ω
2.7 k Ω 20 kΩ, Va r 2 k Ω, Var 9.31 kΩ 9.31 kΩ
'/τ 1/2 1/2 1/2
W W W W
1/4
W
1 W 1 W
W W W W W
Pr ec Pr ec P rec Pr ec
'/2 '/τ % '/τ 1/10% 5%
1/4
W
1/θ W 1/8 W
470 Ω
2W
308-0363-00
3 kΩ
8W
308-0092-00
R 894
902
301-0105-00
R
' F urnis hed as α 'Furn is hed
7-8
as
α
unit wit h R 460 . unit wit h 5740 Υ .
4.5 kΩ 1 Ma
1% 1%
'/τ '/τ '/τ 1/4
305-0471-00
887
R
3 kΩ
Pr ec
5%
1/2
R 886
308-0363-00
Prec
1 1 1 1
1
315-0822-00 316-0154-00
R 884
Prec Prec Prec
Prec
1 W
808 849
R
P rec
1 W
10 k Ω, Va r 50 k Ω, Var 8.2 k Ω 150 k Ω
R
5% 5% 5% 5%
1/4 W 1/4 W 8W
5W 1/2
W
Prec
1
5% Pr ec Prec
1 1
5% WW
WW WW
5
5%
5%
5%
5%
E lect rical
Pa rts List--453A/R453A
C HASSIS (cont) Ckt. No .
Te ktronix P a rt No .
Serial/Model No . Disc
E ff
Resisto rs
Desc ription (co n t)
903 904 R905 R906 R907
301-0305-00 301-0305-00 301-0305-00 301-0305-00 301-0305-00
3 ΜΩ 3 ΜΩ 3 ΜΩ 3 Μ9 3 ΜΩ
ω ω ω ω ω
5% 5% 5% 5% 5%
908 909 R910 R911
301-0305-00 301-0305-00 301-0305-00 315-0204-00
3 ΜΩ 3 ΜΩ 3 ΜΩ 200 k Ω
1 /2
W W 1/2 W 1/4 W
5 5 5% 5%
941 942 R944 R945 R946
301-0206-00 301-0103-00 301-0106-00 301-0106-00 301-0106-00
20 ΜΩ 10 kΩ 10 ΜΩ 10 ΜΩ 10 ΜΩ
1/2
W 1/2 W 1/2 W 1/2 W 1/2 W
5% 5% 5°% 5% 5%
947 948 R949 R951 R 956
301-0106-00 301-0106-00 316-0105-00 308-0588-00 301-0103-00
10 ΜΩ 10 ΜΩ 1 ΜΩ 12 Ω 10 kΩ
1/2
5 5%
961 R962 R963 R 964 R965
316-0105-00 316-0105-00 301-0205-00 301-0335-00 301-0335-00
1 ΜΩ 1 ΜΩ 2 ΜΩ 3.3 ΜΩ 3.3 ΜΩ
1/4 1/4 1/2 1/2 1/2
W W W W W
5% 5% 5
966
301-0335-00
3.3 Μ 2
1/2
W
5%
301-0106-00 315-0332-00
10 ΜΩ 3.3 k Ω
%2
W
5
301-0682-00 301-0103-00
6.8 k Ω 10 kΩ
R R
R R
R940
R R
R
R
R
R
R967 R968
969 R971 R
R
972 975
R
R976
R 979
R980 R985
R
985
R989 R1003 R1005 R1104 R1105
311-0657-00
2 ΜΩ ,
316-0470-00 315-0471-00 311-0458-00 311-0157-00
Β010100
311-1146-00
Β 070000
316-0472-00
1/Ζ
1/2
Var
5 ΜΩ , V a r 1 .5 ΜΩ
311-0254-00 301-0155-00
311-0458-00 316-0123-00 311-0511-00 316-0153-00
1/Ζ
Β069999
47 Ω 470 Ω 5 k Ω, V ar 100 kΩ, V a r
W W 1/4 W 1/2 W 1/Ζ ω 1/2
ωω
1% 5%
1/2 W 1/4 W
5 °/ 5%
1/2 W 1/2 W 1/4 W 1/4 W
5% 5% 5%
100 k Ω, V ar
5 k Ω, Var 12 kΩ 10 k Ω, V a r 15 kΩ 4.7 k Ω
1/α W 1/α W 114 W 7- 9
Electrical
P arts L ist-453 Α /R453A CH ASSIS (cont) Tektronix P art No .
C kt . No .
Serial/Model No . Eff Disc R esistors
R 1106 R l 107 R1108
311-0548-00
R 1137
308-0362-00
Descri p tion (cont )
316-0102-00 316-0330-00
R 1112
1 kΩ 33 Ω
316-0103-00
β 1172
316-0104-00
R 1167
10 kΩ 50 Ω 100 k Ω 100 Ω
308-0362-00
R 1191
303-0153-00
Rl 197
308-0153-00
R 1202
100 Ω
316-0104-00 302-0270-00 27
Ρ 1204 R l275
100 k Ω Ω
322-0655-00
180 Ω 30 Ω 60 Ω
321- 0702-00 321-0704-00
Ρ1270 R 1277
Var
25 Ω, 10 k Ω 50 Ω
316-0103-00
RI 142
1 1
/α W /α W
/α W low 1
ωω
5%
ωω
5%
ωω
5
/α W / W 1/α W
P rec
114%
W
P rec
/α W low 1/α W low low 1
ωω
1
1 2
Pr ec
W
Switc h es Wired or
U nwire d
Sl S5 S75° Sl π 1
260-1168-00 260-0720-03 311-0385-00 260-1168-00
L ever R otary
5105 Sl75'"
260-0720-03 311-0385-00
R otary
S23 ΠΒ
`
S230 β S330
}
S43 π S435 5455 S530A,B S530A,B
W ired
*262-0727-01
R otary
260-0595-01
R otary
260-0688-00
Push
260-0698-01 260-0700-00 260-0472-00 Wire d *262-0724-01 260-0694-00
'Furnished as α unit with R75 . "Furnished as α unit with R175 . 7- 1 0
L ever
L ever
L ever L ever R otary R otary
5 ο/ο
AC-G Ν D-DC CH 1 V OLTS/DIV CH 1 CAL AC-GND-DC
CH 2 V OLTS/DIV CH 2 CAL Τ Rο
ER
E
MODE TRIGGER T RACE FINDER
Α Α Α Α Α
SOURCE COUPLING S LOPE A ND Β ΤΙΜΕ /DIV A ND Β ΤΙΜΕ /DIV
'/4 /ο 1/2 ο/ο
E lectrical Parts List-453Α / R453A
C H ASSIS Ck t . No .
Te k tro n ix P art No .
Se r ial/Mo d el No . Disc
E ff
Desc r iption
Switc h es S530Y 11 5555
311-0554-00 260-0697-01 260-0717-00 S569 12 S580 260-1149-00 5610 5615 S635 S655 S740Y13 S801 Α S801 B S801 Α S801 B 51101
51102 14 51103 14 S1275
(cont)
(cont ) Rotary
Α S WEEP LENGT H RESET Α SWEEP MOD E
Lever
Β SO UR CE Β CO UPLI NG Β SWEEP MOD E Β S LOPE
Pu sh Lever
260-0698-01 260-0700-00 260-0587-00 260-0472-00
Lever
L ever L ever
311-0554-00 260-1197-00
Β010100
260-1197-01
Β060000
Β059999
Rota ry R otary
Β VAR IA BLE CA L HO RIZ DIS PLAY AG H OR IZ DISPL AY AG
M
M
260-0834-00
Toggle
POWER
260-0447-00
Slide
CALIBRATOR
Th e rmal C ut-O u t ΤΚ 1101
Opens at 75°C ± 3°
260-0638-00
T ran sforme r s Τ930 Τ 1101
*120-0471-00 *120-0649-00
Η. L.
V. Power V. P ower
E lectr on Tube
V979 V979 V979
*154-0630-00 *154-0630-05 *154-0630-10
B01 0100
Β030000 8070000
Β029999 Β069999
O p tional V 979 V979 V979
*154-0630-07 *154-0630-08 *154-0630-09
C RT C RT
Stan d ard Ph os ph or Stan da rd Ph os p hor C RT Stan da rd Ph os p hor
Ph osphors ρ2 ρ7
Ρ 11
"Furn is h e d as α unit with R530Y . "Fur nis h e d as α un it wit h D5597.
"Furnished as α unit with R 740Y . '4See Mechanical Pa rts List . Li ne Voltage
Selecto r B o dy .
7-11
E lect r ical Parts List-453Α / R453A
Α1 Te k t r onix P art No .
C k t . No .
*670-0419-08 *670-0419-11
VERTICAL PRE A MP Circuit Boa rd Assembly Serial/ Mo d el No . Disc
Descri p tion
E ff
Β010100 Β 110000
Β 109999
Com p lete Com p lete
B oard B oard
Ca pacito r s Tole r a n ce -±-20% un less ot h e rwise indicated . C17 C18 C20 C23 C24
281-0064-00 283-0077-00 281-0603-00 283-0081-00 290-0177-00
0 .25-1 .5 pF, Va r 330 pF 39 p F 0 .1 μ F 1 μF
500 V 500 V 25 V 50V
5% 5% +80%-20%
C30 C38 C39 C43A C43 B
283-0080-00 283-0142-00 281-0523-00 281-0081-00 281-0572-00
0 .022 μ F Ce r 25V 0.0027 μ F (nominal val u e) Selected 100 pF Ce r 350 V 1 .8-13 p F, V a r Ai r 6.8 pF Ce r 500 V
+80%-20%
C43C C43D C44A C44C C45A
281-0081-00 1 .8-13 p F, V a r 500 Ce 281-0510-00 22 p F Selected Ai 281-0080-00 1 .7-11 p F, V a r 281-0080-00 1 .7-11 pF, V a r
Tu
b. Cer Ce r Ce r E lect.
Ai r r
V
r Ai r
C49 C53 C54 C64 C84
281-0081-00 290-0267-00 281-0077-00 283-0078-00 283-0032-00
1 .8-13 p F, Va r 1 μF 1 .3-5.4 p F, V a r 0 .001 μ F 470 p F
Ai r E lect. Ai r Ce r Cer
500 V 500 V
C94 C95 C96 C97 C98
283-0032-00 283-0080-00 290-0134-00 290-0134-00 283-0092-00
470 p F 0.022 μ F 22 μ F 22 μ F 0.03 μ F
Ce r Ce r E lect . E lect . Ce r
500 25 15 15 200
C99 C117 C118 C120 C123
283-0092-00 281-0064-00 283-0077-00 281-0603-00 283-0081-00
0.03 μ F 0.25-1 .5 p F, V a r 330 p F 39 p F 0 .1 μ &
C124 C130 C138 Cl 39 C1 43A C1 43B C143C C143D 7- 1 2
290-0177-00 25 Ce 283-0080-00 283-0142-00
-±0.5 pF
35 V 5%
V V V V V
5% +80%-20%
Ce r
200 V
+80%-20%
Ce r Cer Cer
500 V 500 V 25 V
5% 5% +80%-20%
1 μF E lect . 50 V V r 0 .022 μ F 0.0027 μ F ( n omi n al val ue) Selected
+80%-20%
T ub .
281-0523-00 281-0081-00
100 pF 1 .8-13 pF,
Var
Cer Air
350 V
281-0572-00 281-0081-00 281-0510-00
6 .8 p F 1 .8-13 pF, V a r 22 pF
Ce r Ai r Ce r
500 V 500 V
+80%-20%
±0.5 pF
E lectr ical
Α1
C k t. No .
Te k tro n ix P art No .
Par ts
L ist-453A/ R 453A
VERTICA L PREAMP Circu it Board Assembly (cont)
Serial/Model No . Disc
Eff
Desc r i p tion
Ca pacitors (co n t ) C144A Selecte d C1 44C 281-0080-00 Cl 45AAi 281-0080-00 C149 Ai 281-0081-00 C153 290-0267-00 C154 C159 C184 C194 C197
281-0077-00 281-0504-00 283-0032-00 283-0032-00 290-0134-00
C198 C199 C214 C218 C224
290-0134-00 283-0080-00 281-0510-00 285-0698-09 281-0510-00
1 .7-11 p F, Var 1 .7-11 pF, V a r 1 .8-13 pF, Va r 1 μF
Ai r r r
E lect .
35 V
22 μ F
Air Cer Ce r Cer E lect.
500 V 500 V 500 V 15 V
22 μ F
E lect.
1 .3-5.4 pF, 10 pF 470 p F 470 pF
Va r
0.022 1& 22 p F 0.0082 μ F 22 p F
C241 283-0060-00 100 p F C253 Cer 283-0081-00 0.1 Ι-ι F C261 283-0060-00 100 pF C262 281-0572-00 6.8 p F C263 281-0081-00 1 .8-13 p F, V a r
Ce r Cer ΡΤΜ Ce r Ce r Ce r Ce r Ai r
15 V 25 V 500 V 100 V 500 V
-0 .25 pF 10% 10%
27 p F ( n ominal val u e) Selecte d 1 .8-13 pF, Va r Ai r 2.2 pF Ce r 500 V 12 pF Ce r 500 V 3.9 pF Ce r
C293
283-0081-00 283-0081-00 281-0505-00 283-0081-00
0.1 μ F 0.1 I A F 12 p F 0.1 μ F
C298 C299
5%
5% +80%-20°/ 5% 10%
281-0512-00 281-0081-00 281-0604-00 281-0505-00 281-0593-00
Ce r Ce r Ce r Ce r
+80%-20%
200 V 25 V 200 V 500 V
C264 C265 C266 C288 C289
C297
10% 5% 5%
25 V 25 V 500 V 25 V
+80%-20% +80%-20% 10% +80%-20%
Semico n d u ctor Device, Dio d es C R 18 Te *152-0324-00 C R 34 *152-0185-00 C R 35 *152-0185-00 C R36 *152-0185-00 C R37 *152-0185-00
Silico n Silico n Silico n Silico n Silicon
k S p ec R e p laceable R eplaceable R e p laceable R e p laceable
C R52 C R58 C R 118 C R 134 C R 135
Silico n Silico n Silicon Silico n Silico n
Re p laceable R e p laceable Te k S p ec Re p laceable Re p laceable
*152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0324-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00
by by by by
1 Ν4152 1 Ν4152 1 Ν4152 1N4152
by I N4152 by 1N4152 by 1 Ν4152 by 1 Ν4152 7- 1 3
Electrical Parts
L ist-453Α/ R 453A
Α1
C k t. No .
Te k tronix P a rt No .
VERTICA L PREAMP Ci rc u it
B oard Assembly (cont)
Se r ial/ M odel No . Disc
Eff
Desc r iptio n
Semicond u ctor Device, Dio d es (cont ) C R 136 C R 137 C R 152 C R201 C R202
*152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 152-0141-02 152-0141-02
Silico n Silicon Silico n Silicon Silicon
R e p laceable by 1N4152 R eplacea b le by 1 Ν 4152 R e p laceable by I N4152
1 Ν4152 1 Ν4152
C R 203 CR204 C R 206 C R207 CR208
152-0141-02 152-0141-02 1 152-0141-02 152-0141-02 152-0141-02
Silicon Silicon Silico n Silicon Silicon
1 Ν4152 1 Ν4152 Ν4152 1 Ν4152 1 Ν4152
CR209 C R 213 C R218 C R 223 C R228
152-0141-02 *152-0185-00 1 152-0141-02 *152-0185-00 152-0141-02
Silicon Silicon Silico n Silicon Silicon
1 N4152 R e p lacea b le by 1 Ν4152 Ν4152 R eplaceable by 1 Ν4152 1 Ν4152
Silicon Germanium Silico n Zen e r Zener
Re p laceable
C R231 C R 233 C R235 VR53 VR 153
*152-0185-00 152-0008-00 *152-0185-00 152-0166-00 152-0166-00
R eplacea b le by 1N4152 1 Ν753Α 6.2 V, 0.4 W, 5%
1 Ν753Α
In du ctors Core, fe rramic s upp resso r 25 ΙιΗ l-l, Va r Co r e 276-0506-00 0.15-0.25 μ 0.3 jι, Η 0.5 ΙιΗ
23 24 L 43A L44A L 45A
*108-0443-00 276-0528-00 *114-0170-00 *108-0182-π0 *108-0170-01
84 1-94 L 95 L l23 L l43A
276-0528-00 276-0528-00 276-0507-00 *108-0443-00 *114-0170-00
Core, fer ramic s u pp r esso r Co re, fe r ramic s uppr essor Core, fe r ramic s uppresso r 25 IM 0.15-0.25 μΗ , Var Co re 276-0506-00
144A l45A L l99 L 201 L 202
*108-0182-00 *108-0170-01 276-0507-00 276-0528-00 276-0528-00
0.3 μΗ 0.5 μΗ Co r e, fe r ramic s u p presso r Core, fe r ramic s up p ressor Co r e, fer r amic s u p presso r
L203
276-0528-00 276-0528-00 276-0528-00 276-0528-00 *108-0329-00
Core, ferramic Core, fe rramic Co r e, fer ramic Co r e, fe r ramic 2.5 Ι-ιΗ (wo un d
L L
L
L L
204 L206 L 209 LR 287 L
7- 1 4
ΧΒ 110000
by 1 Ν4152
s uppresso r s u p pressor s u pp resso r s uppresso r on α 75 Ω r esisto r )
6 .2V, 0.4W, 5%
E lect rical Parts List- 453 Α / R453A
Α1 C k t . No .
VERTICA L PREAMP
Te k tro n ix P art No .
Ci r cu it Board Assembly (cont)
Serial/ Mo del No . Disc
E ff
Desc ri p tion
T ransisto rs
Q23 Q33 Q34 Q43 1 σ Q43
*151-1011-00
Silicon
*153-0552-00
Silicon
*153-0583-00 151-0225-00
Β010100 8070000
Q43 Q54 Q63 Q84 Q94
*151-0269-00 151-0221-00 151-0220-00 151-0221-00 151-0221-00
8080000
Q123 Q133 Q1 34 Ql43 1'' Q143
8069999 Β 079999
FET
D u al, Te k Sp ec
M atc h ed
assembly
Silicon Silico n
ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-18 2 Ν 3563 (matc h e d pai r ) TO-18 2 Ν 3563
Silico n Silico n Silicon Silicon Silicon
ΝΡΝ ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ
TO-106 Selected f rom S E 3005 TO-18 2 Ν 4258 TO-1 8 2 Ν 4122 TO-18 2 1\1 4258 TO-] 8 2 1\1 4258
*151-1011-00
Silico n
FE T
*153-0552-00
Silico n
Match e d assembly
Silico n Silico n
ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-18 2 Ν3563 (matc h ed p ai r) TO-18 2 1\1 3563
*151-0269-00 8080000 Silicon Q143 Silicon 151-0221- 03 Q154 Q184 151-0221-00 Silico n Q194 151-0221-00 Silicon Q215 *151-0190- ύ 1 Silico n
ΝΡΝ ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ ΝΡΝ
TO-106 Selecte d f r om S E 3005 TO-18 2 Ν4258 TO-18 2 1\14258 TO-18 2 1\14258 TO-106 Te k Sp ec
Silico n Silicon Silicon Silicon Silico n Silicon
ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΡΝΡ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-106 Te k Spec TO-106 Te k S p ec TO-1 8 2 Ν 4275 TO-18 21\14122 TO-5 Selecte d f r om 2 Ν 3137 TO-5 Selecte d fr om 2 Ν 3137
1 .1 k Ω 980 k Ω 1 ΜΩ 1 .8 k Ω 20 k Ω
'/4 '/4 '/4 '/4 '/8
W W W W W
315-0101-00
100 Ω 487 Ω
2 .87 kΩ 13 .7 kΩ 13.7 kΩ
'/4 '/8 '/8 '/8 '/8
W
321-0163-00
1 kΩ 511 Ω 1 ΜΩ 33 .2 k Ω
'/4 '/8 '/4 '/8
W W W W
0225 Q234 Q244 Q253 Q284 Q294
*153-0583-00 151-0225-00
8010100 8070000
8069999 8079999
D u al, Te k Sp ec
*151-0190-01 *151-0190-01 151-0223-00 151-0220-00 *151-0160-00 *151-0160-00
R esisto r s
esisto r s are fixe d , com position, ±10% un less oth erwise i nd icate d .
R
R 16
17 R18 R 19 R 20 R
R
21
R 23 R 24 R 25 R 26 R 32
33 R34 R36 R
315-0112-00 322-0630-00 316-0105-00 315-0182-00 321-0318-00
321-0237-00 321-0302-00 321-0302-00 315-0102-00 321-0165-00 316-0105-00 321-0339-00
W
W W W
Prec
5% 1 °%
Prec
5% 1%
Prec
Prec Prec P rec
5% 1
1 °% 1 1
P rec
5% 1 °%
Pr ec
1%
"Furn is h e d as α matc h e d pair with 0143 . "Furn is h ed as α matc h e d p ai r with 043 .
7- 1 5
Electrical Parts List-453 Α/R453A Α1
C kt. No .
Te k tro n ix P art No .
VERTICA L PREAMP Circ u it Boar d Assembly (cont) Serial/Mo d el No . Disc
Eff
R esisto rs
37 38 R39 R41 R43A
315-0274-00 321-0210-00 316-0470-00 321-0281-00 321-0078-00
R43C R 43C R44A R44C R 44C
311-0442-00 311-1223-00 321-0124-00 311-0462-00 311-1225-00
R45A R46 R47 R48
321-0151-00
R R
321-0136-00 321-0237-00 321-0212-07
13 010100
Β 139999
13 010100
Β139999
Β140000
8 140000
311-0462-00
13 010100
R 49
311-1225-00 321-0136-00
13 140000
51 R52 R
R54 R 55
R 55
56 R 58 R59 R
R60 R 60
61 R63 R64 R
13 139999
13 010100
311-0465-00 311-1235-00
13 010100
315-0153-00 301-0122-00 315-0331-00
Β 140000
Β 140000
13 139999
Β139999
Pr ec
1
Prec
1%
P rec
1
Var
500 Ω, Var 500 Ω , V a r
ω 1/8 ω ω
1/8 W 1/4 W '/Θ ω /4 W
7.5 k Ω 1 .1 kΩ 330 Ω
100 k Ω, Var 100 k Ω, V ar 15 kΩ 1 .2 kΩ
1/2
330 Ω
W 1/2 W 1/4 W
5% 5% 5°/ο
1/4
5°% 5°/ο 5%
W W 1/4 W
315-0100-00
10 Ω
R1 16 R 117 R 118
315-0112-00 322-0630-00 316-0105-00
1 .1 kΩ 980 kΩ 1 ΜΩ
'/α '/α '/α '/α '/α
1 .8 kΩ 20 kΩ 100 Ω
'/α W '/Θ ω '/α W
7- 1 6
315-0182-00 321-0318-00 315-0101-00
1% 1 1
1/4
96
10Q
Pr ec Pr ec P rec
1
'/Θ W '/Θ ω '/α W '/Θ ω '/α W
R1 19 R120 R 121
1 1
ω
71 .5 Ω 1 .4 kΩ 330 Ω 1 .4 kΩ 330 Ω
315-0100-0)
Prec P re c
365 Ω
255 Ω 2.87 k Ω 1 .58 k Ω 1 kΩ, V a r
321-0083-00 321-0207-00 315-0331-00 321-0207-00 315-0331-00
R97
5% 1
1
R66 R83 R84 R93 R 94 R
Prec
P rec
68 Ω
311-0480-00 311-1224-00
W '/θ ω 1/4 W W ω
ω
68 Ω 1 .74 kΩ
316-0680-00
1/4
250 (2, Va r 250 Ω, Var 191 Ω 1 k Ω, Va r 1 k Ω, V a r
1 kΩ, 255 Ω
316-0680-00 321-0216-00
315-0752-00 301-0112-00 315-0331-00
(cont ) 270 k Ω 1 .5 kΩ 47 Ω 8.25 k Ω 63 .4 Ω
R49
R50
Desc rip tion
W W W W W
P rec
Pr ec Pr ec
P rec
Pr ec
1 1 5% 1 5 5°/ο 5% 5% 1 °/ο
E lectr ical P arts List-453 Α / R 453A
Α1 C k t. No .
Te k tro n ix P art No .
VER TICA L PRE A MP Circ u it Board Assembly (εοη t) Serial/ M o d el No . Eff . Disc
Desc r i p tion
Resisto rs (co n t ) R123 R 124 R 125 R 126 R 132
321-0163-00
321-0237-00 321-0302-00 321-0302-00 315-0102-00
487 Ω 2 .87 k Ω 13 .7 k Ω 13 .7 k Ω 1 kΩ
R 133
321-0165-00
511 Ω
134 R 136 R 137 R 138 R
R 139 R 141
R1 43A
R143C R 143C
R1 44A
R144C R 144C
R1 45A R 146 R 147
R 148 R149 R 149 R150
316-0105-00 321-0339-00 315-0274-00 321-0210-00 316-0470-00 321-0281-00 321-0078-00
311-0442-00 311-1223-00
321-0124-00 311-0462-00
311-1225-00 321-0151-00
13 010100
Β 139999
13010100 13140000
Β139999
Β140000
321-0237-00 321-0212-00
311-0462-00 311-1225-00 321-0136-00
Β139999
Pr ec Pr ec Pr ec
1 1 1 5%
ω
Pr ec
1%
Prec P rec
1 5% 1
'/Θ ω '/8 W
Prec Prec
1 1
'/8 W
P rec
1
'/8 W '/8 W
Pr ec P rec
1
ω ω
Prec Prec
1 1
ω
Pr ec
1
P rec
1
1 ΜΩ 33 .2 k Ω 270 kΩ 1 .5 kΩ
W '/8 W '/4 W '/8 ω
47 Ω
'/4
8 .25 k 12 63 .4 Ω
250 Ω, 250 Ω,
V ar Var
191 Ω 1 kΩ, V a r 1 k Ω , V ar
255 Ω
13 010100 13 140000
Prec
'/8 W ω ω '/4 W
365 Ω
321-0136-00
'/θ ω
2 .87 k Ω 1 .58 k Ω
1 k Ω, V ar 1 kΩ, V ar 255 Ω
W
R151 R 152 R 154 R155 R155
316-0680-00
R 156 R 158 R 159 R183 R 184
315-0752-00 301-0122-00 315-0331-00 321-0207-00 315-0331-00
7 .5 k Ω 1 .2 k Ω 330 Ω 1 .4 k Ω 330 Ω
'/4 W '/, ω '/4 W '/8 W '/4 W
R 193 R 194
321-0207-00 315-0331-00 315-0473-00 315-0100-00 315-0100-00 315-0200-00
1 .4 k Ω 330 Ω 47 k Ω 10 Ω 102 20 Ω
'/Θ ω P rec '/4 W (nomi n al val u e) Selecte d '/4 W '/4 W '/4 W
R 195 R 197 R 199 R211
321-0216-00 316-0680-00
311-0480-00 311-1224-00
68 Ω
13 010100 Β140000
13 139999
'/4 W
1 .74 k Ω 68 Ω 500 Ω, 500 Ω ,
Var V ar
'/8 ω '/4 W
P rec
1
1
5% 5% 5 1 5 1 5 5 5°/ο 5% 7- 1 7
Electrical P arts List-453 Α ,/ R453A
Α1 Ck t . No .
Te k t r o n ix P art No .
VERTICAL PRE A MP
Ci rc u it Board Assembly (cont)
Serial/ M odel No . Disc
E ff
R esisto r s
Descri p tion (cont)
321-0175-00 321-0123-00
P rec
321-0193-00 321-0229-00 315-0332-00
'/α ω '/8 ω
215 R216
649 Ω 187 Ω 1 kΩ 2 .37 k Ω 3 .3 k Ω
Prec Prec
1 1% 5%
217
321-0113-00
147 Ω
'/8 W '/8 ω
Pr ec
1
R212 R213
R214 R
R
R218 R221 R222 R223
224 225
R R
R227 R228
321-0125-00 315-0200-00 321-0175-00 321-0123-00
196 Ω 20 Ω 649 Ω 187 Ω
321-0193-00 321-0229-00
1 kΩ 2 .37 k Ω
315-0153-00
147 Ω 196 Ω 15 k Ω
R233
315-0332-00
3 .3 k Ω
R235
315-0102-00 315-0473-00 315-0392-00
R232
321-0113-00 321-0125-00
ω ω '/4 W
'/4 W '/α W '/8 W
'/8 '/α '/8 '/α '/4
Prec
Pr ec Prec
Prec
W ω
P rec
ω
P rec
W
W
P rec
Pr ec
1% 1%
1% 5% 1% 1
1 1
1% 1%
5%
47 k Ω 3 .9 k Ω
'/4 W '/8 W '/4 W '/4 W '/4 W
315-0222-00 315-0102-00 321-0179-00 315-0363-00 321-0235-00
2 .2 k Ω 1 kΩ 715 Ω 36 k Ω 2 .74 kΩ
'/4 W '/4 W '/8 W '/4 W '/8 W
P rec
P rec
5% 5% 1 -/. 5 °/ο 1 -/o
321-0260-00
4 .99 kΩ 1 .33 k Ω 499 Ω 162 Ω 162 Ω
'/α '/α '/α '/α '/α
W W ω W W
Prec Pr ec Pr ec P rec Pr ec
1 1 1 1
277 R 278 R 279
321-0179-00 321-0164-00 321-0117-00 321-0117-00
715 Ω 499 Ω 162 Ω 162 Ω 464 Ω
'/α '/α '/α '/α '/α
W W ω W W
Pr ec P rec P rec Pr ec Pr ec
1 1 1 °% 1 1
R285 R285
311-0480-00 311-1224-00
'/α W
P rec Prec
R234 R 241
R 244
R 245
R 253 R 260 R 261 R 262
R264 R 265 R 267 R R
268
269
R 270 R
R284
R286
288 R 289 R
R291
7-1 8
68 .1 Ω 1 kΩ
321-0081-00
321-0205-00 321-0164-00 321-0117-00 321-0117-00
321-0161-00
321-0197-00 321-0037-00 315-0331-00
315-0221-00
13 010100
Β 140000
13 139999
P rec
500(2, V ar 500 Ω, 1 .1 k Ω
78 .7 Ω 330 Ω 220 Ω
V ar
'/α ω 1/α W '/4 W
5% 1
5% 5% 5°%
E lectrical
Α1
VERTICAL PRE AMP Ci rc u it Board Assembly
Te k tronix P a r t No .
C k t. No .
Se rial/ M odel No . Disc
E ff
Resisto rs R292
294 R 295 R 298 R 299 R
Pa rts
L ist--453Α/ R 453A
(cont)
Desc ription (co n t )
323-0099-00
105 Ω
315-0752-00 315-0621-00 321-0087-00 315-0120-00
Prec
Υ2 W 1/4 W 1/4 W '/8 W '/4 W
7.5 k Ω 620 Ω 78 .7 Ω 12 Ω
Prec
1%
5% 5% 1% 5%
Switc h
W i r ed or S195
U nwired
260-0447-00
Slide
INVERT
T ransfo rmers
TI 95 Τ241
276-0576-00
Co re, to r oi d fe rr ite Toroi d , 10 t urn s-5 t ur ns
*120-0384-00
Α2
*670-0416-02 *670-0416-04
VER TICAL
Β010100 Β 050000
O
U TPU T
Β049999
Circ u it
B oard
Assembly
Com p lete B oard Complete B oard
Ca pacito r s Tole rance ±20% un less ot h e rwise indicated .
C301 C302 C303 C306 C311
281-0503-00 281-0503-00 281-0572-00 283-0080-00 281-0503-00
8 pF 8 pF 6.8 p F 0.022 μF 8 pF
Cer Ce r Ce r Ce r Ce r
500 V 500 V 500 V 25 V 500 V
±0 .5 pF ±0 .5 p F ± 0.5 pF +80%-20% -- 0.5 pF
C312 C313 C322 C326 C327
281-0503-00 281-0572-00 283-0080-00 281-0504-00 281-0572-00
8 pF 6.8 p F 0.022 μ. F 10 p F 6.8 pF
Ce r Cer Cer Ce r Cer
500 V 500 V 25 V 500 V 500 V
+0 .5 pF 10 .5 pF +80%-20% 10% -0 .5 pF
C328 281-0081-00 C331 Ce 283-0080-00 C336 281-0081-00 C340 281-0662-00 C342 281-0572-00
1 .8-13 pF, 0.022 I-ι F 1 .8-13 pF, 10 pF 6.8 pF
C344 C347 C354 C361 C371
330 pF 39 pF 330 p F 0.001 μ F 0.001 1, F
283-0077-00 281-0603-00 283-0077-00 283-0078-00 283-0078-00
Var
Ai r
Va r
Air Ce r Cer
25 V
+80%-20%
500 V 500 V
-0.5 pF 10%
Ce r Ce r Cer Ce r Ce r
500 V 500 V 500 V 500 ν 500 V
5% 5% 5%
r
7- 1 9
Elect rical Parts List-453Α / R 453A
Α2 C k t . No .
Te k t r o n ix Pa r t No .
VER TICA L
O UT PU T Circuit B oard Assembly (cont)
Serial/Mo d el No . Dis c
Eff
Desc r i p tio n
Semicon d ucto r Device, Diodes C R339 VR344 VR354
*152-0185-00 152-0278-00 152-0278-00
Re p laceable by I N4152 1 Ν 4372 Α 3V, 0 .4 W, 5% 1 Ν 4372 Α 3V, 0 .4 W, 5%
Silico n Ze n e r Zene r
I ndu ctors L301 L 302 L 311 L 361
L 371
*108-0220-00
0 .15 I- ιΗ
*108-0277-00
0.07,ιιΗ
*108-0220-00 276-0507-00 276-0507-00
0 .15 ;ιΗ Co r e, fe r ramic s u pp ressor Core, fe rr amic s uppressor
Transisto rs Q304 Q314 Q324 0334 Q344 Ο 354
151-0223-00 151-0223-00 *151-0120-01 *151-0120-01 *151-0127-00 *151-0127-00
Silicon Silicon Silico n Silicon Silicon Silicon
ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-1 8 TO-] 8 TO-1 8 TO-1 8 TO-1 8 TO-18
2 Ν4275 2 Ν 4275 Te k S p ec Te k S p ec Selected from 2 Ν 2369 Selected f r om 2 Ν2369
Resistors R esisto R303
R 304 R306 R 313 R314 R 321 R 322
R323 R 324 R325 R 328 R 328 R330 R
331
R 332 R 333 R 334 R 339 R 340
R 341 R 342
7-2ο
rs a re fixe d , com p ositio n , ±10% u nless ot h e r wise i nd icate d . 321-0091-00
86 .6 Ω
322-0097-00
'/8 W
100 Ω
'/4
W
1
Pr ec
1
1
323-0054-00
35 .7 Ω
321-0091-00
86 .6 Ω
322-0097-00
100 Ω
'/4
323-0072-00
54 .9 Ω
'/2 W
P rec
1 °%
W
P rec
1
323-0060-00
'/2 W
Pr ec P rec
'/8 W
41 .2 Ω
W
'/2
W
'/4
322-0097-00
100 Ω
323-0181-00 322-0124-00
750 Ω
'/2
W
191 Ω
'/4
W
311-0480-00
Β 010100
311-1224-00
Β 140000
315-0390-00 315-0332-00 323-0175-00 322-0097-00
13 139999
500 Ω , 500 Ω ,
39 Ω 3 .3 k Ω 649 Ω 100 Ω
323-0181-00
750 Ω
323-0116-00
158 Ω
321-0157-00
422 Ω
323-0079-00 321-0069-00
64 .9 Ω 51 .1 Ω
V ar Va r
'/4 W '/4 W
Prec
1
Prec
1
Pr ec Pr ec Prec
1
1% 1%
5 °% 5%
'/2 W '/4 W
Prec Pr ec
1
W
Pr ec
1 %
'/2 W '/8 W
Pr ec
1 % 1 °%
'/2
'/2 W '/Β W
Prec
Pr ec Prec
1%
1 °% 1 °%
E lectrical
Α2 Te k tro n ix P art No .
C k t. No .
VERTICA L
OU TPU T
Circ u it Boa rd Assembly (cont)
Serial/ M od el No . Disc
E ff
Resisto rs 323-0138-00 301-0470-00
R343 R344
347 348 R 353 R 354 R
Descri ption (cont) 267 Ω 47 Ω
321-0117-00 307-0125-00 323-0138-00 301-0470-00
R
Pa rts List-453 Α/ R 453A
162 Ω 500 Ω 267 Ω 47 Ω
'/2 W 72 W 1/8
W
Pr ec
W W
P rec
Th ermal 1/2 1/2
Prec
1 5%
1
1 5
T ra n sfo rmer
Τ357
276-0517-00
Co re, powder i ron
Α3 *670-0417-02 *670-0417-05
Α S WEEP Ci r c u it Boa rd Assembly
Β010100 Β040000
Β039999
Complete B oard Comp lete B oard
Ca p acito rs Tole ra n ce ±20%
u nless
oth erwise i n dicated .
C405 283-0080-00 0.022 μ F C411 Cer 283-0092-00 0.03 Ιι F C413 283-0065-00 0.001 μF C416 Cer 283-0080-00 0.022 ; ι F C417 Cer 283-0080-00 0.022 1 ι F
Cer
25 V 200 V 100 ν 25 V 25 V
-F80%-20% +80%-20% 5% +80%-20% +80%-20%
C421 283-0031-00 0.1 1& C422 Cer 283-0080-00 0.022 1 ι F C424 283-0090-00 0.022 al' C440 281-0543-00 270 p F C443 283-0080-00 0.022 μ F
Cer Cer Ce r Ce r
25 V 25 V 25 V 500 V 25 V
+80%-20% +80%-20% +80%-20% 10% +80%-20%
C456 C466 C464 C467 C473
0.022 μ F 0.022 1 ι F 0.022 μ F 0.1 μ F 47 pF
Cer Cer Cer Ce r Cer
25 V 25 V 25 V 25 V 500 V
+80%-20 +80%-20% +80%-20% +80%-20% 10%
C476 281-0602-00 C482 281-0523-00 C485 290-0246-00 C493 283-0080-00 C497 Ce 283-0092-00
68 pF 100 p F 3.3 μ F 0.022 μΤ 0.03 Ιι F
Cer Ce r E lect. Ce r
500 V 350 V 15 V 25 V 200 V
5% 10% +80%-20% +80%-20%
C498 C499 C503 C506 C509
1 μF 1 μ& 470 p F 470 p F 15 p F
E lect .
35 V 35 V 500 V 500 V 500 V
10%
283-0080-00 283-0080-00 283-0030-00 283-0081-00 281-0519-00
290-0267-00 290-0267-00 281-0525-00 281-0525-00 281-0509-00
Ce r
r
E lect .
Ce r Ce r Ce r
7- 2 1
Electrical
Parts
List-453Α / R453A Α3
Ck t .
No .
Te k t r o n ix P a r t No .
Α
S WEEP
Circuit
Board
Assembly (cont)
Serial/ Mo d el No . E ff Disc
Descri p tio n
Ca p acito r s (co n t ) C511 C512
C517 C523 C526
C534 C538 C545 C546 C547
C561
C566
C568 C572 C586
C597
C598 C599 C1251 C1255
C1266
C1273
283-0080-00 283-0080-00 Ce 281-0519-00 281-0525-00 281-0523-00
Ce r
0.022 μ F 18 p F
47 pF 470 p F 100 pF
283-0080-00 281-0558-00 290-0135-00
15 ρΤ 0.001 μ F 100 pF
283-0078-00 281-0523-00
100 p F 470 pF 0 .1'ι F 47 p F 0 .022'.ι F
283-0060-00 281-0525-00 283-0057-00 281-0519-00 283-0080-00 Ce
0.03 μ F 15 /ι F 15 ιF 1 Ιι F 0 .1 μ F
283-0092-00 290-0135-00 290-0135-00 290-0267-00 285-0595-00
283-0010-00 Cer 0 .05 Ιι F 281-0519-00
47
Semico
C R 408 C R 441
0 .022 μ F 0 .022 ;ι F
nd u ctor
pF
Ce r Cer Ce r
25 V 25 V
500 V 500 V 350 V
+80%-20% +80%-20%
Cer Cer E lect .
25 V 500 V 20 V
+80%-20%
Ce r Ce r Ce r Cer
5%
r
200 V 500 V 200 V 500 V 25 V
Ce r E lect. E lect . E lect . ΡΤΜ
200 V 20V 20V 35 V 100V
Ce r
500 V
r
Cer Ce r
-
500 V 35 0 V
+80%-20% 10% +80%-20%
+80%-20%
1
50V
10%
Device, Dio d es
1 152-0141-02 152-0246-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00
Silico n Silico n Silicon Silicon Silicon
C R 459 C R 465 C R 466 C R 474
*152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0153-00 *152-0125-00
Silicon Silico n Silico n Silico n Tu nnel
Selected TD 3 Α , 4.7 mA
C R483
*152-0185-00 *152-0322-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 * 152-0153-00
Silico n Silicon Silicon Silicon Silicon
Replaceable Te k Spec R e p laceable R e p laceable R e p laceable
C R 449
C R 455 C R 456
C R 475
C R 484 CR 486 C R 493 C R501
7- 2 2
10%
Ν 4152
L ow lea kage 40 V, 0.25 W R e p laceable b y 1N4152 Replaceable by 1 Ν4152 R e p laceable by 1 Ν 4152
R e p laceable by 1 Ν4152
R e p laceable by 1 Ν 4152 R e p laceable by 1 Ν 4152 Re p laceable by I N4244
by 1 Ν4152 by 1 Ν 4152 b y 1 Ν 4152 by 1N4244
E lectrical Pa rts List-453Α / R453A Α S WEEP Circ uit
Α3 C k t . No .
Te k tro n ix P art No .
Boar d
Assembly (cont)
Serial/ Model No . Disc
Desc ri p tio n
E ff
Semicon ducto r Device, Dio d es
(cont )
C R 505 C R515 C R 517 C R528 C R529
*152-0125-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00
T u nnel Silico n Silicon Silicon Silico n
Selecte d TD R e p laceable R e p laceable Re p laceable R e p laceable
C R533 C R 542 C R 543 C R 545 C R 546
*1 52-0249-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00
Silicon Silico n Silicon Silicon Silico n
Assembly R e p laceable Re p laceable R e p laceable Re p laceable
C R 547 C R 566 C R 575 C R 583 C R 584
*152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00
Silicon Silico n Silicon Silico n Silicon
R e p laceable
C R591 C R 592 C R593 C R594 C R595
*152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00
Silico n Silicon Silicon Silicon Silicon
R e p laceable by 11\14152
VR421 VR 460 VR544
152-0166-00 152-0278-00 152-0149-00
Ze n er Ze n e r Zener
1 Ν 753 Α 1 Ν437 Α 1 Ν 961 Β
R e p laceable R e p lacea b le R e p lacea b le R eplacea b le
e p laceable e p laceable R e p lacea b le R eplaceable R R
3 Α , 4 .7 mA by I N4152 by 1 Ν 4152 b y 1 Ν 4152 by 11\14152
b y 1 Ν 4152 by 1 Ν 4152 by 1N4152 by 1 Ν4152 by by by by by
by by by by
I N4152 11\14152 I N4152 I N4152 I N4152
1N4152 11\14152 I N4152 I N4152
6.2 V, 0 Α W, 5% 3V, 0.4 W, 5% 10 V, 0 .4 W, 5%
Bu lb
DS568
Neon,
150-0035-00
Α1 D
Ind u cto rs
L 498
L499 L536
*108-0181 -01 *120-0382-00 276-0507-00 276-0507-00 276-0507-00
0 .2 1j Η To r oi d , 14 t urn s si n gle Core, fe rramic s up p r esso r Co r e, fer ramic s uppressor Core, fe r ramic s u p presso r
L598 L599 LR 459
276-0507-00 276-0507-00 *108-0487-00
Co re, ferramic s upp resso r Co r e, ferramic s u pp resso r 0 .27 μΗ (wo un d on α 33 Ω resisto r)
L469
L484
Tra n sisto rs
Q404 Q413 Q414 Q423 Q443
151-0225-00 151-0223-00 151-0223-00 *151-0133-00 151-1005-00
Silicon Silico n Silico n Silicon Silicon
ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΡΝΡ FET
TO-18 2 Ν 3563 TO-18 2 Ν 4275 TO-18 2 1\1 4275 TO-18 Selected f r om 2 Ν 3251 Ν c h annel, jun ctio n ty p e 7-2 3
Electrical P arts List--4 53A/ R 453A Α S WEEP Ci rc u it
Α3 C k t . No .
Te k tronix P a r t No .
B oard
Assembly
Serial/ Model No . Disc
Eff
(cont) Descri p tio n
Transistors (cont ) Q453 Q454 Q464 Q473 Q484
151-0223-00 151-0223-00 151-0223-00 151-0221-00 151-0221-00
Silicon Silicon Silico n Silicon Silicon
ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ
TO-18 TO-18 TO-18 TO-18 TO-18
2 Ν 4275 2 Ν 4275 2 Ν 4275 2 Ν 4258 2 Ν 4258
Q485 Q494 Q495 Q504 Q514
151-0223-00 151-0220-00 151-0223-00 151-0131-00 151-0223-00
Silicon Silicon Silico n Ge r mani u m Silico n
ΝΡΝ ΡΝΡ ΝΡΝ ΡΝΡ ΝΡΝ
TO-18 TO-18 TO-18 TO-18 TO-] 8
2 Ν 4275 2 Ν 4122 2 Ν 4275 2 Ν 964 2 Ν 4275
Q524 Q531 Q533 Q543 Q544
151-0223-00 151-0223-00 *153-0570-00 151-0220-00 151-0220-00
Silico n Silicon Silico n Silicon Silico n
ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ FET ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ
TO-18 2 Ν 4275 TO-18 2 1\1 4275 Selecte d TO-18 2 Ν4122 TO-18 21\14122
Q564 Q575 Q585 Q594 Q1255
151-0220-00 151-0220-00 151-0220-00 *151-0136-00 151-0224-00
Silicon Silico n Silicon Silico n Silicon
ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-18 2 Ν4122 TO-18 2 Ν4122 TO-18 2 Ν 4122 TO-5 R e p laceable by 2 Ν 3053 TO-18 2 Ν 3692
Q1265 Q1274
151-0224-00 151-0220-00
Silico n Silicon
ΝΡΝ ΡΝΡ
TO-18 2 Ν 3692 TO-18 2 Ν 4122
Resisto rs
esisto r s are fixe d , com positio n , ±10% u nless ot h e rwise i ndicated .
R
R404 R405
406 407
R R
R408
R409
321-0097-00 316-0101-00
321-0227-00 321-0064-00
321-0077-00
100Q
W W
P rec
1%
P rec
61 .9 Ω
1/8 1/4 1 /8 W 1/8 W 1/8
W
P rec
1% 1
P rec
1
WW
5%
Prec
5 °/ο 1 °/ο 5 °/ο
100 Ω 2 .26 k Ω
45 .3 Ω
411 R412 R413 R416
321-0212-00 316-0471-00 308-0286-00 316-0101-00 316-0101-00
1 .58 k Ω 470 Ω 8 .2 k Ω 100 Ω 100 Ω
1/8 W 1 /4 W 3W 1/4 W 1/4 W
R417 R419 R 421 R422 R424
315-0471-00 321-0210-00 315-0103-00 316-0100-00 316-0221-00
470 Ω 1 .5 kΩ 10 kΩ
1/α 1/8 1/α 1 /α 1 /α
R
7-24
10Q
220 Ω
W W W W W
P rec
1
E lect rical Parts List--453A/ R453A Α3 C k t . No .
Te k tro n ix P a r t No .
Α SWEEP Circ u it
R 438
R439 R440
R441
R443
R447 R 451 R452
R458
R459 R461 R462 R462
Assembly (cont)
Se r ial/ Model No . E ff Disc R esisto rs
R 427 R429
B oa rd
Descri p tio n (co n t )
315-0910-00 315-0910-00 315-0223-00 301-0105-00 301-0105-00
91 Ω 91 Ω 22 k Ω 1 ΜΩ 1 ΜΩ
1/α W 1/α W 1/α W '/2 ω 1/2 W
5 5 5% 5% 5%
316-0101-00 315-0561-00 315-0113-00 315-0392-00 316-0270-00
100 Ω 560 Ω 11 k Ω 3.9 k Ω 27 Ω
1 /α 1 /α 1/α 1 /α 1 /α
W W W W W
5 5% 5%
315-0112-00 315-0560-00 315-0152-00
1 .1 kΩ 56 Ω 1 .5 k Ω
1 /α W 1 /α W 1/α W
5% 5% 5%
311-0496-00
Β010100
2.5 k Ω, Var 2 .5 kΩ , V a r 1 .1 k Ω
R463
R464
315-0561-00
560 Ω
1/α W
5
R 466
315-0682-00 315-0301-00 315-0510-00
5% 5 5
R465 R 467
R 468
R 469
R 472
R 473 R 474 R 476
R 477 R 481
R482 R 483 R484
R485 R486
R490 R492 R493
R494 R495 R 496 R 502
R 503
Β 140000
Β139999
311-1226-00 315-0112-00
1/α W
5%
1/α
W
300 Ω 51 Ω
1/α W 1/α W 1/α W
315-0271-00 316-0470-00 315-0243-00 315-0220-00 315-0201-00
270 Ω 47 Ω 24 k Ω 22 Ω 200 Ω
1/α 1 /α 1 /α 1/α 1 /α
W W W W W
5
315-0392-00 316-0101-00 316-0270-00 301-0183-00 315-0153-00
3.9 k Ω 100 Ω 27 Ω 18 k Ω 15 k Ω
1 /α 1/α 1/α 1/2 1 /α
W W W W W
5%
315-0152-00 315-0104-00 315-0271-00 315-0123-00 316-0470-00
1 .5 k Ω 100 k Ω 270 Ω 12 k Ω 47 Ω
1/α 1/α 1/α 1/α 1/α
W W W W W
5% 5% 5 5% 5%
315-0104-00 315-0102-00 315-0222-00 316-0101-00 315-0201-00
100 kΩ 1 kΩ 2 .2 kΩ 100 Ω 200 Ω
1 /α 1/α 1 /α 1 /4 1/4
W W W W W
5% 5% 5%
316-0270-00
27 Ω 6 .8 k Ω
5% 5 5
5 5%
5 7- 2 5
E lectrical
Parts
L ist-453Α/R453A
Α SWEEP Circ uit Board Assembly (cont)
Α3 C kt . No .
Te ktron ix P art No .
Serial/Model No . Disc
E ff
R esisto rs
506 R 508 R 509 R510 R 511 R 512
315-0391-00 315-0202-00 315-0821-00 315-0220-00 315-0620-00 316-0470-00
R513
321-0143-00
R
514 R 515 R 517 R 519 R
R521
522 R523 R524 R529 R
315-0122-00 323-0301-00 315-0222-00 321-0277-00
321-0184-00
321-0234-00 316-0470-00 315-0122-00 315-0331-00
ΧΒ 040000
Desc ription (cont ) 390 Ω 2 kΩ 820 Ω 22 Ω 62 Ω 47 Ω
'/4 W '/4 W '/4 W '/4 W '/4 W '/4 W
301 Ω
'/8 ω
1 .2 k Ω 13 .3 k Ω 2.2 kΩ 7.5 kΩ 806 Ω 2.67 k Ω
'/4 W '/2 W '/4 W ω
'/8 ω
47 Ω 1 .2 k Ω 330 Ω
'/8 W '/4 W '/4 W '/4 W
533 R534 R535 R536 R538
316-0101-00 316-0101-00 315-0123-00 316-0101-00 321-0259-00
100 Ω 100 Ω 12 k Ω 100 Ω 4.87 k Ω
'/4 W '/4 W '/4 W '/4 W '/8 W
R539 R540 R543
308-0307-00 315-0150-00 316-0101-00
5 kΩ
3 W '/4 W '/4 W
R
15Q
100 Ω 8.2 k Ω
5 5% 5% 5% 5%
Prec
1%
Pr ec
5% 1 5% 1 ;ό
Prec
1
Pr ec
P rec
1
5% 5%
P rec
ωω
1% 5%
1 ω '/4 W
5%
5%
316-0473-00
768 Ω 47 k Ω
'/4 '/4 '/8 '/Β '/4
R566 R567 R568 R574 R575
315-0223-00 316-0472-00 316-0106-00 321-0248-00 321-0188-00
22 k Ω 4.7 k Ω 10 ΜΩ 3.74 k Ω 887 Ω
'/4 W '/α W '/α W '/α W '/α ω
582 R 583 R 585 R586 R587
321-0200-00 321-0114-00 321-0327-00 316-0470-00 321-0266-00
1 .18 kΩ 150 Ω 24 .9 k Ω 47 Ω 5.76 k Ω
'/α W '/α ω '/α W 1/α W '/α W
R
544 546
303-0822-00 316-0101-00
R547 R 549 R561
315-0331-00 316-0101-00 321-0268-00
R
R562 R
564
R
7- 26
321-0182-00
100 Ω
330 Ω 100 Ω 6.04 k Ω
W W W
ω
W
P rec P rec
1 1
5% P rec P rec
1 1
P rec P rec P rec
1 1 1
P rec
1
Electrical Α3 C k t . No .
Te k tro n ix P art No .
S WEEP Circuit B oard
Α
R 588
594 R 596
321-0268-00 315-0512-00 315-0512-00 316-0473-00 302-0820-00
R 1251
315-0120-00
R 1255
315-0472-00 316-0222-00 315-0682-00
R 592 R 593
R
R1254 R 1264 R l265
R 1266
R 1274
316-0471-00
316-0471-00 321-0549-00
L ist-453 Α / R453A
Assembly (cont)
Se r ial/ M o d el No . E ff Disc R esisto r s
Pa rts
Descri p tion (cont ) 6 .04 kΩ 5 .1 k Ω 5 .1 k Ω 47 k Ω 82 Ω
1/, 1 /α 1 /α 1 /α 1/,
W W W W W
470 Ω 4 .7 k Ω 2 .2 k Ω
129
6 .8 k Ω
1 /α 1/α 1/α 1/α 1/α
470 Ω 2 .19 k Ω
1/α W 1/, W
Pr ec
1 5% 5%
W
5%
W W W
5 5% 5%
W
Pr ec
1/4%
Transforme r s Τ474
TI 255
Toroi d , 9 t ur ns bifila r Calib rator freq u ency
*120-0361-00 *120-0460-00
Α4
*670-0418-05
Β
S WEEP Circuit Boa r d
Assembly
Complete
B oar d
Ca pacito r s
Tole ra n ce ±20% u nless ot h erwise i nd icate d . C629 281-0543-00 C633Ce 283-0080-00 C636Ce 283-0080-00 C639 283-0090-00 C642Ce 283-0080-00
270 p F 0 .022 Ηι F 0 .022 /ι F 0 .022 1- F 0 .022 ,ιι F
Ce r r r Cer r
500 25 25 25 25
V V V V V
10% +80%-20% +80%-20% +80%-20% +80%-20%
C656 283-0080-00 C664 283-0080-00 C666 283-0080-00 C667Ce 283-0081-00 C673 281-0519-00
0 .022 μ F 0 .022 ;ι F 0 .022 μ F 0 .1' ι F 47 pF
Ce r Cer Ce r r Cer
25 V 25 V 25 V 25 V 500 V
+ 80% -20 % + 80% -20% +80%-20% +80%-20°/ 10%
C676 C688 C698
51 pF 68 p F 1 /ι F 1 1, F
Cer Ce r E lect.
500 V 500 V 35 V
5% 5%
C699 C702
281-0540-00 281-0602-00 290-0267-00
290-0267-00 281-0580-00
470
pF
-
E lect .
Ce r
35 V 500 V
10%
7- 27
E lect r ical Parts L ist-453 Α / R453A
Β SWEEP Circuit Board Assembly (cont)
Α4 C kt.
No .
Te k tronix P art No .
Se r ial/ M odel No . Disc
Eff
Ca pacito rs
Desc ri p tio n (co n t )
C704 C705 C715 C722 C731
281-0509-00 281-0580-00 283-0080-00 281-0580-00 283-0060-00
15 pF 470 p F 0 .022 1, F 470 pF 100 pF
Ce r Ce r Ce r Ce r Ce r
500 V 500 V 25 V 500 V 200 V
10% 10% +80%-20% 10% 5%
C732 C741 C744 C748 C755
283-0080-00 283-0092-00 283-0080-00 281-0542-00 281-0605-00
0 .022 μ F 0 .03 μ F 0 .022 μ F 18 pF 200 pF
Ce r Cer Ce r Cer Ce r
25 V 200 V 25 V 500 V 500 V
+80%-20% +80%-20% +80%-20% 10%
C756 C759 C759 C768 C774
281-0523-00 290-0248-01 290-0296-00 281-0504-00 281-0549-00
100 p F 150 μ F 100 μ F 10 pF 68 pF
Ce r E lect . E lect. Cer Cer
350 V 15 V 20 V 500 V 500 V
C780 C785 C786 C796 C797
281-0622-00 281-0519-00 283-0080-00 283-0081-00 283-0092-00
47 pF 47 pF 0 .022 1& 0 .1 μF 0 .03 μ F
Ce r Cer Ce r Ce r Ce r
500 V 500 V 25 V 25 V 200 V
290-0135-00 15 μ F 290-0135-00 15 Ιι F Cer 1'u F 283-0059-00 0 .022 μ F 283-0080-00 283-0080-00 0.022 μF
E lect . E lect .
C798 C799 C804 C806 C807 C882 C892 C898 C899
281-0064-00 281-0064-00 290-0267-00 290-0267-00
13010100 Β 100000
Β 099999
0 .25-1 .5 pF, V ar 0 .25-1 .5 pF, V a r 1 μF 1 μF
Ce r Ce r Tub. Tu b . E lect. E lect.
20 20 25 25 25
10% 10% 1% 10% +80%-20% +80%-20%
V V V V V
+80%-20% +80%-20% +80%-20%
35 V 35 V
Semiconductor Device, Diodes
C R631 C R 635 C R638 C R641 C R651
152-0246-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00
Silicon Silicon Silico n Silicon Silicon
L ow lea k age 40 R eplacea b le by R e p laceable by R eplaceable by R e p laceable by
V, 0 .25 W 1 Ν 4152 1N4152 I N4152 1 Ν 4152
C R 653 C R655 C R656 C R 665 C R 666
*152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00
Silico n Silicon Silico n Silicon Silicon
Re p laceable R e p laceable Re p laceable R e p lacea b le Re p laceable
1N4152 1N4152 1 Ν 4152 1N4152 1N4152
7-2 8
by by by by by
Elect rical
Β S WEEP Circ uit
Α4 C k t . No .
Te k t r o n ix P art No .
Board
Assembly
Se r ial/ Mo d el No . Disc
Pa rts List-453Α / R453A
(cont) Desc r i p tio n
E ff
Semico nducto r Device, Dio d es
(co n t ) Selecte d TD Re p laceable R e p laceable Selected TD Re p laceable
3 Α , 4.7 mA by 1 Ν 4244 b y I N4244 3 Α , 4.7 mA by 11\14152
C R727 *152-0185-00 Silicon R e p laceable C R 728 *152-0185-00 Silicon R e p laceable C R731 *152-0185-00 Silicon R e p laceable C R742 *152-0249-00 Silico n Assembly C R748 *152-0185-00 Silico n R e p laceable
by I N4152 by I N4152 by 1N4152
C R 675 C R 678 C R 701 C R 705 C R 714
*152-0125-00 *152-0153-00 *152-0153-00 *152-0125-00 *152-0185-00
T unn el Silicon Silico n T u n n el Silicon
by I N4152
C R752 C R 753 C R 754 C R 755 C R 756
*152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00
Silicon Silicon Silico n Silico n Silicon
C R764A,8 C R776 C R 777 C R795 C R 796
*152-0151-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00
Silico n , assembly matc h ed p air of 1 Ν 4152 Silico n R e p lacea b le by 1N4152 Silico n R e p laceable by 1N4152 Silicon R e p laceable b y 1 Ν 4152 Silicon R eplacea b le by 1 Ν4152
C R 797 C R798 C R851 C R 852 C R 861
*152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0153-00 *152-0153-00 152-0141-02
Silico n Silico n Silicon Silicon Silicon
Re p laceable Re p lacea b le Re p lacea b le Re p laceable
C R 871 VR 654
152-0141-02 152-0278-00
Silicon Ze n e r
1 Ν 4152 1 Ν4372Α, 3 V, 0 .4 W, 5%
Re p laceable
by by Replaceable by Re p lacea b le by R e p laceable by Re p laceable
1 Ν 4152
by by by by
I N4152 I N4152 I N4152 1N4152 I N4152
1 Ν 4152 1 Ν 4152 1 Ν 4244 1N4244
Ind u cto rs L 672 L 698 L699 L798
*108-0181 -01 276-0507-00 276-0507-00 276-0507-00 276-0507-00
0 .2 μΗ Core, fe rra mic Co r e, ferramic Co r e, fe rr amic Core, ferramic
L 799 L 898 L899 LR 653
276-0507-00 276-0507-00 276-0507-00 *108-0487-00
Co r e, fe rr a mic s uppresso r Co re, fe rr amic s uppresso r Co re, fe rr omic s uppr esso r 0 .27 μΗ (wo un d on α 33K2 r esisto r)
L746
s u p p r esso r s uppressor s u pp resso r s u p pr esso r
7-2 9
Electrical P arts List-453 Α ,/ R453A Β S WEEP
Α4 C k t . No .
Te k t ro n ix P art No .
Ci rc u it
B oard
Assembly
Se r ial/ M o d el No . Disc
(cont) Desc r i p tio n
E ff
T ransisto rs
0633 0643 0654 0664 0684
151-1005-00 151-0223-00 151-0223-00 151-0223-00 151-0221-00
Silicon Silicon Silicon Silicon Silico n
FET ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΡΝΡ
Ν c h a n nel, ju nction ty pe TO-18 2 Ν 4275 TO-] 8 2 1\1 4275 TO-18 2 Ν 4275 TO-18 2 1\1 4258
0704 0714 0724 Q734 0741
151-0131-00 151-0223-00 151-0223-00 151-0223-00 151-0223-00
Ge rmani u m Silicon Silico n Silicon Silico n
ΡΝΡ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-1 8 TO-18 TO-] 8 TO-] 8 TO-18
*153-0570-00 151-0220-00 151-0220-00 *151-0104-00 151-0220-00
Silico n Silico n Silico n Silico n Silico n
FE T ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ ΝΡΝ ΡΝΡ
Selecte d TO-18 2 Ν4122 TO-] 8 2 Ν4122 TO-5 Re p laceable by 2 Ν 2913 TO-18 21\14122
Q769 Q772 Ο 775 0779 0785
151-0224-00 151-0220-00 151-0220-00 151-0220-00 151-0220-00
Silico n Silicon Silico n Silico n Silicon
ΝΡΝ ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ
TO-18 TO-18 TO-1 8 TO-] 8 TO-18
2 1\1 3692 21\14122 21\14122 21\14122 21\14122
0790 0 797 081A 0824 0834
151-0220-00 151-0223-00 151-0223-00 151-0223-00 151-0220-00
Silico n Silico n Silicon Silicon Silicon
ΡΝΡ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΡΝΡ
TO-18 TO-18 TO-18 TO-1 8 TO-1 8
21\14122 2 Ν 4275 2 Ν4275 2 1\1 4275 21\14122
0844 0863 0 873
151-0220-00 151-0220-00 151-0220-00
Silicon Silico n Silico n
ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ
TO-18 2 Ν4122 TO-18 2 Ν4122 TO-18 2 Ν4122
0743 Q753 0754 Q764 Α , Β 0768
2 1\1 964 2 1\1 4275 2 Ν 4275 2 Ν 4275 2 Ν 4275
R esisto rs R
esisto rs a r e fixed, compositio n , ±10% u nless ot h e rwise indicated .
R 531
531 R627 R 628 R 629 R 631 R
R 633 R 634 R 635
R636
R638
7-30
311-0462-00
311-1225-00 315-0223-00 301-0105-00 301-0105-00 316-0101-00
315-0561-00 315-0113-00 316- 0 183-00 316-0332-00 315-0183-00
13010100 13140000
Β 139999
1 kΩ, V a r 1 k Ω, V a r 22 kΩ
1 Μ9 1 ΜΩ 100 Ω
'/4 W '/2 W '/τ W '/4 W
5% 5% 5%
560 Ω 11 k Ω
'/4 W '/α W
5% 5%
3 .3 k Ω 18 k Ω
'/4 W '/4 W
5%
18 kΩ
'/4 W
Electrical Β SWEEP Circ u it
Α4 C k t . No .
Te k tro n ix P art No .
Boa r d
Pa rts
List -453 Α / R453A
Assembly (cont)
Se r ial/ Model No . Disc
Eff
Descri p tion
Resisto rs (co n t ) R639
R641
R 642
R644
R645
R645 R646 R 650
R653 R659
R661 R662 R 662 R 663 R 664 R665
R 666
667 R 671 R 672 R 674 R
R 676 R 677
R 686 R688
R689
R 702 R704 R705 R708 R710
R713 R714 R715 R 717 R 718
R 719 R721 R 722 R 723
R 724
316-0332-00 315-0183-00 316-0332-00 321-0289-00
311-0463-00
Β010100
311-1227-00
Β140000
315-0824-00 316-0270-00 315-0112-00 315-0560-00
315-0152-00
311-0496-00
13 010100 Β 140000
Β 139999
3 .3 k Ω 18 kΩ 3 .3 k Ω 10 kΩ 5 k Ω,
Var
5 k Ω,
Var
820 k Ω 27 Ω 1 .1 kΩ 56 Ω
1 .5 k Ω
Var Va r
5%
Pr ec
1%
W W W W
5%
'/4 W
5%
'/4 W
5%
'/4 '/4 '/4 '/4
5% 5%
315-0621-00 316-0270-00
2.5 kΩ, 2 .5 k Ω , 1 .1 k Ω 620 Ω 27 Ω
315-0332-00 315-0301-00 315-0510-00 315-0271-00 315-0243-00
3 .3 k Ω 300 Ω 51 Ω 270 Ω 24 k Ω
'/4 W '/4 W '/α W '/α ω '/4 W
5% 5 5% 5 5%
315-0270-00 316-0470-00 315-0220-00 315-0201-00 315-0392-00
27 Ω 47 Ω 22 Ω 200 Ω 3 .9 kΩ
'/4 '/4 '/4 '/4 '/4
W W W W W
5%
315-0201-00
200 Ω
315-0391-00 315-0202-00 315-0220-00
390 Ω 2 kΩ 22 Κ2
'/4 W '/α W '/4 W '/4 W '/4 W
321-0184-00
321-0260-00 315-0333-00
806 Ω 1 .2 kΩ 62 Ω 4.99 k Ω 33 kΩ
'/4 W
315-0823-00
82 k Ω
'/4 W
47 Ω 1 .2 k Ω
'/8 ω '/4 W '/4 W
311-1226-00 315-0112- 00
315-0821-00
315-0122-00
315-0620-00
321-0184-00
321-0234-00 316-0470-00 315-0122-00
Β139999
'/4 W '/4 W '/4 W ω
820 Ω
806 Ω 2.67 k Ω
'/4 W '/4 W
ω
W
W '/4 W '/8
'/8 ω
5
5% 5% 5%
5
5
5 5% 5
Prec
P rec
Prec
Prec
1
5% 5
1% 5%
5% 1
1
5% 7- 3 1
E lect r ical Parts List-453Α / R453A
Α4 C k t . No .
Te k t ro n ix P art No .
Β
SWEEP
Circuit B oard Assembly (co n t)
Serial/ Model No . E ff Disc R esisto rs
R 728 R 731 R 733 R 734
315-0331-00 315-0153-00 315-0471-00 316-0103-00 316-0104-00
R741 R741 R743 R744 R745
311-0462-00 311-1225-00 316-0101-00 316-0101-00
R748
R735
Descri p tion (co n t ) 330 Ω 15 k Ω 470 Ω 10 k Ω 100 k Ω
13 010100 Β140000
13 139999
1 kΩ, 1 k Ω,
1000
Va r Var
100 Ω 12 k Ω
'/α W '/4 W '/4 W '/4 W '/4 W
5 5% 5
'/4 W '/4 W
100 Ω
'/4 W '/4 W
321-0259-00 308-0307-00 316-0101-00
4 .87 k Ω 5 kΩ 100 Ω
'/8 W 3W '/4 W
304-0103-00 316-0221-00 315-0331-00
10 k Ω 220 Ω 330 Ω 12.7 k Ω
1 ω '/4 W '/4 W
'/2 W
Prec
321-0126-00 316-0101-00 321-0155-00
'/Β ω '/4 W '/Β ω
Prec
1
Prec
1
R766
301-0822-00 315-0122-00
200 Ω 100 Ω 402 Ω 8 .2 k Ω 1 .2 k Ω
R 767 R 768 R769 R770 R771
315-0351-00 315-0682-00 321-0245-00 301-0622-00 315-0122-00
360 Ω 6 .8 kΩ 3 .48 kΩ 6 .2 k Ω 1 .2 k Ω
'/4 W '/4 W '/8 ω
Prec
5% 5% 1 5 5%
R772
315-0102-00 301-0822-00 321-0207-00 321-0305-00 321-0198-00
1 kΩ 8 .2 k Ω 1 .4 k Ω 14.7 k Ω 1 .13 kΩ
'/4 W ω ω
Prec Prec Prec
5% 5 1 1 1
321-0333-00
28 .7 kΩ 715 Ω 2 .26 kΩ 2 .49 k Ω 715 Ω
ω ω ω
Prec Prec Prec Prec Prec
1 1 1 1 1
R746
R 749 R750 R751 R753
R 754
R755 R756 R757 R758
R759 R761 R763 R765
R773 R775 R776 R777
R778 R779 R780 R781 R 782
7- 3 2
315-0123-00 316-0101-00
315-0150-00 316-0101-00
323-0299-00 311-0514-00
321-0179-00 321-0227-00 321-0231-00 321-0179-00
15 Ω 100 Ω
100 Ω , V a r
5%
P rec ωω
'/4 W '/4 W
'/2 W '/4 W
W '/4 W
5
'/2
'/2
W
'/8 W
'/Β W '/Β ω
1 1
5
1
5% 5%
Electrical Pa rts Β S WEEP Ci rcuit Board Assembly (cont)
Α4 C kt. No .
Te ktronix P art No .
List-453Α/ R453A
Serial/Model No . Disc
E ff
Descriptio n
Resistors (cont) 783 784 R785 R786 R787
321-0198-00 321-0231-00 321-0227-00 315-0392-00 321-0248-00
789
316-0101-00
791 R792 R794
315-0103-00 315-0103-00 315-0203-00
R R
R
R790 R
R 796
321-0148-00
1 .13 kΩ 2.49 kΩ 2.26 kΩ 3.9 k Ω 3.74 kΩ
'/Θ ω 1/8 ω '/θ ω 1/4 W 1/8 ω
100 Ω
1/4
W 1/8 W 1/4 W 1/4 W 1/4 W
340 Ω 10 k Ω 10 k Ω
20 k Ω
797 R 798
315-0100-00 315-0302-00 315-0302-00
804
315-0822-00
51 Ω 8.2 kΩ
806 807 R 809 R 812
315-0184-00 315-0822-00 321-0231-00 321-0260-00
180 kΩ 8.2 k Ω 2.49 k Ω 4.99 k Ω
R821
315-0510-00
51 Ω
304-0103-00
10 k Ω
R
R803 R
R R
R814
822
R
R824
826 828
R R
831 833 R834 R R
R835 R 835
836
R
841 843 R844 R R
R845 R845 R846
854
R
R 855 R855
856 R 862 R 863 R
10 kΩ 3 kΩ 3 kΩ
315-0510-00
304-0103-00
Prec Prec Prec
Prec
1/4 1/4
W W 1 /4 W 1 /4
W
1 /4
W W ω ω
1/4
5.36 kΩ
1 ω
/4 W
1
1
5% 5% 5%
5
5%
Pr ec P rec
'/Θ ω
Pr ec Pr ec
1 ω
1 1 1 5% 1
5% 5% 5%
/4 W
1
10 kΩ
321-0263-00
P rec
5% 5% 1 1
5%
1
321-0231-00 315-0272-00
2.49 k Ω 2.7 kΩ
1/8 ω 1/4 W
315-0153-00 323-0305-00 322-0216-00
15 k Ω 14 .7 k Ω 1 .74 k Ω
1/4 W '/, ω 1 /4 W
Pr ec P rec
5% 1 1
ω
Prec
1
W 1/2 W 1/4 W
Pr ec Pr ec
5% 1 1 °%
/8 W
Pr ec
1%
311-0480-00 311-1224-00
321-0213-00 315-0153-00 323-0305-00 322-0216-00
311-0433-00 311-1222-00 321-0110-00
315-0103-00
311-0541-00 311-1230-00
315-0103-00 315-0273-00 316-0122-00
13010100
Β140000
Β010100 Β140000
13010100
Β140000
13 139999
Β 139999
500 Ω, Va r 500 Ω, V ar 1 .62 k Ω
15 k Ω 14 .7 kΩ 1 .74 k Ω 100Q, V a r 100 Ω, V a r 137 Ω
Β139999
10 k Ω
20 kΩ, 20 kΩ, 10 k Ω 27 k Ω 1 .2 k Ω
1/4
1
V ar Va r
1 /4
1 5%
W
5%
W W 1/4 W
5% 5%
1/4
1/4
7-33
E lect r ical Parts L ist-453 Α / R453A Α4
Ckt.
No .
Te k tro n ix P a r t No .
Β
S WEEP
Circ u it
Boar d
Assembly (cont)
Serial/ M o d el No . Disc
E ff
Descri p tio n
R esisto rs (cont) R 864 R 872 R 873 R 874 R 882 R 892
315-0681-00 315-0273-00 316-0122-00 315-0681-00 323-0322-00 323-0322-00
680 Ω 27 k Ω 1 .2 k Ω 680 Ω 22 .1 kΩ 22 .1 k Ω
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/2
W W W W W W
5% 5% 5 1 1
Pr ec Pr ec
T ransfo rmer
Τ686
Toroi d , 9 t urn s b ifila r
*120-0361-00
Α5 *670-0414-07 *670-0414-06
Ζ AXIS Circ u it
Β 010100 Β 080000
Β 079999
B oard
Assembly
Com p lete Complete
B oar d B oard
Ca p acitors Tole ra n ce -20% un less ot h erwise i nd icate d . C902 C902 C913 C982 C1007
285-0633-00 13010100 285-0919-00 Β 080000 285-0622-00 Ce 283-0003-00 Ce 283-0080-00
C1015 C1016 C1022 C1023 C1026
283-0080-00 283-0003-00 281-0547-00 283-0080-00 Ce 283-0080-00
C1029 C1034 C1036 C1037 C1041 C1043 C1044 C1048
283-0083-00 283-0092-00 281-0064-00 281-0547-00 283-0092-00
Β 079999
0 .22 ιι F 0 .22 /ι F 0.1 μ F 0 .01 /ι F 0.022 Νι F
ΡΤΜ ΡΤΜ ΡΤΜ r r
0 .022 μ F 0 .01 μ F 2 .7 p F 0 .0221& 0 .022 ,ιιF
Cer Ce r Cer Cer r
0 .0047 μ F 0 .03 ; ι F 0 .25-1 .5 pF, V a r 2 .7 pF 0 .03 μ F
283-0092-00 Ce 283-0092-00 283-0080-00
0 .03 μ F 0 .03 μι F 0 .022 μ F
100 V 100 V 100V 150 V 25 V 25 150 500 25 25
10% 10% +80%-20%
V V V V V
+80%-20%
Cer Cer T ub . Cer Cer
500 V 200 V
5% +80%-20%
500 V 200 V
10% +80%-20%
Ce r r Ce r
200 V 200 V 25 V
+80%-20% +80%-20% +80%-20%
10% +80%-20% +80%-20%
Semiconductor Device, Diodes
C R 1015 C R 1016
C R1042 C R1044 C R1045
*152-0153-00 *152-0153-00 *152-0061-00 *152-0061-00 *152-0185-00
VR 1043 1 152-0024-00 7- 3 4
Silicon Silicon Silicon
R e p lacea b le by 1N4244 R e p lacea b le by I N4244
Silico n Zene r
R e p laceable b y 1N4152 Ν3024 Β 15 V, 1 W, 5%
Silicon
Te k Sp ec Tek
S pec
E lect rical
Te ktronix P art No .
L ist--L53A/ R453A
Ζ AXIS Ci rcuit B oa rd Assembly (cont)
Α5 C kt . No .
Parts
Serial/Mod el No . Disc
Descri ptio n
Eff
T ra nsistors
Q913 0914 0923 Q1014 Q1023
151-0220-00 *151-0126-00 *151-0136-00 151-0223-00 *151-0190-01
Q1024 01024 Q1034 Q1043
151-0214-00 151-0270-00 *151-0124-00 *151-0124-00
Β010100 B) 40000
Β139999
Silicon Silico n Silico n Silicon Silicon
ΡΝΡ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-18 2 Ν4122 TO-18 Rep laceab le by 2 Ν 2484 TO-5 R eplaceable by 2Ν3053 TO-18 2 Ν4275 TO-106 Te k S pec
Silico n Silico n Silicon Silicon
ΡΝΡ ΡΝΡ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-5 TO-5 TO-5 TO-5
21\13495 Selected from 2Ν3495 Selected from 2Ν3119 Selected from 2Ν3119
Resistors R esistors
R900 R900
901
are fixed , compositio n, ±10% un less ot herwise indicated . 311-0465-00 311-1235-00
R913 R915
301-0435-00 316-0103-00 316-0102-00 316-0474-00
R916 R917 R925
316-0101-00 316-0104-00 301-0303-00
R1004
316-0470-00
R
R 912
R982 R982
311-0465-00 311-1235-00
Β 010100 Β140000
13 010100 Β140000
Β139999
100 kΩ, 100 k Ω,
4.3 ΜΩ 10 k Ω 1 kΩ 470 k Ω
Β139999
100 Ω 100 kΩ 30 k Ω
100 k Ω, 100 k Ω,
47 Ω
V ar Va r
1/2 W 1/α W 1/4 W 1/4 W
5%
/4 W 1/α W 1/2 W 1
Var Var
5
1/4 W
R1006 R 1007 R 1008 R 1011 R 1012
315-0123-00 315-0123-00 321-0241-00 301-0473-00 316-0470-00
12 k Ω 12 k Ω 3.16 k Ω 47 k Ω 47 Ω
1/4 W 1/4 W 1/8 W 1/2 W 1/4 W
R1013 R 1014 R1015 R 1016 R 1021
321-0241-00 316-0471-00 316-0101-00 323-0318-00 315-0390-00
3.16 k Ω 470 Ω 100 Ω 20 k Ω 39 Ω
1/8 W 1/4 W 1/4 W 1/2 W 1/α W
RI 023 R 1024 R1025 R 1026 R 1029
315-0221-00 315-0121-00 301-0751-00 316-0470-00 316-0102-00
220 Ω 120 Ω 750 Ω 47 Ω 1 kΩ
1/4 W yα W 1/2 W 1/4 W 1/4 W
5% 5% 5%
R1033 R1034 R1036 R 1041
315-0240-00 301-0243-00 323-0335-00 316-0101-00
24 Ω 24 kΩ 30 .1 k Ω 100 Ω
1/4 1/2 1/2 1/4
5% 5 1%
R1042
305-0183-00
18 kΩ
W W W W
2W
Prec
5 5% 1 5
P rec
1
Pr ec
1% 5%
P rec
5% 7- 35
Electrical Parts
L ist-453Α/ R453A
Ι AXIS Circ u it Board Assembly (cont)
Α5 Te k tro n ix P a rt No .
C k t . No .
Serial/ M odel No . Disc
Eff
Desc r i p tio n
R esisto r s (cont) R1043 R1044
308-0348-00 316-0101-00
R 1046
3.32 kΩ 100 Ω
301-0680-00 305-0822-00 316-0101-00
R 1047
R1048
Α6
68 Ω 8.2 k Ω 100 Ω
LOW V OLTAGE REGULATOR Circ u it
*670-0415-00
Tolera n ce
-20%
u nless
290-0171-00 290-0162-00 283-0078-00 290-0162-00
C1164 C1164 C1181 C1181 C1184
290-0286-00 290-0209-00 290-0198-00 290-0226-00 283-0079-00
C1156
Cl185
C1194 C1194
285-0622-00
1%
5 5°/
W
2W 1/4 W
Board Assembly
Ca p acito rs 100 μ F
22 μF
0.001 μ F
22 μF 0.001 μF
283-0078-00
290-0305-00 290-0159-00
1/2
WW
Complete Board
ot h erwise i nd icated .
C1114 C1121 C1128 C1151
3W W
1/4
Β010100 13 100000 Β 010100 13 100000
8 099999
13010100 13 100000
Β099999
Β099999
50 μ F 50 1& 17 rι F 20 1,L F 0.01 μ& 0.1 μF
3 μF 2 μF
E lect .
12 V 35 V 500 V 35V
lect . Ce r E lect. E
Cer
500 V
E lect .
Cer
25 V 25 V 150 V 100 V 250 V
ΡΤΜ
100 V
E lect .
E lect . E lect .
E lect . E lect .
+75%-10% +75%-10% +30%-15%
150 V 150 V
Semicond u cto r Device, Diodes *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00
Silicon Silicon Silico n Silicon Silico n
Re p lacea b le R eplaceable
C R1194 C R1198
*152-0185-00 152-0066-00
Replaceable by 11\14152
VR1185
-152-0150-00
Silico n Silicon Zener Ze n er Zener
V R 1114
VR 1209
152-0212-00 152-0293-00
by by R eplaceable by R e p lacea b le by Replacea b le by
1 Ν4152 I N4152 1 Ν4152 I N4152 1N4152
C R 1152 C R 1164 C R 1182 C R 1188 C R 1189
1 Ν3194 1 Ν936 9 V, 5% TC 1 Ν3037Β 51 V, 1 W, 5% 1 Ν3032 Β 33 V, 1 W, 5%
T r a nsisto r s Q1114 Q1124 Q1129 Q1154 Q1159 7- 36
151-0224-00 151-0224-00 151-0224-00 151-0224-00 151-0224-00
Silicon Silico n Silico n Silicon Silicon
ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-18 TO-18 TO-1 8 TO-1 8 TO-1 8
2Ν3692 2 Ν3692 2Ν3692 2 Ν3692 2 Ν3692
E lectr ical
Α6
L O W V O LTAG E RE G ULATO R
Te k t r o n ix P art No .
Ck t . No .
Se r ial/ M o d el No . Disc
E ff
Tra n sisto rs Ql184 Q1189 Ql193
Circuit Board
Assembly
P a rts L ist--153A/ R 453A (cont)
Descri p tio n ( εοπ t )
151-0224-00 151-0250-00 *151-0136-00
Silico n Silicon Silico n
ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ ΝΡΝ
TO-18 2 Ν 3692 TO-104 2 1\1 5184 TO-5 Re p laceable by 2Ν 3053
R esisto r s R esisto r s
R1114
1117 R 1119 RI 121 R
R1122 R1123
a re fixed , com p osition, ±10% un less ot h e rwise i n dicated . 323-0154-00
301-0273-00 315-0561-00 323-0212-00
311-0515-00
27 k Ω 560 Ω 1 .58 k Ω 250 Ω,
323-0160-00
453 Ω
R1152
311-0514-00
100 Ω,
R 1153
1154 R 1156 R 1159 R 1163
323-0205-00 323-0373-00 301-0243-00 308-0244-00 316-0121-00
1164 R 1181 R1182 R1183 R1184 R 1185
R 1129
308-0224-00 316-0121-00 323-0210-00
'/τ W
392 Ω
0 .3 Ω 120 Ω 1 .5 k Ω
Va r
1/2 W 1/4 W W
'/τ W
Pr ec
1%
Prec
5% 5 1
Pr ec
1%
2W 1/4 W '/τ W
WW Pr ec
1
1 .33 k Ω 75 k Ω 24 kΩ 0 .3 Ω 120 Ω
'/τ W 72 W 1/2 W 2W 1/4 W
P rec
1 ~/ 1 5%
316-0123-00 323-0308-00 311-0515-00 323-0222-00 323-0373-00
12 k Ω 15.8 k Ω 250 Ω , V a r 2 kΩ 75 k Ω
ι/4 W '/τ W
Pr ec
1
1/2 W '/τ W
Pr ec Ρ rec
1 1 -/
RI 186 R 1187 RI 188 RI 189
316-0103-00 315-0333-00 307-0093-00 316-0470-00 315-0683-00
10 k Ω 33 k Ω 1 .2 Ω 47 Ω 68 k Ω
1/4 W 1/4 W 1/2 W 1/4 W 1/4 W
5%
RI 193 R 1194 RI 209
316-0121-00 316-0823-00 301-0123-00
120 Ω 82 k Ω 12 k Ω
1 /4 W 1/4 W 1/2 W
5%
R 1133 R 1151
R
R
Va r
Pr ec WW
5% 5%
SECTION
DIAG RAM S AN D CI RCU IT Symbols an d
R eference
s
B OA R D I LLUST RATIO NS
Designators
E lectrical components shown on the d iagrams are in the following units unless noted otherwise : Capacitors = Resistors = Symbols used on the d iagrams are b ase d on
U SA
Values one or greater are in p icofara d s ( p F) . Values less than one are in microfarads ( μ F) . Ohms ( Ω )
Stan d ard Υ 32 .2-1967 .
L ogic symbology is based on MIL-STD-806B in terms of positive logic . a nd ma y d iffer from the manufacturer's d ata .
L ogic
symbols de p ict the logic function performed
The following lowing s p ecial symbols are used on the d iagrams :
E xternal Screwd river adjustment . E xternal control or connector . Clockwise control rotation in direction of arrow . 1
4
Refer to d iagram number indicate d in diamond . Refer to waveform number indicated in h exagon .
ι
Connection soldered to circuit board . Connection ma d e to circuit board with interconnecting p in .
ι
Blue tint encloses com p onents located on circuit b oard .
The following p refix letters are used as reference designators to i d entify com p onents or assemblies on the d iagrams .
ι
Α AT Β BT C CR DL DS F FL Η HR J Κ L
Assembly, se p arable or re p airable (circuit board, etc .) Attenuator, fixed or variable Motor Battery Ca pacitor, fixed or variable Dio d e, signal or rectifier Delay line In d icating d evice (lam p ) Fuse Filter H eat d issi pating device (heat sink, h eat radiator, etc .) Heater Connector, stationary portion Relay In d uctor, fixed or variable
LR Μ Q Ρ R RT S Τ ΤΡ U V VR Υ
Inductor/resistor combination Meter Transistor or silicon-controlled rectifier Connector, movable p ortion Resistor, fixed or variable Thermistor Switch Transformer Test point Assembly, inse p arable or non-repairable (integrated circuit, etc .) Electron tube Voltage regulator (zener d iode, etc .) Crystal
; Ζ ,ο ρ
453 Α / R 453A
V O L TAG E A N D W A VE F O RM T E ST CO N DITIO N S Ty p ical voltage measurements an d waveform p h otogra p h s were obtained under t h e followi n g con d itions u n less noted ot h erwise on 20 t h e indivi d u al diagrams : Test Oscilloscope (wit h 10Χ Probe)
F req uen cy res p onse Deflection factor (wit h probe) Inp u t impeda n ce P robe gro u nd Trigger source
Recommend e d ty p e (as used for waveforms on diagrams)
DC to 20 mega h ertz 50 millivolts to 10 volts/ division 10 mego h m, 13 picofarads 453Α c h assis groun d E xter nal from Α GAT E conn ector to i n dicate true time relations h ip b etween signals Te k tronix 7504 wit h 7 Α 16 and 71350 p l u g-in units
Voltmeter Ty p e I np ut imped ance
Non-loading digital voltmeter 10 mego h m R a n ge 0 to 1000 volts 1 Reference voltage 453Α c h assis ground RecommenCA d ed ty pe Te k tronix 7D13 Digital ΜυΙ (as used for voltages timeter (use d wit h test oscilon d iagrams) losco p e)
Vertical
Controls (bot h ch annels if a p plicab le)
VO LTS/DI V VA R POSITIO N I nput Cou ρ ling
M OD E
ΙΝΤ Τ R Ι G I NVER T
L ine voltage 115 volts Signal No ap p lied signal ap p lied for voltage measurements . Apply calibraf or signal to C h a nn el 1 for waveforms only . Connectors No connections exce pt as in CA Signal a pp lied above . Centered Trace positio n on C R T 1 Co n trol settings As follows exce p t as n ote d ot h erwise on i nd ivid ual diagrams . Dis p lay Controls I N T EN SITY F OC U S SCA LE LLUM
I
M id ra n ge A dj ust for focused d isplay As d esired
M idrange
DC CH 1 N O RM P ush ed in
Trigge r ing Controls (bot h Α and Β if applicable)
LEVEL
S L O PE CO UPL I N G SO UR C E
0 + AC ΙΝΤ
Sweep Controls DELAY-TIME MUL TI PL I ER Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V Α VA R Α S WEEP M OD E Β S WEEP M OD E
H O R IZ DIS PL AY 453 Α Con d itions
mV Cali b rated
M AG
Α S WEEP LEN GT H P OSITIO N F I NE P O WER Side- Panel Controls Β ΤΙΜΕ /DI V VA R IA BLE
CA L I BR ATO R
5 .00 ms .2 ms
L A U TO T R IG T R IGG ER A BLE A F T ER D EL AY TIME Α O FF
FULL M i d range M i d range ON
L .0 V
ΑΙΙ voltages give n on t h e diagrams are i n volts . Waveforms s h own are actual waveform ph otogra ph s tak e n wit h α Te k tronix Oscillosco p e Camera System a n d P ro j ected Grati cule . Rea d outs are sim u lated in larger-t h a n -normal ty p e . Voltages an d waveforms on t h e d iag r ams (s h ow n in blue) are not absolute an d may vary between instrume n ts because of d iffering com p onent tolerances, inter n al calibratio n or front- p anel co n trol settings .
C H Ι VER TICA L
DE L AY
ρβΕΑΜΡ
Ο 23, 433,443 Ο 54, Ο 64, ΟΤ 3 Q811, 094
010D Σ GAT E S
Q284
-R201 C R 206 C R 202 C R 207
C. H 2 VERTICA L PRF AM Ρ 01 2.5 Q ι 64 Q133 Q149 ΟΙ 54 a 194 4 ι sq
L I NE
DR I V ER
CO MM ON MODEFEEDBACK EF Q253
SW ITC H ING R MULT VIBRATO
C R 205 CR20 B C R 204 C R Z09
Q2 η 5
G294
4225
s
T R IGG Σ R P IC KO FF A MP L I F IE R Q63 CH Ι O UT
ΑLΤΕ R ΝΑΤΕ
Α UN BL ANK I N 4 AMPL I F I ER
T R AC E A M P L I F I ER
Q234
TR I GGE R P RE AMP Q404 Q413
041-4 α 42α
Α T R IGG E,R ΙΝΡ U τ
443 0455 ρ
Q514
Α sLο 1Ιε
ι
COM PAR ATO R Q454
r
Q4 6 4
Α T R IGG ER GE N E RATO R
Q524
Α SWEEP
GATE
C R5Π5
C R 476 047 Β
Qs0 α
A U TO MULYI V i6 RATOR
ΕχΥ -,'RIG N PU T
IQ4B4 5W4 Ι- Ε SWEEP R ESE T
Ι
QS64
Ι
Ι
1 494
Q455
Q495
-~
Α RESE T μυ L71 ΥΙΒRΑ7
QS
1Q57S SINGLE SW EEP
I
N DICATO R
C
4594
Μυ LΤΙ ' 076
Β RESET MU LTIV I BR ATO R 0775
Β Τ R IGGE R INPUT ΕΧΤ T R IG OR χ 11111 U7
Q Ε 33 g643
Θ SLO? ξ CO MPAR ATOR 0654
a b64
Β T R IGG E R G EN ER ATOR C RG76
OG64
α sωεΕΡ GΑΤ Ε. C R 705
Β
Q704
U N B L AN K IN Γa A MPL I F IER
Q734
4 α3Α OSCI L L OSCO P E
478S
G724
FAT Α
Ε
Α υΝΒLΑΝΚΙΝU A MPLIFtER ΟG14
Q524
E, UNBLΑNKIN~ AMPLI F I ΕR
Q711
β724
1
Β
GA7E
DON 1270
BL OC K DIAG R A M
'T brn-red on tan 'S' brn-red-blk on t `R' vio-grn-blk on wht '0' brn-orn-brn on wht 'P' brn-grn-brn on wht I
NOTE : C18, CR18, R16, R21, R71, R76, R81, R91 mounted on rear of board .
'U' shield for 'V' 'V' blu-blu on qv (coax)
I
See Figs. B-2 and 8-3 for location of parts not i(
Fig. 8- 1 . ΡΙΟ Al, Partial Vertical Preamp ci
location of p arts not i d entified h ere.
" tial Vertical P rea mp circuit boa rd .
` Υ' red on wh t
=
mmml Jim No ME molmim ME
ONES
100 TV
500 lis
MEN
-mommoomm, MENEEMEMMI
ol 200
171V
500
μ$
1ω
AC CO UPLE D
MENEM
mm
"i 00
ο ff III
(ε
cΗ i
ΡΟ S)710Η
C ΕΝΤΙ: FΖ
p- 19 Ι.Β
C ΝΙΟR Χ /~ ~~G Γ Ο. Ι J1
5
RM --" AC ι
G N17 DL
Ί
~ι
ΑΤΤεΝ 5 ΕΕ ®
62
Ι 1
C
c18 Ο 33
ΤΣ " ΙΝΑι9
ι 1
1 5~ Γ
β. Ι rο 1 . 1 Κ
(INPUT GOυ P L IN L.)
R IS ι Μ
ιι β.2 Ρ 2Ο Κ
Lο.m α
C R Γα 2 +12V Dc PL.) +-ι .7
: S . Θ -1 Κ
1
Q43 ι 39 s00
+1c τ 4 1 .1+ F -
R 24
β .S7 FL 1
Ι
GNI
Ι
β 2 Γος I S .1 yC
Χτ 5 - Ι 3.7 Κ
G 23 Ο. ι
ον
+69
51 RΤ 4 Κ
6θ
0 .78 η
β 3 Ι3 Ι .5 Κ
R.23
1
55
Q Z 3A
c πια
G Ιϊ ~ ςt2S 0-15 -s .s =
ι34
+ Ι %V (Dr-PI-)
-12 ν
`~~
1
FEEP r 1+ ρ- υ '
/^
Ι
+175 ν
ςe34 47
487
Ι
VO LTS~DI V
ΤΡ 54 4~-Ον
G98
rτ , ι
~
(SE L )
Lτ 3 25 y λΗ
~ \\
λ-12 ν (DtG) \\
R-
2? ΟΚ STEP ΑΘΑ L
,__Q23 Β
-", . ' ..
3Ι
Χ
RΙΟΚ
c ι~ 35 ;
R 34~~ C30
G Ι 37
T
c)" -" S R V (D C Q ιj
VO LTAG E S
OW WAVEF O RMS σδtαίπσd υιdαr caιdiF ii-, grvm οπ φρο 82.
VERTICA L Ρ RΕΑΜΡ βΟΑΡ D
- ι ι .Π
μ.36 33 .2 Κ
Q33
2~ ΟΚ . R 3 Γε
Ι Μ
.
l
Ι
fι .; β 48 Ι .58 k -!2V (d G P L}
ή-4 ί 2 .87 Υ~
+ι1ν (Dc p Q ικ ι 1 C POSITION β 55 EN T E ¢. 500 1-1 c
R57.
Q43
β 66 3 .5k
Q54
β.51 ώα
β 545 β8
CQ34 1z46 255
g,9 y 4'7
C53 1y.. F
ΤΡ 54
G54 1 .1y-S.4
β a,0 255
CH 1 Dc
+ ι
Τβ.1CwC~ Ε
L EV EL
2V
z60 look y
c 44 1 .8-1 5
c αss
ρ 63 ι .2 Κ '
f - ί2ν
R 59
1τ.49
530
Rs ιi
P- r.4 33 Ο
- Ι1Υ
C ΗΑΝΝΣ L 1 VERTICAL SIG N A L TO T R IGG Ε 2 S ωιτ C Η s23o B 93~
ν
ββ Ι ~5 Κ
QG3
ι.ι k
~~ GCo4 .001
-12 V
λ
α, 3 3 β, t
β 48 1 .58 k 1
να 23 6 .2 V (τ. rιβ 7 .5 1
R 52 1 .14 κ
Ι ,L)
+Ι1ν {OC P L~
ι)
P-45 Α 3G5
F-41
8 .2S k
β 4,
C45A It
T . 87k
ι 43 Σ ια Κ 43 έ~ 3k
ΡΟ5 ίΤΙΟΝ
R4ο 2,5 k
W
Ρ-,3 Ι h vv ~-, ~ ι, 3 3 .3
P-75 250
Ι Ιι
β, β
R 534
5 -30
Ρ-55 1,4 Κ
ΥΑ y2.
ΤΟ
r- 94 4, Ο
L 201
ι` 84
L 45 A 0 .51,Η
- ιή V ( D G?L~ Ι
τ,
+12 ν
Ι 4Ο
p- 8 ι 36 .5
Ι SOI L UN GA L
5 ΙΟ 2Ο 50
-mV
~R,β Ι ιοΜ
0s,5
CFO
A714]
OPEN (CALIBRAT ED ) 5,5 ONLY WHEN R 75 15 F U LL Y C W F-71`4 ΙΟΚ
F-
ΟΟ
CHANNEL I SI GNA L To D IOD E 4 ΑΤε
+12 V
β9 Ι 14 .77
R 43
1 .4 υ C94 47 ο
L 94 To
F-143
5 0
494 jί ΕF~ εΝ G Ε D1 ACZ RA M5
CH A NN
L
Ο
G FiAN NEL 1 ATT E N UATO R S
0 Ο 7
νεβτε c αι
s ωιτc ωιυ G
7R-IC-,CF-FL
f' βΕΑΜΡ
L
1
V
E
RT
I
CAL
5 Εε PAP-T5 L Ι 5Τ Ρ0 ρ5εΜΙ G ομρμ C Τφ2. ΤΥρΕ 5 VALUES AND SERIAL ΝU ΜΒΕΑ RANGES OF PARTS MARKED WIT H BLUE Ο U ΤU ΝΕ.
ΡβΕΑΜΡΟ
`TRW'
1-204
~ I
_____- _ Γ _____ Γ __
Ι
L
Ι
JI
c Η 4
οR
Ι
m
Χ
ΟΙ
7-1 ~
C3
R ,l
Ι Ι
Ι
_ AC
~~
G υο
R3
2 FQR
F~R
ZF
Ι
1 clo
1 .s
,
Ι
Ι
Ι
1
Ι
4 F1 4 R
Ι Ι
Ι
1 Ί
Ι
Ι
ΤΟ C, ΑΤΕ 423 Α i Ν R U c ια ε R2 ι
Ο
110
Ι
3F4 R Ι
Ι
S
ν
Ι Ι
Sδ
--L(IΗ ι VOLTS/ ο1 ν
_ Τ
ρ
ο
ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
mV
DC
Ι 51
2ο
50
ρ
.ι
Ο-
.τ
-s
ρ ~+ ιο ----τ , --0
ο
ρι 5 τ2
ο
C13 1S
Ι
Ο-
ι
= 100 --T--o
2
Ο
10
ο-
0
1 .3-S,4
R 8C
Τ
111 κ
-~
έ
R EF.
F FP.
Ι
1 S Ινη_ ΟΙϊl4 ΟΟ - 1 'Z, ι 29999
C BE so
RSF
ι
56
Lc9D~Cgc -r S .9 0.25-1 .5
P-9 ε ιο. ικ
LC9FΤ s οο
. D IAC R A MS REFERENCE
C1iA NNEL Ι V ERTICA L
Ι
C6C
c8 D .4zcac 5.6 0 .25-LS
9 ΟΟ Κ
R9c ζ 990 κ
~~ R 6C
τ 2 .S
RSE
C9 B 1 .4-7 .3
Ι
Rb έ
- ΊΟ
c6 B 1 .3-6.4
Ι
Ρ FΖΕΑΜΡ
R9 F 47
ι C13F
R . -T
S EE PA R TS LIST F O R EARL I ER VALUES AND S ERIAL NUMBE R RAN G E S O F PARTS MARKED WITH BLUE OU TL I NE . ΟΟλS
ΙΙ 7 Ι
453 Α
05C I L L.OSCO PF-
C H ANNEL
Ι ATTENU ATO RS
NOTE : CR118, R116, R121, 8171, R176, R181, R191 mounted on rear of board .
See Figs, 8-1 and 8-3 for location of parts m
Fig . 8- 2 . P/O Al . Partial Vertical Preamr
3 for location of parts not identified h ere,
Partial Vertical P reamμ circuit board .
(FRONT
+ ιτν ζηεαι)
GH 2
ρ- ι 55
R IS9
+75V
Ι .9 Κ
G
O
H 2 RY
1
R 102
1r.,1
CIO Ο .1
'
, 7 ΙσΙ 7 Ι 1 b2
-11Υ
Is
GfD3 11
R ΙΟθ
-
( ΝΡt1 Υ
CH
λ; cs
SEE ι
1 1 1
COUPLINCη)
α3°
ΑϊΤΕΝ
111
3Ι ιΟΙ
ει ια
ιι 2 Ο Κ
Μ
,
τξR ΜΙ W~
Ζ 12ο 20 Κ
Ι
Q143
Ι
Γ ύσ . 3
R118
-`-
C Ι 29
0 .1
τ .5 Κ } d,9
4 Κ
R151 69
~
'
κ
R 14 ώ
81 .9
RI B I3
155
ς 47
1 .5 Κ
C149
1 .8- Ι 3
P-123 4Ε~
SI05
2 νΟ LΤ
βΙτ ι
+4 .6
134
Q
Ι Do
CS24 ΤΙη F
C ENT E R
R 154
C 1 39
1 η,
R124 λ-97Κ
R117 9 ΒΟ Κ
I61
R
+ Ι 2ν ( οε c ι)
R1 26 Ι 5 .τκ
"°
Clll σ .25- Ι .6
Γ 3Ιτκ
Q123A
ε R ιι ~
P- 11 11 ισσ
GR
+MV (DCPL)
POSITION
fRI4q
ικ
τΡ 134
G 139
(sει ) LΓ 13
τ ~ υΙ+
Ιλ V
\
Ι
\
ΟΡΙ 35
Ι
- ~.θ
ΑΑ
Ρ- Ι 47 2, ε37 Κ
ς
365
ι140Α 1 .7-11
ρL Ι 4δΑ °
-0 .5μH
1149 1 .5"
-Ι2ν (nCFU
\
ςβΙ 36 SS δ3,1 Κ
ΑΙ45 Α
-I2V ~ρGPl.y
CR1 φ 7
\
C130 I
(Dc PL)
τ
Q~33
C R 13Φ \
. Ο22
5 .2E .κ
βί 37 17 σΚ
Q~23 B \
R134 ιηπ
R 141
{DCPL)
GR114 ~/
\
CΙ4 θΕ
Ι3
R Ι 33
511
-I1V
(DCPL)
R Γ 44Α 91
CI{4Α ML)
Ι
L144 λ
Cι 4 αΕ~
6.θ
C 143D τ1
y
C Ι 44 β 14-7
Τ
C144C P.7-11
Ο3μΗ
-mV
RI44E, Ι3Κ
_5 R 144C
~ ιΚ
Κ εΙ=εΚΕΝιC Ε CHANNEL VE R TICA L
VERTICA L ΡRΕΑΜΡ
C Γ 49C Ι .9- Ι 3
/
οε" ε ON L Ι:
Ο Ο
BOARD
Ο14 ςΚ ?.ω1 5
2 ΑτΥΕΝΙΑΥΟR5SWITCNINCy
VO L T AG E S σδtα 'ιπαd -de, σσπd ίη G σηα g'ι- οη except αα full-
SEE PARTS 41ST FOR 5 ΕυΙCONDl1CTOR ΤΥΡΕ5.
463 Α OSCILLOSCOPE
Ι
Ο
16 Ο
ι
Ο
Ο
RI43C
P/0 A
0
F O RMSI -,
MODE
j see
d iagram
page
θ-ί
~% Ιο , t γρΙεαΙ WAVE-
CH 2
+ ι 1ν (οε ΡC_) KISS 5οο
λΙ 52 ~
ΟΗΡ POSITION CENT ER
Ι 2ν (ΟCΡμ~
jI
V R155 6.1 Υ
yR156
Ri52 ι . Τακ
?'SK
Rι5 Ι 63
f4 . b
Q154
+Λ» ΑΙ S 4 6Β
ΤΡΙ54 -ο. π
121-34
Ι
-
.L Ii=.~
C}59 ~1F 1+ μ
zι sα ς 33 α
ει 54
ε 1S9 1Ο
5 R ι 5Ο 259
ε 149 Ι.Β - Ι8
k lSe Ι .2 Κ
_5 RS44 ~ ΙΚ L ηΙ
Ι 34
R ι4Ι
z
Ι
-I1V
+1 χν
fl .iSK --- _ Υ147 ι .θ7κ
RΙ 4εΑ 365
-Ι 2Υ (OGPL~
CΓ45 Α Ι .7- Ι 1
ό LI4SA ο 0,5μH
RΜ 140
R ιΤ 9 1κ Gl73 9. 9
νΑ R ΙΖ 175 25 ρ
r
R 174
;ι ι
ΙΒΟ
ΑΙ77 15 οκ Ο
.1
0
.1
Ο
.s
Ο
ι
Ο
2
Ο
8
υυεΑς Ο5 ι 7s sιτs οΡεΝ (εΑιι "R ΑτΣο) ONLY WHEN R 175 15 FULLY Ο W
1
SI4S NVER T ΡυιL
"ι _. ~i
Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι
>ΖΙΒ3 L4k
έ ιΙ M1 ΙΟΜ
R
Ι Ι
C1114 47 α
~Ι Ι
Ι Ι Ι Ι
+lSOV (υ~αε4}
-mV
.r
Q184
I
R I B4 35Ο
Ι Ι Ι Ι
Kiel 36.S Ο GΑ1 Ν R 190 ΙΟΟ
+12ν
Ο~
~~ υ RI9S 1δh~SEL} ΤΙ 95
ρΙ 91 Ι 4.7 Ι J, Ι R r94 ~+ Ι 350 ι j?--F.ηη/ν Ο
ΙΟ Rf 99 1, 4Κ
" 4 GΙθ 47ρ
C L--Ll Q !94
έ yoο ~ Ρα 9ο αα mα! ωανε -
L
C H AN NE L
2
VE RTICA L
GM9 270
P R E .AM P
SIDS -[CH Ζ VσιΣ 5/ P I V 1
J f 01
GH
2
Οιο b
R102
ς,$01
F ιf,.R
2f 11r.R
ι Ι
2F
~c ιιο 1 .5
Ι Ι Ι
D CΟ
Ι
qF 1 R
ι ι
r ι Ι
~Ο
G
3F ξ R
ε
ι Ι
ι ι Ι ι
Ι Ι
ΤΟ GAT E QS23A ΤΗΡυ C 1 ΙΒ
Δ-
R 121
Ι
Ο
Ι S Ιοι
Ο
ο
C
Ο
τ ΙΟ -1η0
Ο
ι
S0
Ο
0-
.Ι
.2-
Ο
P--
ο
Ο
τδ
Ο
R 113
22
C113 15
ι
0---1
z
ο-i-- τιοο
ο L-4--0
10
0-
α
L- Ο
Cιlι Ι .3
τ 10
ι
CIOS B Ι .3-5.4
ς'η
~i29S99
R IO BC !; .LC108 D -ec10 θ c 9ΟΟΚ
0 .25-1 .S
.6 -r5
P1 ΙΟΒΕ ιΙΙΚ
'Ί
G10$ Ε so
Ρ 10Θ F 5( .
100
! 1 .4-7.5
F- TV . ' . Ν βΟΙΟ 1 ΟΟ - Ι
τ5
ο 990 Κ ~
Τ3 9 ρ
ς
R ΙΟ 9 Ε }
.~ α. Ιο 9 Ε ΤΥαοΟ
ΙΟ . ΙΚ z
Ifο. Ι2 5Β.5
C.S
R 109 F 47
αοο κ ~
ι
'PrI 4 7 3
R !07£~G107 E. 2SΟΚ Ι2
C109F Z-7
R107 F 47
ι
R E FE I2 ENC Σ OIAG R A M5 S EE
PAR TS LIST F O R EA RL IE R VALUES AND S ERIAL NUMBER RANGES OF PAR TS MA RK ED WITH BLUE OUTL I NE.
υευ
7 Υlι
453 Α OSCILLOSCO
PE
C
H
A NNEL 2 ATT ENU ATO RS
` O'wht-whtongy (coax)-W shield for `0' T' shield for 'M' 'M' grn-gro on gy (coax)-
'H' orn on wht 'G' brn on wht T' grn on wht 'E' yet on wht'D' blu on whi 'C' red-red on gy (coax)
'AC' gy {coax} 'AD' brn-red-blk on tan 'AE' brn-red-bik on wht
See Figs. 8-1 and 8-2 for location of parts not
Fig. 8- 3. P/ 0 Al . Partial Vertical Preamp i
πd
8-2 for location of p arts n ot identified h ere.
3 Α 1 . Partial Vertical P reamp circuit board .
03
ον
*
MEMME EMME
1
0V
200 m V
ον
μS
AG CO UPLE D
500
mV
O~D
5,00 μS Ι
AC COU PLE D
5V 1 100 μS
Ι
Ι
1
1
1
AC CO UPLE D
ME
500 mV 500 μS r --h
71 0 ν
L201
'1j L202 0 Gf2202
C H A N N EL
Ι V ER TICA L SIGNA L F RO MO - Εm . ο
C R 203
Δ
~ ι2Ο 3 C R204 L204
R 260 71S
F -Ι2 F
R270 71S
R113 187
R223
C R 21S
C R 12S
Rill 649
-5.5 * ΤΡ2! δ ιι
Iς SR 221 649
187
R211 2Ο
Q215
ι κ
ι κ
R216 C214~ 22 .~ R11S7s1 3 θΚ λ .37 Κ
A217 147
-17V
(Dr-PL)
C RAIB , ν :
R 2Ι β Ι 46
~
-
~C224 ρ 22 θ 22 2 .37 Κ
- Θ . λχ
-12V
(DC- PL)
~, C R 23 Ι 0 -121, (η c Ρι)
5 λ3 ΟΑ μΟΟΕ
"_
R 233
3 .3 Κ
Gt -----
Ι5Κ
~
Ε ~
CHI
C H2
Ο
ALT
0-
CHOP
0-
ADD
ρ
453 Α OSCI LLOSCO PE
V
(DC
R 227
Ι 47
+12V
ιΙ~226
R22 B
R2gl 47 Κ
Γ 46
δτι R231
62 θ3 ο.1
Q225
C1 ;6 0 .00 8 2
ALT ER NAT E TR AC E SYNC FR O M ' Έ
ΤΡ 21S
R121 20
4 --
ιοτ
'""
Q 2Z4 -ι ;. . ~.
C241 ΙΟΟ
ι. F Ζ ) ι . ;~.
+11 V R244 3.9 Κ
R 14S 1.2 Κ
+ ι 2ν R 2Β s
N O R M AL T R IGG E R DC L EV ξ, L
~ΟΟ
R28(. 1 . ΙΚ
75
Α
VERTICAL SIGNAL SW ~~ ΤΟ TRIGGER LTcl-l 523Ο8 Ο
LR 2B7 2 .5μ H
R 284 4 δ4
Α2 ΘΘ 79.7
Τρ 2 θ4
~. θ 0 .
Q 2 84
jR2δ9 I b2
R 260
ι~Ι L2 BB 12
22 .74 Κ ~ /~`9-h13
715
R 1δ7
C26 Γ ~ ΥΟΟ Τ
499 ~
~ -F 1V+--}
-12V
R 292
R 2615 36
1I
7Γ S
Τ39 9
R 164
~ 4.99Κ
2.2 Ί' Ι
T
JL
R 27 B
6 (SF,
6.8
L263 5R26STL2 LB-IS ι .13K
t
R 294 ς 7.S K
AC R296
5 R29S h 2D
78 .7
fI 2.V
R2 έα 3
ΙΚ
m
R291
12ο
..
C25 θ 1
32
ι
Ι
θ3Ο 9
L 29 B
R279 Ι 42
Q294
I
°
162
ΤΡ 294'
VERTICAL S14NAL TO D EL AY LINE
-'
ΙΟ 5
Α277{ 499 y
R 270
Ι
L 266~
0.1
ά7
Q253
./77 ~~/
Γλ {αcΡι)
Ρ/0 Α Ι
ή VERTICAL PREAMP
r
VERTICAL
C HOP BLANKI NL ΤΟ
R IO i I
B OA RD
Ι' Ι
~- οιτα cεs σηυ ωανεεοΗrπs ουιαπ,eα -de, -αΙ ""'91ven σο peye α-2 e* εερτ .,s εηιιητ '.
' ί .1 UΠΕ ΙΙ ,,
''vODF
ALT CHOP
' Ι e ττ nsrillnse0pe Irl7gered irσm applied dg-1 Ιητ rvπ. ι . ι , π , .ι. Ι < ικ3 ' . ιπυ
R EF ERENCE DSACaF2A MS ι 3
C}1A NNEL _L ι HA
Y E.RTICA L PREA MP
2 V ΕR7IG Α L P REA MP
6
VERTICAL ΟυΤΡυΤ AMPLiFI ER
7
T R1G['>,E R PRE AMP Α SW ΣEA GENERATOR
ι5 SEE PARTS LIST FOR
SEMICONDUCTOR TY PES
Ε AXIS
AMPLI F I ER
'C'
b fu
on wh t
SN
'D' brn-red- bl k
on tan
Β010100 - Β049999
ΝΟΤΕ : C3A t? C''417, Ρ340, R347, R r~ α+ τι ( Γκ, ;+~ ιΙ .
ed
d
' Ε' brn- r e -bl k
on wh t
on
Fig, 8-4 Α. Α-2 . Vε *,t ί c αl Output Amplifier circuit board.
'C' bl u on wh t
'D' brn-re d-blk on tan
' Ε' brn-red -blk on wh t
S N B050000-up
F ig . 8-4β.
Α-2 . V ertica l Output Am p lifier circ uit board .
ο
c~
αν
500 μS 500 500 ai ν _ 500 mV
i-~
μS
=
αν
ιι
mmm
E177 ~ I q
[F--Fm No
No
0
0
w
on mm~~
[
±i
-
07 1 ν_ .
50 mV
EUT
5αο
,
No
μI ~H
500 μS
+7 .5 ν
1
τ 1α
500 λ+5
50α μS
lo v
ι-
τ=-n.
Ον
L ._.. . .1
AC COUPLED
lo v
} 500 AS ~ -
_
lo v
Dν
500 μ5 -
ι ι
ι
ι
_ Ι Ι 0μ
ι
1
~~ 0 ν
Ε y >R32ι τ5Α.9 Ι
e .ε:
WAVEF ORM S
R 322
41 .2
0322 .ο22
5 . Γ;4
\
\
C303
V ΕRT1CA L SFR OM L R 2&8Λ
93 η
Υ
6
Ύ
6.Ι3
L 301 b . Ι5μΗ
fι ι
~
R323 ΙΟΟ +3
'
Q-304
-
`~
Q32-1
R 303
Θ
Bb .b
C33δ
R 3ο 4 ΙΟο
f.B-Ι3
C326
R 324
ΙΟ
750
R 3Ο6 3S.7 p L 302 .07),L Η
Τ
Τ
_ς R 328 ~ ~ S00
DΑΜΡΙΝ G
R 325 Ι91
C306 .Ο22
Μ334 75 Ο
R314
Ι
Ι
C327 6. Β
C328
ΙΟΟ
C311
Ι C312
8
VERTICA L STGNAL
FR O M
ηηη
R 29 8
DEL AY
Θ
R313
Α
93 η
86 .6
-19_44r
i
Ι . Θ -13
L31 Ι ,LL
ο. ι 5 Η
ρ .3 Ι9 -313
6.8
L I NE
R 3θ3 ΙΟΟ
R331
R330
649
G ια f3 η 9
39
5$9
R331 3.3 Κ -ι 2ν Α2
VE RTICA L
O U TPU T B OA RD
S 330
Vc : ι .1 Αι ; ΕS .~~ ιιι ε:ανε-ιυινιιr ιι ύοπτ yf υcn οπ Ραgε 8-2 -pt ατ fουοω, 'BEAM FI NDER
45 ~! Α OSCI
L LOSCO PE
Presse d
-- ---- -~
-12ν
FI NI S PR I NG R ETUF POSITION SF REAM
+ '7 5 Υ
C R 339 8339 158
R 3-01 64 .9 -12V
- ---- -~
RE FER E N C1i
5330 ΒΕΑΜ F L N D ER
S PR I NG RET UR N TO ΡΟ 5 ΙΤιΟΝ SH OWN
S EE PAR TS LIST F OR SEMICONDUC70R TYPES
VER
TICA
S
VER TICA L
13
H O R IZO N TA L C R7
Ι6
L
O U PU T
A
A MP L
C ιετ C υΙΤ
GMD Ι 27 Ο
T
D Γ AG R A M S
S W ITC H ING
M P L I F IE R
I FVER
See Figs . ITC 80 and 8-14 for location for parts not identified here
Fig. 8-5. P/0 A3. Partial A Sweep circuit board.
'DA' shiel d for 'DB' --'D Β' blu-blu on gy (coax)
'DC' gy (coax) 'DD' shiel d for 'DC'
'DE'
s h ield
'DF' gy (coax)
8-6, 8-7 and 8-14 for location for parts not i d entifie d h ere .
ig, 8- 5, Ρ /Ο Α3. Partial Α Sweep circuit boar d .
for 'D F'
ι
OV
500 50 mV μ5
!
1V
η
ι
ι ι
504 μS
IO V
Ι
10 0 , mV
544 AS ι
4V
500 mV
500 mV
56011S
500 μ5
ωαυεεο R ιω s (UIJRk4) +ISO V
R400 ιιΝιτ
_
i
P/n Α Ι `ιι
sso~c
ο 54οα
Ι
ι
ι
5401 ρ
\ Ιρ+ί GΗ Ι
ι
zgκ
ι
ι ~
4 7S V
CΗ Ι
ι
V E RTICAL PREA MP B OARD
CH P.N NE L i V E RTIC A L S1 G μΑ L FROM R bb
R401
ι sοκ
R~
τ
4/ j
~ 43sι ΤSΓ, _ ,-,
ιιι
R4S1
Ψ
93 σι
470
+12 V R 40S +
100
OUT 402
C411 -L .03 Τ
J
' R4 ι 2 ~82 . Κ
C405 ~ R 406 .022 Τ ~ 2.26 Κ
+1,4 VER TICA L SIG NA L FR(' Ρ LR 287
(F
NO RM CHI OR Χ
DE
R403
+(i04 ,
0404
R 40A ΙΟΟ
ΙΟΟ
R413 ΙΟΟ
_ ρ ,72
C413 .ODI
R407 4 .5.3
VOLTAGES and WAVEF O RM$ obtained un der con dh [ions given on page 8 2.
R4 ι 9 Ι . δΚ
ΜΑV C F 2 408
RΣ F Ε R έΝ C έ D ιΑG R ΑΝι 5 Ι
CHANNEL $ INPUT
AMPLIFIER
S
VERTICAL. 5W ιΤ C Ηιμ C~
θ
Α τ' R ) GG E Q G ENER ATO R
ι 0 Β T R 144 ER G ΕΝΣ R ΑΤΟ R I
R 4p$
V ;a,
bL 9
6.
R 409
1SS K
R422
SEE PARTS L IST FO R SEMICONDUCTOR TYPES .
ιο
Α
453 Α 05C 1 LL OSCO PF-
3
Α SWEEP
B OA RD
-12V
+75V +12 V R411 470
C411 -L .Os Τ
Ρ 41{. 100
R 412 > 8.2 Κ
C41 (o
.022 1
+ ΙΙ . ι
+ S.3
Q413 + 4 .7
P4¢ 1 4 Π . ra
I C413 Τ . ΟΟ 1
R 413 ΥΟΟ
C417 1-
QA17
022 Τ
RA19 I .S ΙC
Ζ 470
R 427 9Ι
rD
C421 0.1
VR4a t 6.2Υ
~1,
1
8421 10 Κ
Q42S
9.S
OG
----ΜΛ~=-~
R 4i29 9Ι
ή
93_ςι
Α
93 J-L
ρ T R IGG ER SIG N A L TO SOU RC E SW ITC H , 5430
2 T R IG4 ER SI4 N A L 70
SO URCE
DD
S WITCH,
R424 5 -L C424 .22
1
C422
022
ρ2ο
Τ . ο22
- ι 2ν
-12V
LJIJ
1270
TRIGG
ER PR EAM P
5610
`CA' vio-grn-blk on wht 'CB' brn-red-blk on wht
'CC' brn-red-bil A
W(
5N B040000-up
SN 6010105B039999
Fig . 8-6 . P/ 0 A3, Partial A Sweep circuit board,
'CC' brn-red-blk on tan
TD' Val on wht
q B040000-up
partial A Sweep circuit board .
See Figs . &V 83 and 8-14 for location of parts not identified here .
IRONT
500 mV τ500μS
2 ν η 540 μS
200 mV
No ONE m ON
500 μS
Ό 5 4 mV
-
ον
'
504 μS ον
--
ι
! ιΙ .1
500 500 m V
μ5 Ον
(Ιo
ίΟ
λ ον
ον
Α
7 R SCa4G R 5 455
Ι
WA VE F ORM S
CU
Α 7 ΓιΙ G4 ~ β CO U P ι f N Cl 5415
! σ
Ι Ι Ι
Ι ι ι ι
}--0
G432 27
ρ τi . ιG αετRR S Ι 4 Ν_ΑL~ - ~
Ι_
_
Ι
Ι
, ι ι , ι , ~
, Ι ι ι ι Ι Ι
Ι Ι
, Ι
ι Ι Ι ι
Ι Ι ~
Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι
Ι1~
53=ι ~
F?-OK R427
, ι Ι ι Ι ! Ι
ΙΝΤ
~ i ι
ι Ι ι Ι
ι
Ι
L ΓΝΕ Τ}ΖΣ G b Εβ SIGNAL " F fΖΟππ Γz ιιοω
ΕΧΤ Τ R 14 INPUT
J450
ι
ι ι ι
ι ~ ι ι , ,
ιΙ ι ι ι ι ι
ι Ι ι ι ι ι
Ι , Ι
C4δς ' οί ~i
Ι ι Ι Ι Ι
ι AC LF REJ
ρ430 10
r-ο
ΕΧτ
ο--α
Ε XT = ιο
0-10--o Ιο -0
ι 3
C R 4fo6
CR 45!οV
,_. ._
C R455
C R 4to
2' ϊ
ιΙ
ι ι ι + ι
///]]]
ι ι
Ι
5α3ο
G4~G . Ο 22~
1 ΓΠ / Τ7
{ Ι
Ι Ι
ρ
72 ι G4 E R
C451a~ . Ο 22 η,
Ι ~
+~.5
+ 12ν TW15T ED PAI R
δ 4-Ι 2ν ,', .y G443 Ι .022 t
C440
CF
Ζ4λΚ
RΙΜ
R 4M 9
1
0
Ιόο 4Ι
Q443
Q453
ι
NF ι ωεJ ι
Q454 ;~'',g46G
Γz452 27
P-461 3 .9 Κ
~~
ιια 4->9 ~ i ο. zτ~,υ
c R4:
-1 χν VOLTAGES ..d νυΑνΕFΟRΜ5 αΙιταίπed under εοηdΙ t Ιαπτ 9+ νeπ απ ρα9e 8-2.
β,447 ΙΙΚ Ο ΙΟ
Ρ/Ο
Α
9
!7
OSGI LL OSCO PM
R 458
Ι . ΙΚ
Α SW EEP B OA R D
R E FE P- Ελ1C Ε DIAGRA M S 7
453Α
C R 449
TRIGG ER PREAMP
Α S WE E P GENERATOR
POWE P- SU PP LY $ DIST PLIB U TIO N
5Ε sε
+ 1-4v
Α
+ Ι 2ν
R 4αϊ
τβς Cκ4G Γζ
600
5455 P-
ι
Ι Ι
Ι
Ι 0 Ι-
Ι
c4&'] 0.1
αΙ
GI
ι
11 473 24 Κ
C473 47
+15 ν
C M 49S
G R48Γa
R4s3 ς4(α$
Λ
cc,
CH
C4 5lη L .022 -r Ι /77
G4~αώ 1
c Fτ 45 Γο
C ετ 4~ ω
Q4`74
~w ω492 Ι 2Κ
ΙΟΟ -1-
. Ο 22 η~
ΤΡ475
J
///77]777
5 '--~ C~τ 455 CR4ω 5
-
R444 ισοΚ
7 Ρ4 5 5
C45,4 R 4Β2 2ί
C Fλ475
47
R4β!ο ΙοΟΙ-
ΙΘΚ
Λ
ΙΖ 49 3
+75V
+~ 5V
L4G9
0, α υ ι+
ςt4G9 -4-ι α
;
R459
9 L-70 of
C485
3.3Jιι F - .
εακα 3
Q473
β-472 47
Φ
Q484
β481 Ι ιοο
cR 484
L4841 Ι
1
c ωτ 474 δ
`` υΓ `t ν
15 Κ
- ι 2ν
R5$ 1 -5
- ι zν
Ρ .443
56 Ο
(ςΙ ? C441 j .022
13
- -
Α
7 LEVEL
Q453 P-452 ί7
LEVEL c ετιτε R
Q454,'"`.,Q4 6 4
R451 3.4 Κ
Ι R465 έ 27
4-59 o7 ~i >3 '
ρ z4Τ
R 469 Ι .τΚ
C F2444
- Ι2ν
ξ
3ν
-12 V
t
ξΙτ 4ώ2 5L ~5 Κ "" , τα 4r4R4G1 Ι .5 Κ.
5~ ο4
C R459 V R4!οο Μ7 ΙΚ
+12ν
R 466
δ. ~ κ '
- ι 2V
+11 V CD
β 4 ωο ΓΟΚ
-ιτ.ν
τίενε ι υ
R458 Ι . ΙΚ
-S2V
Ρ BOARD
p- ΑΜ S "AMP ΙΕρ.ΑΤΟ R ' LY 6, D15T R.I
5 DU
7 L ON
εε PA RT S L IST FΟΓζ ΤΥΡε 5
S E M ICOND U LTD β.
4Α6 1210
Α TR IGG E R G ΕΝΕ R ΑΤΟΡ.
P-49 Γσ
1,2ω
Ι τΡ494 ~ ΙΖ 495
ΙΚ
Q495
AU TO GATE. TO P-592
'V' bl k -bl u on wh t
'U' bl k -red on wh t 'Τ ' grn on wht 'S' br n on wh t
'R' bl k -yel on wh t
' Ε' wht- w ht on gy (coax) 'F' sh ield for 'E' 'G' sh ield for 'Η' ' Η' red -red on gy (coax)
'0' gy (coax)*
' Ρ' sh iel d for 'Q'* 'Ο ' blu-grn-bl k on wh t
Ι 'Ν ' gy on wh t Ι
' Μ' οrη- οrπ on gy (coax) * W ires co n necte d th roug h hole in board
'L' shiel d for ' Μ' `Κ' b rn-grn-brn on wh t
g r n -grn on gy (coax)
'J` sh iel d for '1'
Η
U
; Η58 ;; i585
See Figs. 8-5, 8-6 an d 8-14 fo r location of p a rts not id entifie d h ere.
Ν( 594
Ln Vά
ο[, ι35 λ
R582 ')75
F ig .
C'.z 98
8-7. Ρ / Ο Α3- P artial Α Sweep circuit boarc
'ε' wht-ωη t on gy (coax)
'F' sh ield for 'E' 'G' sh ield for 'Η` ' Η' red-red on gν (coa x)
'Α' s h ield for 'Β'
'Β' yel-yel on gy (coax)
ε
SN 13 040000-υρ
'C' s h ield for 'D'
'D' red-red on gy (coax)
η-grη on gy (coax) or Τ
1. Ρ/Ο Α3. Partial Α Swee p circuit board.
SN
Β010100-Β039999
ον
ον
5V
_
ο
5 m5
2_ V Ί ί
5 m$
ον α 0V
Ι +H
ο
1 0
Γ
2 ν
57S Ι
_
AC CO
UPLE D
_ζ -+2 .5 V
_ .
Ι
r_
500 mV
5 Μ$ " 0
V
.
λ
ι 01
5 mS
. ..τ
1
Ε _______________ R
IF Q
9 ΕΝ DS Α
PU LSE FROM
ι R 5ΒΚς S ~i
R5 B S
Ι
R S3 Sol 4 Ι 2Υ
Ι 1 Ι '
GATE PROM R4 9b
'ς pk59 Ι -1 .g
[R592
R 592
ρ 69 3 ς 5. Ι ΚΚ
5. ι Κ
ί
~C R 552
58-55
ΙΟΚ
ς ι} FULL 1 ι ~
ρ, ι,
_5B6 , Ο22
(~575
\~ Ν~
Α $W ΕΕΡ
CRSS~
ι \ ρΡΣΝ ΟΝ LΥ 1 ______ λ WRεΝ RS55 15 FUL LY CGW
VR559 Β. 2 ν
So ~
Ι Ι
Λι
+75ν
Ι
ι-0
ρ $596
~
L75 547 Ι
ι ι
ι .4
4τ
Ι
Α SW EEP T R IG' Ο Ι Ι
Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι ι
A UTO ι.
RSS θ 9b.4 Κ
Ι
y
Ι ι Ι Ι
U
1
R 585 6l R55 , [559
; ι
κσσσ
/Π Qs85
24_9 Κ
CR583 1
R
CR595
-
C R~~94
Ι
Ι
ι'y
Sί
R S96
θ2 = .2 .Ο
R562 76 Β -1ZV
R 59~
ι C R 593
C
5569
-12V
RSO2 100
"
{R574
5.74 Κ
Ο
-12V
[R5050 a.7ma Α
T RIGG ER
P UL SE
FROM R 47b
50
65 Ο3 4το
-Ο.47
CR 5O1
T PSOS
Ρ/Q Α 3
R 503
Q504 -2 .32
R S09 Θ2Ο
Τ\ΡςοΑ
2) Α 5W ΕΕΡ ΘΟΑΡ D
=Ζ
CS09 19
2ΟΟ
R S6b C606 47 Ο 0390
+ 12 V
CRSI~
61 1 Ι
+75V
62
.2 Κ .022
6211C
j Ι353Κ
Y + 7Ρ5Ι 4
Q514
R EFEREN θ E
bIAGRAMS
$
VERTIUIL SWITCHING
β
Α
ΙΙ
Β SWEEP
Ι2
A411 ΤΙΜΙΝCα SWITCH
Ι3
HO R IZONTAL
S
Σ AXIS
VOLTAG ES απd WAVΕ F ORMS οhιαίπ ~d under epηditi-9 ίυm on pap 82 .
PARTS LIST FOR
S EWCONOUCTOR
3ΟΙ
TYP ES
R522~
2.67K PARTS LIST FOR E ARLI ER ΥΑLU Ε 5 AND SERIAL NUMB ER R ANGES OF PARTS MARKED W ITH BLUE OUTLINE. SEE
OSCI LLOSCO PE
R S13
Ι -12V
R 512 47
-MV
C512 .ο22
Bob
SELL
7
22
R 52F
AMPORILIk
453Α
2κ
R510
-12V
T RIGG E R G EN ERATOR G ENERATOR A MPLIFI ER
R 508
ί
11
R 523
ΙΟΟ
Q ~ z~i J
-` ιί7 :7
47 ς
C523 y. 47 Ο -" 1-
G52 b ~
RS2λ Ι.2 Κ
t
Α
1
Ι2
Ι
Ι
1 Ι ι Ι
'Ι
Ι ι ι ι- ΓΙ H OLOOFF ρ
Ί
ι
ι
VR544 ΙΟν
CA PACITORS
l
ΙΙ
C550
5 Τό
Ο
R 544
Ι
8.2 Κ
Ι
Ι
εαs4s s~r~
Υ
ιι
~+6SV Τ0
+lo3V
1
ι
1
ι 1 1
+75V
r-/ Β
A
` Ύ31
αsss
+6S V
+75V
C RΒ55
9ο
R 757
SWEEP 91-ART
R754
~C R546
C
' Ι Ι
ι Ι
Ι ι
Ι Ι
ιΙ
ι
4Ι ι
Ι Ι
ιΙ
ιΙ
'
ΙΙ
ι
ι
ΒΑ
1 S
Ι
Ι
ιιΙ j
ι
ι ι
Ι Ι Ι ι
ι Ι Ι Ι
ι Ι Ι Ι Ι
' ι '
ι
ί
Ι t Ι t ι Ι
Ι Ι Ι Ι ι ι
Ι ι
ι Ι Ι Ι !
ι Ι Ι
ι ι
R S4 Β~
-Π . Ι 5
+12ν
Ρ/© BΑ 4 8 SW EEP
R53λ ΙΚ
+ bSV FR Otd VR544
R S4 Ρ
-
CS46
-r . ΟΟΙ
1Sr. F
+12V
Ρ
5Κ
1 Ορ
6 Ρ549 + 1ΟΟ --CS45
Α
CAL
R 539
R 543
ι ε- . s
$
R758
100
+7θ V
S WEEP
D544
2546
Q5 44
Α
Ι
SWEEP ΗΟΑΡD
χυιν
ιν Ccw
ι
ι
Γ ιι
ιΙ υΑ ~ ι ιΙ
ω /Α
cαs a3
Ι ιι
ΙΖ
ΙΙ
ι Ι
4 FξR ι Ι 2F6R
C547
OA RD
ΙΟΟ
0
j! D ΙΟ
~CSb9 3 Τ-Ο
ι
R669 ΙΟΟχ
ΟCΡδ47
+I2 V
0
R 5θ 4 ΙΟΟ
1CS34 ο 22
4Ι `( 7
+12V
ΙΟσ -
ΟCR517
R511 ς,1
Ι
R514 Ι .1 Κ
2.2 Κ
R 51S
Ι&3 Κ
R SI3 3 Ο1 3.
AD
ι -
ι
TO
Α SWEEP HO RI? DISPLAY 580ΙΑ -4 F ξ R
12 Κ
L 536
Τ -12ν
ε
vcoasι s ,-, 6ρ η
i
4
VNBLA N K I N G
GA7R
TO ΝΟ RίΖ DISPL AY SWITC H, 68 ΟΙΑ -3 R
ΤΡ5Ι 4
R 512 47
A LTERN AT E T RAC E
-τ zν
SY N C
cs z e ιοΟ Τ
. Ο22
CR526
r Ια ;ι
R1 .2.y 514
lop
s οπ
R b 36
RS M 7.S Κ
Q 514
RS38 4, Β7 Κ
R s3S
+75ν
R S17
,4
22 Ο
ΑΒ
C.536 Τθ
R559
C R S33 ΤΓ
R b 32
~~ }L
-,c5 . ϋ. . .
s
R S29 33Ο
.ι5χ9
1101
ν3( ι
Α
SW E EP G EN ER ATO R
7Ο
R231
'CD' vio on ι 'CC' gΥ on wh t 'CB' grn on wh t 'CA' bl k on wh t
See F igs. 8-9 a n d 8-10 for location of parts not identified h ere.
F ig . β-8 . Ρ/Ο Α4. Parti?1 Β Sweep circ u it board,
'CD' via on wh t 'CC' gy on wh t 'C B ' grn on wh t 'CA' bl k on wht
'0 for location of parts not i d entifie d here,
44. Partial Β Swee p circ u it boa r d
' ςΕ ' bl k -orn on wh t 'C F ' yel on wh t 'CG' bl k -gr n on wh t
500
mm
5500 μ S '
ε
ι ρV
-L---j
w
ρν
EZ , J.
260
ο
mV
10
V
5 ms
-+ρ ν
ο*
5ρ0 μ5
50 m V
'
'
7~1
ρ .75
V
15 Τ RIGG Ι 6!-. Ο Ρ θ (ο 5
Β 7 χ 1GGC R
W A μ EF OR MS
GO U P L11J G1
S L 15
_ .- τ _ _~ Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι
Ι
8 Τ R IG4
F j2
SO U R .G Ε 5G10
Ι Ι Ι Ι
-Ι Ι
Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι 1 Ι Ι ι
Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι ι Ι ~ Υ Ι
z2
Ι Ι ΤΡΙ " ER 51 U ΝΑ L P-4 -'I Λ
ε~ 3 π
FR O M
L I λJ E 7 β4GGE P- 5 Ι g Νλι ΡχοΜ R1106
θ
εχτ TRIG OR Χ INPUT
'-
/\
3ωαΙ
ι
ΙΝΤ
Ι C,
ι
Ι
Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι
Ί
εοΙ1I ς
Ι Ι ι Ι ι ι ι
~
Ι i
'i"
T W I ST E p "AIR T\NI'T-
Ι All
/
- Γ %Υ 1 G 270
\
Γt(,27 ~ Ι R 62q R1o31 2 λΚ ΙΟΟ 1Μ . . . . ...
`
ετ
,ή. ν
--ο
αχτ
~ο
ΕΧΤ = Ιο
ο - -'. to --0
Σ (Ζ 6 3 3 } 5&ο
C Fte°, Ι
ϊ
+ q.F,
G(σ33
.021
ι / -_. + Ο 3
QG43
-1 ε
0633
RL θ ιΜ
~
1 ο
Ι ~
AG
L ΙΝΕ
R ωΟι
1
Ι
Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι 1 Ι Ι Ι ΙΙ ΙΙ Ι Ι Ι ι Ι , ι ι
Ι Ι
GL 02
Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι ι ι Ι
~ ο . ιο G Ι;e4 Ι
RL 34 ΙΙΚ-
- ι 2Υ
f
+ ι 2Υ ΙΖ e35 Ι 8Κ
Ι863Κ
R eam 3.3 Κ = ΙΟ
ο
V O LTAGES
an d WAV EF O RMS ο bιαΙπ ed -d e, candiτίππτ g Ινοπ Oil page 8- 2 e-pt as follow, : H O R IZ
DISPL AY ' ΗΟΗΙΖ DISPLAY
453 Α
13 {DE L AY E D SWEEP) Κ -Υ
o5c ι LL OSCOP E
Ρ/0 Α 4 EE Β
SW
P
B OA
RD
~R ςΒΚ- Ι + ι 1ν ξ p-638 ς I8< -LG Γα42 02.2
Β Τ 1ί. Ι GG Ε Χ SL ΟΡΕ 5(σ 55
+ 11ν
ι
Γ Ι Ι Ι ~Ι
~Φ74 2414
Gb
'
+9 .2
G673 4τ
5l
L Γο 72
ο 0.2JιιΗ '°
C 21a66 j
+θ,5 C R lσ55
β-G72 2τ ο
z7
τ 9 .S
Q684
R6τ7 47
CβΓε65
Οι R6 τ Β
Cί
+ Ι 2ν
ςτ 676
ΤΡ b 75
G6 Γο 6 . ο 22
54, Ρ G12-(
G ωτΓα 51
C-06 75
R G7 1
`
GΙσ 5 Γο . Ο22
+7 Γι V
CΓαώ7 Ο. Γ ι
%~
Ι 2ν 1
β6 Γσ 7 3 Οο
Ι
Ι Ι Ι Ι Ι έΑ
R-68(σ
42
ρbθ3 56 ο +9.~i
Ί LCb33 . Ο 27
+ Ι 2ν 1
Ι ι 434 ΙΙΚ
Β ΤΑ GGE R LEVEL G E NTC R I N G
Ι2.64 Ι
- *σ . αι
+0 .10 C
+14V pp r. 3 e, ί 8Κ
*7. Β ΚG5 ο Ζ7 -O .S6
C12 β35 + ι 7.νΙ P-635 is-
R .b 39
ξ 3ΑΚς
cm3s .0 R 2
r+ Γα 3Γι 3.3 W
C6 ΘΓ~
Ι
jtb42 3.3 Κ C642 1022
jt644 10K, β645 51L
4664
R-663
ι . ιω
Τα 6 6 4 η .S6
R 665 27
LR (ο 53
GR b 51
~ ιι .S -n
+ Β-~
Q654 _ .27,
ο,2- τ Ι Η
-
G664 .0 22
νρ.654 3v V
ξ R b s3~ βω 53 f Ι , λΚ
R 6m 4 m
~
b 20
+ Ι 'τν
- ι 2ν GA
ςτ ~ b τ β r δ6 Ι " 5 Κ ! 3 .3 k ~ -ο ~ Ι - ι 2ν
f
1Ζ-G410 Ι Ο Κ, α τ R IGG ER Lεν eι -Ι 2ν
- Ι 2ν εΧ 7 ΗΟ R ι GAI N EXT E RN AS . HORIZONTAL
R6 k 6 82 οΚ
cΚ
α- SIG N AL τ 6 5 8Ο! Α
R Ε F Ε R-ΕΝιΕ D! Α 4iζΑΜS 7
ΤΡ- Ι GG Εξ- PP-ΕΑΜΡ
It
E5 SWEEP GRNrp-ATo R
Ι3 14 1
ΗΟ (ΖΙΖΟΝΤΑΙ.. ΑΜΡ L Ι F ΙΕΙΧ
5ΕΕ F A RTS L Ic,T F O jτ. SC- W GONDU~Τ Oς - ΤΥΡΙ-5
HORIZONTAL D Ι 5ΡιΑΥ 5ωΙΤGΗ ΡΟωΕς2- 15U PP LY ξ
MST R 1D U T10λi
Β Τ P-IGG EP-
GENERATOR-27-PULSE
AX' shield for AW' AW gy (coax) 'AV' vio on wht TYF7 1 , 0
AU' shield for AT' 'AT' red-red on gy (coax) 'AS' gy fcoax)
CUM 107i - Ρ T 714 wmu *τ R718 :_ ()/ . W5, R717
AR' shield for 'AS'
AQ'Yel-yel on gy (coax) AP' shield for AQ'
R74 I-I
1' 0744
A C"W6 R751
R7413
%0' brn-red-blic on wht 'AN' brn-red-blk on tan I 'AM' vio-grn-bik on wht AL' blu-grn-blk on wht 'ΑΚ ' blu-blu on gy (coax) AG' gy (coaW AX shield for AK *Wires connected through hole in board
See Figs . 8-8 and 8-10 for location of parts not ide
Fig. 8-9. P/ 0 A4. Partial B Sweep circuit b
'BE' brn on wht 'BD' shiel d for ' BC' 'BC' yel-yel on gy (coax)
'AY' grn-gr η an gy (coax) 'AT s h iel d for 'AY'
rv η
' ΒΑ ' οrπ on wh t 'BB' b l k-yet on wh t 'ΒΗ ' yel-γel on gy (coax)
- ' ΒΙ ' sh iel d for ' ΒΝ '
ι
'AE' red on wht
'BF sh ield for 'BG'
'BG' ΟΥη-ΟΥΠ on gy (coax) it
'A F' sh ield for 'ΑG'*
η-b l k on wh t υ-blu on gy (coax)
'ΑΗ ' shiel d for 'All *
'AG' 9Υ (coax) .
'Al' red -re d on gy (coax)
'AX sh ield for 'AK' 8 an d 8-1 D for locution of parts not identified h ere.
8-9 . ΡΙΟ Α4. P artial Β Sweep circ uit boar d .
σ Νι
-ον
ον
5
50 mV ,
ς
50
ν
5
ς
ι
αν
ου
σν
"GSV R773 θ .2 Κ
Q772
+12V
+12 V
Q 76 θ
+ ι b .e
R776 2,θκ
ΤΡ 774
c77a
+12V
α,θ3 4775
RT94 Z .-49K
Q78S
C R74B
I.-
R772 Ικ %
2 .2 b κ
C76θ ΙΟ +12 V
+12V i 'l
ΡΖ768 b.ΒΚ
SR776 14 ακ
{{ 50 .767
ρ 36Ο j ςςςξξ ξ--ςςς
Ι.Ι3κ
077.9
Q79ο
τ~ α
ι ί
47 θ5
715
TT ζΑ7ΘΓ
R777 ,PPί0 .777
Rl θ2
+IzV
+6{5V
η.C796 ~ί
-Ι 2ν
.49 Κ 3k2
Ι.4 Κ
R792 ΙΟχ
2ΟΚ~ -
6791 ΙΟΚ
!-2 Κ
SWE EP
START Α8
α 4Α
+~c759~ΙΟΟμΕΙ
R7 b l + α, ι
+' .6
AC
M IlL71PL LER
402
GR7 64A ΓV
~/
j
CR 764 H
2F Ι
ΤΡι GG E RA B LE μΤΕ R
-12V
ι θ STARTS AFTER
Α Α ΙΝΓΕΝ DU R LN6 Β Β(9E LAYLO SWEE P)
DELAY 7ΙΜΕ
R ,ΘΦ Οο
. Ο22
Ι
TRIG PULSE
F ROM R6BB
Α 4 . 5W ΕΕΡ ΘΟΑ R ρ
Α Ε F Ε R Ε Ν G Ε
Α SWE EP GENERATOR
ςιC
5 TRIGGER GENER ATok
R7σ 2
700
47 Ο
-t z ν
At, Β TIMING SWITCH νHOR 6ZONTAL DISPLAY 5ωιΤGΗ it ΑΧΙ 5 AMPLIFIER
ίΠσ ~Ασεσ , πω k τστσσπτανΙαιΙσωα. Ι'
ι
ιιρειι μι $ νιΑν
ΧμΦτμΙ 5Ριπν
υιια°ι σmαι
ρΙρε L Ανερ $ ω[Εν1 Μιχεμ
7 FOR FnRLι kR
PARTS LIST FOR SEMICσMDUCTOR TYPES
ο+c ιιιο scοΡε
1 ? Ι Ον
TP70S
ί, SOS
~Id> H Q R IZON7AL AMPLIFIER
453 Α
τ
D Ι Δ G β Α Μ 5
9
SEE
ΤΤΓ c R7σ 1
C+σ2
~47Ο
4.7
Ρ/0
4F ι Ι
- -- -- - - - - - - - ---- -
3.9 κ
C R705
- ι2Υ
Ι
Ι
Α 5W ΕΕΡ FR OM ρS3 Ι Λ
4R 1
G,Sb
χ-Υ
3-48Κ
Ι 1
1
3 74 Κ
Rl θx
DELAY TIIAE
R769
1Ι
ι
R lθ7
'1Ι
MIXED
DIS PL 5
GATE
ι Γ
-- - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - -- - - --- --- - - -
R7b3
~
Μ 4ΧΕί
1
-12V
-12 ν
5 ΘΟΙΑ
Ιι
J Α798
$2 ΟΟ
OELAV-71 Μξ
2Κ
Ο y
ΒΗ C R795 _ , ; -z/ ^$ ~~ 0-6sJ
5 εR759 }` + Ι2 ν
R760
Ο
R7βθ 100
Ι Q 7643
Α
GRl9b
3Κ
1-711 $ l-757 ? 12 .7 Κ
-12V
412V
ν
- Ι .2
cR79θ
475V
Ι .2Κ
} +12 1/
_
gE
Q797
{R790 140
7Ι 5
α766
εΖ ~1 ',-_
.0 .797
R779
R7,1
Q764A Ι
+ Ι2ν
ί7θΟ 47
Β.2 Κ
Ι
`,
3Κ
R 780
.765 0
4 Ιί` Ιίω
10
R797
.
ι.c
R 796
ι
R775
+65 ν
{R770 }}}6 .2χ
Ιια .r.3
47
2
226 Κ
Α 5W ΕΕ Ρ FROM R532
--cΎ_
,Θ5
ΥALUESO ΑΜύ __ SERIAk NUMOFR OF s AIII ωιιχ & υε συπΙΝk χFπ
+τ5ν +Ι 2ν Ρ7θ3 3.33 Κ
Ρ 754 ΙΟΚ
+Ι 2ν RΤΒ 4 2.49Κ
4785
4CR754
CR749
VCR7S3
(`α`; (ι 5) *
R79S 2.26Κ
+Ι 2ν G7θ5 47
;G . Ολ CT96 Ο.Ι
V
R79ε ΙΟ
R7B2
~
-ΟΡο5
Υ
Ι
7 Β]
+75V
CR75B
R757 ιΑτκ
R79Β 3Κ
-Ι 2ν
ςg )Ο
~~~~ 7
Ι Ι1
$
ι
Ar
Τ TO ~~~~ 55ΕΕΡ54Α R β Ι ι
t
ι ι 1-3 - Σ..5% RT53 Ιοσ Β.
200
R755 220 Q753
Q7S4
λ Α,5 Ο Οσ
-GRε
-12ν
BB
{R749 ξ SK
Ι Ι Ι Ι 7Σξ R Ι Ι Ι
R τ5 ι
R756 33Ο
CR7S2 σ Τ * +Ι 2V
G756 Ιοσ
AS ωΕΕΡ FβΟΜ Q531
